HUMAN PANCREAS AND PANCREATIC CANCER ASSOCIATED GENE SEQUENCES AND POLYPEPTIDES

Abstract: This invention relates to newly identified pancreas or pancreatic cancer related polynucleotides and the polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides herein collectively known as "pancreatic cancer antigens", and to the complete gene sequences associated therewith and to the expression products thereof, as well as the use of such pancreatic cancer antigens for detection, prevention and treatment of disorders of the pancreas, particularly the presence of pancreatic cancer. This invention relates to the pancreatic cancer antigens as well as vectors, host cells, antibodies directed to pancreatic cancer antigens and recombinant and synthetic methods for producing the same. Also provided are diagnostic methods for diagnosing and treating, preventing and/or prognosing disorders related to the pancreas, including pancreatic cancer, and therapeutic methods for treating such disorders. The invention further relates to screening methods for identifying agonists and antagonists of pancreatic cancer antigens of the invention. The present invention further relates to methods and/or compositions for inhibiting the production and/or function of the polypeptides of the present invention.

Description: Human Pancreas and Pancreatic Cancer Associated Gene Sequences and Polypeptides Field of the Invention This invention relates to newly identified pancreas or pancreatic cancer related polynucleotides and the polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides herein collectively known as "pancreatic cancer antigens," and to the complete gene sequences associated therewith and to the expression products thereof, as well as the use of such pancreatic cancer antigens for detection, prevention and treatment of disorders of the pancreas, particularly the presence of pancreatic cancer. This invention relates to the pancreatic cancer antigens as well as vectors, host cells, antibodies directed to pancreatic cancer antigens and recombinant and synthetic methods for producing the same. Also provided are diagnostic methods for diagnosing and treating, preventing and/or prognosing disorders related to the pancreas, including pancreatic cancer, and therapeutic methods for treating such disorders. The invention further relates to screening methods for identifying agonists and antagonists of pancreatic cancer antigens of the invention. The present invention further relates to methods and/or compositions for inhibiting the production and/or function of the polypeptides of the present invention. Background of the Invention Cell growth is a carefully regulated process which responds to specific needs of the body. Occassionally, the intricate, and highly regulated controls dictating the rules for cellular division break down. When this occurs, the cell begins to grow and divide independently of its homeostatic regulation resulting in a condition commonly referred to as cancer. In fact, cancer is the second leading cause of death among Americans aged 25-44. Pancreatic cancer is one of the most dangerous cancers, killing half its victims within 6 weeks and having a 5-year survival rate of only 1%. The diagnosis of pancreatic carcinoma is often associated with a poor prognosis, because most patients already have advanced disease. Despite the many advances reported during the past few years, pancreatic cancer remains a profound therapeutic challenge. It is hoped that the increasing knowledge of the molecular biology of pancreatic carcinoma will lead to improvements in diagnosing, staging, and treating pancreatic adenocarcinoma (Brand et al., Curr Opin Oncol 10:362-6 (1998)). There is a need, therefore, for identification and characterization of factors that modulate activation and differentiation of pancreatic cells, both normally and in disease states. In particular, there is a need to isolate and characterize additional molecules that mediate apoptosis, DNA repair, tumor-mediated angiogenesis, genetic imprinting, immune responses to tumors and tumor antigens and, among other things, that can play a role in detecting, preventing, ameliorating or correcting dysfunctions or diseases related to the pancreas. Summary of the Invention The present invention includes isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising, or alternatively, consisting of, a pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer associated polynucleotide sequence disclosed in the sequence listing (as SEQ ID NOs: 1 to 459) and/or contained in a human cDNA clone described in Tables 1, 2 and 5 and deposited with the American Type Culture Collection ("ATCC"). Fragments, variant, and derivatives of these nucleic acid molecules are also encompassed by the invention. The present invention also includes isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a polynucleotide encoding a pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer polypeptide. The present invention further includes pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides. Further provided for are amino acid sequences comprising, or alternatively consisting of, pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer polypeptides as disclosed in the sequence listing (as SEQ ID NOs: 460 to 918) and/or encoded by a human cDNA clone described in Tables 1, 2 and 5 and deposited with the ATCC. Antibodies that bind these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Polypeptide fragments, variants, and derivatives of these amino acid sequences are also encompassed by the invention, as are polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides and antibodies that bind these polypeptides. Also provided are diagnostic methods for diagnosing and treating, preventing, and/or prognosing disorders related to the pancreas, including pancreatic cancer, and therapeutic methods for treating such disorders. The invention further relates to screening methods for identifying agonists and antagonists of pancreatic cancer antigens of the invention. Detailed Description Tables Table 1 summarizes some of the pancreatic cancer antigens encompassed by the invention (including contig sequences (SEQ ID NO:X) and the cDNA clone related to the contig sequence) and further summarizes certain characteristics of the pancreatic cancer polynucleotides and the polypeptides encoded thereby. The first column shows the "SEQ ID NO:" for each of the 459 pancreatic cancer antigen polynucleotide sequences of the invention. The second column provides a unique "Sequence/Contig ID" identification for each pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer associated sequence. The third column. "Gene Name," and the fourth column, "Overlap, " provide a putative identification of the gene based on the sequence similarity of its translation product to an amino acid sequence found in a publicly accessible gene database and the database accession no. for the database sequence having similarity, respectively. The fifth and sixth columns provide the location (nucleotide position nos. within the contig), "Start" and "End", in the polynucleotide sequence "SEQ ID NO:X" that delineate the preferred ORF shown in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO:Y. The seventh and eighth columns provide the "% Identity" (percent identity) and "% Similarity" (percent similarity), respectively, observed between the aligned sequence segments of the translation product of SEQ ID NO:X and the database sequence. The ninth column provides a unique "Clone ID" for a cDNA clone related to each contig sequence. Table 2 summarizes ATCC Deposits, Deposit dates, and ATCC designation numbers of deposits made with the ATCC in connection with the present application. Table 3 indicates public ESTs, of which at least one, two, three, four, five, ten, fifteen or more of any one or more of these public EST sequences are optionally excluded from certain embodiments of the invention. Table 4 lists residues comprising antigenic epitopes of antigenic epitope-bearing fragments present in most of the pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer associated polynucleotides described in Table 1 as predicted by the inventors using the algorithm of Jameson and Wolf, (1988) Comp. Appl. Biosci. 4: 181-186. The Jameson-Wolf antigenic analysis was performed using the computer program PROTEAN (Version 3.1 1 for the Power Macintosh, DNASTAR, Inc., 1228 South Park Street Madison, WI). Pancreas and pancreatic cancer associated polypeptides (e.g., SEQ ID NO:Y, polypeptides encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, or polypeptides encoded by the cDNA in the referenced cDNA clone) may possess one or more antigenic epitopes comprising residues described in Table 4. It will be appreciated that depending on the analytical criteria used to predict antigenic determinants, the exact address of the determinant may vary slightly. The residues and locations shown in column two of Table 4 correspond to the amino acid sequences for most pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer associated polypeptide sequence shown in the Sequence Listing. Table 5 shows the cDNA libraries sequenced. and ATCC designation numbers and vector information relating to these cDNA libraries. Definitions The following definitions are provided to facilitate understanding of certain terms used throughout this specification. In the present invention, "isolated" refers to material removed from its original environment (e.g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring), and thus is altered "by the hand of man" from its natural state. For example, an isolated polynucleotide could be part of a vector or a composition of matter, or could be contained within a cell, and still be "isolated" because that vector, composition of matter, or particular cell is not the original environment of the polynucleotide. The term "isolated" does not refer to genomic or cDNA libraries, whole cell total or mRNA preparations, genomic DNA preparations (including those separated by electrophoresis and transferred onto blots), sheared whole cell genomic DNA preparations or other compositions where the art demonstrates no distinguishing features of the polynucleotide/sequences of the present invention. As used herein, a "polynucleotide" refers to a molecule having a nucleic acid sequence contained in SEQ ID NO:X (as described in column 1 of Table 1) or the related cDNA clone (as described in column 9 of Table 1 and contained within a library deposited with the ATCC). For example, the polynucleotide can contain the nucleotide sequence of the full length cDNA sequence, including the 5' and 3' untranslated sequences, the coding region, as well as fragments, epitopes, domains, and variants of the nucleic acid sequence. Moreover, as used herein, a "polypeptide" refers to a molecule having an amino acid sequence encoded by a polynucleotide of the invention as broadly defined (obviously excluding poly-Phenylalanine or poly-Lysine peptide sequences which result from translation of a polyA tail of a sequence corresponding to a cDNA). In the present invention, "SEQ ID NO:X" was often generated by overlapping sequences contained in multiple clones (contig analysis). A representative clone containing all or most of the sequence for SEQ ID NO:X is deposited at Human Genome Sciences, Inc. (HGS) in a catalogued and archived library. As shown in column 9 of Table 1, each clone is identified by a cDNA Clone ID. Each Clone ID is unique to an individual clone and the Clone ID is all the information needed to retrieve a given clone from the HGS library. In addition to the individual cDNA clone deposits, most of the cDNA libraries from which the clones were derived were deposited at the American Type Culture Collection (hereinafter "ATCC"). Table 5 provides a list of the deposited cDNA libraries. One can use the Clone ID to determine the library source by reference to Tables 2 and 5. Table 5 lists the deposited cDNA libraries by name and links each library to an ATCC Deposit. Library names contain four characters, for example, "HTWE." The name of a cDNA clone ("Clone ID") isolated from that library begins with the same four characters, for example "HTWEP07". As mentioned below, Table 1 correlates the Clone ID names with SEQ ID NOs. Thus, starting with a SEQ ID NO, one can use Tables 1 , 2 and 5 to determine the corresponding Clone ID, from which library it came and in which ATCC deposit the library is contained. Furthermore, it is possible to retrieve a given cDNA clone from the source library by techniques known in the art and described elsewhere herein. The ATCC is located at 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209, USA. The ATCC deposits were made persuant to the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms for the purposes of patent procedure. A "polynucleotide" of the present invention also includes those polynucleotides capable of hybridizing, under stringent hybridization conditions, to sequences contained in SEQ ID NO:X, or the complement thereof (e.g., the complement of any one, two, three, four, or more of the polynucleotide fragments described herein), and/or sequences contained in the related cDNA clone within a library deposited with the ATCC. "Stringent hybridization conditions" refers to an overnight incubation at 42 degree C in a solution comprising 50% formamide, 5x SSC (750 mM NaCl, 75 mM trisodium citrate), 50 mM sodium phosphate (pH 7.6), 5x Denhardt's solution, 10% dextran sulfate, and 20 μg/ml denatured, sheared salmon sperm DNA, followed by washing the filters in 0. lx SSC at about 65 degree C. Also included within "polynucleotides" of the present invention are nucleic acid molecules that hybridize to the polynucleotides of the present invention at lower stringency hybridization conditions. Changes in the stringency of hybridization and signal detection are primarily accomplished through the manipulation of formamide concentration (lower percentages of formamide result in lowered stringency); salt conditions, or temperature. For example, lower stringency conditions include an overnight incubation at 37 degree C in a solution comprising 6X SSPE (20X SSPE = 3M NaCl; 0.2M NaH 2 PO ; 0.02M EDTA, pH 7.4), 0.5% SDS, 30% formamide. 100 ug/ml salmon sperm blocking DNA; followed by washes at 50 degree C with 1 XSSPE. 0.1% SDS. In addition, to achieve even lower stringency, washes performed following stringent hybridization can be done at higher salt concentrations (e.g. 5X SSC). Note that variations in the above conditions may be accomplished through the inclusion and/or substitution of alternate blocking reagents used to suppress background in hybridization experiments. Typical blocking reagents include Denhardt's reagent, BLOTTO, heparin, denatured salmon sperm DNA, and commercially available proprietary formulations. The inclusion of specific blocking reagents may require modification of the hybridization conditions described above, due to problems with compatibility. Of course, a polynucleotide which hybridizes only to polyA+ sequences (such as any 3' terminal polyA+ tract of a cDNA shown in the sequence listing), or to a complementary stretch of T (or U) residues, would not be included in the definition of "polynucleotide." since such a polynucleotide would hybridize to any nucleic acid molecule containing a poly (A) stretch or the complement thereof (e.g., practically any double-stranded cDNA clone generated using oligo dT as a primer). The polynucleotides of the present invention can be composed of any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA. For example, polynucleotides can be composed of single- and double-stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions. In addition, the polynucleotide can be composed of triple-stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA. A polynucleotide may also contain one or more modified bases or DNA or RNA backbones modified for stability or for other reasons. "Modified" bases include, for example, tritylated bases and unusual bases such as inosine. A variety of modifications can be made to DNA and RNA; thus, "polynucleotide" embraces chemically, enzymatically, or metabolically modified forms. In specific embodiments, the polynucleotides of the invention are at least 15, at least 30, at least 50, at least 100, at least 125, at least 500, or at least 1000 continuous nucleotides but are less than or equal to 300 kb. 200 kb. 100 kb. 50 kb, 15 kb, 10 kb, 7.5kb, 5 kb, 2.5 kb, 2.0 kb, or 1 kb. in length. In a further embodiment, polynucleotides of the invention comprise a portion of the coding sequences, as disclosed herein, but do not comprise all or a portion of any intron. In another embodiment, the polynucleotides comprising coding sequences do not contain coding sequences of a genomic flanking gene (i.e., 5' or 3' to the gene of interest in the genome). In other embodiments, the polynucleotides of the invention do not contain the coding sequence of more than 1000, 500, 250, 100, 50, 25, 20, 15, 10, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 genomic flanking gene(s). "SEQ ID NO:X" refers to a pancreatic cancer antigen polynucleotide sequence described in Table 1. SEQ ID NO:X is identified by an integer specified in column 1 of Table 1. The polypeptide sequence SEQ ID NO:Y is a translated open reading frame (ORF) encoded by polynucleotide SEQ ID NO:X. There are 459 pancreatic cancer antigen polynucleotide sequences described in Table 1 and shown in the sequence listing (SEQ ID NO: l through SEQ ID NO:459). Likewise there are 459 polypeptide sequences shown in the sequence listing, one polypeptide sequence for each of the polynucleotide sequences (SEQ ID NO:460 through SEQ ID NO:918). The polynucleotide sequences are shown in the sequence listing immediately followed by all of the polypeptide sequences. Thus, a polypeptide sequence corresponding to polynucleotide sequence SEQ ID NO: l is the first polypeptide sequence shown in the sequence listing. The second polypeptide sequence corresponds to the polynucleotide sequence shown as SEQ ID NO:2, and so on. In otherwords, since there are 459 polynucleotide sequences, for any polynucleotide sequence SEQ ID NO:X, a corresponding polypeptide SEQ ID NO:Y can be determined by the formula X + 459 = Y. In addition, any of the unique "Sequence/Contig ID" defined in column 2 of Table 1, can be linked to the corresponding polypeptide SEQ ID NO:Y by reference to Table 4. The polypeptides of the present invention can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, i.e., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other than the 20 gene-encoded amino acids. The polypeptides may be modified by either natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in a polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. It will be appreciated that the same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain many types of modifications. Polypeptides may be branched, for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic polypeptides may result from posttranslation natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods. Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer- RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination. (See, for instance, PROTEINS - STRUCTURE AND MOLECULAR PROPERTIES, 2nd Ed., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York ( 1993); POSTTRANSLATIONAL COVALENT MODIFICATION OF PROTEINS, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York, pgs. 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al., Meth Enzymol 182:626-646 (1990); Rattan et al., Ann NY Acad Sci 663:48-62 ( 1992).) The pancreas and pancreatic cancer polypeptides of the invention can be prepared in any suitable manner. Such polypeptides include isolated naturally occurring polypeptides, recombinantly produced polypeptides, synthetically produced polypeptides, or polypeptides produced by a combination of these methods. Means for preparing such polypeptides are well understood in the art. The polypeptides may be in the form of the secreted protein, including the mature form, or may be a part of a larger protein, such as a fusion protein (see below). It is often advantageous to include an additional amino acid sequence which contains secretory or leader sequences, pro-sequences, sequences which aid in purification, such as multiple histidine residues, or an additional sequence for stability during recombinant production. The pancreas and pancreatic cancer polypeptides of the present invention are preferably provided in an isolated form, and preferably are substantially purified. A recombinantly produced version of a polypeptide, including the secreted polypeptide, can be substantially purified using techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art, such as, for example, by the one-step method described in Smith and Johnson, Gene 67:31-40 ( 1988). Polypeptides of the invention also can be purified from natural, synthetic or recombinant sources using techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art, such as, for example, antibodies of the invention raised against the polypeptides of the present invention in methods which are well known in the art. By a polypeptide demonstrating a "functional activity" is meant, a polypeptide capable of displaying one or more known functional activities associated with a full-length (complete) protein of the invention. Such functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, antigenicity [ability to bind (or compete with a polypeptide for binding) to an anti-polypeptide antibody], immunogenicity (ability to generate antibody which binds to a specific polypeptide of the invention), ability to form multimers with polypeptides of the invention, and ability to bind to a receptor or ligand for a polypeptide. "A polypeptide having functional activity" refers to polypeptides exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical to, an activity of a polypeptide of the present invention, including mature forms, as measured in a particular assay, such as, for example, a biological assay, with or without dose dependency. In the case where dose dependency does exist, it need not be identical to that of the polypeptide, but rather substantially similar to the dose- dependence in a given activity as compared to the polypeptide of the present invention (i.e., the candidate polypeptide will exhibit greater activity or not more than about 25-fold less and, preferably, not more than about tenfold less activity, and most preferably, not more than about three-fold less activity relative to the polypeptide of the present invention). The functional activity of the pancreatic cancer antigen polypeptides, and fragments, variants derivatives, and analogs thereof, can be assayed by various methods. For example, in one embodiment where one is assaying for the ability to bind or compete with full-length polypeptide of the present invention for binding to an antibody to the full length polypeptide antibody, various immunoassays known in the art can be used, including but not limited to, competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich" immunoassays, immunoradiometric assays, gel diffusion precipitation reactions, immunodiffusion assays, in situ immunoassays (using colloidal gold, enzyme or radioisotope labels, for example), western blots, precipitation reactions, agglutination assays (e.g., gel agglutination assays, hemagglutination assays), complement fixation assays, immunofluorescence assays, protein A assays, and immunoelectrophoresis assays, etc. In one embodiment, antibody binding is detected by detecting a label on the primary antibody. In another embodiment, the primary antibody is detected by detecting binding of a secondary antibody or reagent to the primary antibody. In a further embodiment, the secondary antibody is labeled. Many means are known in the art for detecting binding in an immunoassay and are within the scope of the present invention. In another embodiment, where a ligand is identified, or the ability of a polypeptide fragment, variant or derivative of the invention to multimerize is being evaluated, binding can be assayed, e.g., by means well-known in the an, such as, for example, reducing and non- reducing gel chromatography, protein affinity chromatography, and affinity blotting. See generally, Phizicky, E., et al., Microbiol. Rev. 59:94- 123 ( 1995). In another embodiment, physiological correlates polypeptide of the present invention binding to its substrates (signal transduction) can be assayed. In addition, assays described herein (see Examples) and otherwise known in the art may routinely be applied to measure the ability of polypeptides of the present invention and fragments, variants derivatives and analogs thereof to elicit polypeptide related biological activity (either in vitro or in vivo). Other methods will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention. Pancreas and Pancreatic Cancer Associated Polynucleotides and Polypeptides of the Invention It has been discovered herein that the polynucleotides described in Table 1 are expressed at significantly enhanced levels in human pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer tissues. Accordingly, such polynucleotides, polypeptides encoded by such polynucleotides, and antibodies specific for such polypeptides find use in the prediction, diagnosis, prevention and treatment of pancreas related disorders, including pancreatic cancer as more fully described below. Table 1 summarizes some of the polynucleotides encompassed by the invention (including contig sequences (SEQ ID NO:X) and the related cDNA clones) and further summarizes certain characteristics of these pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer associated polynucleotides and the polypeptides encoded thereby. Table 1 Sequence/ HGS Nucleotide SeqID Contig ID Gene Name Overlap Start End % % Clone ID No. Identity Similarity 456379 197 I1CDΛJ28 462108 S'-AMP-dClivated protein kinase gamma- 1 gι|1335856 1033 100 100 I1HPU186 subunit [Homo i ien l >sp|P546l9|AΛK.G_IIUIvlAN5'-ΛMP- AC 11 VA1 LD PRO! E1N INAS GΛ Λ-I SUBUNI1 (AMPK GΛMMΛ- UIΛIN) length = 331 3 503446 161 415 111 II U40 4 507841 1 1^9 110 AA 152 5 509287 Similarity to Yeast SOH-1 protein gnl|PlD|el346272 1 480 66 80 I I I Ml 61 (SW P38633) |Caenorhabdιtιselegans| >-.p|P9l869|P91869F-32H22PROrLIN I ength= 163 6 509672 16 141 IIIPAM3I 7 509673 1 162 IIMWI1R I 8 518767 2 148 III HZ88 9 522008 1 378 H15PI M59 10 524112 248 475 11 IPC M86 II 525971 LIK2-I36, putative |llomo sapiens] gι|632966 1 579 95 97 IIIXARI6 >pιr|S53638|S53638 protein kinase K2-I39 (I C27 I -)- human 1 ength = 139 527156 ORF YOR262\\ | Saccharomyces cerevιsιac| gnl|PlD|e252ll3 174 506 48 63 1IMWIW50 >pιrlS67l59|S67159 probable membrane proiein (Sacch.ιrυni)ccs cerevisiae) sp|Q08726|Q08726 CHROMOSOME XV READING FRAME ORFYOR262W Length = 347 532502 73 267 IIIPCP39 533459 electron transler flavoprotein beta subunit gι|297902 2 850 87 87 IIKAΛY56 (Homo sapιens| >pιr|S32482|S32482 electron transler flavoprotein beta chain - human >sp|P38l I7|L ITBJIUMAN Ei C ΓRON ΓRΛNSFI R IIΛVOPROII IN 1.1 IΛ-SUI.ONII (l.LIΛ-L II) length = 255 533551 lnlcrleukm 4 receptor |llomo sapiciιs| gι|33834 1564 84 84 II 101 V80 >gι|3219334 (AC004525) lnterleukin 4 alpha-chain precursor [Homo sapiens] >sp|P24394|!L4RJIUMAN INI R1 EUMN-4 RECEPTOR Al PIIΛ CHAIN PRECURSOR (IL-4R-A1 PHA) (CDI24 ANTIGEN) Length = 825 537850 tetiaspan mcmbiane protein [Homo sapιcns| gι|953239 179 913 89 89 III D N04 >sp|P48230|IL14JIUMAN II TRASPAN MEMBRANE PROTLIN IL-TMP Length = 202 537925 sialyltransf rase |llomo sapiens] gι|522l97 228 80 82 HS YV64 >pιr|A54898|A54898 gal-beta I 3galNΛc alpha-2,3-sιal ltranslerase (FC 2499 -) ■ human Length = 340 538160 pancreatic zymogen granule membrane gι|1244512 68 595 98 98 HPWAR18 protein GP-2 [I lomo sapiens] pιι|G020 l|G()209| pancicalic granule menibiane protein GP-2 - human >sp|P55259|GP2JIUM N PΛNCRI ΛIIC SI C RE TORY GRANULE MEMBRΛNI M \ IOR GI Y( OPRO TLIN GP2 PRrC URSOR (PANCRLA I IC ZYMOGI N GRA 540420 Method conceptual translation supplied by gι| 1049231 48 338 68 77 HIPBWI9 author, putative h brid protein similar to IIΓRV-H protease and HERV-E mtegrase [Human endogenous retrovirus] >sp|Q68997|Q68997 SIMILAR 10 HFRV- II PRO II ASF ANDHI V-E INTEGRASE >gι|2587023 (Al 026246) HI RV-Eintee 540802 III 11 lomo sapιens| >gι|178697 I 2- gι|410202 198 671 99 99 IIMI KG44 c> chc-inositol-phosphate phosphodiesterase [Homo sapiens] ^gι|3()7l 15 lipocortin-lll [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A47658|LUIIU3 annex in III - human >sp|PI2429|ANX3JIUMΛN ΛNNEXIN III (L1POCORTIN III) (PLACEN 1 AL ANTICOAGUI AN 1 540989 lipase related protein 1 [Homo sapiens] gι|l87230 29 343 98 98 I ΛSD60 >pιr|A43357|A43357 pancreatic lipase- rclated protein I - human >sp|P543l5|LIPMIUMΛN PANCRI A I IC i IPΛSI RΠΛΓLDPROΠ IN I PRI CURSOR (I C 3 I I 3) I englh = 167 540997 lipase related protein I [Homo sapιens| gι|l87230 409 98 99 IIPΛSG94 >pιr|Λ43357|A43357 pancreatic lipase - related protein I - human >sp|P543l5|LIPIJIUMΛN PΛNCRI ΛI1C LIPASE RLLA TED PROTI IN I PRECURSOR (LC 3 I I 3) Length = 467 548735 P692-5A synthase II - human Length = 727 pιr|B42665|B42665 101 664 96 98 IIM1AL33 549709 c\ lochrome P450 PCN3 ]I lomo sapιens| gι|l81346 72 305 64 64 IIISBZ89 >pιr|A34l01|A34l()l cytochrome P4503A5 - human >sp|P208l5|CP35_HUMΛN CYIOCHROMEP4503A5(EC I 14141) (CYPI1IA5) (P450-PCN3) >gι|950342 cytochrome P450 [Homo sapiens] jSUB I- 24) length = 502 550007 thimet o gopeptidase [Homo sapiens] gι| 1098600 150 782 100 100 HCTIB78 >gi|l()30055 metalloproteinase [Homo sapiens] >pir|JC4197|HYHUTII t imet ohgopeptidase (EC 342115)- human >sp|l'52888|Ml PDJIUMΛN IIIIMI I OLIGOPLPIIDΛSI (LC 342415) (LNDOPEP11DASL2415)(MP78) |SUB 2-689" Length = 550118 macrophage capping protein [Homo sapιens| gt| 187456 113 99 99 HDPXJI8 >pιι|Λ43358|A43358 macrophage capping protein - human >sp|P4012l|CAPGJIUMΛN MACROPHAGE CAPPING PRO I LIN (AC I IN-REGUI A IORY PROTEIN CΛP- G) >gι|5l5505 Cap-G 11 lomo sapιens| [SUB 1-172} Length = 348 550148 274 456 HISBΛI7 550870 carbonic anhydrase IV 11 lomo sapiens] gι|l7979l 594 94 94 IINFIΛ35 >pιr|A45745|CRHU4 carbonate deh li.iLise (I C 42 I I ) IV precursor - hun n >sp|P22748|CΛI14_IIUMAN CARBONIC Af.'HYDRASE IV PRECURSOR (EC 42 I 1 ) (CARBONATE DEHYDRΛ I ΛSL IV) Length = 312 552506 preproglucagon [Homo sapiens] gι|l83270 350 96 96 1IIPDP78 >pιr|A24377|GCHU glucagon precursor - human >sp|P01275|GLUCJIUMAN GLUCAGON PRECURSOR >gι|31778 Human gene encoding preproglucagon Glucagon is a 29-aιruno acid pancreatic hormone which counteracts the blood glucose-lowering a 553765 complement lactoi B [Homo sapiens] gι|297569 48 1214 100 100 HI DRK20 >pιr|S34075|BBI III complement lactoi B precursor - hum.iii >sp|l'0075l| I ABJIUM\N COMPI LMLNI I ACIOR B PRLCURSOR (EC 342147) (C3/C5 CONVERTASL) (PROPERDIN I ACTOR B)(GLYCIN1 - RICH EIΛGlYCOPROIEIN)(GBG) (PBF2) >gι|758090 554050 hislidyl-lRNΛ sjnthe se |I lomo sapiens] gι|32460 374 934 86 86 IIΛRMI 85 >pιr|l37559|SYHUI II hi tidine-tRNA hgase(EC6 I I 21) - human >gι|431312 histidyl tRNA synthetase [Homo sapιens| {SUB 1-30} Length = 509 554186 br.iin glycogen phosphoiylasc [Homo gι|3O72O0 98 99 IIKΛ069 sapiens] >pir|Λ29949|A29949 glycogen phosphoty'lase (EC 2411) brain (.lstrocyloma cell line) - human 1 ength - 863 554716 transcobalamin I precursor | Homo sapiens] gι|307479 441 97 97 IICHΛC67 >pιr|A34227|A34227 transcobalamin I precursor - human I ength = 433 556791 mtegπn alpha I subunit - human (liagmcnt) pιr|A45226|A45226 484 93 93 HF1YR48 >sp|P56l99|ITAI_HUMAN IMEGRIN ALPHΛ-I (LAMININ AND COLLAGEN RI CTP TOR) (VLA- I ) (CD49A> Length = 1151 557121 gamma-glutmy I transpeptidase-related gι| 183142 151 567 100 100 IIISCL8I protein [Homo sapiens] >pιr|Λ41l25|Λ41l25gamma- glulamj iansfeiase (EC 2322) related protein - human >splP36269|GG I 5 1 IUMΛN GΛMMΛ- (iLU I ΛMYL I RANSPLP I IDΛSE 5 PRECURSOR (EC 2322) (GAMMA- GLU I ' AMYLTRANSFERASE 5) (GG I 557199 180 kDa bullous pemphigoid antigen 2/t>pe gi| 1877435 646 HPDDA57 XVII collagen fllomo sapiens] >sp|E307563|F307563180 KDA BULLOUS PEMPHIGOID ANIIGEN 2TYPE XVII COLLAGEN. >sp|GI877435|GI877435180 KDA BULLOUS PEMPHIGOID AN I IGLN 2/FYPE XVII COLLAGEN Lenizlh = 1497 557293 alpha-5 lype IV collagen [Homo sapiens] gi|13142l() 929 99 99 HISBI ' 9() >gι| 180825 collagen type IV alpha 5 chain [I lomo sapiens] {SUB 833-1604} Length = 1604 557441 neurofibromin [Rattus norvegιcιιs| gnl|PID|d 1008732 207 326 100 100 HTPAD5I >pιr|)C5196|IC5196 neurofibromin I - rat >sp|P97526|P97526 NEUROFIBROMIN >gι|30945l neurofibromin fMus musculus] (SUB 1-96} >gι| 1084091 neurollbromatosis I |Homo sapiens] |SUB 97-161} >gι| 1084092 neurollbromatosis I 11 lorn 558091 flavin-containing sapιens|>pιι|S7l6l8|S7l618 dimethylaniline monooxj genase (N-oxidc- forming) (EC 114138) I M05 - human >sp|P49326|FM05JIUMΛN DIMEΓHYI ANH INE MONOOXYGI NΛSI [N-OλlDI rORMING]5(I I 14138)(HEPA1IC II AVIN-CONIΛINI 558423 transhn |llomo sapιens| >pιr|S51738|S 1738 gι|607l30 19 807 93 93 I ID 11)109 transhn - human >sp|Q 15631 |Q 15631 TRANSL1N >gnl|PID|e3l3773 MTRANCDS [Homo sapiens] (SUB 23- 215} Lenι-th = 228 558465 G/T mismatch-specific th> mine DNA gι|l378107 507 90 91 HAMFJ55 ghcosylase |Homo sapiens] Length = 410 558493 tubulin beta- 1 chain - slime mold (Phssaiiim pιr|S02532|S02532 357 76 86 111 II 140 poljcephalum) (Iragment) >gι|313801 bcta- liibuhn [Ph saium pol)cephaltιιn| {SUB I- 203} I ength = 204 558778 i -cell antigen receptor (AA 1-292) [1 lomo gι|37004 290 625 95 95 1IISBP6I sa.iiens] >pιr|S03421 |S03421 I -cell receptoi delta chain precursor (Peer) - human 1 ength = 292 558818 lRNA-GuanιneTransglycos)lase [Homo gι|940l82 468 100 100 IIPIBI63 sapiens] >pιr|G I932|GOI932 tRNΛ- 563182 (Al 072128) claudιn-2 [Mus musculus| gι|3335184 466 81 85 IICHM060 >sp|088552|088552 CI ΛUDIN-2 I ength = 230 572571 194 553 I1ΛIC 02 575525 Bat2 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S3767l|S3767l gι|29375 553 858 85 87 IIΛPOI89 bat2 protein - human Length = 1870 580659 695 1003 IIBICR03 583650 islet regenerating protein |llomo sapiens] gι| 190979 261 413 78 83 IITPDS26 >pιr|Λ35197|RGIIUIA regenerating islet lectin I -alpha piecursor - human >sp|P0545l|LHA IUMAN I I IMOSIΛ1 MINI I ΛIPIIΛ PRI CURSOR (PΛNCRI A 1 IC S IONI PRO 11 IN) (PSP) (PANCRLΛ1 IC THRI AD PRO TI IN) (PI P) (ISI I I 01 LΛNGERIIANS 584698 982 1200 IIIQCJ79 585791 B6I [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A36377|A36377 gι|l79321 52 705 95 95 IISID108 B61 protein precursor - human >sp|P20827|El ΛMHJMΛN I PIIRIN-ΛI PRI CURSOR (I PH-R11A1LD RECI ITOR I YROSINL KINASI I IGΛND l)(I IRK-I)(IMMFDIΛ11 I AR1 Y RI SPONSr PRO TI IN B61 ) ( I UMOR NI CROSIS FΛC I OR Al PI IΛ- INDU 1 PROII IN 4) 587229 ph . phohpase 11 lomo sapiens] >gι|387025 gι|l90013 470 81 IIPDDI22 phosphohpasc 11 lomo sapiens] ^gι|2769697 (ΛC 003982) Hiosphalidxlcholme 2- ac lhydrolase [Homo sapιens| >pιr|C25793|PSHU phosphohpasc A2 (I C 3114) piecursor pancreatic - human >sp|P04054|PA2l_IIUMΛN PHOSPHOLIPASE 587246 pi obable tiansmembrane protein I MC - pιήS70029|S70029 67 573 92 92 III WΛI93 human Length = 705 587486 alpha-subunit ol prol>l gι|602675 745 1734 95 95 IIDPWQ32 [Homo sapiens] pιι|13 2 procollagen-prohne dioxjgenase (FC 114 II 2) alpha chain promisor splice lorm 2-huιnan^sp|PI3674|P4llΛJIUMΛN PROI Yl 4-IIYDROXY1 ΛS1 ΛIPIIΛ S BUNII PRI (. URSOR (I C I 11112) I cnglh = 589218 185 HBSAL59 592154 adenj lyl cyclase (Homo sapiens] >gι|395275 gι|763444 1033 95 95 HAOΛI 42 adenjlate cyclase (Homo sapiens | >pιr|I37l 36|I37136 aden> late c>clase (I C 4611) - human (fragment) >sp|Q08462|CYA2_HUMΛN ADENYLATE CYCI ASE ΓYPLIKIC 461 I ) (Al P PYROPHOSPHA TE- LYASE) (ADENYLYL CYCLASE) (I R 598664 unnamed protein product [unidentified] gnllPID|e307065 255 97 97 111 PDO06 >gι|35330 carboxypeplid.ise a [Homo s.φιens|>pιr|S29l27|S29l27 precursor - human >spιPI5085|CBPI HUMAN CΛRBOXYPI PIIDΛSI Al PRI CURSOR (1C3417 I) length = 419 598665 unnamed protein product |unιdeιιlιfied| gπl|PID|e307()65 1218 100 100 II I PI 179 >gι|35330 carboxypeplidase a [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S29127|S29127 carbow peptidase A ( EC 3417 I ) C P \ 1 precursor - human --sp|PI5085|CBPI HUMAN C ARBOXYPEP I IDASE A I PRI CURSOR (EC 34171) Length = 419 604719 ADP-nbos>latιon factor |Bos taurus| gι| 162627 651 100 100 HSIICI 2 >gι|l78l56 ΛDP-πbosylalion Kiclor I 11 lomo sapιens| >gι| 178164 ADP- ribosykilion (actor I |Homo sapιens| 612689 243 578 HMADQ02 612980 47 259 HISAD74 615134 metavinculin - pig (fragments) >gι|2283 pιr|S29507|S29507 30 578 100 100 IIΛIII M20 metavιnculιn|Su scrofa] {SUB 113-336} I ength = 336 616064 159 398 HASCD63 616096 (ΛC004877) sco-spondin-mucm-hke, similar gι|3638957 99 221 40 52 HOHC 05 to P98167 (PID gl7l 1548) details ol intron/exon structure uncertain (Homo sapiens] >sp|075851|075851 WUGSCH_D1075IH131 PRO 1 LIN (FRAGMENT) Length = 4123 616926 Gps2 |1 lomo sapiens] I ength = 327 gι| 1049070 2 1123 100 100 HDPJK8I 634923 islet legenerating protein [Homo sapiens] gι| 190979 148 447 81 88 II 1 P r 17 >pιr|A35197|RGIIUIA regenerating islet lectin I -alpha precursor - human >sp|P0545l|LIIAJIUMAN I ! I MOSI ATHINΓ I ΛIPIIΛ PRECURSOR (PANCRLAI IC SI ONI PRO! I IN) (PSP) (PANCREATIC 1HRLADPR0TIIN)(PT.P)(ISIF101 LANGERHANS 646688 ORF1 [Homo sapiens] >sp|QI492l|QI492l gι|l89()86 508 819 99 99 IIIPDY03 NONSPFCIFIC CROSSRLAC ING ANTIGLN I ength = 100 647531 cakium-depcndcnl prote.ise lOryctolagus gι| 165666 809 1177 76 81 HMS 36 cu culus] >pιr|B248l5|B24815 calpam (I C 342217) large chain 2 - rabbit (fragment) >sp|l'068l4| ΛN2_RΛBirCΛI PAIN 2 LΛRGI ICΛIΛIYIICJSUBUNII (I C 3422 l7)(CALCIUM-ACIIVAirD NEU1 RAL PRO! TINASI ) (CANP) (M- TYPD 647695 preprocarboxjpeptidase A2 [Homo sapiens] gι|790227 1285 92 92 HVΛΛB38 >pιr|Λ5617l|A56l71 carboxy peptidasc Λ2 (I C 341715) precuisor- human >sp|P48052|CPA2_HUMAN CARBOXYPEP riDASE A2 r URSOR (IC341715) I ength = 417 647699 chymotrypsin-hke protease CTRI -I | Homo gι|438039 577 100 100 IICCMB81 sapiens] >gι|406228 protease CI RL-I [Homo sapiens] >pιr|l38l36|l38l36chyιnotr>psιn-lιkc protcinase (I C 3421 -) C I RI -I hum.iii sp|PI()313|( I I HUMAN I IV MO 1 R YPSIN-I IK1 PRO 11 ΛSI C IRI-1 PRECURSOR (I C 651706 erythroc>le p55 [Homo sapiens] gι|l89786 963 96 97 uncoil >sp|Q00013|EM55_HUMAN 55 KD LRY1HROCYIEMI MBRΛNI PRO 11 IN (P55) Length = 466 651726 an (acetamide deacetvlasc [Homo sapiciιs| gι|5375l4 384 1553 99 99 III VIII 70 >pιι|Λ53856|Λ53856 a l-acylami asc (I C 35 I 13) -human >sp|P22760|AAΛD_HUMAN ARYI ACETAMIDE DEACE I Yl AS! (I C 3 I I -)(ΛΛDΛC) [SUB 2-399} I ength = 399 652160 alpha 2-macroglobulιn 690-730 [I lomo gι|579592 78 860 92 92 HDPUB04 sapiens I Length = 1474 654015 172 390 IIISΛV29 75 656339 alpha endosulfine [Homo sapιens| gnl|PID|e284090 450 100 100 IIKGCM36 >sp|043768|043768 ALPHA I NDOSIILI INI - gnl|PII)|c221652.ilph.i eiulosulline I os taιιrus| {SUB 25-101 } Length = 121 76 657190 293 493 111111143 77 657859 3 323 HNKΛAI4 78 662143 576 722 HLDQI35 79 662212 FK506 polyketide synthase [Slreptom>ces gnl|PID|e29068l 11 457 45 59 IIIPΛG88 sp ] >sp|P958!4|P958l4 FK506 POLYKE 1 IDE SYN IHΛSE I ength = 6420 80 662225 107 289 HWΛCN48 81 662496 3 446 IIWIIIIGI7 82 669529 254 343 1IIS I 0 83 670453 acid sphingomjeliiuse |llomo sapιens| gι|972769 926 1 48 100 100 I IMA 1 4 >sp|Q16837|QI6837 ACID SPIIINGOMYEl,INΛSL(LC3 I 412) (SPIIINGOMYELIN PI IOSPHODIES I ' ERΛSE) (NL FRAL SPHINGOMYELINASE) >gι|972770 acid sphingomjelinase (Homo sapiens] {SUB 33- 629} Length = 629 84 675028 seven in absentia homolog [Homo sapiens] gι|304!825 284 100 100 HE2IJ09 >gi|2673966 hSIAHI [Homo sapiens] >sp|043269|043269 HSIAH 1 Length = 282 85 681325 3 224 IIA1BC26 86 683103 212 1024 HΓΓBNOS 87 684432 serine hydroxy methyltritnslerasc 11 lomo gι|438636 905 94 95 IISPAΛ79 >pιr|Λ46746|Λ46746 glycine h dioxymethy Itranslerase (EC 2121) cytosohc - human >sp|P34896|Gl YC HUMAN SI RINI HYDROXYMI ΓHYI IRANSIIRΛSI CYIOSOl IC( 88 688018 protease (put ) putative [Simian gι|334735 169 351 66 77 HIPDI05 immunodeficiency virus] >sp|Q85727|Q85727 PIG! All ED MONKI Y SIMIAN F-CELI I LUKI MIA VIRUS PRO 11 ΛSI (I RAGMI N T) 1 ength = 215 89 688077 (Al 047440) πbosomal protein L33-hke gι|3335136 276 100 100 IILBAG86 protein [Homo sapiens] >sp|075394|075394 RIBOSOMΛI PROFFINL33-LIKI PROIEIN I ength = 65 90 691522 similar to vacuolar biogenesis protein gnl|PID|el35l725 1179 32 54 111 AC N89 (pen5) cDNΛI I LMBI 1)27614 comes Irom this gene cDNΛISI I MB1 D34974 comes from this gene |C.ι_noιh.ιbdιlιs elegans| gnl|PlD|e!351725 similai to vacuolar biogenesis protein (pep5) cDNA rsi I MBI D276I4 comes Irom t 91 693706 transcription factor ISGF-3 (Homo sapiens] gι|228l()7l 184 2541 98 98 IIAICK36 >sp|G228(07l|G228l071 TRANSCRIPTION FACIOR ISGF-3 >sp|GI 168081 |G 1168081 SIGNAL ΓRANSDUCI R AND ACT IVΛ FOR OI TRANSCRIPTION I A. STA 11A=IN ΓERLLUKIN-6 RESPONSE ELEMENT BINDING PROTEIN {SRC- HOMOLOGY DOMAIN TYPE 2) {S 92 694523 1 204 HTPDK30 93 697517 I IOSPHOGLUCOMU IΛSE (FC 5422) ,p|P36871|PGMU III) 117 1649 IIIBDL34 (GLUCOSE PIIOSPHOMU FΛSE)(PGM) MAN Length = 561 94 699054 338 889 I1MEC129 95 699464 2 241 II1LDΛ59 96 703402 (Al 000422) I ΓF-1 interacting peptide 5 gι|2183083 1 423 94 95 HIIIIIV36 [Homo sapiens] >sp|O00536|O00536 FI I -1 IN I ERACTING PEP TIDE 5 (IRAGMENT) Length = 407 97 703651 guanine nucleotide-bindmg protein alpha pιr|Λ4807l|A4807l 332 99 99 IIDPGNI6 subunit, G alpha 12 - human >sp|G264227|G264227 GUANINE NUCLEOTIDE-BINDING PROTEIN Al PIIΛ SUBUNIT, GΛI PI IΛ 12 length 381 98 704905 359 655 IIPMIKI9 99 706907 I 153 HRSAR67 100 708515 CDM | Homo sapιens| gι|535058tumor- gι|47 l57 480 87 87 HCIDΛ53 associaled antigen 11 lomo sapιens| >gι| 1508820 C M protein 11 lomo sapiens] >pιι|S44279|S44279 CDM protein - human >sp|P51572|CDM_HUMΛN C DM PRO TLIN (6C6-ΛG 1 UMOR- ASSOCIATEDANTIGEN)(DXSI357L) >gι| 1020320 CDM protein (Horn 101 710572 6 248 III1ASC40 102 710618 125 325 IIBMAC72 103 711810 283 543 HBXCZ83 104 714933 RNA adenosme deammase [Homo sapιens| gι|2795790 2 370 89 90 IIAM1Q09 >sp|043859|043859 RNA ADENOSIN1 Dl AMINASF I eneth = 1181 105 716331 (Λl 006621) embryonic lung protein [Homo gι|2654559 564 91 IILIIIPIO sapiens] >sp|G2654559|G2654559 EMBRYONIC LUNG PROTEIN I ength = 568 106 717686 282 494 HIPBX62 107 718187 153 HIPDG49 108 719934 trigl ceπde lipase precursor [Homo sapien | gι|339597 1420 100 100 IIPΛSI ) 23 >gι|l90140 lipase [Homo sapiens] >gι| 1304379 p.increatic lipase [Homo sapιens| ~-pιι | 43357|C43357 tn.icy Ig ceiol lipase (I C 3 I I 3) precursor, p.mcreatic - human >sp|PI6233|l IPPJIUMAN TRIΛCYLGLYCTROI I IPASE PR 109 722980 pL-.ma gelsohn precursor |Sus scrola| gι|l64472 67 375 100 100 III ( 16 >gι|758306 gelsohn [Sus scrola] ~-pιι|S02665|S0266s gelsohn piccuisoi pig (lι.ιgment) ; sp|P20305|Cιl I S PIG GI LSOLIN PRECURSOR PI ΛSMΛ (ΛCTIN-DFPOI YMf RIZING FAC I O ) (ΛD1 ) (BRLVIN) (1 RΛGMl N I ) I ength = 772 110 723596 poly (A) binding protein (Mus musculus] gι|53754 1010 1225 67 HI ri)R30 >pιr|!487l8|l487l8 poly(Λ) binding prot in - mouse >sp|P2934l|PΛBl_MOUSL POI YADLNYLAT E-BINDING PRO 11 IN I (POLY(Λ) BINDING PROT EIN I ) (PABP 1) I ength = 636 ill 724352 255 662 llkGBC30 112 724450 311 517 IIMWGX 0 113 724855 3 410 IIIPB 0 114 724904 (ΛJ225089) 2'-5' ohgoadeny late sy nthet.ise ι l|PII)|cl3l6607 1 417 100 100 III3I 04 (p590ΛS) [I lomo sapιens| >sp|075686|0756862'-5' Ol IGOAD1NYI AIF SYNΠII 1ΛSI (P590AS) length = 514 115 725642 svnaptotagmin VI |Rattus norvegιcus| gι|643654 303 85 86 HISBX52 >pιr|S58399|S58399 cellutagmin I sytVI - rat >sp|Q62746|Q62746 SYNAPTO TAGMIN VI Length = 511 16 726192 Highly similar to murine eps 15 GB A N gι|470035 276 785 79 79 IISKXII03 L221768 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S43074|S43074 AF-lp protein - human Length = 896 117 726964 clastiisc 2 precursor 11 lomo sapιens| gι| 182023 808 92 92 IIPΛSI77 >gι|l82058 pancreatic elastase IIA z mogen [Homo sapiens) -pιι|B26823|B26823 pancreatic elastase 11 ( I C 342171) Λ precursor - hum.in >sp|P08217|EL2AJIUMANI 1ΛSIΛSI 2A PRECURSOR (LC 342171 ) I ength = 269 730930 glutathione synthctase (Homo sapιens| gι|886284 1530 97 97 III WB110 >gι| 1236350 glutathione s nthetase [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S56748|S56748 glutathione synthase (1 C 6323) brain - human sp|P48637|GSI IB J IIJMΛN GLUIAΓHIONE YNIHLTΛSI (ic 6323)(GI UTAΓIIIONESYNIIIΛSI ) (GSHSYNIHLIASEX 119 731314 91 261 HSPAK79 120 732386 3 632 HLIDQ55 121 732909 759 1220 III TCA26 122 733088 (Ar029786) GBAS [I lomo sapiens] gι|3403167 1 399 100 100 IIΛDI Y44 >sp|075323|075323 GBAS Length : 286 123 733351 287 463 HDPCl -.6 124 733693 1 276 IIIPDU59 125 734760 (Al 042379) spindle pole body piolcin spc97 gι|280l70l 205 Is84 96 96 III Ml U68 homolog GC P2 [Homo sapiens) >sp|043632|043632 SPINDLE POI E BODY PRO I LIN SPC97 HOMOl OG Length = 902 126 735711 glutamate pyruvate transaminase [Homo gι| 1763096 12 842 66 82 H2CBI6I sapiens] length = 496 127 742413 779 HI IAS62 128 742676 common librinogen alpha chain [Homo gι|458554 10 1 89 89 III ICN22 sapiens) >gι|l82426 A-alpha fibrmogen [Homo sapiens] >gι|4033511 librinogen alpha subunit [Homo sapιens| >pιr|A93956|FGHUA librinogen alpha chain precursor, short splice fomi - human >gι|532482 alpha-fibπnogen [Homo s 129 742781 344 607 HE8ΛYI4 130 743356 173 298 HCl DΛ89 131 745694 1 105 III 11IK36 132 747235 3 743 III BIII8 133 750986 s ntaxin 7 [Homo sapiens] I ength = 2 1 gι|2337920 156 689 83 83 1II CR21 134 751068 529 810 II A 088 135 751164 1341 1736 II I3G96 136 751890 18 308 HIPBR05 137 751991 1 1330 IIMSIS33 138 752449 1 270 HI YDM55 139 752504 pro-alpha-1 type V collagen [Homo sapiens] gι|l89520 1 552 94 95 IIOUDR20 >pιr|S18802|CGHUIV collagen alpha l(V) chain precursor - human >sp|Q15094|QI5094 PRO-ALPHA-1 IYPI VCOI I AGIN 1 ength = 1838 140 752688 (ΛF006088) pl6-Arc [Homo sapιens| gi|2282042 140 451 100 100 IUBGK82 >gι|24076l I (Al 017807) Λrp2/3 complex !6kDa subunit 11 lomo sapiens] >sp|0155ll|ΛRI6JIUMANΛRP2/3 COMPLEX I6KDSUBUNIF(PI6-ΛRC) Length = 151 141 752889 testican [Homo sapiens] gι|793845 153 518 87 87 HE8DN77 >sp|Q08629|Q08629 TESTICAN PRECURSOR >gι|3282168 (ΛC005213) testican [Homo sapιens| {SUB 237-439} Length = 439 142 753150 pre-mRNΛ splicing lactor 11 lomo sapιens| gι|307438 259 1176 100 100 III-.LHM06 •pιr|Λ48133|A48133 pre-mRNA splicing SRp75 - human >gι|29l4669 (ΛC004236) SRP0001 LB |l lomo sapiens] {SUB 1-192} I ength = 494 143 753690 246 743 HHPBG69 144 754479 160 543 HISDΓ69 145 754692 (AL03l058)dJ5l2Bll I (Desmoplakm I gnl|PID|e 1329910 338 2122 87 87 III IBL33 (DPI)) I Homo sapiens] >sp|075993|075993 DI512B11 I (DESMOPLAKIN 1 (DPI)) Length = 2871 146 756814 glucose transporter glycoprotein 11 lomo gι|183303 44 679 90 90 IICWBI85 sapιens| --pιr|A272l7|A27217 glucose transport protein - human >sp|PIII66|GIRI HUMAN GI UC OSI 1RΛNSPORI1R ΪYPF 1 I RYIIIROCYII/BRΛIN bbs|77925 glucose transporter isolorm 1. GLU I I [mice, embryo, Peptide Partial 107 147 757127 253 501 II BAIN 70 148 757347 213 620 IIMSFX70 149 757495 (ΛJO 10046) guamne nucleotide-exchange gnl|PID|e 1363645 88 1221 99 100 IIIPBY44 factor [1 lomo sapiens] >sp|L I363645|F 1363645 GUΛN1NF N CLLO riDI -I X 11 ANGI I AC I OR Length = 548 150 757715 C.L008986) similar to tyrosine-protein gnl|PID|e 1347680 227 1729 72 84 HLBIDOl kinase [Caenorhabditis elegans] >gnl|PID|e 1348186 similar to tyrosine- prolein kinase [Cienorhabditis elegans) >sp|045668|045668H37N21 I PRO 11 IN Length = 231 151 760388 232 111 WAII26 152 760433 mutant sterol regulatory element binding gι|841318 730 83 89 IIIBDG86 proteιn-2 (Cπcetulus gπseus] 1 ength = 839 153 760545 (Al 051426) slow delayed rectifier channel gι|296l249 345 80 81 IISSIS06 subunit [Homo sapiens] >sp|O60607|O60607 SI OW DELAYED rC riFIER CHANNEI SUBUNIT Lenεth = 548 154 761566 protein tyrosine phosphatase PTPCAAXl gι|1777755 601 1125 99 99 HDPOW14 [Homo sapiens] >gι|2961199 (AF051160) tyrosine phosphatase [Homo sapiens] >gι|530l62 tyrosine phosphatase [Rnttns rattus] >gι| 1814024 protein tyrosine phosphatase |Mus museulus] >pir|A56059|A56059proteιn-tyrosιne-pho 155 761740 7 435 HSIFY01 156 765215 colipase precursor [Homo sapιens| gt|l80886 25 417 86 86 HTPCY18 >gι| 1483624 colipase [Homo sapiens) >pιr|A42568|XI HU colipase precursoi - human >sp|P04118|C0L HUMAN COLIPASE PRECURSOR Length = 112 157 765428 142 627 III YCF90 158 766686 38 901 HNINP54 159 767396 (ΛF05O640) NΛDI 1-ubιquιnone gι|3337443 2 568 87 89 HSKNG05 o.xiOoreductase NDUFS2 subunit 11 lomo sapiens] >sp|G3337443|G3337443 NΛDII- UBIQUINONE OX1DOREDUCFASE NDUlS2SUBUNir Length = 463 160 767501 I -.lrgmine glycine .imidmolransfei.ise {IC bbs| 143982 735 95 95 IIKMMB02 2141} |human. kidney carcinoma cells. Peptide.423 aa| |llomo sapιens| >pιr|S4l734|S41734 glycine amidinotranslerase (EC 2141) piecui or - human >sp|P50440|GA FM HUMAN GLYCINE AMIDINOTRANSFERΛSE PRECURSOR (EC 161 767945 183 302 IIISI B76 162 768996 209 4ι4 II I PC 34 163 771415 I 17 IIIINW77 164 772657 zyginll [Rattus norvegιcus| gι| 1778078 110 1087 69 72 IIDQLV69 >sp|P97578|P97578ZVGINIl (FRAGMENT) I ength = 324 165 773123 beta-poly merase [Homo sapiens] >gι|5536l4 gι|l90l56 278 1012 35 58 IIWIIIIN55 polymerase beta [Homo sapiens] {SUB I- 39} Length = 335 166 773193 246 69s IIBOD078 167 773710 3 707 HIIYK62 168 774283 (Al 047384) postsyn.iptic protein C RIP I gι|309855| 3 39i 99 99 HΛK 132 I Rattus norvegicusl >sp|O70333|O70333 POST SYNA IIC PRO TI INC RIP 1 I ength = 101 169 774369 33 224 HDAAC 6 170 774754 (Al 013758) polyadcnvlate binding piolcin- gι|3046900 52 1239 92 92 IIL80N42 interacting proteιn-1 [Homo sapiens] >sp|O60455|O60455 POI YΛDENYI A 11 BINDING PRO I LIN-INT I RΛC I ING PRO! I IN- 1 Length = 480 171 774823 out at first [Drosophila viπlis] gι|2443448 568 46 62 IIMKLG85 >sp|() 18638|OI 8638 OU1 AT I IRS I I ength = 305 172 775510 3 98 IIVAMK80 173 775634 106 537 lirXBI9l 174 775640 53 358 IITWDN88 175 775802 762 971 IIJMΛI44 176 777470 Ner-I [Homo sapiens] >pιr|IC40l4|JC40l4 gι|64l962 731 1621 91 IIIΛCM37 steroid hormone-nuclear receptor NI R - human ^sp|P55()55|NI RJIUMAN NUC1 I Λ RLC1 PIORNI R (UBIOUIIOUSI V-i PRISSI I) NULLI ΛR RLCI PI OR) gι|608l35 orpli4in receptor 11 lomo sapiens] {SUB 7- 461} I ength = 461 177 777652 2 340 IIDPVII0 178 778998 197 409 IIISCOI0 179 779273 (Al 053091) eyehd [Drosophila gι|2981221 699 51 67 IIRADK5I melanogaster] >sp|O6l603|O61603 EYELID Length = 2715 180 779297 cek5 receptor ligand |Mus nuιsculus| 1 ength gι|575929 318 100 100 II I B53 = 345 181 779664 enhancer-tnip-loeus-l |Mus musculιιs| gι|50866 184 67 98 99 IIIS I82 >pιr|Λ56559|Λ56559enhancer-trap-locιιs-l protein - mouse (Iragment) >sp|Q04692|Q04692 FNHΛNCI R I RAP I OCUS I (LNHANCLR-IRAP-I OCUS 1 PROIEINMΓRAGMENT) Length = 1136 182 780565 10 144 I USD 193 183 780665 pieprochy motry psinogen (EC 3421 I ) gι|18H90 3 401 100 100 HVANΓ29 (Homo sapιens| >pιr|A31299|Λ31299 (IC342I I) length = 263 184 780666 preprochymotr psinogen (I C 3421 I) gι|l II9() 57 494 93 IIIPDP5I I Homo sapiens] >pιr|Λ31299|Λ3l299 chymotr psin (FC 34211 ) precursor - human >sp|PI7538|C I RBJIUMΛN CHYMOΓRYPSINOGEN B PRECURSOR (IX * 3421 I) Length = 263 185 781579 26S proteasome regulatoo' chain 12 - human pιr|S6549l|S6549l 56 1102 94 94 HI WBI70 Length = 321 186 782052 (ΛP000002) 376aa long hypothetical gnl|PID|dl()30629 76 447 5 58 H1SD077 dehydrogenase [Pyrococcus oπ oshii | >sp|O58320|O58320376AΛ LONG HYPOTHETICAL DEHYDROGENASL Length = 376 187 782393 3 269 H1SEC84 188 782907 2 379 HSSIR96 189 783220 273 635 III XIXI2 190 783300 (Al 068195) putative ghalblastoma cell gι|3211975 685 1392 86 86 IIDPI/33 dillerentiation-related piotein [Homo sapicnsl --sp|O75500|O75500 I'll I A I IVL GI IΛLBLΛSIOMΛC I LI D1FFEREN I IΛ 1 ION-RELΛ I LI) PROIE1N Length = 334 191 783938 1139 1495 HIDΛE52 192 784024 355 540 HMEIS4I 193 784575 615 806 IHSAC93 194 785006 3 353 IIISDII86 195 785069 3 206 IIDIΛ156 196 785237 46 132 I II) 11086 197 786111 2 331 II I PC 024 198 787036 (AL008583) dJ327J16 I (human ortholog ol gnl|PID|e 1370730 123 518 100 100 HSSΛL37 mouse outer arm Dynein light chain 4) [Homo sapiens] Length = 105 199 788991 74 556 HCI II73 200 789125 3 515 I IT XI S64 201 789626 98 742 HI PBL42 202 789703 2 817 IIDPIU62 203 789858 351 806 HAH 1130 204 790848 891 1067 HIPDK53 205 790893 29 241 III VII 06 206 790912 293 544 HISLI09 207 791386 ΛDP-nbosy l.ition Kicloi I -directed G I P.ise gι| 1130494 1 366 73 84 I1DOI 29 activating protein [Rattus norvegιcus| >sp|062848|Q62848 ΛDP- R1BOSYLATION I AC I OR l-DIRI CUD GΓPASI ΛCIIVΛIINGPROILIN length = 415 208 791598 399 644 IIOLDP59 209 791619 1 1698 HOGCS94 210 791628 125 466 HOLBI96 211 791751 3 464 1118OL02 212 792557 (AB004066)DEC1 [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|dI022575 231 470 92 93 IIAMΓQI5 >pιr|JC5547|JC5547 basic hehx-loop-helix lactor DEC I - human >sp|OI4503|OI4503 1)1 C 1 I ength-- 412 792568 unknown [Saccharomyces eerey ιsιae| gι|7632l8 211 882 36 58 HUVDRI7 >pιr|S5357l|S53571 hypothetical piotem YU 128xv - yeast (Siiccharomyces ceιevιsi4ie)>sp|P40469| ll8_YI S I DNA REPAIR/ 1 RANSCRIPI ION PROTL1N METI8/MMS19 >gι|599989 I Saccharomyces cerevisiae I {SUB 162- 1 32} I ength = 214 792590 O-hnked CdcNΛc tianslerase |llomo gι|2266994 1163 2656 100 100 111 IC 93 sapiensl >sp|OI5294|015294 UDP-N- ACLT Yl GI UCOSAMINE--PL I ID1 N- ACFIYIGI UCOSAMINYEIRANSπ R\ SL 100KDSUBUNII (IC 24 I -)(()- GLCNACTRANSFLRASE PI 0 SUBUNIT) I ength = 920 215 793323 2 439 I IB WU 167 216 793466 567 887 IIIBCII37 217 793507 634 903 HΛGI R01 218 793546 3 1088 H2CBU95 219 793559 137 295 I1ISBI02 220 793604 (AB008430) CDEP |llomo sapiens] gnl|PID|dl025l78 3 1187 96 96 HISBR20 >sp|D 1025178|D 1025178 CDL P Length ■■ 1045 221 794121 2 469 HOLAN65 222 794295 2 433 HFIAAI 223 795241 I 46F6 I (FR4GMLN I ) I ength = 509 sp| 20473|Q20473 556 1089 43 67 HOIDV07 224 795286 132 1487 IIIIN055 225 795637 2 1282 IIIIBHM95 226 796301 (Al 053367) carboxyl terminal I IM domain gι|29961 6 142 1104 63 82 IIKΛC 38 protein [Mus musculus| >sp|O70400|O7040() CΛRBOXYI ILRMINAL I IM DOMAIN PRO 1 FIN lcm-th = 326 227 796347 740 952 IIOGCR67 228 796579 U2 small nuclear πbonucleoprotein B" gι|340l05 32 847 88 88 HOGΛQ65 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A259IO|Λ25910 small nuclear πbonucleoprotein U2B" - human I ength = 225 229 796590 (Al 039700) antigen NY-CO-3811 lomo gι|3170200 54 572 65 IIIXBD96 sapiens] >sp|G3170200|G3170200 ANTIGI N NY-CO-38 >gι|3170l98 (Ar039699) antigen NY-CO-37 [Homo sapιens| {SUB 1-403} length = 652 230 799783 1 198 IIPNΛA0I 231 7997 1 1 282 II I PC Y49 232 799785 176 373 IIIP W69 233 799786 26 397 1IISII 18 234 799787 78 245 111 PDR86 235 799800 1 210 HIPDJ82 236 799808 pancreatic protease E precursor [Homo gnl|PID|dl()00660 2 820 97 97 HCCMD30 sapiens] >sp|P09093|EL3A_HUMAN ELASTASE IMA PRECURSOR (rC 342170) (PRO I EASE F) 1 ength = 270 799977 (ΛJ000342) DMB I I protein 58 kb gnl|PID|e328724 541 81 IIPDXI9 transcript [Homo S4ipιens] >sp|E328724|E328724 DMBl I PRO 11 IN 58 KB TRANSCRIP! PRI CURSOR Length = 1785 800149 (ABOI7365) lrι/zlcd-7 (Homo sapιens| gnl|PlD|dl()35649 188 96 96 HISBC04 >sp|D1035649|DI035649 TRIZZ1 ED-7 I ength = 574 800189 N 1 GP4 |Nιcolι.ιna tabacιιm| gι|4()97->85 33 434 4 68 II1 D021 >sp|G4097585|G4097585 N IGP4 (I ΛGMΓNT) I ength = 344 800589 retinal-specific hetcrotrimeπc G 1 P-bmding gι|l663629 137 1249 99 100 HARΛG68 protein beta subunit G bet ϊl |Mus musculusl sp|G1663629|G 1663629 RITINAL-SPI IIIC III ILR01 IM1 RIC G ΓP-BINDING PRO ΓFIN BFT A SL3UNIT GBETA5I >gι|557738 guaiiinc nucleotide regulatory protein |Mus musculusl {SU 800811 SH3-domaιn interacting protein I Homo gnl|PID|e 1226443 601 100 100 IIS GN39 sapiens] >sp|QI5220|Q15220 PRPL-2 PROT LIN >pιr|S52796|S52796 p l 2 protein - human (Iragmcnl) {SUB 92-494} I ength = 494 800857 p78 protein (Homo sapiens] gι|l90l36 295 2274 96 96 H TBX80 >sp|P2059l|MXI_HUMAN INK RI I RON- RLGULAΠ D RESIS I ANCEG IP- BINDING PRO I EIN XA (INTERFERON- INDUCI D PROT FIN P78)(II I-78K) {SUB 2-662} Length = 662 805721 3 224 IISKY 73 805818 143 994 IIJΛBI1I 245 806267 ( Al 022982) contains similarity to the Λ-ly pe gι|23849IO 1018 57 75 HI) I DM49 potassium current class ol channel proteins |Cιienorhdbdιlιs elegans| - * sp|OI70()l|OI70(M 1231)126 PRO If IN I ength = 670 246 806579 971 1282 IIIΛSC33 247 810625 (Al 085691) multidrug resistance-associated gι|4106442 3 1019 96 96 IIWIΛD06 protein 3A [Homo sapiens] >sp|G4l06442|G4l()6442 MUl IIDRUG RI sis ΓANCΓ-ΛSSOCIΛ I ED PRO I LIN 3 A Length = 1238 248 811153 SI IB-SRC IIOMOI OGY 2 PRO II IN sp|G545IOO|G545IOO 531 881 83 96 IIDQI 1)71 I ength = 309 249 811787 1201 1797 III ONN5I 250 812314 ubiquitin-specific protdise [Diosophila gnl|PID|c252797 648 1514 46 67 1IUSX07I melanogaster| I ength = 898 251 812443 binding l.ιctor-2 box B | Diosophila gill 1064 733 67 85 HE8PW90 melanogasler] >pιr|A42l40|A42140 box B- bindmg factor-2 - fiuit fly (Drosophila melanogaster)>sp|P29747|BBF2_DROML BOX B BINDING I ACT OR-2 (BBI -2) 1 ength = 515 252 812498 1290 1550 III 8PW45 253 812504 (Al 035737) general liansciiption lactoi 2 I. gι|2827l 0 3 1601 98 99 HI IΛI66 alternative splice product (Homo sapιens| >sp|043546|043546 GENERAL TRANSCRIPIIONIACIOR2-I ALΓIRNAΠVI SPLICE PRODUCI Length = 998 254 813079 GS2NA [Homo sapiens] gι|805095 I 756 62 73 HCROBI7 >pιr|IC2522| IC2522 nuclear autoantigen - human 1 ength = 713 255 815889 centπn |llomo sapιens| >sp|OI5l82|OI5l82 gnl|PII)|e314005 I 603 99 100 MOI IN43 CL IRIN Length = 167 256 824358 ox lerol-bmding protein [Homo sapiens] gι|l89403 415 1275 100 100 MMSKI74 >pιr|Λ345811 A34581 oxy sterol-binding protein - human >sp|P22059|OX YBJ IUMΛN OXYSIEROL-BINDINGPROILIN Length = 807 257 826144 ets-related protein [Homo sapiens) gι|479l67 609 100 100 HN1MII73 >gnl|PID|e2257l9 eim [Homo sapιens| >pιr|S43692|S43692 transcription factoi eim - human >sp|P4l I61|ERM_HUMΛN E 1 S- Rl 1 All D PRO 11 INI RM(I IS IRΛNSIOCΛIION VARIΛNI 5) I englli = 510 258 826558 266 IIIAI 167 259 827471 cholesterol esterase )Homo sapiens] gι|l80482 1077 96 96 HVANU76 >bbs|109l85 pancreatic cholesterol esterase. CEase {internal fragment) {EC 3 I 113} [human, pWE 15. PTCF. Peptide Partial.28 aa] [Homo sapiens] [SUB 458-485} Length = 747 260 827716 (Al 008197) syncolhn [Rattus norvegιeus| gι|2258437 403 72 84 I1VΛNR45 >sp|035775|035775 SYNCOLL1N >gι|3366638 (AF0I2887) sιp9 [Rattus norvegicusl {SUB 8-145} I ength = 145 261 827722 1976 2116 HISCW2I 262 827727 1192 1557 msec 19 263 828238 (AC 002451 ) py ruvate dehy drogenase kinase ml2337883 ι 301 100 100 III IGU39 isotorm 411 lomυ sapiens | gι|l39 l97 pyruv.ite deh rogenase kinase isolomi 4 I Homo sapiens I gι|l399210 pyiuy.Ue dehydrogenase kin.ise isolomi 411 lomo sapιens| >sp|QI6654|PDK4_HUMΛN [PYRUVΛTE DLHYDROGENΛS1 (I IPOΛMIDI 264 828573 3 1118 IIGCΛΛ50 265 828624 1305 1520 II 1 Ol U64 266 828656 185 403 HISDT27 267 828848 pancreatic zymogen granule membrane gι|!2445l2 3 1220 97 97 HVΛNS09 protein GP-2 [Homo sapiens) >pιr|G02091|G02091 pancreatic z mogen granule membrane piotein GP-2 - human >sp|P55259|GP2JIUMAN PΛNCRI AT IC SICRLIORYGRΛNUI I Ml MBRΛNI MΛIOR GI YCOPRO I LIN GP2 PRLCURSOR (PANCREAT IC YMOGI N GRΛ 268 828929 casein kinase I alpha I [R.ittus noιvegιeιιs| gι| 1679790 479 80 80 IIMICG83 >sp|P97634|P97634 CASEIN KINASE I ALPHA L >gι|97569l casein kinase [-alpha (M"s musculusl (SUB 327-353} I ength = 353 269 829008 G 1 P-binchng protein |l lomo sapiens] gnl|PID|e 1227622 17 694 80 IIISΛM79 >sp|043824|043824 GFP-BINDING PROTEIN Length =442 270 829086 small GrP-bmding protein [Oryctol.igus gι|43600l 244 426 82 87 HIPDL66 cuniculus] >pιr|A48500|Λ48500 small G I P- binding protein Rab25 - rabbit Length = 213 271 829192 pLK |llomo sapiens] Length = 603 gι|3930l7 455 1270 94 95 IIMI KC67 272 829310 SUP35 gene product [Xenopus laevιs| gι|9762l9 3 527 90 95 HΛMI Y36 >pιr|S58444|S58444 SUP35 protein - Λlncan clawed frog (fragment) Length = 614 273 829319 407 805 HUFDB42 274 829459 spermatid-specific [Mus musculusl gi|556310 2 184 97 100 MNFAAI7 >pιr|A37363|A37363 histone II2B. testis mouse (fragment) >sp|Q64477|064477 HIS I ONE I I2B (FRAGMENT) Length - ■ 134 275 829527 489 806 HI IDP69 276 829736 (AL031532) yeast gtr2 homolog. novel small gnl|PID|el319429 3 1049 69 86 HIGC I0 G I Pase subfamily protein [Schizosaccharomyces pombe] >sp|074544|074544 YEAS I G I R2 HOMOLOG, NOVEL SMALL GT PASI SUBIΛMILYPROII IN Length = 314 277 830552 329 1712 III II V21 278 830566 cathepsin E precursor [Homo sapiens| gi|!81194 552 99 100 HTPBQ32 >gi|181205 cathepsin E [Homo sapiens| >pιι|A42038|Λ3440l cathepsin E(EC 342334) precursor - human >sp|P 14091 |CATEJIUMAN CATHEPSIN E PRECURSOR (EC 34.2334). >sp|G402841|G40284l CATHEPSIN E. CE=MATURE FORM {N-TERMI 279 830568 tyrosine protein kinase (Homo sapiens] gι|306475 1874 95 95 HISG078 >sp|Q08345|EDDI JTUMAN EPI ITILLIΛL DISCOIDIN DOMAIN RECEPTOR 1 PRECURSOR (EC 27 I I 12) ( I YROSIN1 - PRO I LIN KINASE CΛKMCT. I I ADHESION KINASE) ( I YROSINE KINASE DDR) (DISCOIDIN RECEIMOR TYROSINE KINASE) ( I RK E) (PRO 1 EIN- 280 830569 lipase related protein 2 [Homo sapiens] gi|l87232 1433 98 98 MSIAL52 >pir|B43357|B43357 pancreatic lipase- related protein 2 - human >sp|P54317|LIP2 J IUMAN PΛNCREA 1 IC LIPASE RELΛ TED PRO TE1N 2 PRECURSOR (FC 3 I 13) Length = 469 281 830583 alpha-lropomyosin 5b | attus norvegicus) gι|207508 909 85 85 HAROA79 >pir|D39816|D398l6 (ropomyosin 5b. tϊbioblast - rat >sp|Q63609|Q63609 ΛLPI IΛ- 1 ROPOMYOSIN 5B Length = 248 830613 clalhrin-assocMted protein (Mus mιιscιιlιιs| gι|191986 10 1 77 90 III 11)47 >pιr|SI9693|SI9693 ΛP47 piotein - mouse ^sp|P35 85|ΛP47 MOUSI IAIIIRIN COAI ASSI MBI 1 PROII INΛP17 (CI AIHRINCOAT ASSOCIAII D PRO 11 IN AP47) (GOI GI ADAP 1 OR AP I 47 KD PROT I IN) (IIΛI 47 KD SUBUNIT) (CLATHRIN ASSLMBI Y 830686 197 391 HSIMI26 830691 1343 1627 HSXI07I 830716 (AL03l393)dJ733DI51 (Zinc-finger gnl|PlI)|e 1329909 3 713 62 74 HSSI 142 protein) [Homo sapiens] I ength = 496 830792 kallikrein [Homo sapiens] gι| 186653 1 801 99 99 IISDSG96 >pιr|Λ24696|K HU tissue kallikrein (I ( 342135) precuisor - hum.in >sp|P06870|KI MJIUMΛN GI ΛNDUI AR ΛU IKRI IN I PRI CURSOR(IC342l 35)(IISSUI KAI I IKRI IN) (KIDNEY/PΛNCRLAS/SAI IVARY GI AND KALI IKREIN) >gι|386843 kallikrein 11 lorn 830893 29 535 HPRIG34 830976 (Al 077866) amino .icicl transporter I 1 gι|3639058 3 1244 53 73 HDPRII64 [Homo sapiensj >sp|G3639058|G3639058 AMINO ACID TRANSPORTER LI6 >gι|18l908l l6[Homo apιens| {SUB 267- 507} I ength = 507 289 831043 adhesive protein - mussel ( I richomya pιι|S42675|S42675 24 257 62 HOAB/73 hirsuta) (fragments) 1 ength = 65 290 831131 23 301 MM 11)128 291 831164 59 331 IIMSGB46 292 831173 pancreatic secretory trypsin inhibitor (Homo gill 90688 194 475 86 86 IIMQBB05 sapiens] >gι|l90694 PS 11 [Homo sapiens | >pιr|A27484| TIHUA pancreatic secretory try sin inhibitor pieeursor - human >sp|P00995|IPSI HUMAN PΛNCRI A I IC SLCRE TORY TRYPSIN INHIBI I OR PRI CURSOR (T UMOR-ASSOC IA 11 D TRY PSI 293 831255 Ml N 64 (Homo sapiens] -dhj||D38255J gι|95!279 198 431 85 92 IIISDU60 CAB I [Homo sapiens] >pιr|I38027|138027 MI N 64 protein - human >sp|QI4849|Q14849 MLN64 MRNA I ength = 445 294 831327 rcg gene homologue (Homo sapιens| gι|487726 80 601 90 90 IIPΛSG5I gnl|PID|dl0046IO legeneialing piotein I beta lllomo sapιens| >gnl|PID|dl () 04643 regenerating protein I beta (Homo sapiens >pιr|S34591|RGH IB regenerating islet lectm I -beta precursor - human >sp|P48304|Ll I BJ IUMΛN LI 11 IOS I 295 831493 DARPP-32=D0PAM1NE AND CΛMP- sp|G545790|G545790 256 97 97 HISDI3I REGU1 ATI D PHOSPHOPROI 1 IN >gι| 1244402 DΛRPP-32 |Mus musculus| [SUB 1-27} I ength = 204 296 831500 endothehn 3 precursor [i lomo sapιens| gι|l82249 364 87 87 I1WMEM06 >pιr|A34378|A34378 endothehn 3 precursor - human >sp|P 14138|E T3_l IUMΛN ENDOπiELIN-3 PRECURSOR (ET-3) Length = 238 297 831501 2 118 IIISB094 298 831502 339 527 IIISCII48 299 831508 160 354 II RMN2I 300 831509 450 752 HISCC33 301 831520 242 424 IIIIF11.36 302 831547 match piotein P307I I |llomo sapιens| gnl|PID|e313869 2 766 91 92 II1Y1Λ02 I ength = 240 303 831548 glutathione transleiase I 1 [Homo s,ιpιens| gι|510905 3 257 97 97 IIIIG1 ) 055 >pιr|S44358|S44358 glutathione S- ttapslerase T heta - human >spjP3 () 7ll|Gl ' T!_lllJMAN GLU TA 11 HONE S-T RΛNSI ERASE THEIA 1 (LC25118) (CLASS-I 1111Λ) {SUB 2-240} Length = 240 304 831558 3 410 HIIGCU20 305 831847 48 953 HTPEI64 306 831893 (AT0I2023) integπn cytoplasmic domain gι|2305238 167 589 78 78 1IPJDB54 associated protein, leap- 1 a [Homo sapιens| >sp|OI4 l3|OI4713 INTEGRIN CYIOPLΛSM1C DOMAIN ΛSSOCIΛ 11 I) PRO I LIN I ength = 200 307 831903 881 1045 I ID TEA 17 308 831921 (Al 013965) Zis |Raltus norvegιcus| gι|2317752 66 410 70 78 HMUΛR39 >gι|2317754 (Λl 013966) /is I Rattus noi egicusl -gι|2317756 (Λl 013967) /is [Rattus norvegicus) --sp|035986|035986 ZIS Length = 332 309 831923 (AF035527) Llir [Mus musculus] gι|3l38930 133 1041 88 93 1IDQIG93 >sp|O70273|O70273 LTS HOMOI OGOUS rAC IOR (El If ) (Fill ) l ength = 300 310 831959 672 956 HDPRY54 311 832008 cyclin-dependent ki ise 11 lomo sapiens] gι|986879 741 86 86 HDPQA36 >pιr|l68674|l68674 cyclin-dependent kinase - human (Iragment) >gι|425l43 cyclin- dependent kinase inhibitor (Homo sapiciιs| {SUB 18-181} I ength = 181 312 832107 2 244 IIJΛCI80 313 832110 T-cell receptor alpha enhancer-binding pιr|Λ39625|Λ39625 2 844 91 91 HCl I R04 protein long torm - human I ength = 399 314 832146 C TP synthetase homolog |Mus musculu | gι| 1654186 3 587 69 77 HI 80)09 -sp|l > 70303|P70303 C I P SYN I III IΛSI HOMOLOG (C I PSH) Length = 586 315 832189 251 520 HISER65 316 832295 thymopoietm ^ ilpha 11 lomo sapiens | gι|508725 3 617 97 97 HCUDS28 >pιr|A55741|Λ5574l thymopoietm alpha precursor - human 1 ength = 694 317 832334 eoatomer [Bos taurus) . pιι|Λ49465|Λ49465 gι|441486 299 98 98 IIBICG79 eoatomer /eta chain - bovine >sp|P35604|COPZ_BOVIN COΛIOMI R ZLIASUBUNII (Zl 1Λ-COΛI PRO 11 IN) (/l IA-COP) I ength = 177 318 832339 (Ar049l()5) centrosomal Nek2-assυcιaled gι|2984657 634 50 1117 TI 56 protein 1 [Homo sapiens] >sp|O60588|O60588 CEN TROSOMAL NFK2-ΛSSOCIΛ I TD PRO 11 IN I I ength = 2442 319 832393 platelct-cndothehal telraspan antigen 3 gι|54l613 49 591 81 IIWI 111)38 [Homo sapiens] >sp|P48509|CI51_IIUMΛN PLAIELFT-LNDOΓHΠ IΛI TEFRASPAN ANTIGEN 3 (PL IA-3) (GP27) (MEMBRANE GI YCOPROII IN SIΛ-1)(CDI51 ΛNIIGFN) Length = 253 320 832415 PC4[Honιosapιens|>gι|6l9161 PC4 pl5 gι|53l395 80 475 87 87 IK DM1.85 11 lomo sapiensl >pιr|A54670|A54670 RNA polymerase II colactorplϊ - human >sp|P53999|P 15_1 It IMAN AC "TVA TED RNA POLYMERASI II TRANSCRIPT IONΛ1 COACI1VAIOR PI5(PC4)(PI4) {SUB 2-127} Length = 127 321 832422 1112 HΛMGD22 322 832448 (AF006751 ) ES/ 130 [I lomo sapiens] gι|3299885 777 65 65 HA1BU71 >sp|O75300|O75300ES/130 Length = 977 323 832532 protein seπne/threonine kinase |1 lomo gι|3l22l 532 100 100 11MKD/23 sapiensl >pιr|Λ48082|A48082 mitogen- aclivated protein kinase p44-erk 1 - human Length = 379 324 832621 462 1I2CBH76 325 832622 (ΛF056209) PΛM COOII-termmal gι|3560563 78 569 97 97 II2CΛΛ56 intcractor protein I 11 lomo sapιens| •gι|3560563 (Λl 056209) PΛM COOll- lerminal intei actor protein 111 lomo sapiens] ->sp|O75901 IO75901 PAM C OOI I- TERMINΛ1 INTERACTORPROII IN I Length = 435 326 835327 140 355 111 PCS09 327 835695 (AF031174) Ig-hke membrane protein gι|3766l36 2 997 75 IIDPIQ22 [Homo sapiensj Length = 1215 328 835857 (AC004549) IXBPI5I [Homo sapiens] gι|3046307 1 1728 100 100 IIL BZ28 >sp|O60398|O60398 T XBP15I Length ■■ 563 329 836183 46 978 IIWLGVI4 330 836190 1586 1813 IILIΛV24 331 836196 2 319 HOLC 156 332 836253 1 363 HNSAC43 333 836372 Similar to sullatase |Caenorhabdιlιs elegans] gill 125842 794 1177 58 HOELR57 >sp|Q2l376|Q2l376 SIMILAR TO SUI.FΛIΛSE NCBIGI 1125842 I ength = 709 334 837077 similar to BPT1/KUNI TZ inhibitor domain gnl|PID|el345870 572 48 HEOMV66 335 837445 (AF046888) proliferation inducing ligand gι|3650492 801 1580 90 90 HDQIII76 APRIL [Homo sapiens) >sp|075888|()75888 PROl II LRΛTION INDUCING I IGAND APRIL I ength = 250 336 837620 (ΛF002210) copper chaperone foi gι|2431868 930 99 99 HILDR72 superoxide dismutase [Homo sapιens| >sp|014618)014618 COPPER CHAPERONE FOR SUPEROXIDE DISMUTASE Length = 274 337 837981 beta-l 6-N-acel Iglucosamm ltianslerase gι|l8344l 346 1740 58 74 HIPBB03 [Homo sapiens) >gι|886273 beta-l 6-N- acclylglucosamιnvltr,ιnsleιase 11 lomo sapiens] >pιr|A46293|Λ46293 beta-l 3- galactosy 1-O-gly cosy l-gly coprotein beta- 1 6-N-ιicelylgIucosamιnyltranslcιase (I ( 24 I 102)- human sp| 338 837995 aminopeptidase N precursor (LC 34112) gι| 178536 301 3231 94 94 HDPΛY72 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A30325|A30325 membrane alany I aminopeptidase (EC 34 II 2) precursor - human 1 ength = 967 339 838001 lysyl hydroxylase isoloπr 2 [Homo sapiens] gι|2l38314 2553 93 93 HOHAUI4 -sp|O00469|Pl 02JIUMΛN PROC 01 IΛGI N-l YSINI 2- OλOGLU I ARA I L 5-D10XYGLNASL 2 PRI CURSOR (FC I 14114) (LYSYL HYDROXYLASE 2) (I H2) I ength = 737 340 838237 alpha-N-acetylgalactosammidc alpha-26- gι|453197 416 58 74 IIWM1G72 sialyltranslerase |Gallus gallus] >pιr|Λ49880|A49880 alpha-N- acclylgalactosamimde alpha-26- sialyllranslerasc (I C 24993) - chicken >sp|Q92183|CAG3_CIIIC AlPIIA-N- ΛCITYIGΛIΛCTOSΛMINIDEΛI PIIΛ- 26-SIΛI Yl IRΛNSII RΛSl 341 838700 2 1756 I1DIGB8I 342 838805 (Λl 032653) similar to Ubiquitin- gnl|PID|c 1350657 3 485 61 78 HAMGK18 con|ugalιng enzy mes 343 839096 (ΛF027302) I NI -alpha stimulated ABC gι|2522534 666 1559 84 84 1IDPJC76 protein (Homo sapιens| >sp|0148971,014897 TNF-Al PI IA S 1 IMULA I ED ΛBC PRO 11 IN I ength = 807 344 839185 similar to A I P-bindmg transport protein gι|500734 1323 2165 49 69 HDPI R49 lamily (ABC tr<insporters) [Caenorhabditis elegans] >sp|Q20306|Q20306 GCN20 PRO 1 EIN HOMOLOG Length = 712 345 839588 710 904 V35 346 839589 synthetic preproinsuhn [artificial sequenee| gι|208668 498 80 80 IICCMB04 >gι|58103 reading frame proinsulin |unιdentιfied| {SUB 28-114} >gι|208664 insulin B chain |artιl ' ιeιal sequence] {SUB 28-58} >gι|208660 insulin beta chain (aitillcialsequencel {SUB 29-58} -gι|9299l5 insulin I 347 839733 RGL2 [Homo sapιens| >sp|0152l l|0152l I gnl|PII)|e 1186796 1098 2681 90 90 HYACT02 RGL2 >gnl|PID|dl037179(ΛBOI2295) GDS-reLited protein [Homo sapιens| [SUB 656-777} Length = 777 348 839874 mitochondnal NΛD(P)+ -dependent malic gι|l87300 102 1058 96 97 IIDPP04I enzyme [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A39503|A39503 malate dehydiogenase (NAD+) (EC 111-) precursor mitochondnal - human >sp|P23368|MAOM_IIUMΛN MAI All OXIDORLDUC TASL |NΛD|, MIΓOCΠONDRIΛI PRI CURSOR Π C I I I I0)(MΛ1 IC I N/YM 349 840017 I KBP65 binding protein [Mus musmlus| gι|894l62 1303 86 92 ML 11.167 >pιr|I49669|l49669 TKBP65 binding protein - mouse >sp|Q6l576|Q61576 FK506 BINDING PROT EIN 6 (65 KDA) (T KBP65 BINDING PROTEIN) I ength = 581 350 840124 937 1311 IINIIGX94 351 840222 P24 protein |Mus musculus] gnl|PID|dlOI9688 28 747 35 47 IIISES36 >sp|P97799|P97799 VESICULAR MEMBRAIN PROT EIN P24 (P24 PROTEIN) Length = 196 352 840617 (Λl 033861) type III adenylyl cyclase (Homo gι|4l04226 35 2599 91 IIIPDMI sapiens] >sp|G4104226|G4H>42261 \ IT ill ADINYIYI CYCLΛSL >gnl|PID| 1026367 (ΛBOI 1083) KIΛΛ05I I protein [Homo sapiens! {SUB 212-1144} >sp|G299652|G299652 TYPE III ADINYLYLCYC1 ASE IYPLIIIΛC {EC 4611} {SUB 353 840641 RGS10 protein - human Length = 173 pιr|S718l2|S7l812 622 100 100 Hill IJ24 354 840792 signia 3Λ protein (1 lomo sapiens] gnl|PID|c256 l2 699 100 100 I IOI 1119 >gι| 1923270 P-3 complex sιgma3Λ subunit [Homo sapιens| >gnl|PID|dl010444 clathπn coat assembly protein-like (Homo sapiens] >gι|3462900 (Λl 084575) adaptor protein complex-3 sιgma3A subunit isotorm [Mus musculusl >gι| 192327 355 840915 Tob [Homo sapιens| Length = 345 gnl|PID|d1008002 411 1469 82 82 II2MBI94 356 841059 583 828 IIISBI50 357 841325 I AC1 gene product [Homo sapiens] gι| 1276428 6 989 95 95 II1LB152 >pιr|GOI252|GOI252 small GTP binding protein homologous to SLC4 - human >sp| I2830|Q12830ll IΛI Λl /-50- Rl ΛC TIVL CI ONL 1 (I AC I) Length = 810 358 841713 3 872 πWHGV,75 359 842324 487 837 HI WBQ3I 360 842386 201 671 1ICIDΛ62 361 842454 mitochondnal A I Pase inhibitor [Rattus gι|5l7226 231 76 88 IIVΛMF27 noryegιcιιs[>gnl|PID|dl002924AIPase inhibitor piotein precursor [Rattus sp | >pιι|IS0738|JS()738 ΛlPase mhibiloi protein precursor, mitochondnal - tat >sp|Q03344|IA TP_RAT A TPASI INHIBITOR. MI I OCHONDR1AI PRECURSOR 362 842768 179 400 HRΛI.QI5 363 842999 2 1354 IINISM88 364 843830 dl434PI 3|llom sapiens|-gi||59256i gι.l|PI!)|e 1249592 3 635 93 93 HMSPB89 Dl protein p72 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S72367|S72367 Λ I P-dependenl RN \ hehcase - human sp|09284l|P72_IIUMΛN PROBΛBLI RNΛ-DI PI NDI NI HEL1CΛSL P72 (DEAD-BOX PRO 11 IN P72) Length = 650 365 844723 66 1ILYB068 366 844868 (AF092557) LIM domain only 7 [Homo gι|4028544 1179 56 74 HHPBC57 sapιens| >sp|G4028544|G4028544 LIM DOMAIN ONI Y 7 (I RΛGMI NI ) I ength = 120 367 845258 MRΛS2 gene product [Rhi omucoi gι|553070 131 925 30 45 IIKAKW86 racemosus] Length = 198 368 845373 183 1847 HNTLF6I 369 845412 (ΛB003I84) LSI R [Homo sapiens) db|||ΛB003184_l 303 1178 87 87 HCRNPI5 >sp|014498|014498 ISLR PRECURSOR Length = 428 370 H1SED43R 29 283 HISED43 371 1IOSEQ76R 165 308 HOSLQ76 372 IIISDS43R 1 141 IIISDS43 173 IIPIDY28R 5) 116 IIPIDY28 374 IIIPBW7IR 29 94 IIIPBW7I 375 IIC0ΛGI R 18 173 I1CQΛGI4 376 IIVΛNP48R 14 271 IIVΛNP48 377 1 IGBG086R (ΛB005546) porcine serum amy loid P gnl|PID|dl()2232l 2 139 66 76 1IGBG086 component (SAP) |Sus scrota] >sp|OI9()63|019063 PORCINE SriUJM AMYLOID P COMPONEN Y (SAP) PRECURSOR (SAP) Length = 224 378 1IISDW59R (AB012223) 0RF2 [Cams lamiliaπs] gnl|PID|dl02618l 261 647 72 HISDW59 >sp|062658|062658LlNE-l ELEMENT ORF2 Length = 1275 379 I IDB \MI6R (Λl 000381 ) non-luiictional lol te binding gι|2565l96 189 416 88 88 IIDBΛMI6 protein I Homo sapiens] >sp|OI4597|OI4597 NON-1 UNCTIONΛl I OLA 11. BINDING PRO I LIN Length = 254 380 I1IPGD92R (Λl 016692) small intestinal mucm MUC3 gι|2454615 308 46 46 HIPGD92 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|PC4395|PC4395 mucm 3 - human (fragment) >sp|OI4760|OI4760 SMALL INTESTINAL MUCIN MUC3 (FRAGMENT) I ength = 648 381 IIMΠ B69 (Λl 018432) dll I Pase (Homo sapιens| gι|244358l 245 100 100 B69 ^gι|l 144332 deoxy undine nuelc'otidohydrolase [Homo sapιens| >gι|l42l8l8 deoxyuπdine tπphosphiitase [Homo sapiens] >pιr|G02777|G02777 dU I P pyrophosphatase (EC 36123) - human >gι|292877 dll 1 P nueleotidohydrolase [Homo sa 382 IIPDFII50R (Λr026689) prostate-specific gι|3523H3 166 66 72 HPDHI50 transglutaminase [Homo sapiens) >sp|O75320|O75320 PROS I AT L- SPLCII IC TRANSGL U TAMINASE (I RAGMEN T) length = 51 383 IIMTMΛ16R (Λl 042081) SII3 domain binding glulanue gι|3337420 299 too 100 HMIMΛI6 acid-πch-like protein [Homo sapiens) >sp|075368|075368 SI 13 DOMAIN BINDING GLUTAMIC ΛCID-RICH-LIKE PROTI IN lencth= 114 381 111 NΛP71 (Λl 080484) thy loglobuhn 11 lomo sapιens| gι|34l505l 199 95 95 INΛP7I ^sp|G34|5()51|G34l5051 IIIYKOCil 01)1)1 INflRΛGMI NI) I ength = 680 385 IIIPGL88R (Λl 081673) bile salt-dependent lipase gι|3421403 434 97 98 HTPGL88 oncoletal isolorm [Homo sapιens| >sp|0756l2|075612 Bit L SALT- DEPENDENT LIPASE ONCOI I I ΛL ISOrORM (FRAGMENT) Length = 612 386 HMCIA86R actin [Absidia glauca] >pιr|S03109|S03109 gι|578097 250 88 100 IIMCTΛ86 actin - pin mould (Absidia glauca) (lragment)>sp|PI0982|ΛC 11 ΛBSGL AC I IN I (TRAGMFNI) (Absidia glaucal {SUB 3-140} Length = 140 387 1 IΛPOC60R alpha-catenin II lomo sapιens| >gι|4092761 gnl|PID|d 1003485 505 77 80 HΛPOC60 (AF102803) alphaE-catenin [Homo sapιens| >pιr|IN0607|)N0607 alpha-catenin - human >sp|P35221|CINIJlUMΛNΛI PHΛ-I CA TENIN (CADHERIN-ASSOCIA I IT) PROI EIN) (ALPHA E-CΛ I ENIN) I ength = 906 388 I ID TFE89R antibody, heavy chain variable regm to HIV I gι|732750 3 329 75 78 HD 111.89 gp 120 f I lomo sapiens] I ength = 127 389 IIΛJB038R B,,t2 [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S37671|S37671 gι|29375 1 435 94 94 HAIB038 bat2 protein - human Length = 1870 390 IICCMA90R BII E SALT -DLPENDEN I LIPASE sp|Q16398|Q16398 3 329 75 75 IICCMΛ90 Length = 720 391 111 LIIII34R carnitine O-acety ltranslerase (EC 23 I 7) pιr|Λ55720|Λ55720 3 602 97 97 ΠΓLHII34 precursor, mitochondnal - human >sp|P43155|CACP_HUMΛN CARNITINE O-AC E I YL FRΛNSITRΛSL (EC 2317) (CΛRNI I INL ΛCL TYLΛSE) (CA 1 ) (I RAGMEN I) {SUB 3-626} Length = 626 IWIIPY22R I N3 protein [Homo sapiens) gι| 1039423 432 95 95 IIWHPY22 >gnl|PID|e283670 CLN3 protein |Homo sapiensl ->gι|294705i (Λ( 002425 )( I N3 11 lomo sapiens] gι|3337387 (AC (102544) CI N [Homo sapiensl >gι|4102729 (ΛF015593) CLN3 protein IHomo sapiens] >pιr|A572l9|A572l9 Batten disease-related prot IICWII39R coll.igen alpha I (V) chain precursor 11 lomo gnl|PID|d 1015029 407 65 65 IICWII39 sapiens] ^ sp|P20908|CA 15 IUMΛN PROCOLLΛGEN AIP1IΛ l(V) CHAIN PRLCURSOR >gι| 1020326 alpha- 1 typeV collagen |Homo sapiens] {SUB 1-36} Length = 1838 1IBBBA92R cytochrome oxid.isc subunit I |Λn.ιs gι|348683 210 58 HBBBΛ92 platy rhy nchos] >sp|P50656|COX I _ΛNΛ PI CYTOCHROME C OXIDASF POLYPEPTIDE I (LC 1931) (I RAGMEN I) Length = 102 11 rLHP03R dipeptidase precursor [Homo sapiens] gnl|PID|dl00293l 92 92 HIT. IIP03 Length = 411 I IC C MΛ63R elastase III B [I lomo sapiens] gι|182035 252 96 96 IK MΛ63 >pιι|B29934|B29934 paneiealic elastase (I C 342136) 1MB precursor- human >sp|P08861|EL3B_IIUMAN ELAS1ΛSF III!) PRECURSOR (EC 342170) (PROTLASLE) Length = 270 397 IIF8FZ78R endosomal protein [Homo sapiens] gι|475934 352 98 100 HI8LZ78 >pιr|S44243|S44243 endosomal protein - human sp| 150751 15075 [ NDOSOM \l PRO 11 IN len lh- 1411 398 1IGI Λ029R erythroid DN \-bιndιng protein 11 lomo gι|l83072 186 50 54 IIGl Λ029 sapiens] ^gι|31243 Iryll transcription lactor (AA 1-413) [Homo sapiens] >pιr|A34888|A34888 transcription lactor GA I A- 1 - human >sp|P15976|GAFlJlUMAN LRYTHROID TRANSCRIP riON FACTOR (GAT A- 1 ) (ERYFI)(GΓ-1)(NF-F1) Length 399 IIΛ1SD82R fibrinogen gamma-prime chain 11 lomo gι| 182440 399 98 100 IIΛI SD82 sapiens] >sp|P04469|l 1BH_I1UMΛN I IBRINOGI N GAMMΛ-B C IIΛIN PRI CURSOR (I IBRINOGI N GAMMA ) ' gι|l82443 gamma fibrinogen type I) (ΛΛ at 202) [Homo sapiens] {SUB 285-453} I ength = 453 400 H2IAS44R gamma subunit ol CCT chaperomn | Homo gι|67l527 75 560 99 99 H2LΛS44 sapiens] >pιr|S6l529|A38983 TCPI ring complex protein TRιC5 - human I ength = 544 401 IIIXPA42R G I P-binding protein (rab7) [Cams gι| 164058 166 432 98 100 IIIXPΛ42 tamihansl >pιr|B30 13|B30413 G I P- binding protein rab7 - dog Length = 207 402 IIBWAH57R hCRMP-2 (Homo sapιens| gι| 1244400 121 92 94 IIBWΛH57 >gnl|PID|dl()l 1853 dihydropyπmidm.isc related proleιn-2 [Homo sapiens] >gι|2967519 N2Λ3 [Homo sapιens| >pιι |JC5317| IC5317 dihydropy nmidinase- related protein 2 - human >sp|QI6555|DPY2_IIUMΛN DIIIYDROPYRIMIDINΛSLRI 1 Λ II PROILlN-2(DRP 403 IIAIILI39R HSI la [Homo sapiens] >pιr|S23509|S23509 gι|32470 370 84 84 IIΛHI J39 dnaJ protein homolog - human I ength = 277 404 IIOEMQ04R hypoxia-inducible lactor 1 alpha [Homo gι|88l346 299 100 100 H LMQ04 sapiens] >gι|l 144013 ARNT interacting protein ]Homo sapiens] >pιr|I38972|l38972 hypoxia-inducible lactor I alpha - human >sp|QI6665|HirAJIUMΛN HYPOXIΛ- INDUCIBLEΓΛCΓOR I ALPHA OIII-I AL PHA) (ARNT IN I LRAC I ING PRO I EIN) 405 IIΛPBR18R Ig kappa L-cham variable region fllomo gι|1905938 29 325 67 70 11APBRI8 sapiensl Lengdi = 122 406 IIOENU56R 288 IIOINU56 407 IIΛGGB37R L-iirgmine glycine amidinotransleiase gι|79l049 238 83 83 IIAGGB37 [ I lomo sapiens] >pιr|S54161 |S54161 L- arginme— glycine amidinolranslerase - human Length = 391 408 HCCMC02R lipase related protein 2 (Homo sapiens | gι|l87232 357 61 64 IICCMC02 >pιr|B43357|B43357 pancreatic hpase- related protein 2 - human >sp|P54317|LIP2_HUMAN PΛNCRLAIIC L IPASE RELA TED PRO I EIN 2 PRECURSOR (EC 31 I 3) Length = 469 409 IIΛHD057R located at OA TL I [Homo sapiens] gι|95041l 536 100 100 IIΛIID057 >sp|QI4827|Q14827 DNA SEGMENI. JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVΓRSITY I (MG2I)(FRAGM1NT) Length= 166 410 IIOI MK29R lysyl oxιd.ιse-2 |Mus musculus| gι|2636697 116 97 97 HOLMK29 >sp|P97873|P97873 LYSYL OXIDASL LIKL (LYSYL OXIDASE-2) (LYSYL OXIDASE-LIKE PROT EIN) (I RAGMEN I) Lenglh = 110 411 IIRADI65R ORF protein, C-terminal (aa 125-319. gι|376IO 357 98 98 IIRADJ65 I96aa) (Homo sapiens] Length = 196 412 II TPCT95R pancreatic elastase IIB zymogen [Homo gι|l82060 340 98 98 I ITPC 195 sapiens] >pιr|C26823|C26823 pancreatic elastase II (EC 342171) B precursor - human >sp|P08218|EL2BJIUMAN ELAS EASE 2B PRECURSOR (EC 342171) Length = 269 413 111,01 Y56R pancreatitis associated protein 11 lomo gι|l8960l 281 493 94 94 IIL IY56 sapiens] Lenglh = 174 414 IICCMD33R phospholipase |llomo sapiens] >gι|387025 gι|l9()OI3 109 345 77 77 IICCMD33 phospholipase [Homo sapiensl >gι|2769697 (AC003982) Phosphatidylcholine 2- acylh drolase [Homo sapιens| >pιr|C25793|PSIIU phospholipase Λ2 (F.C 3114) precursor, pancreatic - human >sp|P04054|PA2l HUMAN PHOSPHOLIPASE 415 I IDPΛQ04R PQ-πch protein | Homo sapιens| gι|929660 125 85 85 IIDPΛ 04 >pιr|S58222|S58222 PQ-rich protein - human >sp|Q 15184|Q 15184 PQ-RICI I PROTEIN Length = 400 416 IICF4I96R PRSMI [Homo sapιens| gι| 1354931 194 89 89 IK 1.4196 • pιr|IC4963|IC4963 melallopioteiiuse I (F.C 3424 -) - hιιman>sp| I5779|QI5779 PRSMI Lenmh = 3l8 417 II1PGL86R putative surface glycoprotein [Homo gnl|PID|el8811l 32 322 85 85 HTPGL86 sapiens] >sp|P53801|C2l 1J1UMΛN PUTATIVE SURFACE GLYCOPRO I EIN C210RF1 PRECURSOR (C2IORF3) Length = 180 418 HLQGB61R reg gene homologue [Homo sapiens] gι|487726 21 182 92 92 HIQGD6I >gnl|PID|dl()04610 regenerating protein I beta [Homo sapιens| -gnl|PID|d 1004643 regenerating protein I beta 11 lomo s.ιpιens| >pιr|S3459l|RGIIUIB regenerating islet leclm I -beta precursor - human >sp|P48304|LI I l)_HUMΛN I 111 IOS I 419 1IWDAK95R RNA sphcing-related protein [Rattus gnl|PID|d 1024790 141 362 82 88 HWDΛK95 norvegicusl >sp|054729|054729 BRAIN Length = 712 420 IIE9DG72R selenium-binding protein [Homo sapιens| gι| 1374792 414 95 96 HL9DG72 >pιr|GOI872|GOI872seIenιum-bιndιng protein - human >sp| I3228|QI3228 SI 1 I NIUM-BINDING PRO I EIN I ength = 472 421 1IDPOY89R Similar to sulLHase [Caenorlwbditis elegans| gι| 1125842 132 452 47 71 HDPOY89 >sp|Q2l376|Q2l376 SIMILAR TO SULFATASE NCBI GI 1125842 I ength = 709 422 IIΛHEJI3R sperm membrane protein [Rattus norvegιcus| gι|207694 366 58 60 IIΛIII JI3 >pιr|A35981|A3598l sperm membrane protein - rat I ength =191 423 I10EMRI6R tyrosine phosphatae precursor [Homo gι|32067 80 76 84 HOFMR16 sapiens] >sp|QI4513|Q14513 TYROSINE PHOSPHATASE PRECURSOR (EC 3 I 348) Length = 793 424 HCFCM83R ubiquitin— protein hgase El homolog • pιr|Λ48l95|A48l95 168 269 94 94 I1CFCM83 human Length = 1058 425 II6BSB07R 105 II6BSB07 IIΛGCC01R 1 219 IIΛGCCOI IIΛQΛM88R 49 372 HΛQΛM88 IIΛUBA62R 3 233 I1ΛUBA62 IIBCMΛ07R 3 164 HBCMΛ07 I1BGNU45R 132 293 HBGNU45 IIBJHW09R 142 309 I1BJHW09 IIBMBJ92R 3 173 IIBMBJ92 IICGBC37R 1 219 HCGBC37 IICROI22R 105 236 IICROI22 HDTLK21R 184 351 IIDTLK2I HDTLXIIR 234 518 HDTLXIl HE2CM25R 27 470 1II.2CM25 IIE9F119R 1 183 IIE9FH9 HEGΛD29R 234 344 1IEGAD29 HFKHCIOR 118 267 HFKHCIO 1IIPΛE25R 174 332 III PΛE25 IIGBHA95R 3 161 HGBIIΛ95 IIIIBEA82R 139 387 IIHBEΛ82 H1SCX64R 1 312 IIISCX64 IILCΛB30R 1 72 ITLCΛB30 IILDOW24R 147 296 HEDOW24 HLLBΛ89R 56 220 IILLBΛ89 I1L DE48R 299 523 IILQDE48 IINED154R 1 84 ITNEDI54 ■ IINIICiQ70R 1 423 I INI IG070 II0SMVI9R 151 291 II0SMVI9 ITTPG.I4IR 89 340 HTPG.I4I IITTIIJIIR 1 90 HTTHJII IIULEB88R 2 376 HULEB88 HUSJN92R 284 460 IIUS.IN92 IIWΛEJ52R 1 285 HWAEJ52 IIWLMS12R 136 321 HWI.MSI2 458 HWLWG58R I 108 IIWLWG58 459 HAIDL46R X 104 [Homo sapιens| ->pιr|154378|I54378 gι|498013 3 224 55 57 IIΛIDI 46 gene X 104 protein - human >sp|Q15883|QI5883 XI 04 >gι|3462868 (ΛI 083892) tight itinclion protein ZO-2 isol rm A |IIomo sapiens) {SUB 1-166} >gι|3462870 (AF083893) light |iιnctιon protein ZO-2 isolorm C [Homo sapιens| {S The first column of Table 1 shows the "SEQ ID NO:" for each of the 459 pancreatic cancer antigen polynucleotide sequences of the invention. The second column in Table 1, provides a unique "Sequence/Contig ID" identification for each pancreas and/or pancreatic cancer associated sequence. The third column in Table 1, "Gene Name." provides a putative identification of the gene based on the sequence similarity of its translation product to an amino acid sequence found in a publicly accessible gene database, such as GenBank (NCBI). The great majority of the cDNA sequences reported in Table 1 are unrelated to any sequences previously described in the literature. The fourth column, in Table 1 , "Overlap," provides the database accession no. for the database sequence having similarity. The fifth and sixth columns in Table 1 provide the location (nucleotide position nos. within the contig), "Start" and "End", in the polynucleotide sequence "SEQ ID NO:X" that delineate the preferred ORF shown in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO:Y. In one embodiment, the invention provides a protein comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a polypeptide encoded by the portion of SEQ ID NO:X delineated by the nucleotide position nos. "Start" and "End". Also provided are polynucleotides encoding such proteins and the complementary strand thereto. The seventh and eighth columns provide the "% Identity" (percent identity) and "% Similarity" (percent similarity) observed between the aligned sequence segments of the translation product of SEQ ID NO:X and the database sequence. The ninth column of Table 1 provides a unique "Clone ID" for a clone related to each contig sequence. This clone ID references the cDNA clone which contains at least the 5' most sequence of the assembled contig and at least a portion of SEQ ID NO:X was determined by directly sequencing the referenced clone. The reference clone may have more sequence than described in the sequence listing or the clone may have less. In the vast majority of cases, however, the clone is believed to encode a full-length polypeptide. In the case where a clone is not full-length, a full-length cDNA can be obtained by methods described elsewhere herein. Table 3 indicates public ESTs, of which at least one, two, three, four, five, ten, or more of any one or more of these public ESTs are optionally excluded from the invention. SEQ ID NO:X (where X may be any of the polynucleotide sequences disclosed in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO: 1 through SEQ ID NO:459) and the translated SEQ ID NO: Y (where Y may be any of the polypeptide sequences disclosed in the sequence listing as SEQ ID NO:460 through SEQ ID NO:918) are sufficiently accurate and otherwise suitable for a variety of uses well known in the art and decribed further below. For instance. SEQ ID NO:X has uses including, but not limited to, in designing nucleic acid hybridization probes that will detect nucleic acid sequences contained in SEQ ID NO:X or the related cDNA clone contained in a library deposited with the ATCC. These probes will also hybridize to nucleic acid molecules in biological samples, thereby enabling immediate applications in chromosome mapping, linkage analysis, tissue identification and/or typing, and a variety of forensic and diagnostic methods of the invention. Similarly, polypeptides identified from SEQ ID NO:Y have uses that include, but are not limited to, generating antibodies which bind specifically to the pancreatic cancer antigen polypeptides, or fragments thereof, and/or to the pancreatic cancer antigen polypeptides encoded by the cDNA clones identified in Table 1. Nevertheless. DNA sequences generated by sequencing reactions can contain sequencing errors. The errors exist as misidentified nucleotides, or as insertions or deletions of nucleotides in the generated DNA sequence. The erroneously inserted or deleted nucleotides cause frame shifts in the reading frames of the predicted amino acid sequence. In these cases, the predicted amino acid sequence diverges from the actual amino acid sequence, even though the generated DNA sequence may be greater than 99.9% identical to the actual DNA sequence (for example, one base insertion or deletion in an open reading frame of over 1000 bases). Accordingly, for those applications requiring precision in the nucleotide sequence or the amino acid sequence, the present invention provides not only the generated nucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ID NO:X, the predicted translated amino acid sequence identified as SEQ ID NO:Y, but also a sample of plasmid DNA containing the related cDNA clone (deposited with the ATCC, as set forth in Table 1). The nucleotide sequence of each deposited clone can readily be determined by sequencing the deposited clone in accordance with known methods. Further, techniques known in the art can be used to verify the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO:X. The predicted amino acid sequence can then be verified from such deposits. Moreover, the amino acid sequence of the protein encoded by a particular clone can also be directly determined by peptide sequencing or by expressing the protein in a suitable host cell containing the deposited human cDNA, collecting the protein, and determining its sequence. The present invention also relates to vectors or plasmids which include such DNA sequences, as well as the use of the DNA sequences. The material deposited with the ATCC on: Table 2 each is a mixture of cDNA clones derived from a variety of human tissue and cloned in either a plasmid vector or a phage vector, as shown in Table 5. These deposits are referred to as "the deposits" herein. The tissues from which the clones were derived are listed in Table 5, and the vector in which the cDNA is contained is also indicated in Table 5. The deposited material includes the cDNA clones which were partially sequenced and are related to the SEQ ID NO:X described in Table 1 (column 9). Thus, a clone which is isolatable from the ATCC Deposits by use of a sequence listed as SEQ ID NO:X may include the entire coding region of a human gene or in other cases such clone may include a substantial portion of the coding region of a human gene. Although the sequence listing lists only a portion of the DNA sequence in a clone included in the ATCC Deposits, it is well within the ability of one skilled in the art to complete the sequence of the DNA included in a clone isolatable from the ATCC Deposits by use of a sequence (or portion thereof) listed in Table 1 by procedures hereinafter further described, and others apparent to those skilled in the art. Also provided in Table 5 is the name of the vector which contains the cDNA clone. Each vector is routinely used in the art. The following additional information is provided for convenience. Vectors Lambda Zap (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128,256 and 5,286.636), Uni-Zap XR (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128, 256 and 5,286.636), Zap Express (U.S. Patent Nos. 5, 128,256 and 5.286,636). pBluescript (pBS) (Short, J. M. et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 76:7583-7600 (1988); Alting-Mees, M. A. and Short. J. M.. Nucleic Acids Res. 17:9494 (1989)) and pBK (Alting- Mees. M. A. et al.. Strategies 5:58-61 ( 1992)) are commercially available from Stratagene Cloning Systems. Inc.. 1 101 1 N. Torrey Pines Road. La Jolla, CA, 92037. pBS contains an ampicillin resistance gene and pBK contains a neomycin resistance gene. Phagemid pBS may be excised from the Lambda Zap and Uni-Zap XR vectors, and phagemid pBK may be excised from the Zap Express vector. Both phagemids may be transformed into E. coli strain XL- 1 Blue, also available from Stratagene. Vectors pSportl , pCMVSport 1.0, pCMVSport 2.0 and pCMVSport 3.0, were obtained from Life Technologies. Inc., P. O. Box 6009, Gaithersburg, MD 20897. All Sport vectors contain an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E. coli strain DH10B, also available from Life Technologies. See, for instance. Gruber, C. E., et al., Focus 75:59 ( 1993). Vector lafmid BA (Bento Soares, Columbia University, New York, NY) contains an ampicillin resistance gene and can be transformed into E. coli strain XL- 1 Blue. Vector pCR*2.1, which is available from Invitrogen, 1600 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, CA 92008, contains an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E. coli strain DH10B, available from Life Technologies. See, for instance, Clark, J. M., Nue. Acids Res. 76:9677-9686 (1988) and Mead, D. et al, Bio/Technology 9: (1991). The present invention also relates to the genes corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X, SEQ ID NO:Y, and/or the cDNA contained in a deposited cDNA clone. The corresponding gene can be isolated in accordance with known methods using the sequence information disclosed herein. Such methods include, but are not limited to, preparing probes or primers from the disclosed sequence and identifying or amplifying the corresponding gene from appropriate sources of genomic material. Also provided in the present invention are allelic variants, orthologs, and/or species homologs. Procedures known in the art can be used to obtain full-length genes, allelic variants, splice variants, full-length coding portions, orthologs, and/or species homologs of genes corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X, SEQ ID NO:Y, and/or the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone in the deposit, using information from the sequences disclosed herein or the clones deposited with the ATCC. For example, allelic variants and/or species homologs may be isolated and identified by making suitable probes or primers from the sequences provided herein and screening a suitable nucleic acid source for allelic variants and/or the desired homologue. The present invention provides a polynucleotide comprising, or alternatively consisting of. the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, and/or the related cDNA clone (See, e.g., columns 1 and 9 of Table 1 ). The present invention also provides a polypeptide comprising, or alternatively, consisting of, the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library. Polynucleotides encoding a polypeptide comprising, or alternatively consisting of, the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the the dDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, are also encompassed by the invention. The present invention further encompasses a polynucleotide comprising, or alternatively consisting of, the complement of the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, and/or the complement of the coding strand of the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library. Many polynucleotide sequences, such as EST sequences, are publicly available and accessible through sequence databases and may have been publicly available prior to conception of the present invention. Preferably, such related polynucleotides are specifically excluded from the scope of the present invention. To list every related sequence would unduly burden the disclosure of this application. Accordingly, for each "Contig Id" listed in the first column of Table 3, preferably excluded are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described in the second column of Table 3 by the general formula of a- b, each of which are uniquely defined for the SEQ ID NO:X corresponding to that Contig Id in Table 1. Additionally, specific embodiments are directed to polynucleotide sequences excluding at least one, two, three, four, five, ten. or more of the specific polynucleotide sequences referenced by the Genbank Accession No. for each Contig Id which may be included in column 3 of Table 3. In no way is this listing meant to encompass all of the sequences which may be excluded by the general formula, it is just a representative example. Table 3. Sequence/ General formula Genbank Accession No. Contig ID 456379 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R34554, AAO 18972. AA055489 one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 551 of SEQ ID NO 1 , b is an integer of 15 to 565, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 1 , and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 462108 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T79903. R46289. R73001. R73606, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide N30140, N35752 W32520, W32636, sequence described by the general formula of a-b, AA018675. AA018676. AA040600. where a is any integer between 1 to 1677 of SEQ ID AA040683. AA070495. AA070381 , NO 2. b is an integer of 15 to 1691. yvhere both a and AA083072, AA 134451. AA207060. b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues AA207086 shown in SEQ ID NO 2. and yvhere b is greater than or equal to a + 14 503446 Preterably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 466 of SEQ ID NO 3, b is an integer of 15 to 480. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 3, and yvhere b is greater than or equal to a + 14 507841 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R12126. R14285 one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 594 of SEQ ID NO 4, b is an integer of 15 to 608. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 4, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 509287 Preferably excluded trom the present invention are H01699, H94037, N30572, N57219, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide N64393, N92189. AA035664, sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, AA037022. AA045335, AA045422, where a is any integer between 1 to 682 of SEQ ID AA056367. AA 1 15587 NO 5, b is an integer of 15 to 696, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 5, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 509672 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsmg a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 278 of SEQ ID NO 6, b is an integer of 15 to 292, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 6, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 509673 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsmg a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 348 of SEQ ID O 7. b is an inteaer of 15 to 362. where both a and where a is any integer between 1 to 1328 of SEQ ID NO 50. b is an integer of 15 to 1342. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 50, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 585791 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T48321. T67802. T67948, T67040. one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide T67041, T83908, R09529, R09642, sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, T83737, R16473. R16773. R25443, where a is any integer between 1 to 1513 of SEQ ID R26269. H05343. H26912, H28048, NO 51. b is an integer of 15 to 1527. where both a H39855, R861 13. N33097, N44668, and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide N79489, W 16656. W60696, W60757, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 51 , and where b is AA081126. AA081 151, AA083763, greater than or equal to a + 14 AA 132950, AA 132862. AA 149302, AA149416, AA191527, AA194936, AA195535. AA233905, AA234134 587229 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general foπnula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 616 of SEQ ID NO 52. b is an integer of 15 to 630, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 52, and yvhere b is greater than or equal to a + 14 587246 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsmg a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 561 of SEQ ID NO 53. b is an integer of 15 to 575, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 53, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 587486 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T71052, T71 121, T72185. R21828, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide R21895, N51506. N53649, N66770, sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b. W72635, W77877, AA063260, where a is any integer between 1 to 2920 of SEQ ID AA083833. AA 165549 AA 165652, NO 54, b is an integer of 15 to 2934. where both a AA 169616, AA256205. AA256348, and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide AA464908 residues shown in SEQ ID NO 54, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 589218 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R31 1 10, N36905, N36910, N48189, one or more polynucleotides compnsmg a nucleotide ■W32216, AA069678, AA 173954 sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 561 of SEQ ID NO 55. b is an integer of 15 to 575, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 55. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 592154 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R 12094, T66653. T80236, R 15999, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide R25029, R35910. AA 194354 sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1 126 of SEQ ID NO 56. b is an integer of 15 to 1 140, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 56, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 598664 Preferably excluded from the present invention are KV40222 one or more polynucleotides compnsmg a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 241 of SEQ ID N0 57, b is an integer of 15 to 255. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 57, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 598665 Preferably excluded from the present invention are W39277. W39349, W39357, W39764, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide W39767. W40288, W40538, W44820, sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, W45264. W51936, W51937, W51918, where a is any integer between 1 to 1240 of SEQ ID W52848, W74327 NO 58, b is an integer of 15 to 1254. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 58, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 604719 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T49228, T49490. T70505. T70428. one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide T73981, T86568, T86746. T91867. sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b. R10309, R12088, T79988. T80222. where a is any integer between 1 to 1 176 of SEQ ID T84402. T85263. T85576. T85577, NO 59. b is an integer of 15 to 1 190. where both a R05432. R13226, R13278. R13833. and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide R18842, R19462, R21598. R22718, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 59, and where b is R35298, H10723. HI 1 136, H44767, greater than or equal to a + 14 R88961. R92868, R92897, R97874, H71254, H71922, H78937, H79825, H79920, H80125. H86893. H90187, N251 16. N44644, N50007, N53591, N72554, W40421, W42525, W52370, AA021224. AA037505. AA053988 612689 Preferably excluded from the present invention are H54589. AA227410 one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 566 of SEQ ID NO 60, b is an integer of 15 to 580. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 60, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 612980 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 439 of SEQ ID NO 61, b is an integer of 15 to 453, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 61 , and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 615134 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T54861, T55025, T92712. T92716, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide T92721. T92789, T92795, T92801. sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, T92938, T93055. T93331, T94009. where a is any integer between 1 to 2579 of SEQ ID R15352, R25472. R26297, R33615, NO 62, b is an integer of 15 to 2593, where both a R33726, R53088. R62766, R62767. and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide R71478, R71526, R78919, R79016, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 62, and where b is H06272, H06317, H24935, H24973, greater than or equal to a + 14 H28559, H28560, H42644, H38452, H38491. H47593, H47673. R87481. R88156. R89767, R89789. H51597. H57134, H57205, H62215, H62312, H97605, N24503, N27658. N35013, N43767, N92918, W15223, W39515, W72421. W76280. W86384, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1327 of SEQ ID NO 69, b is an integer of 15 to 1341, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 69, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 647699 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 721 of SEQ ID NO 70, b is an integer of 15 to 735, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 70, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 651706 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T71695, T71768, R08204, R08255. one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide R31484, R31485, R50842, R52642. sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, R53297, R60059, R60122, R60247, where a is any integer between 1 to 2016 of SEQ ID R60760, R62567, R62568. R70726, NO 71, b is an integer of 15 to 2030, yvhere both a R71415. H38156, R83081. R94374. and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide R94394, H53235, H60439, H60485, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 71 , and where b is H63520. H63921, H64892, H65484. greater than or equal to a + 14 H71929, H77840, H77887, H78275, H79162, H80573, H94710, H95076, H95259, H95309, N46854, N47172. N49873, N55275, N64845, N68747, N74193, N74236, N91640, W01 175, W01240. W57593, AA129298, AA129339, AA133183, AA 133370 651726 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T90733, R10849, R10850, T82138, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide T83264, R87054, R91713, H71337, sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, H71389. H72382, N55250, N74908, where a is any integer between 1 to 1861 of SEQ ID N76660, N76857, W20174, W23436, NO 72, b is an integer of 15 to 1875, yvhere both a W35129, AA045320, AA045221 and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 72. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 652160 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 846 of SEQ ID NO 73, b is an integer of 15 to 860, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 73, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 654015 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 506 of SEQ ID NO 74, b is an integer of 15 to 520, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 74, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 656339 Preferably excluded from the present invention are H70078 one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 849 of SEQ ID NO 75, b is an integer of 15 to 863. where both a and T62110. T62136. T39959, T47778. T47810. T53910, T6I195, T61199. T61883, T62738. T62764, T62888. T62914, T64121. T64186. T64232, T64242. T64305, T64309, T64585, T64595. T64652, T64692. T64696, T64738. T64751. T67432. T67593. T67633. T67703, T67725. T67736, T67739. T67753. T67755. T67820. T67837. T67845, T67848. T67862, T67864. T67886, T67895, T67907. T67922. T67929. T67971, T68044. T68055. T68070. T68106, T68107, T68170. T68176. T68201, T68220, T68245, T68267, T68291, T68301, T68329. T68355, T68367. T68401. T68516. T68607, T68688, T68716, T68772. T68781, T68842, T68914, T69001. T69031, T69081, T69122. T69139. T69145, T69180. T69197. T69206. T69230, T69243. T69283. T69293. T69317, T69358, T69368, T69400. T69420, T69445, T70452, T70475. T70494, T70495. T70498, T70975, T71039, T71105, T71313, T71351. T71356, T71429. T71457, T71518, T71692, T71698, T71712, T71715. T71781, T71784, T71800, T71851, T71857, T71870, T71875, T71895. T71908, T71914, T71916, T71959, T72031. T72037, T72042, T72063, T72065, T72079, T72098, T72099. T72152. T72177, T72178, T72199, T72223. T72300, T72304, T72360. T72394, T72407. T72418, T72451. T72456, T72464, T72510, T72517. T72525, T72793, T72803, T72821, T72826, T72827, T72956, T72957, T72978, T73010, T73052, T73096. T73203. T73225, T73250, T73258, T73265, T73317, T73333, T73382, T73400, T73410, T73425, T73427, T73445, T73493, T73495, T73512. T73566, T73666, T73729, T73768. T73787, T73819, T73868, T73873, T73920. T73931, T73952, T73962, T74033, T74101, T74111, T74269. T74273, T74372, T74380, T74407. T74474, T74485, T74541, T74598. T74615, T74645. T74658, T74673, T74677, T74756, T74765, T74843, T74854. T74860. T74863, T7491 . T71341. T71501. T77799, T90078, T82897, T95610, T95711, R02292, R02293. R06796, R95746, R98475. H48262. H48353, H58120, H58121, H61463. H67459, H70620, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 142. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 753690 Preferably excluded from the present invention are LAA262521 one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 729 of SEQ ID NO 143, b is an integer of 15 to 743 where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 143 and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 754479 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polvnucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b. where a is anv integer between 1 to 825 of SEQ ID NO 144. b is an integer of 15 to 839 here both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 144 and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 754692 Preferablv excluded from the present invention are one or more polvnucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general foπnula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 2893 of SEQ ID NO 145, b is an integer of 15 to 2907. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 145. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 756814 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T51378 T54439. T54440, T54492, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide T39385. T89470, T89560, R05534, sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, R05644, R17667, R25313. R32922, where a is any integer between 1 to 1823 of SEQ ID R33132. R33284, R35666, R35777, NO 146, b is an integer of 15 to 1837, where both a R38043. R38132, R38752. R43414, and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide R54027. R54028. R43414, R63780, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 146 and where b is R64328, R64614, R64615. R74563, greater than or equal to a + 14 R82622 H01362. H01835 H02683, H02973, H04269, H09641. H09675, H10002, H13064 H I3271. H13720, H13933, H13934, H 15328. H15712, H15993, R83464. R83844, R83845, R89553, R95676, R97388, R98691, R98917, H48613. H48805, H51096, H51682, H58872, H58873, H67326, H68534, H70197, H78192, H78193, H79697. H79698, H83266, H83267, H90205, H90308, H90862, H90962, H94344, H95788, H96137. H97956, H99868, N28553, N68855, N94629, W31434, W31994. W46421. W52814, W56529, W56780, W58375. W58549, W58662, W68203, W68204, W69142, VV69248, W81130, W81 131 , W81700, W81701, AA043367, AA043368, AA044067. AA044159, AA 122334, AA464398, AA419080, AA423821 , AA428882. AA428973. AA429196 757127 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b. residues shown in SEQ ID NO 153. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 761566 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T69288. T69363. T94926. R12359, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide R26909, R27151 , R37284. R61007, sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b. R61674, R68776, R68872, R70952. yvhere a is any integer between I to 2427 of SEQ ID R71004, H92792. H92913. N25506. NO 154. b is an integer of 15 to 2441. where both a N32325, N57420. N68341 , N94012, and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide AA01 1440. AA076005, AA076006. residues shown in SEQ ID NO 154. and where b is AA 129646. AA 129781 , AA 187676 greater than or equal to a + 14 761740 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R13217, R30963, R31018, R40301. one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide R51543. R51544, R40301, R63409, sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, H29530, H83725. H98067, N20307, where a is any integer between 1 to 2933 of SEQ ID N27578, N28375, N46832, N62348, NO 155. b is an integer of 15 to 2947, where both a N62593, N78359, N791 10, AA041460, and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide AA041513. A A046252, AA046371. residues shown m SEQ ID NO 155, and where b is AA 125849. AA 125850, AA252450, greater than or equal to a + 14 AA46I403 765215 Preferablv excluded trom the present invention are T54662, T54749 one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 652 of SEQ ID NO 156. b is an integer of 15 to 666. where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 156. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 765428 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 613 of SEQ ID NO 157. b is an integer of 15 to 627, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 157, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 766686 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 888 of SEQ ID NO 158. b is an integer of 15 to 902, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 158, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 767396 Preferably excluded from the present invention are A172282. AA220915 one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 579 of SEQ ID NO 159, b is an integer of 15 to 593, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 159, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 767501 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T48254, T48253, T61610, T61695, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide T70390, T70397. T86348. RI 1405. sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b. R05486. R05593. R19155, R6122S, where a is any integer between 1 to 1833 of SEQ ID R61229, R70142, R70143, R78897, NO 160, b is an integer of 15 to 1847, where both a R78993, R94037, N81 160, W90480. and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide W90479, W95079, AA 192429 residues shown in SEQ ID NO 160, and where b is where a is any integer between 1 to 414 of SEQ ID NO.235. b is an integer of 15 to 428. yvhere both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 235. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 799808 Preferably excluded from the present invention are W38424. W38440. W39289. W40123, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide W40239, W40423, W40223, W44752, sequence described by the general formula of a-b. W44840. W45263, W45310. VV45466, where a is any integer between 1 to 952 of SEQ ID W45478. W45484, W52088. W52399, NO:236. b is an integer of 15 to 966. where both a W52587. W52966. VV56192. W59966, and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide W60273, W60443, W60621 , W74243 residues shown in SEQ ID NO 236, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 799977 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 683 of SEQ ID NO.237. b is an integer of 15 to 697. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 237. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 800149 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general foπnula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 2253 of SEQ ID NO.238. b is an integer of 15 to 2267. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID N0 238, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 800189 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 753 of SEQ ID NO:239. b is an integer of 15 to 767. where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 239. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 800589 Preferably excluded trom the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsmg a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 1704 of SEQ ID NO 240. b is an integer of 15 to 1718. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 240. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 80081 1 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 3585 of SEQ ID NO:24I, b is an integer of 15 to 3599. where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 241. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 800857 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general foπmila of a-b. where a is anv integer between 1 to 2873 of SEQ ID 1 3 and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 249, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 812314 Preferably excluded trom the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 2103 of SEQ ID NO 250, b is an integer of 15 to 21 17, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 250, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 812443 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polvnucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b where a is any integer between 1 to 1432 of SEQ ID NO 251. b is an integer of 15 to 1446, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 251. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 812498 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general foπnula of a-b, yvhere a is any integer between 1 to 2036 of SEQ ID NO 252. b is an integer of 15 to 2050, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 252, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 812504 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 2515 of SEQ ID NO 253. b is an integer of 15 to 2529, where both a and b correspond to the positions ot nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 253. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 813079 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polvnucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1664 of SEQ ID NO 254, b is an integer of 15 to 1678, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 254, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 815889 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R75777, R81 161. H89597. N66387. one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide AA031510, A A03151 1. AA046590, sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, AA046523, AA1 14840. AA1 14841. where a is any integer between 1 to 952 of SEQ ID AA262053, AA459986. AA460079 NO 255. b is an integer of 15 to 966, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 255. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 824358 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descπbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 3077 of SEQ ID NO 256. b is an integer of 15 to 3091, where both a and b correspond to the positions of nucleotide one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide R55532. R55533. W60669. W60670, sequence described bv the general foπnula of a-b W96122 W96123. AA551364, where a is any integer bet een 1 to 1902 of SEQ ID AA5536U, AA570432 NO 296, b is an integer of 15 to 1916 where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 296, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 1 831501 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R52091 H 14837 AA023003, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide AA022470. AA232097, AA256032, sequence described bv the general formula of a-b AA258844, AA259023, AA424828, where a is any integer between 1 to 1462 of SEQ ID AA557330. AA765793 NO 297. b is an integer of 15 to 1476 where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 297. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831502 Preferably excluded trom the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general foπnula of a-b, yvhere a is any integer betw een 1 to 527 of SEQ ID NO 298. b is an integer ot 1 to 541 w here both a and b coπespond to the positions ot nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 298. and where b is greater than or equal to a t 14 831508 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 457 of SEQ ID NO 299. b is an integer of 15 to 471 , where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 299, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831509 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described bv the general formula of a-b where a is any integer between 1 to 928 of SEQ ID NO 300, b is an integer of 15 to 942 here both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 300. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831520 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 447 of SEQ ID NO 301. b is an integer ot 15 to 461. where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 301 , and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831547 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R09826, T95977. T97888, H66377, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide W31 141 sequence descnbed bv the general foπnula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 892 of SEQ ID NO 302, b is an integer of 15 to 906 where both a and b coπespond to the positions ot nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 302, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831548 Preferably excluded from the present invention are T95880, T97781 , R05685. R12413, one or more polvnucleotides compnsmg a nucleotide R37130 R37412 R94523, H82826, sequence described by the general formula of a-b. H99806. H99813. AA 172251. where a is any integer between 1 to 606 of SEQ ID AA468699. AA659754. AA808925, NO 303, b is an integer of 15 to 620. where both a AA837298. AA8581 10. AA864723, and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide AA954263. F181 15. N99864 residues shown in SEQ ID NO 303. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831558 Preferably excluded from the present invention are H60157, W57916. W57917. AA056029, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide AA056047, AA 142858. AA21 1887, sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, AA469104. AA659257. AA662867, where a is any integer between 1 to 519 of SEQ ID AA665372, AA728846, AA933045, NO 304, b is an integer ot 15 to 533, where both a F17890. AA090265 and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 304. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831847 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b. where a is anv integer between I to 1360 of SEQ ID NO 305. b is an integer of 15 to 1374. where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 305. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831893 Preferably excluded trom the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b. where a is any integer between 1 to 654 of SEQ ID NO 306, b is an integer of 15 to 668, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 306. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831903 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descnbed bv the general foπnula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1032 of SEQ ID NO 307. b is an integer of 15 to 1046. where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 307, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831921 Preferably excluded from the present invention are H52554, H66743, H71667, N32238, one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide N77727, W19857, AA0171 1 1, sequence described by the general formula of a-b, AA074918, AA235917, AA236708 where a is any integer between 1 to 1672 of SEQ ID NO 308, b is an integer of 15 to 1686, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 308, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831923 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1412 of SEQ ID NO 309, b is an integer of 15 to 1426, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 309, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 831959 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b. one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide T68795. T68814, T73080. T73178. sequence described by the general formula of a-b. T73508. T83922. T87588. T78456, where a is any integer between 1 to 3714 of SEQ ID T78483. T78523, T78568. T79931 , NO 338. b is an integer of 15 to 3728. where both a T83750. R16916, R16973. R73535. and b coπespond to the positions ot nucleotide R73536, R95125, R95126. R99128. residues shown in SEQ ID NO 338. and where b is H48427. H65045. H65046. H65601, greater than or equal to a + 14 H72506. H72904. H73672. H73416, H75352. H79656, N55345 N69659. N77351. N94268, N94637, W19274, W23857, W24361, W42977, W48819, W68303, W68486, AA037188. AA044094. AA044284. AA055252, AA055253, AA186602. AA188281, AA177045, AA229943. AA514508, AA557392, AA565513. H80617, AA588181, AA635650, AA580469, AA687441 , AA687497, AA834363. AA878670, AA906758. AA934579, AA948660. AA99531 1. C06397, AA284956. AA2851 13 AA292550 838001 Preferablv excluded trom the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general foπnula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 2660 of SEQ ID NO 339. b is an integer of 15 to 2674. where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 339, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 838237 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1443 of SEQ ID NO 340. b is an integer of 15 to 1457, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 340, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 838700 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 3385 of SEQ ID NO 341 , b is an integer of 15 to 3399, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 341, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 838805 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1915 of SEQ ID NO 342. b is an integer of 15 to 1929, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 342, and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 839096 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence descnbed by the general formula of a-b. wwhere a is any integer between 1 to 1547 of SEQ ID N O 343. b is an integer of 15 to 1561. where both a one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 2121 of SEQ ID NO 349. b is an integer of 15 to 2135. where both a and b coπespond to the positions ol nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 349. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 840124 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula ot a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 1564 of SEQ ID NO 350, b is an integer of 15 to 1578, where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 350. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 840222 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R84486, R84529. R88248. Z43097 one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general foπnula of a-b where a is any integer between 1 to 960 of SEQ ID NO 351. b is an integer of 15 to 974 where both a and b coπespond to the positions ot nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 3 1. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 840617 Preferably excluded from the present invention are one or more polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence described by the general formula of a-b, where a is any integer between 1 to 2587 of SEQ ID NO 352. b is an integer of 15 to 2601. where both a and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide residues shown in SEQ ID NO 352. and where b is greater than or equal to a + 14 840641 Preferably excluded from the present invention are H5031 1, N31637, N38837, N57092, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide W25229. W35251 , W58039, W58123, sequence described by the general formula of a-b, W72521 , W76080, N89999, AA256075, where a is any integer between 1 to 907 of SEQ ID AA2561 14, AA426416. AA279475. NO 353. b is an integer of 15 to 921. where both a AA287965. AA286961 AA286962. and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide AA405003. AA521338. AA588308, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 353. and where b is AA729660. AA732508. AA736855, greater than or equal to a + 14 AA760789, AA765636. AA766365, AA805546, AA825927, AA91 1323, AA917840, AA918945. AA922719, AA939023, AA969474. AA976724, N95393, AA453687. AA482391 , AA447756, AA706719. AA709036, AA719892, AI089099. D20399 840792 Preferably excluded from the present invention are R23893, R23892, R32223. R81610, one or more polynucleotides compnsing a nucleotide H00321 , N30960, N66394, W40278, sequence described by the general formula of a-b, W40275, W45359. W56625, W56539, where a is any integer between 1 to 1297 of SEQ ID AA025789. AA025949. AA 12651 1, NO 354, b is an integer of 15 to 131 1 , where both a AA126636. AA131 184. AA131 120, and b coπespond to the positions of nucleotide AA131260. AA 135445. AA 164894, residues shown in SEQ ID NO 354. and where b is AA164893. AA181943 AA262234. greater than or equal to a -r 14 AA460727. AA460899 AA614654, AA576166, AA577101. AA5771 1 1, AA814470, AA962227. AA996044, C00083, C 18672, AA644060, AA635144. AA725839. AA960853, Polynucleotide and Polypeptide Variants The present invention is directed to variants of the polynucleotide sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA sequence contained in a cDNA clone contained in the deposit. The present invention also encompasses variants of the pancreas and pancreatic cancer polypeptide sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide sequence encoded by the polynucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. "Variant" refers to a polynucleotide or polypeptide differing from the polynucleotide or polypeptide of the present invention, but retaining essential properties thereof. Generally, variants are overall closely similar, and. in many regions, identical to the polynucleotide or polypeptide of the present invention. The present invention is also directed to nucleic acid molecules which comprise, or alternatively consist of, a nucleotide sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%o, 99% or 100%, identical to, for example, the nucleotide coding sequence in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, the nucleotide coding sequence of the related cDNA contained in a deposited library or the complementary strand thereto, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA contained in a deposited library, and/or polynucleotide fragments of any of these nucleic acid molecules (e.g., those fragments described herein). Polypeptides encoded by these nucleic acid molecules are also encompassed by the invention. In another embodiment, the invention encompasses nucleic acid molecules which comprise or alternatively consist of, a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions, or alternatively, under low stringency conditions, to the nucleotide coding sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, the nucleotide coding sequence of the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, and/or polynucleotide fragments of any of these nucleic acid molecules (e.g., those fragments described herein). Polynucleotides which hybridize to the complement of these nucleic acid molecules under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides. The present invention is also directed to polypeptides which comprise, or alternatively consist of, an amino acid sequence which is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%) identical to, for example, the polypeptide sequence shown in SEQ ID NON, a polypeptide sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID ΝO:X, a polypeptide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, and/or polypeptide fragments of any of these polypeptides (e.g., those fragments described herein). Polynucleotides which hybridize to the complement of the nucleic acid molecules encoding these polypeptides under stringent hybridization conditions, or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides. By a nucleic acid having a nucleotide sequence at least, for example, 95%> "identical" to a reference nucleotide sequence of the present invention, it is intended that the nucleotide sequence of the nucleic acid is identical to the reference sequence except that the nucleotide sequence may include up to five point mutations per each 100 nucleotides of the reference nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide. In other words, to obtain a nucleic acid having a nucleotide sequence at least 95% identical to a reference nucleotide sequence, up to 5% of the nucleotides in the reference sequence may be deleted or substituted with another nucleotide, or a number of nucleotides up to 5% of the total nucleotides in the reference sequence may be inserted into the reference sequence. The query sequence may be, for example, an entire sequence referred to in Table 1 , an ORF (open reading frame), or any fragment specified as described herein. As a practical matter, whether any particular nucleic acid molecule or polypeptide is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to a nucleotide sequence of the present invention can be determined conventionally using known computer programs. A preferred method for determining the best overall match between a query sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence, also referred to as a global sequence alignment, can be determined using the FASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp. App. Biosci. 6:237-245 ( 1990)). In a sequence alignment the query and subject sequences are both DNA sequences. An RNA sequence can be compared by converting U's to T's. The result of said global sequence alignment is in percent identity. Preferred parameters used in a FASTDB alignment of DNA sequences to calculate percent identiy are: Matrix=Unitary, k-tuple=4, Mismatch Penalty=l , Joining Penalty=30, Randomization Group Length=0, Cutoff Score=l , Gap Penalty=5, Gap Size Penalty 0.05, Window Size=500 or the lenght of the subject nucleotide sequence, whichever is shorter. If the subject sequence is shorter than the query sequence because of 5' or 3' deletions, not because of internal deletions, a manual correction must be made to the results. This is because the FASTDB program does not account for 5' and 3' truncations of the subject sequence when calculating percent identity. For subject sequences truncated at the 5' or 3' ends, relative to the query sequence, the percent identity is corrected by calculating the number of bases of the query sequence that are 5' and 3' of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned, as a percent of the total bases of the query sequence. Whether a nucleotide is matched/aligned is determined by results of the FASTDB sequence alignment. This percentage is then subtracted from the percent identity, calculated by the above FASTDB program using the specified parameters, to arrive at a final percent identity score. This corrected score is what is used for the purposes of the present invention. Only bases outside the 5' and 3' bases of the subject sequence, as displayed by the FASTDB alignment, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence, are calculated for the purposes of manually adjusting the percent identity score. For example, a 90 base subject sequence is aligned to a 100 base query sequence to determine percent identity. The deletions occur at the 5' end of the subject sequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignment does not show a matched/alignment of the first 10 bases at 5' end. The 10 unpaired bases represent 10% of the sequence (number of bases at the 5' and 3' ends not matched/total number of bases in the query sequence) so 10% is subtracted from the percent identity score calculated by the FASTDB program. If the remaining 90 bases were perfectly matched the final percent identity would be 90%. In another example, a 90 base subject sequence is compared with a 100 base query sequence. This time the deletions are internal deletions so that there are no bases on the 5' or 3' of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query. In this case the percent identity calculated by FASTDB is not manually corrected. Once again, only bases 5' and 3' of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence are manually corrected for. No other manual corrections are to made for the purposes of the present invention. By a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least, for example, 95% "identical" to a query amino acid sequence of the present invention, it is intended that the amino acid sequence of the subject polypeptide is identical to the query sequence except that the subject polypeptide sequence may include up to five amino acid alterations per each 100 amino acids of the query amino acid sequence. In other words, to obtain a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least 95%> identical to a query amino acid sequence, up to 5% of the amino acid residues in the subject sequence may be inserted, deleted, (indels) or substituted with another amino acid. These alterations of the reference sequence may occur at the amino or carboxy terminal positions of the reference amino acid sequence or anywhere between those terminal positions, interspersed either individually among residues in the reference sequence or in one or more contiguous groups within the reference sequence. As a practical matter, whether any particular polypeptide is at least 80%), 85%, 90%>, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%o or 99% identical to, for instance, the amino acid sequence in SEQ ID NON or a fragment thereof, the amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID ΝO:X or a fragment thereof, or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, or a fragment thereof, can be determined conventionally using known computer programs. A preferred method for determing the best overall match between a query sequence (a sequence of the present invention) and a subject sequence, also referred to as a global sequence alignment, can be determined using the FASTDB computer program based on the algorithm of Brutlag et al. (Comp. App. Biosci.6:237- 245( 1990)). In a sequence alignment the query and subject sequences are either both nucleotide sequences or both amino acid sequences. The result of said global sequence alignment is in percent identity. Preferred parameters used in a FASTDB amino acid alignment are: Matrix=PAM 0, k-tuple=2, Mismatch Penalty= l , Joining Penalty=20, Randomization Group Length=0, Cutoff Score= l , Window Size=sequence length, Gap Penalty=5, Gap Size Penalty=0.05, Window Size=500 or the length of the subject amino acid sequence, whichever is shorter. If the subject sequence is shorter than the query sequence due to N- or C-terminal deletions, not because of internal deletions, a manual correction must be made to the results. This is because the FASTDB program does not account for N- and C-terminal truncations of the subject sequence when calculating global percent identity. For subject sequences truncated at the N- and C-termini, relative to the query sequence, the percent identity is corrected by calculating the number of residues of the query sequence that are N- and C- terminal of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned with a corresponding subject residue, as a percent of the total bases of the query sequence. Whether a residue is matched/aligned is determined by results of the FASTDB sequence alignment. This percentage is then subtracted from the percent identity, calculated by the above FASTDB program using the specified parameters, to arrive at a final percent identity score. This final percent identity score is what is used for the purposes of the present invention. Only residues to the N- and C-termini of the subject sequence, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence, are considered for the purposes of manually adjusting the percent identity score. That is, only query residue positions outside the farthest N- and C- terminal residues of the subject sequence. For example, a 90 amino acid residue subject sequence is aligned with a 100 residue query sequence to determine percent identity. The deletion occurs at the N-terminus of the subject sequence and therefore, the FASTDB alignment does not show a matching/alignment of the first 10 residues at the N-terminus. The 10 unpaired residues represent 10%> of the sequence (number of residues at the N- and C- termini not matched/total number of residues in the query sequence) so 10% is subtracted from the percent identity score calculated by the FASTDB program. If the remaining 90 residues were perfectly matched the final percent identity would be 90%. In another example, a 90 residue subject sequence is compared with a 100 residue query sequence. This time the deletions are internal deletions so there are no residues at the N- or C-termini of the subject sequence which are not matched/aligned with the query. In this case the percent identity calculated by FASTDB is not manually corrected. Once again, only residue positions outside the N- and C-terminal ends of the subject sequence, as displayed in the FASTDB alignment, which are not matched/aligned with the query sequence are manually corrected for. No other manual corrections are to made for the purposes of the present invention. The variants may contain alterations in the coding regions, non-coding regions, or both. Especially preferred are polynucleotide variants containing alterations which produce silent substitutions, additions, or deletions, but do not alter the properties or activities of the encoded polypeptide. Nucleotide variants produced by silent substitutions due to the degeneracy of the genetic code are preferred. Moreover, variants in which less than 50, less than 40, less than 30, less than 20, less than 10. or 5-50, 5-25, 5-10, 1-5, or 1-2 amino acids are substituted, deleted, or added in any combination are also preferred. Polynucleotide variants can be produced for a variety of reasons, e.g., to optimize codon expression for a particular host (change codons in the human mRNA to those preferred by a bacterial host such as E. coli). Naturally occurring variants are called "allelic variants," and refer to one of several alternate forms of a gene occupying a given locus on a chromosome of an organism. (Genes II, Lewin, B., ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York ( 1985).) These allelic variants can vary at either the polynucleotide and/or polypeptide level and are included in the present invention. Alternatively, non-naturally occurring variants may be produced by mutagenesis techniques or by direct synthesis. Using known methods of protein engineering and recombinant DNA technology, variants may be generated to improve or alter the characteristics of the polypeptides of the present invention. For instance, as discussed herein, one or more amino acids can be deleted from the N-terminus or C-terminus of the polypeptide of the present invention without substantial loss of biological function. The authors of Ron et al., J. Biol. Chem. 268: 2984- 2988 ( 1993), reported variant KGF proteins having heparin binding activity even after deleting 3, 8, or 27 amino-terminal amino acid residues. Similarly, Interferon gamma exhibited up to ten times higher activity after deleting 8-10 amino acid residues from the carboxy terminus of this protein. (Dobeli et al., J. Biotechnology 7:199-216 (1988).) Moreover, ample evidence demonstrates that variants often retain a biological activity similar to that of the naturally occurring protein. For example, Gayle and coworkers (J. Biol. Chem 268:22105-221 1 1 ( 1993)) conducted extensive mutational analysis of human cytokine IL-1 a. They used random mutagenesis to generate over 3,500 individual IL-1 a mutants that averaged 2.5 amino acid changes per variant over the entire length of the molecule. Multiple mutations were examined at every possible amino acid position. The investigators found that "[m]ost of the molecule could be altered with little effect on either [binding or biological activity]." (See, Abstract.) In fact, only 23 unique amino acid sequences, out of more than 3,500 nucleotide sequences examined, produced a protein that significantly differed in activity from wild-type. Furthermore, as discussed herein, even if deleting one or more amino acids from the N-terminus or C-terminus of a polypeptide results in modification or loss of one or more biological functions, other biological activities may still be retained. For example, the ability of a deletion variant to induce and/or to bind antibodies which recognize the secreted form will likely be retained when less than the majority of the residues of the secreted form are removed from the N-terminus or C-terminus. Whether a particular polypeptide lacking N- or C-terminal residues of a protein retains such immunogenic activities can readily be determined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known in the art. Thus, the invention further includes polypeptide variants which show a functional activity (e.g., biological activity) of the polypeptide of the invention of which they are a variant. Such variants include deletions, insertions, inversions, repeats, and substitutions selected according to general rules known in the art so as have little effect on activity. The present application is directed to nucleic acid molecules at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%>, 99% or 100% identical to the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein or fragments thereof, (e.g., including but not limited to fragments encoding a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of an N and/or C terminal deletion), irrespective of whether they encode a polypeptide having functional activity. This is because even where a particular nucleic acid molecule does not encode a polypeptide having functional activity, one of skill in the art would still know how to use the nucleic acid molecule, for instance, as a hybridization probe or a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) primer. Uses of the nucleic acid molecules of the present invention that do not encode a polypeptide having functional activity include, inter alia, (1 ) isolating a gene or allelic or splice variants thereof in a cDNA library; (2) in situ hybridization (e.g., "FISH") to metaphase chromosomal spreads to provide precise chromosomal location of the gene, as described in Verma et al., Human Chromosomes: A Manual of Basic Techniques, Pergamon Press, New York (1988); and (3) Northern Blot analysis for detecting mRNA expression in specific tissues. Preferred, however, are nucleic acid molecules having sequences at least 80%, 85%>, 90%, 95%>, 96%, 97%o, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein, which do, in fact, encode a polypeptide having a functional activity of a polypeptide of the invention. Of course, due to the degeneracy of the genetic code, one of ordinary skill in the art will immediately recognize that a large number of the nucleic acid molecules having a sequence at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100%, identical to, for example, the nucleic acid sequence of the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, the nucleic acid sequence referred to in Table 1 (SEQ ID NO.X), or fragments thereof, will encode polypeptides "having functional activity." In fact, since degenerate variants of any of these nucleotide sequences all encode the same polypeptide, in many instances, this will be clear to the skilled artisan even without performing the above described comparison assay It will be further recognized in the art that, for such nucleic acid molecules that are not degenerate variants, a reasonable number will also encode a polypeptide having functional activity This is because the skilled artisan is fully aware of amino acid substitutions that are either less likely or not likely to significantly effect protein function (e g , replacing one aliphatic amino acid with a second aliphatic amino acid), as further descπbed below For example, guidance concerning how to make phenotypically silent ammo acid substitutions is provided in Bowie et al , "Deciphering the Message in Protein Sequences Tolerance to Amino Acid Substitutions." Science 247 1306-1310 (1990), wherein the authors indicate that there are two main strategies for studying the tolerance of an amino acid sequence to change The first strategy exploits the tolerance of amino acid substitutions by natural selection during the process of evolution By comparing amino acid sequences in different species, conserved amino acids can be identified These conserved amino acids are likely important for protein function In contrast, the amino acid positions where substitutions have been tolerated by natural selection indicates that these positions are not critical for protein function Thus, positions tolerating amino acid substitution could be modified while still maintaining biological activity of the protein The second strategy uses genetic engineering to introduce amino acid changes at specific positions of a cloned gene to identify regions critical for protein function For example, site directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis (introduction of single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule) can be used. (Cunningham and Wells, Science 244 1081-1085 ( 1989) ) The resulting mutant molecules can then be tested for biological activity As the authors state, these two strategies have revealed that proteins are surprisingly tolerant ol amino acid substitutions The authors further indicate which ammo acid changes are likely to be permissive at certain amino acid positions in the protein. For example, most buπed (within the tertiary structure of the protein) amino acid residues require nonpolar side chains, whereas few features of surface side chains are generally conserved. Moreover, tolerated conservative amino acid substitutions involve replacement of the aliphatic or hydrophobic amino acids Ala, Val, Leu and He; replacement of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr; replacement of the acidic residues Asp and Glu; replacement of the amide residues Asn and Gin. replacement of the basic residues Lys, Arg, and His; replacement of the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr, and Tip, and replacement of the small-sized amino acids Ala, Ser, Thr, Met, and Gly. Besides conservative amino acid substitution, variants of the present invention include (i) substitutions with one or more of the non-conserved amino acid residues, where the substituted amino acid residues may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or (ii) substitution with one or more of amino acid residues having a substituent group, or (iii) fusion of the mature polypeptide with another compound, such as a compound to increase the stability and/or solubility of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or (iv) fusion of the polypeptide with additional amino acids, such as, for example, an IgG Fc fusion region peptide, or leader or secretory sequence, or a sequence facilitating purification. Such variant polypeptides are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art from the teachings herein. For example, polypeptide variants containing amino acid substitutions of charged amino acids with other charged or neutral amino acids may produce proteins with improved characteristics, such as less aggregation. Aggregation of pharmaceutical formulations both reduces activity and increases clearance due to the aggregate's immunogenic activity. (Pinckard et al., Clin. Exp. Immunol. 2:331-340 ( 1967); Robbins et al., Diabetes 36: 838-845 (1987); Cleland et al., Crit. Rev. Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems 10:307-377 (1993).) A further embodiment of the invention relates to a polypeptide which comprises the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence which contains at least one amino acid substitution, but not more than 50 amino acid substitutions, even more preferably, not more than 40 amino acid substitutions, still more preferably, not more than 30 amino acid substitutions, and still even more preferably, not more than 20 amino acid substitutions. Of course it is highly preferable for a polypeptide to have an amino acid sequence which comprises the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide of SEQ ID NON, an amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID ΝO:X, and/or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library which contains, in order of ever-increasing preference, at least one, but not more than 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 amino acid substitutions. In specific embodiments, the number of additions, substitutions, and/or deletions in the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NON or fragments thereof (e.g., the mature form and/or other fragments described herein), an amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID ΝO:X or fragments thereof, and/or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library or fragments thereof, is 1-5, 5-10, 5- 25, 5-50, 10-50 or 50-150, conservative amino acid substitutions are preferable. Polynucleotide and Polypeptide Fragments The present invention is also directed to polynucleotide fragments of the pancreas and pancreatic cancer polynucleotides (nucleic acids) of the invention. In the present invention, a "polynucleotide fragment" refers, for example, to a polynucleotide having a nucleic acid sequence which: is a portion of the cDNA contained in a depostied cDNA clone; or is a portion of a polynucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA contained in a deposited cDNA clone; or is a portion of the polynucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto; or is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a portion of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y; or is a polynucleotide sequence encoding a portion of a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto. The nucleotide fragments of the invention are preferably at least about 15 nt, and more preferably at least about 20 nt, still more preferably at least about 30 nt, and even more preferably, at least about 40 nt, at least about 50 nt, at least about 75 nt, at least about 100 nt, at least about 125 nt or at least about 150 nt in length. A fragment "at least 20 nt in length," for example, is intended to include 20 or more contiguous bases from, for example, the sequence contained in the cDNA in a related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary stand thereto. In this context "about" includes the particularly recited value or a value larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) nucleotides. These nucleotide fragments have uses that include, but are not limited to, as diagnostic probes and primers as discussed herein. Of course, larger fragments (e.g., at least 150, 175, 200, 250, 500, 600, 1000, or 2000 nucleotides in length) are also encompassed by the invention. Moreover, representative examples of polynucleotide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a sequence from about nucleotide number 1-50, 51-100, 101 -150, 151-200. 201-250, 251-300, 301-350, 351- 400, 401-450, 451-500, 501-550, 551-600, 651-700,701- 750, 751-800, 800-850, 851-900, 901-950, 951-1000, 1001-1050, 1051-1 100, 1 101-1 150, 1 151-1200, 1201-1250, 1251 -1300, 1301-1350, 1351-1400, 1401 -1450, 1451-1500, 1501-1550, 1551-1600, 1601- 1650, 1651- 1700, 1701- 1750, 1751-1800. 1801 - 1850, 1851-1900, 1901-1950, 1951-2000, 2001-2050, 2051-2100, 2101-2150, 2151-2200, 2201-2250, 2251-2300, 2301-2350, 2351-2400, 2401- 2450, 2451-2500, 2501 -2550, 2551-2600, 2601 -2650, 2651-2700, 2701-2750, 2751-2800, 2801-2850, 2851-2900, 2901 -2950, 2951-3000, 3001-3050, 3051-3100, 3101-3150, 3151- 3200, 3201-3250, 3251-3300, 3301-3350, 3351-3400, 3401-3450, 3451-3500, 3501-3550, and 3551 to the end of SEQ ID NO:X, or the complementary strand thereto. In this context "about" includes the particularly recited range or a range larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 ) nucleotides, at either terminus or at both termini. Preferably, these fragments encode a polypeptide which has a functional activity (e.g., biological activity) of the polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide of which the sequence is a portion. More preferably, these fragments can be used as probes or primers as discussed herein. Polynucleotides which hybridize to one or more of these nucleic acid molecules under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides or fragments. Moreover, representative examples of polynucleotide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, a sequence from about nucleotide number 1-50, 51 -100, 101 -150, 151-200, 201-250, 251-300, 301-350, 351- 400, 401-450, 451-500, 501-550, 551-600, 651-700,701- 750, 751-800, 800-850, 851-900, 901-950, 951-1000, 1001-1050, 1051-1 100, 1 101-1 150, 1 151-1200, 1201-1250, 1251-1300, 1301-1350, 1351-1400, 1401-1450, 1451 -1500, 1501-1550, 1551-1600, 1601-1650, 1651- 1700, 1701-1750, 1751-1800, 1801-1850, 1851-1900, 1901-1950, 1951-2000, 2001 -2050, 2051-2100, 2101-2150, 2151-2200, 2201-2250, 2251-2300, 2301-2350, 2351-2400, 2401- 2450, 2451-2500, 2501-2550, 2551-2600, 2601-2650, 2651-2700, 2701-2750, 2751 -2800, 2801-2850, 2851-2900, 2901-2950, 2951-3000, 3001-3050, 3051-3100, 3101-3150, 3151- 3200, 3201-3250, 3251-3300, 3301-3350, 3351-3400, 3401-3450, 3451-3500, 3501-3550, and 3551 to the end of the cDNA nucleotide sequence contained in the deposited cDNA clone, or the complementary strand thereto. In this context "about " includes the particularly recited range, or a range larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) nucleotides, at either terminus or at both termini. Preferably, these fragments encode a polypeptide which has a functional activity (e.g., biological activity) of the polypeptide encoded by the cDNA nucleotide sequence contained in the deposited cDNA clone. More preferably, these fragments can be used as probes or primers as discussed herein. Polynucleotides which hybridize to one or more of these fragments under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency conditions, are also encompassed by the invention, as are polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides or fragments. In the present invention, a "polypeptide fragment" refers to an amino acid sequence which is a portion of that contained in SEQ ID NO:Y, a portion of an amino acid sequence encoded by the polynucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, and/or encoded by the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library. Protein (polypeptide) fragments may be "free-standing," or comprised within a larger polypeptide of which the fragment forms a part or region, most preferably as a single continuous region. Representative examples of polypeptide fragments of the invention, include, for example, fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acid sequence from about amino acid number 1-20, 21-40, 41-60, 61 -80, 81-100, 102-120, 121-140, 141-160, 161-180, 181-200, 201-220, 221-240, 241-260, 261-280, 281-300, 301-320, 321-340, 341 -360, 361- 380, 381-400, 401-420, 421-440, 441-460, 461 -480, 481-500, 501-520, 521-540, 541-560, 561-580, 581-600, 601-620, 621-640, 641-660, 661 -680, 681-700, 701-720, 721-740, 741- 760, 761-780, 781-800, 801-820, 821 -840, 841-860, 861-880, 881-900, 901 -920, 921-940, 941-960, 961 -980, 981-1000, 1001-1020, 1021 -1040, 1041-1060, 1061 - 1080, 1081- 1 100, 1 101 -1 120, 1 121-1 140, 1 141-1 160, 1 161-1 180, and 1181 to the end of SEQ ID NO:Y. Moreover, polypeptide fragments of the invention may be at least about 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 1 10, 120, 130, 140, or 150 amino acids in length. In this context "about" includes the particularly recited ranges or values, or ranges or values larger or smaller by several (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1) amino acids, at either terminus or at both termini. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptide fragments are also encompassed by the invention. Even if deletion of one or more amino acids from the N-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of one or more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities (e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bind a ligand) may still be retained. For example, the ability of shortened muteins to induce and/or bind to antibodies which recognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptides generally will be retained when less than the majority of the residues of the complete or mature polypeptide are removed from the N-terminus. Whether a particular polypeptide lacking N-terminal residues of a complete polypeptide retains such immunologic activities can readily be determined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known in the art. It is not unlikely that a mutein with a large number of deleted N-terminal amino acid residues may retain some biological or immunogenic activities. In fact, peptides composed of as few as six amino acid residues may often evoke an immune response. Accordingly, polypeptide fragments of the invention include the secreted protein as well as the mature form. Further preferred polypeptide fragments include the secreted protein or the mature form having a continuous series of deleted residues from the amino or the carboxy terminus, or both. For example, any number of amino acids, ranging from 1-60, can be deleted from the amino terminus of either the secreted polypeptide or the mature form. Similarly, any number of amino acids, ranging from 1-30, can be deleted from the carboxy terminus of the secreted protein or mature form. Furthermore, any combination of the above amino and carboxy terminus deletions are preferred. Similarly, polynucleotides encoding these polypeptide fragments are also preferred. The present invention further provides polypeptides having one or more residues deleted from the amino terminus of the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide disclosed herein (e.g., a polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, a polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide sequence contained in SEQ ID NO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library). In particular, N-terminal deletions may be described by the general formula m-q, where q is a whole integer representing the total number of amino acid residues in a polypeptide of the invention (e.g., the polypeptide disclosed in SEQ ID NO:Y), and m is defined as any integer ranging from 2 to q-6. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Also as mentioned above, even if deletion of one or more amino acids from the C-terminus of a protein results in modification of loss of one or more biological functions of the protein, other functional activities (e.g., biological activities, ability to multimerize, ability to bind a ligand) may still be retained. For example the ability of the shortened mutein to induce and/or bind to antibodies which recognize the complete or mature forms of the polypeptide generally will be retained when less than the majority of the residues of the complete or mature polypeptide are removed from the C-terminus. Whether a particular polypeptide lacking C-terminal residues of a complete polypeptide retains such immunologic activities can readily be determined by routine methods described herein and otherwise known in the art. It is not unlikely that a mutein with a large number of deleted C-terminal amino acid residues may retain some biological or immunogenic activities. In fact, peptides composed of as few as six amino acid residues may often evoke an immune response. Accordingly, the present invention further provides polypeptides having one or more residues from the carboxy terminus of the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide disclosed herein (e.g., a polypeptide of SEQ ID NON, a polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide sequence contained in SEQ ID ΝO:X, and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA contained in deposited cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 ). In particular. C-terminal deletions may be described by the general formula 1 -n. where n is any whole integer ranging from 6 to q-1, and where n corresponds to the position of an amino acid residue in a polypeptide of the invention. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. In addition, any of the above described N- or C-terminal deletions can be combined to produce a N- and C-terminal deleted polypeptide. The invention also provides polypeptides having one or more amino acids deleted from both the amino and the carboxyl termini, which may be described generally as having residues m-n of a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X (e.g., including, but not limited to, the preferred polypeptide disclosed as SEQ ID NO:Y), and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library, where n and m are integers as described above. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Any polypeptide sequence contained in the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y, encoded by the polynucleotide sequences set forth as SEQ ID NO:X, or encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library may be analyzed to determine certain preferred regions of the polypeptide. For example, the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X, or the cDNA in a deposited cDNA clone may be analyzed using the default parameters of the DNASTAR computer algorithm (DNASTAR, Inc., 1228 S. Park St., Madison, WI 53715 USA; http://www.dnastar.com/). Polypeptide regions that may be routinely obtained using the DNASTAR computer algorithm include, but are not limited to, Garnier-Robson alpha-regions, beta-regions, turn-regions, and coil-regions, Chou-Fasman alpha-regions, beta-regions, and turn-regions, Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilic regions and hydrophobic regions, Eisenberg alpha- and beta-amphipathic regions, arplus-Schulz flexible regions, Emini surface-forming regions and Jameson- Wolf regions of high antigenic index. Among highly preferred polynucleotides of the invention in this regard are those that encode polypeptides comprising regions that combine several structural features, such as several (e.g., 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the features set out above. Additionally, Kyte-Doolittle hydrophilic regions and hydrophobic regions, Emini surface-forming regions, and Jameson- Wolf regions of high antigenic index (i.e., containing four or more contiguous amino acids having an antigenic index of greater than or equal to 1.5, as identified using the default parameters of the Jameson-Wolf program) can routinely be used to determine polypeptide regions that exhibit a high degree of potential for antigenicity. Regions of high antigenicity are determined from data by DNASTAR analysis by choosing values which represent regions of the polypeptide which are likely to be exposed on the surface of the polypeptide in an environment in which antigen recognition may occur in the process of initiation of an immune response. Preferred polypeptide fragments of the invention are fragments comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an amino acid sequence that displays a functional activity of the polypeptide sequence of which the amino acid sequence is a fragment. By a polypeptide demonstrating a "functional activity" is meant, a polypeptide capable of displaying one or more known functional activities associated with a full-length (complete) protein of the invention. Such functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, antigenicity [ability to bind (or compete with a polypeptide for binding) to an anti-polypeptide antibody], immunogenicity (ability to generate antibody which binds to a specific polypeptide of the invention), ability to form multimers with polypeptides of the invention, and ability to bind to a receptor or ligand for a polypeptide. Other preferred polypeptide fragments are biologically active fragments. Biologically active fragments are those exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical, to an activity of the polypeptide of the present invention. The biological activity of the fragments may include an improved desired activity, or a decreased undesirable activity. In preferred embodiments, polypeptides of the invention comprise, or alternatively consist of, one, two, three, four, five or more of the antigenic fragments of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NON, or portions thereof. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Table 4. l-n HCCMA63R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 855 as residues Glv- l to Gly- 13 HE8EZ78R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 856 as residues Ala- 1 to Leu-7, He- 14 to Gln-22, Glu-39 to Asp-44, Leu-76 to Val-84 Asn- 89 to Leu-95 Pro-98 to Glu- 103 HALSD82R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 858 as residues Asn- 1 to Asp-6, Thr- 19 to Cys-3~ϊ , Glu-33 to Tφ-39, Gly-56 to Asp-69. Met-84 to His- 106, Lys- 1 12 to Hιs- 1 18 H2LAS44R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 859 as residues His- 10 to Gin- 18. Ser-79 to Glv-89 HTXPA42R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 860 as residues Arg-1 to Lvs-6. Asn-31 to Lγs-39 HAHEJ39R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 862 as residues Asp-8 to Gly- 14 Gly- 19 to Ser-29. Arg-67 to Glv-72 HOEMQ04R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 863 as residues Lvs- 12 to Arg-21. Tvr-57 to Pro-71 HOENU56R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 865 as i esidues Leu-9 to Leu- 15 HAGGB37R|Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 866 as residues Asn-32 to Hιs-38 HAHD057R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 868 as residues Gly- 1 to Gly-7 G y-17 to Ser-28 HTPCT95R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 871 as residues G Glluu--3333 ttoo TTφφ--4400.. TTyyrr--4488 ttoo HHιιss--5566 HCCMD33R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 873 as residues G Glluu--99 ttoo G Gllyy-- 1144.. CCyyss--3333 ttoo LLyyss--4444 HCE4L96R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 875 as residues Gln- 1 to Arg-8. Arg-13 to Ser-30. Hιs-38 to Tyr-44 HTPGL86R Preteπed epitopes include ■ t thho.sCe c shhnouw/in in SEQ ID NO 876 as residues Gln-47 to Cvs-53. Asn-66 to Cvs-71 HWDAK95 Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 878 as R residues Hιs-17 to Gln-26. Met-28 to Hιs-39 Pro-48 to G y-58 HE9DG72R Prefeπed epitopes include those compnsing a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 879 as residues VaI-29 to Lys-34, Thr-50 to Gly-56 HDPOY89R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 880 as residues Gln- 1 to Met-1 1. Pro-26 to Ser-37. Pro-55 to Hιs-60. Lys-83 to Thr-99 HAHEJ 13R Prefeπed epitopes include those compnsing a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 881 as residues Glu- 12 to Ser- 17 HCFCM83R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 883 as residues Glu- 19 to Ala-26 HBMBJ92R Preteπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 891 as residues Leu-22 to Glv-27, Glu-33 to Val-38 HCGBC37R Prefeπed epitopes include those compnsing a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 892 as residues Phe-26 to Val-31 , Pro-35 to Arg-42 HCROI22R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 893 as residues Pro-5 to Ser-14, Ser-25 to Leu-30 HDTL 21 R Prefeπed epitopes include those compnsmg a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 894 as residues Pro- 1 1 to Asn- 17 HEGAD29R Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 898 as residues Glu-1 to Hιs-6. Gly- 19 to Tφ-31 HF HC10R iPrefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 899 as residues Val- 12 to Asn- 18. Lys-30 to Glu-38 HNHGQ70R [Prefeπed epitopes include those comprising a sequence shown in SEQ ID NO 909 as The present invention encompasses polypeptides comprising, or alternatively consisting of, an epitope of the polypeptide sequence shown in SEQ ID NON, or an epitope of the polypeptide sequence encoded by the cDΝA in the related cDΝA clone contained in a deposited library or encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the complement of an epitope encoding sequence of SEQ ID ΝO:X, or an epitope encoding sequence contained in the deposited cDNA clone under stringent hybridization conditions, or alternatively, under lower stringency hybridization conditions, as defined supra. The present invention further encompasses polynucleotide sequences encoding an epitope of a polypeptide sequence of the invention (such as. for example, the sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:X), polynucleotide sequences of the complementary strand of a polynucleotide sequence encoding an epitope of the invention, and polynucleotide sequences which hybridize to this complementary strand under stringent hybridization conditions or alternatively, under lower stringency hybridization conditions, as defined supra. The term '"epitopes," as used herein, refers to portions of a polypeptide having antigenic or immunogenic activity in an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably in a human. In a preferred embodiment, the present invention encompasses a polypeptide comprising an epitope, as well as the polynucleotide encoding this polypeptide. An "immunogenic epitope," as used herein, is defined as a portion of a protein that elicits an antibody response in an animal, as determined by any method known in the art. for example, by the methods for generating antibodies described infra. (See. for example, Geysen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81 :3998- 4002 (1983)). The term "antigenic epitope," as used herein, is defined as a portion of a protein to which an antibody can immunospecifically bind its antigen as determined by any method well known in the art, for example, by the immunoassays described herein. Immunospecific binding excludes non-specific binding but does not necessarily exclude cross- reactivity with other antigens. Antigenic epitopes need not necessarily be immunogenic. Fragments which function as epitopes may be produced by any conventional means. (See, e.g., Houghten. R. A., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135 ( 1985) further described in U.S. Patent No. 4,631 ,21 1.) In the present invention, antigenic epitopes preferably contain a sequence of at least 4. at least 5, at least 6. at least 7, more preferably at least 8. at least 9, at least 10, at least 1 1, at least 12, at least 13. at least 14, at least 15. at least 20, at least 25. at least 30. at least 40, at least 50. and, most preferably, between about 15 to about 30 amino acids. Preferred polypeptides comprising immunogenic or antigenic epitopes are at least 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50. 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100 amino acid residues in length. Additional non-exclusive preferred antigenic epitopes include the antigenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as portions thereof. Antigenic epitopes are useful, for example, to raise antibodies, including monoclonal antibodies, that specifically bind the epitope. Preferred antigenic epitopes include the antigenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as any combination of two, three, four, five or more of these antigenic epitopes. Antigenic epitopes can be used as the target molecules in immunoassays. (See, for instance, Wilson et al., Cell 37:767-778 (1984); Sutcliffe et al., Science 219:660-666 (1983)). Similarly, immunogenic epitopes can be used, for example, to induce antibodies according to methods well known in the art. (See, for instance, Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson et al., supra; Chow et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:910- 914; and Bittle et al., J. Gen. Virol. 66:2347-2354 ( 1985). Preferred immunogenic epitopes include the immunogenic epitopes disclosed herein, as well as any combination of two, three, four, five or more of these immunogenic epitopes. The polypeptides comprising one or more immunogenic epitopes may be presented for eliciting an antibody response together with a carrier protein, such as an albumin, to an animal system (such as rabbit or mouse), or, if the polypeptide is of sufficient length (at least about 25 amino acids), the polypeptide may be presented without a carrier. However, immunogenic epitopes comprising as few as 8 to 10 amino acids have been shown to be sufficient to raise antibodies capable of binding to, at the very least, linear epitopes in a denatured polypeptide (e.g., in Western blotting). Epitope-bearing polypeptides of the present invention may be used to induce antibodies according to methods well known in the art including, but not limited to, in vivo immunization, in vitro immunization, and phage display methods. See, e.g., Sutcliffe et al., supra; Wilson et al.. supra, and Bittle et al.. J. Gen. Virol., 66:2347- 2354 ( 1985). If in vivo immunization is used, animals may be immunized with free peptide; however, anti-peptide antibody titer may be boosted by coupling the peptide to a macromolecular carrier, such as keyhole limpet hemacyanin (KLH) or tetanus toxoid. For instance, peptides containing cysteine residues may be coupled to a carrier using a linker such as maleimidobenzoyl- N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS), while other peptides may be coupled to carriers using a more general linking agent such as glutaraldehyde. Animals such as rabbits, rats and mice are immunized with either free or carrier- coupled peptides, for instance, by intraperitoneal and/or intradermal injection of emulsions containing about 100 μg of peptide or carrier protein and Freund's adjuvant or any other adjuvant known for stimulating an immune response. Several booster injections may be needed, for instance, at intervals of about two weeks, to provide a useful titer of anti-peptide antibody which can be detected, for example, by ELISA assay using free peptide adsorbed to a solid surface. The titer of anti-peptide antibodies in serum from an immunized animal may be increased by selection of anti-peptide antibodies, for instance, by adsorption to the peptide on a solid support and elution of the selected antibodies according to methods well known in the art. As one of skill in the art will appreciate, and as discussed above, the polypeptides of the present invention , and immunogenic and/or antigenic epitope fragments thereof can be fused to other polypeptide sequences. For example, the polypeptides of the present invention may be fused with the constant domain of immunoglobulins (IgA, IgE, IgG, IgM), or portions thereof (CHI, CH2, CH3, or any combination thereof and portions thereof) resulting in chimeric polypeptides. Such fusion proteins may facilitate purification and may increase half-life in vivo. This has been shown for chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains of the human CD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. See, e.g., EP 394,827; Traunecker et al., Nature. 331 :84-86 ( 1988). Enhanced delivery of an antigen across the epithelial barrier to the immune system has been demonstrated for antigens (e.g., insulin) conjugated to an FcRn binding partner such as IgG or Fc fragments (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 96/22024 and WO 99/04813). IgG Fusion proteins that have a disulfide-linked dimeric structure due to the IgG portion desulfide bonds have also been found to be more efficient in binding and neutralizing other molecules than monomeric polypeptides or fragments thereof alone. See, e.g., Fountoulakis et al., J. Biochem., 270:3958-3964 ( 1995). Similarly, EP-A-O 464 533 (Canadian counterpart 2045869) discloses fusion proteins comprising various portions of constant region of immunoglobulin molecules together with another human protein or part thereof. In many cases, the Fc part in a fusion protein is beneficial in therapy and diagnosis, and thus can result in, for example, improved pharmacokinetic properties. (EP-A 0232 262.) Alternatively, deleting the Fc part after the fusion protein has been expressed, detected, and purified, may be desired. For example, the Fc portion may hinder therapy and diagnosis if the fusion protein is used as an antigen for immunizations. In drug discovery, for example, human proteins, such as hIL-5, have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists of hIL-5. (See, D. Bennett et al., J. Molecular Recognition 8:52-58 ( 1995); K. Johanson et al., J. Biol. Chem. 270:9459-9471 ( 1995).) Moreover, the polypeptides of the present invention can be fused to marker sequences, such as a peptide which facilitates purification of the fused polypeptide. In preferred embodiments, the marker amino acid sequence is a hexa-histidine peptide, such as the tag provided in a pQE vector (QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue, Chatsworth, CA, 9131 1 ), among others, many of which are commercially available. As described in Gentz et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:821-824 (1989), for instance, hexa-histidine provides for convenient purification of the fusion protein. Another peptide tag useful for purification, the "HA" tag, corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin protein. (Wilson et al.. Cell 37:767 ( 1984).) Thus, any of these above fusions can be engineered using the polynucleotides or the polypeptides of the present invention. Nucleic acids encoding the above epitopes can also be recombined with a gene of interest as an epitope tag (e.g., the hemagglutinin ("HA") tag or flag tag) to aid in detection and purification of the expressed polypeptide. For example, a system described by Janknecht et al. allows for the ready purification of non-denatured fusion proteins expressed in human cell lines (Janknecht et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:8972- 897 ( 1991 )). In this system, the gene of interest is subcloned into a vaccinia recombination plasmid such that the open reading frame of the gene is translationally fused to an amino-terminal tag consisting of six histidine residues. The tag serves as a matrix binding domain for the fusion protein. Extracts from cells infected with the recombinant vaccinia virus are loaded onto Ni2+ nitriloacetic acid-agarose column and histidine-tagged proteins can be selectively eluted with imidazole-containing buffers. Additional fusion proteins of the invention may be generated through the techniques of gene-shuffling, motif-shuffling, exon-shuffling, and/or codon-shuffling (collectively referred to as "DNA shuffling"). DNA shuffling may be employed to modulate the activities of polypeptides of the invention, such methods can be used to generate polypeptides with altered activity, as well as agonists and antagonists of the polypeptides. See, generally, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,605,793; 5,81 1 ,238; 5,830,721 ; 5,834,252; and 5,837,458, and Patten et al., Curr. Opinion Biotechnol. 8:724-33 (1997); Harayama, Trends Biotechnol. 16(2):76-82 (1998); Hansson, et al., J. Mol. Biol. 287:265-76 ( 1999); and Lorenzo and Blasco, Biotechniques 24(2):308- 13 (1998) (each of these patents and publications are hereby incoφorated by reference in its entirety). In one embodiment, alteration of polynucleotides corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X and the polypeptides encoded by these polynucleotides may be achieved by DNA shuffling. DNA shuffling involves the assembly of two or more DNA segments by homologous or site-specific recombination to generate variation in the polynucleotide sequence. In another embodiment, polynucleotides of the invention, or the encoded polypeptides. may be altered by being subjected to random mutagenesis by error-prone PCR, random nucleotide insertion or other methods prior to recombination. In another embodiment, one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc., of a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the invention may be recombined with one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc. of one or more heterologous molecules. As discussed herein, any polypeptide of the present invention can be used to generate fusion proteins. For example, the polypeptide of the present invention, when fused to a second protein, can be used as an antigenic tag. Antibodies raised against the polypeptide of the present invention can be used to indirectly detect the second protein by binding to the polypeptide. Moreover, because secreted proteins target cellular locations based on trafficking signals, polypeptides of the present invention which are shown to be secreted can be used as targeting molecules once fused to other proteins. Examples of domains that can be fused to polypeptides of the present invention include not only heterologous signal sequences, but also other heterologous functional regions. The fusion does not necessarily need to be direct, but may occur through linker sequences. In certain preferred embodiments, proteins of the invention comprise fusion proteins wherein the polypeptides are N and/or C- terminal deletion mutants. In preferred embodiments, the application is directed to nucleic acid molecules at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the nucleic acid sequences encoding polypeptides having the amino acid sequence of the specific N- and C-terminal deletions mutants. Polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides are also encompassed by the invention. Moreover, fusion proteins may also be engineered to improve characteristics of the polypeptide of the present invention. For instance, a region of additional amino acids, particularly charged amino acids, may be added to the N-terminus of the polypeptide to improve stability and persistence during purification from the host cell or subsequent handling and storage. Also, peptide moieties may be added to the polypeptide to facilitate purification. Such regions may be removed prior to final preparation of the polypeptide. The addition of peptide moieties to facilitate handling of polypeptides are familiar and routine techniques in the art. Vectors. Host Cells, and Protein Production The present invention also relates to vectors containing the polynucleotide of the present invention, host cells, and the production of polypeptides by recombinant techniques. The vector may be, for example, a phage, plasmid, viral, or retroviral vector. Retroviral vectors may be replication competent or replication defective. In the latter case, viral propagation generally will occur only in complementing host cells. The polynucleotides of the invention may be joined to a vector containing a selectable marker for propagation in a host. Generally, a plasmid vector is introduced in a precipitate, such as a calcium phosphate precipitate, or in a complex with a charged lipid. If the vector is a virus, it may be packaged in vitro using an appropriate packaging cell line and then transduced into host cells. The polynucleotide insert should be operatively linked to an appropriate promoter, such as the phage lambda PL promoter, the E. coli lac, tip, phoA and tac promoters, the SV40 early and late promoters and promoters of retroviral LTRs, to name a few. Other suitable promoters will be known to the skilled artisan. The expression constructs will further contain sites for transcription initiation, termination, and, in the transcribed region, a ribosome binding site for translation. The coding portion of the transcripts expressed by the constructs will preferably include a translation initiating codon at the beginning and a termination codon (UAA, UGA or UAG) appropriately positioned at the end of the polypeptide to be translated. As indicated, the expression vectors will preferably include at least one selectable marker. Such markers include dihydrofolate reductase, G418 or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic cell culture and tetracycline, kanamycin or ampicillin resistance genes for culturing in E. coli and other bacteria. Representative examples of appropriate hosts include, but are not limited to. bacterial cells, such as E. coli, Streptomyces and Salmonella typhimurium cells: fungal cells, such as yeast cells (e.g., Saccharomyces cerevisiae or Pichia pastoris (ATCC Accession No. 201 178)); insect cells such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sf9 cells; animal cells such as CHO, COS, 293. and Bowes melanoma cells; and plant cells. Appropriate culture mediums and conditions for the above-described host cells are known in the art. Among vectors preferred for use in bacteria include pQE70, pQE60 and pQE- 9, available from QIAGEN. Inc.; pBluescript vectors. Phagescript vectors, pNH8A, pNH lόa, pNH 18A. pNH46A, available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, Inc.; and ptrc99a, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5 available from Pharmacia Biotech, Inc. Among preferred eukaryotic vectors are pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl and pSG available from Stratagene; and pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG and pSVL available from Pharmacia. Preferred expression vectors for use in yeast systems include, but are not limited to pYES2, pYDl , pTEFl/Zeo, pYES2/GS, pPICZ, pGAPZ, pGAPZalph, pPIC9, pPIC3.5, pHIL-D2, pHIL-Sl, pPIC3.5K, pP!C9K, and PAO815 (all available from Invitrogen, Carlbad, CA). Other suitable vectors will be readily apparent to the skilled artisan. Introduction of the construct into the host cell can be effected by calcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-dextran mediated transfection, cationic lipid-mediated transfection. electroporation, transduction, infection, or other methods. Such methods are described in many standard laboratory manuals, such as Davis et al., Basic Methods In Molecular Biology ( 1986). It is specifically contemplated that the polypeptides of the present invention may in fact be expressed by a host cell lacking a recombinant vector. A polypeptide of this invention can be recovered and purified from recombinant cell cultures by well-known methods including ammonium sulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cation exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography and lectin chromatography. Most preferably, high performance liquid chromatography ("HPLC") is employed for purification. Polypeptides of the present invention can also be recovered from: products purified from natural sources, including bodily fluids, tissues and cells, whether directly isolated or cultured; products of chemical synthetic procedures; and products produced by recombinant techniques from a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host, including, for example, bacterial, yeast, higher plant, insect, and mammalian cells. Depending upon the host employed in a recombinant production procedure, the polypeptides of the present invention may be glycosylated or may be non-glycosylated. In addition, polypeptides of the invention may also include an initial modified methionine residue, in some cases as a result of host-mediated processes. Thus, it is well known in the art that the N-terminal methionine encoded by the translation initiation codon generally is removed with high efficiency from any protein after translation in all eukaryotic cells. While the N-terminal methionine on most proteins also is efficiently removed in most prokaryotes, for some proteins, this prokaryotic removal process is inefficient, depending on the nature of the amino acid to which the N-terminal methionine is covalently linked. In one embodiment, the yeast Pichia pastoris is used to express polypeptides of the invention in a eukaryotic system. Pichia pastoris is a methylotrophic yeast which can metabolize methanol as its sole carbon source. A main step in the methanol metabolization pathway is the oxidation of methanol to formaldehyde using O . This reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme alcohol oxidase. In order to metabolize methanol as its sole carbon source, Pichia pastoris must generate high levels of alcohol oxidase due, in part, to the relatively low affinity of alcohol oxidase for O 2 . Consequently, in a growth medium depending on methanol as a main carbon source, the promoter region of one of the two alcohol oxidase genes (AOX1) is highly active. In the presence of methanol, alcohol oxidase produced from the A OX1 gene comprises up to approximately 30% of the total soluble protein in Pichia pastoris. See, Ellis, S.B., et al. Mol. Cell. Biol. 5: 1 1 1 1 -21 (1985); Koutz, P.J. et al. Yeast 5: 167-77 (1989); Tschopp, J.F., et al. Nucl Acids Res. 15:3859-76 (1987). Thus, a heterologous coding sequence, such as. for example, a polynucleotide of the present invention, under the transcriptional regulation of all or part of the AOX1 regulatory sequence is expressed at exceptionally high levels in Pichia yeast grown in the presence of methanol. In one example, the plasmid vector pPIC9K is used to express DNA encoding a polypeptide of the invention, as set forth herein, in a Pichea yeast system essentially as described in "Pichia Protocols: Methods in Molecular Biology," D.R. Higgins and J. Cregg, eds. The Humana Press, Totowa, NJ, 1998. This expression vector allows expression and secretion of a polypeptide of the invention by virtue of the strong AOX1 promoter linked to the Pichia pastoris alkaline phosphatase (PHO) secretory signal peptide (i.e., leader) located upstream of a multiple cloning site. Many other yeast vectors could be used in place of pPIC9K, such as, pYES2, pYD l , pTEFl/Zeo, pYES2/GS, pPICZ, pGAPZ, pGAPZalpha, pPIC9, pPIC3.5, pHIL-D2, pHIL-Sl , pPIC3.5K, and PAO815, as one skilled in the art would readily appreciate, as long as the proposed expression construct provides appropriately located signals for transcription, translation, secretion (if desired), and the like, including an in-frame AUG as required. In another embodiment, high-level expression of a heterologous coding sequence, such as, for example, a polynucleotide of the present invention, may be achieved by cloning the heterologous polynucleotide of the invention into an expression vector such as, for example, pGAPZ or pGAPZalpha, and growing the yeast culture in the absence of methanol. In addition to encompassing host cells containing the vector constructs discussed herein, the invention also encompasses primary, secondary, and immortalized host cells of vertebrate origin, particularly mammalian origin, that have been engineered to delete or replace endogenous genetic material (e.g., coding sequence), and/or to include genetic material (e.g., heterologous polynucleotide sequences) that is operably associated with polynucleotides of the invention, and which activates, alters, and/or amplifies endogenous polynucleotides. For example, techniques known in the art may be used to operably associate heterologous control regions (e.g., promoter and/or enhancer) and endogenous polynucleotide sequences via homologous recombination (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,641 ,670, issued June 24, 1997; International Publication No. WO 96/2941 1 , published September 26, 1996; International Publication No. WO 94/12650, published August 4, 1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 ( 1989); and Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435- 438 ( 1989), the disclosures of each of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties). In addition, polypeptides of the invention can be chemically synthesized using techniques known in the art (e.g., see Creighton. 1983. Proteins: Structures and Molecular Principles. W.H. Freeman & Co., N.Y.. and Hunkapiller et al., Nature, 310: 105-1 1 1 (1984)). For example, a polypeptide corresponding to a fragment of a polypeptide can be synthesized by use of a peptide synthesizer. Furthermore, if desired, nonclassical amino acids or chemical amino acid analogs can be introduced as a substitution or addition into the polypeptide sequence. Non-classical amino acids include, but are not limited to, to the D-isomers of the common amino acids, 2,4- diaminobutyric acid, a-amino isobutyric acid, 4-aminobutyric acid, Abu, 2-amino butyric acid, g-Abu, e-Ahx, 6-amino hexanoic acid, Aib, 2-amino isobutyric acid, 3-amino propionic acid, omithine, norleucine. norvaline, hydroxyproline, sarcosine, citrulline, homocitrulline, cysteic acid, t-butylglycine, t-butylalanine, phenylglycine, cyclohexylalanine, b-alanine, fluoro-amino acids, designer amino acids such as b- methyl amino acids, Ca-methyl amino acids, Na-methyl amino acids, and amino acid analogs in general. Furthermore, the amino acid can be D (dextrorotary) or L (levorotary). Non-naturally occurring variants may be produced using art-known mutagenesis techniques, which include, but are not limited to oligonucleotide mediated mutagenesis, alanine scanning, PCR mutagenesis, site directed mutagenesis (see, e.g., Carter et al, Nucl. Acids Res. 75:4331 (1986); and Zoller et al, Nucl. Acids Res. 10:6481 (1982)), cassette mutagenesis (see, e.g., Wells et al. Gene 34:315 (1985)), restriction selection mutagenesis (see, e.g., Wells et al. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London Ser A 3/ 7:415 (1986)). The invention additionally, encompasses polypeptides of the present invention which are differentially modified during or after translation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including but not limited, to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH 4 ; acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction; metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin; etc. Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the invention include, for example, e.g., N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, processing of N-terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemical moieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of an N-terminal methionine residue as a result of procaryotic host cell expression. The polypeptides may also be modified with a detectable label, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein. Also provided by the invention are chemically modified derivatives of the polypeptides of the invention which may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogenicity (see U.S. Patent No. 4, 179,337). The chemical moieties for derivitization may be selected from water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol and the like. The polypeptides may be modified at random positions within the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the molecule and may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties. The polymer may be of any molecular weight, and may be branched or unbranched. For polyethylene glycol, the preferred molecular weight is between about 1 kDa and about 100 kDa (the term "about" indicating that in preparations of polyethylene glycol. some molecules will weigh more, some less, than the stated molecular weight) for ease in handling and manufacturing. Other sizes may be used, depending on the desired therapeutic profile (e.g., the duration of sustained release desired, the effects, if any on biological activity, the ease in handling, the degree or lack of antigenicity and other known effects of the polyethylene glycol to a therapeutic protein or analog). For example, the polyethylene glycol may have an average molecular weight of about 200; 500; 1000; 1500; 2000; 2500; 3000; 3500 4000; 4500; 5000; 5500; 6000; 6500; 7000; 7500; 8000; 8500; 9000; 9500; 10,000 10,500; 1 1.000; 1 1.500; 12,000: 12,500; 13,000; 13,500; 14,000; 14,500; 15,000 15.500; 16,000; 16,500; 17,000; 17,500; 18,000; 18.500; 19.000; 19,500; 20.000 25,000; 30.000; 35,000; 40,000; 50,000; 55,000; 60,000; 65.000; 70,000; 75,000 80.000; 85.000; 90,000; 95,000; or 100,000 kDa. As noted above, the polyethylene glycol may have a branched structure. Branched polyethylene glycols are described, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 5,643,575; Morpurgo et al, Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol 56:59-12 (1996); Vorobjev et al, Nucleosides Nucleotides 18:2145-2150 (1999); and Caliceti et al, Bioconjug. Chem. /0:638-646 (1999), the disclosures of each of which are incoφorated herein by reference. The polyethylene glycol molecules (or other chemical moieties) should be attached to the protein with consideration of effects on functional or antigenic domains of the protein. There are a number of attachment methods available to those skilled in the art, e.g., EP 0 401 384, herein incoφorated by reference (coupling PEG to G-CSF), see also Malik et al., Exp. Hematol. 20: 1028-1035 ( 1992) (reporting pegylation of GM-CSF using tresyl chloride). For example, polyethylene glycol may be covalently bound through amino acid residues via a reactive group, such as, a free amino or carboxyl group. Reactive groups are those to which an activated polyethylene glycol molecule may be bound. The amino acid residues having a free amino group may include lysine residues and the N-terminal amino acid residues; those having a free carboxyl group may include aspartic acid residues glutamic acid residues and the C-terminal amino acid residue. Sulfhydryl groups may also be used as a reactive group for attaching the polyethylene glycol molecules. Preferred for therapeutic puφoses is attachment at an amino group, such as attachment at the N-terminus or lysine group. As suggested above, polyethylene glycol may be attached to proteins via linkage to any of a number of amino acid residues. For example, polyethylene glycol can be linked to a proteins via covalent bonds to lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine residues. One or more reaction chemistries may be employed to attach polyethylene glycol to specific amino acid residues (e.g., lysine, histidine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, or cysteine) of the protein or to more than one type of amino acid residue (e.g., lysine, histidine. aspartic acid, glutamic acid, cysteine and combinations thereof) of the protein. One may specifically desire proteins chemically modified at the N-terminus. Using polyethylene glycol as an illustration of the present composition, one may select from a variety of polyethylene glycol molecules (by molecular weight, branching, etc.), the proportion of polyethylene glycol molecules to protein (polypeptide) molecules in the reaction mix, the type of pegylation reaction to be performed, and the method of obtaining the selected N-terminally pegylated protein. The method of obtaining the N-terminally pegylated preparation (i.e., separating this moiety from other monopegylated moieties if necessary) may be by purification of the N-terminally pegylated material from a population of pegylated protein molecules. Selective proteins chemically modified at the N-terminus modification may be accomplished by reductive alkylation which exploits differential reactivity of different types of primary amino groups (lysine versus the N-terminal) available for derivatization in a particular protein. Under the appropriate reaction conditions, substantially selective derivatization of the protein at the N-terminus with a carbonyl group containing polymer is achieved. As indicated above, pegylation of the proteins of the invention may be accomplished by any number of means. For example, polyethylene glycol may be attached to the protein either directly or by an intervening linker. Linkerless systems for attaching polyethylene glycol to proteins are described in Delgado et al, Crit. Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys. 9:249-304 ( 1992); Francis et al. Intern. J. of Hematol. 65: 1 - 18 ( 1998); U.S. Patent No. 4,002,53 1 ; U.S. Patent No. 5,349,052; WO 95/06058; and WO 98/32466. the disclosures of each of which are incoφorated herein by reference. One system for attaching polyethylene glycol directly to amino acid residues of proteins without an intervening linker employs tresylated MPEG, which is produced by the modification of monmethoxy polyethylene glycol (MPEG) using tresylchloride (CISO 2 CH 2 CF 3 ). Upon reaction of protein with tresylated MPEG, polyethylene glycol is directly attached to amine groups of the protein. Thus, the invention includes protein-polyethylene glycol conjugates produced by reacting proteins of the invention with a polyethylene glycol molecule having a 2,2,2-trifluoreothane sulphonyl group. Polyethylene glycol can also be attached to proteins using a number of different intervening linkers. For example, U.S. Patent No. 5,612,460, the entire disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference, discloses urethane linkers for connecting polyethylene glycol to proteins. Protein-polyethylene glycol conjugates wherein the polyethylene glycol is attached to the protein by a linker can also be produced by reaction of proteins with compounds such as MPEG- succinimidylsuccinate, MPEG activated with l, l '-carbonyldiimidazole, MPEG- 2,4,5-trichloropenylcarbonate, MPEG-p-nitrophenolcarbonate, and various MPEG- succinate derivatives. A number additional polyethylene glycol derivatives and reaction chemistries for attaching polyethylene glycol to proteins are described in WO 98/32466, the entire disclosure of which is incoφorated herein by reference. Pegylated protein products produced using the reaction chemistries set out herein are included within the scope of the invention. The number of polyethylene glycol moieties attached to each protein of the invention (i.e., the degree of substitution) may also vary. For example, the pegylated proteins of the invention may be linked, on average, to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 20. or more polyethylene glycol molecules. Similarly, the average degree of substitution within ranges such as 1-3, 2-4, 3-5, 4-6, 5-7, 6-8. 7-9, 8- 10. 9-11, 10-12, 1 1-13, 12- 14, 13- 15, 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, or 18-20 polyethylene glycol moieties per protein molecule. Methods for determining the degree of substitution are discussed, for example, in Delgado et al, Crit. Rev. Thera. Drug Carrier Sys. 9:249- 304 (1992). The pancreatic cancer antigen polypeptides of the invention may be in monomers or multimers (i.e., dimers, trimers, tetramers and higher multimers). Accordingly, the present invention relates to monomers and multimers of the polypeptides of the invention, their preparation, and compositions (preferably, Therapeutics) containing them. In specific embodiments, the polypeptides of the invention are monomers, dimers. trimers or tetramers. In additional embodiments, the multimers of the invention are at least dimers, at least trimers, or at least tetramers. Multimers encompassed by the invention may be homomers or heteromers. As used herein, the term homomer, refers to a multimer containing only polypeptides corresponding to the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NON or an amino acid sequence encoded by SEQ ID ΝO:X, and/or an amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA in a related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library (including fragments, variants, splice variants, and fusion proteins, corresponding to any one of these as described herein). These homomers may contain polypeptides having identical or different amino acid sequences. In a specific embodiment, a homomer of the invention is a multimer containing only polypeptides having an identical amino acid sequence. In another specific embodiment, a homomer of the invention is a multimer containing polypeptides having different amino acid sequences. In specific embodiments, the multimer of the invention is a homodimer (e.g., containing polypeptides having identical or different amino acid sequences) or a homotrimer (e.g., containing polypeptides having identical and/or different amino acid sequences). In additional embodiments, the homomeric multimer of the invention is at least a homodimer, at least a homotrimer, or at least a homotetramer. As used herein, the term heteromer refers to a multimer containing one or more heterologous polypeptides (i.e., polypeptides of different proteins ) in addition to the polypeptides of the invention. In a specific embodiment, the multimer of the invention is a heterodimer. a heterotrimer, or a heterotetramer. In additional embodiments, the heteromeric multimer of the invention is at least a heterodimer, at least a heterotrimer, or at least a heterotetramer. Multimers of the invention may be the result of hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent associations and/or may be indirectly linked, by for example, liposome formation. Thus, in one embodiment, multimers of the invention, such as, for example, homodimers or homotrimers. are formed when polypeptides of the invention contact one another in solution. In another embodiment, heteromultimers of the invention, such as. for example, heterotrimers or heterotetramers, are formed when polypeptides of the invention contact antibodies to the polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies to the heterologous polypeptide sequence in a fusion protein of the invention) in solution. In other embodiments, multimers of the invention are formed by covalent associations with and/or between the polypeptides of the invention. Such covalent associations may involve one or more amino acid residues contained in the polypeptide sequence (e.g., that recited in SEQ ID NON, or contained in a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID ΝO:X, and/or by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in a deposited library). In one instance, the covalent associations are cross-linking between cysteine residues located within the polypeptide sequences which interact in the native (i.e., naturally occurring) polypeptide. In another instance, the covalent associations are the consequence of chemical or recombinant manipulation. Alternatively, such covalent associations may involve one or more amino acid residues contained in the heterologous polypeptide sequence in a fusion protein. In one example, covalent associations are between the heterologous sequence contained in a fusion protein of the invention (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925). In a specific example, the covalent associations are between the heterologous sequence contained in a Fc fusion protein of the invention (as described herein). In another specific example, covalent associations of fusion proteins of the invention are between heterologous polypeptide sequence from another protein that is capable of forming covalently associated multimers, such as for example, oseteoprotegerin (see, e.g., International Publication NO: WO 98/49305, the contents of which are herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). In another embodiment, two or more polypeptides of the invention are joined through peptide linkers. Examples include those peptide linkers described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,073,627 (hereby incoφorated by reference). Proteins comprising multiple polypeptides of the invention separated by peptide linkers may be produced using conventional recombinant DNA technology. Another method for preparing multimer polypeptides of the invention involves use of polypeptides of the invention fused to a leucine zipper or isoleucine zipper polypeptide sequence. Leucine zipper and isoleucine zipper domains are polypeptides that promote multimerization of the proteins in which they are found. Leucine zippers were originally identified in several DNA-binding proteins (Landschulz et al., Science 240: 1759, ( 1988)), and have since been found in a variety of different proteins. Among the known leucine zippers are naturally occurring peptides and derivatives thereof that dimerize or trimerize. Examples of leucine zipper domains suitable for producing soluble multimeric proteins of the invention are those described in PCT application WO 94/10308, hereby incoφorated by reference. Recombinant fusion proteins comprising a polypeptide of the invention fused to a polypeptide sequence that dimerizes or trimerizes in solution are expressed in suitable host cells, and the resulting soluble multimeric fusion protein is recovered from the culture supernatant using techniques known in the art. Trimeric polypeptides of the invention may offer the advantage of enhanced biological activity. Preferred leucine zipper moieties and isoleucine moieties are those that preferentially form trimers. One example is a leucine zipper derived from lung surfactant protein D (SPD), as described in Hoppe et al. (FEBS Letters 344: 191, (1994)) and in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/446,922, hereby incoφorated by reference. Other peptides derived from naturally occurring trimeric proteins may be employed in preparing trimeric polypeptides of the invention. In another example, proteins of the invention are associated by interactions between Flag® polypeptide sequence contained in fusion proteins of the invention containing Flag® polypeptide seuqence. In a further embodiment, associations proteins of the invention are associated by interactions between heterologous polypeptide sequence contained in Flag® fusion proteins of the invention and anti- Flag® antibody. The multimers of the invention may be generated using chemical techniques known in the art. For example, polypeptides desired to be contained in the multimers of the invention may be chemically cross-linked using linker molecules and linker molecule length optimization techniques known in the art (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety). Additionally, multimers of the invention may be generated using techniques known in the art to form one or more inter-molecule cross-links between the cysteine residues located within the sequence of the polypeptides desired to be contained in the multimer (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Further, polypeptides of the invention may be routinely modified by the addition of cysteine or biotin to the C-terminus or N-terminus of the polypeptide and techniques known in the art may be applied to generate multimers containing one or more of these modified polypeptides (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Additionally, techniques known in the art may be applied to generate liposomes containing the polypeptide components desired to be contained in the multimer of the invention (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Alternatively, multimers of the invention may be generated using genetic engineering techniques known in the art. In one embodiment, polypeptides contained in multimers of the invention are produced recombinantly using fusion protein technology described herein or otherwise known in the art (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). In a specific embodiment, polynucleotides coding for a homodimer of the invention are generated by ligating a polynucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide of the invention to a sequence encoding a linker polypeptide and then further to a synthetic polynucleotide encoding the translated product of the polypeptide in the reverse orientation from the original C-terminus to the N-terminus (lacking the leader sequence) (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5.478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). In another embodiment, recombinant techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art are applied to generate recombinant polypeptides of the invention which contain a transmembrane domain (or hyrophobic or signal peptide) and which can be incoφorated by membrane reconstitution techniques into liposomes (see, e.g., US Patent Number 5,478,925, which is herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Antibodies Further polypeptides of the invention relate to antibodies and T-cell antigen receptors (TCR) which immunospecifically bind a polypeptide, polypeptide fragment, or variant of SEQ ID NO:Y, and/or an epitope, of the present invention (as determined by immunoassays well known in the art for assaying specific antibody- antigen binding). Antibodies of the invention include, but are not limited to, polyclonal, monoclonal, multispecific, human, humanized or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab') fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies (including, e.g., anti-Id antibodies to antibodies of the invention), and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above. The term "antibody," as used herein, refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site that immunospecifically binds an antigen. The immunoglobulin molecules of the invention can be of any type (e.g., IgG, IgE, IgM, IgD, IgA and IgY), class (e.g., IgGl, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl and IgA2) or subclass of immunoglobulin molecule. Most preferably the antibodies are human antigen-binding antibody fragments of the present invention and include, but are not limited to, Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2, Fd, single-chain Fvs (scFv), single-chain antibodies, disulfide-linked Fvs (sdFv) and fragments comprising either a VL or VH domain. Antigen-binding antibody fragments, including single-chain antibodies, may comprise the variable region(s) alone or in combination with the entirety or a portion of the following: hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains. Also included in the invention are antigen-binding fragments also comprising any combination of variable region(s) with a hinge region, CHI, CH2, and CH3 domains. The antibodies of the invention may be from any animal origin including birds and mammals. Preferably, the antibodies are human, murine (e.g., mouse and rat), donkey, ship rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, horse, or chicken. As used herein, "human" antibodies include antibodies having the amino acid sequence of a human immunoglobulin and include antibodies isolated from human immunoglobulin libraries or from animals transgenic for one or more human immunoglobulin and that do not express endogenous immunoglobulins, as described infra and. for example in, U.S. Patent No. 5,939,598 by Kucherlapati et al. The antibodies of the present invention may be monospecific, bispecific, trispecific or of greater multispecificity. Multispecific antibodies may be specific for different epitopes of a polypeptide of the present invention or may be specific for both a polypeptide of the present invention as well as for a heterologous epitope, such as a heterologous polypeptide or solid support material. See, e.g., PCT publications WO 93/17715; WO 92/08802; WO 91/00360; WO 92/05793; Tutt, et al., J. Immunol. 147:60-69 (1991); U.S. Patent Nos. 4,474,893; 4,714,681 ; 4,925,648; 5,573,920; 5,601,819; Kostelny et al.. J. Immunol. 148: 1547-1553 (1992). Antibodies of the present invention may be described or specified in terms of the epitope(s) or portion(s) of a polypeptide of the present invention which they recognize or specifically bind. The epitope(s) or polypeptide portion(s) may be specified as described herein, e.g., by N-terminal and C-terminal positions, or by size in contiguous amino acid residues. Antibodies which specifically bind any epitope or polypeptide of the present invention may also be excluded. Therefore, the present invention includes antibodies that specifically bind polypeptides of the present invention, and allows for the exclusion of the same. Antibodies of the present invention may also be described or specified in terms of their cross-reactivity. Antibodies that do not bind any other analog, ortholog, or homolog of a polypeptide of the present invention are included. Antibodies that bind polypeptides with at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 65%. at least 60%, at least 55%, and at least 50% identity (as calculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to a polypeptide of the present invention are also included in the present invention. In specific embodiments, antibodies of the present invention cross-react with murine, rat and/or rabbit homologs of human proteins and the corresponding epitopes thereof. Antibodies that do not bind polypeptides with less than 95%, less than 90%, less than 85%, less than 80%, less than 75%, less than 70%, less than 65%, less than 60%, less than 55%, and less than 50% identity (as calculated using methods known in the art and described herein) to a polypeptide of the present invention are also included in the present invention. In a specific embodiment, the above-described cross-reactivity is with respect to any single specific antigenic or immunogenic polypeptide, or combination(s) of 2, 3, 4, 5, or more of the specific antigenic and/or immunogenic polypeptides disclosed herein. Further included in the present invention are antibodies which bind polypeptides encoded by polynucleotides which hybridize to a polynucleotide of the present invention under stringent hybridization conditions (as described herein). Antibodies of the present invention may also be described or specified in terms of their binding affinity to a polypeptide of the invention. Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 X 10 " M, 10 "2 M, 5 X 10 "3 M, 10 "3 M, 5 X 10 "4 M, 10 "4 M, 5 X 10 "5 M, 10 "5 M, 5 X 10 "6 M, 10 "6 M, 5 X 10 "7 M, 10 7 M, 5 X 10 "8 M, 10 "8 M, 5 X 10 "9 M, 10 "9 M, 5 X 10 "10 M, 10 "10 M, 5 X 10 ' " M, 10 " " M, 5 X 10 " 12 M, l0"12 M, 5 X 10 "13 M, 10 "13 M, 5 X 10 '14 M, 10 " ,4 M, 5 X 10 "15 M, or 10 15 M. The invention also provides antibodies that competitively inhibit binding of an antibody to an epitope of the invention as determined by any method known in the art for determining competitive binding, for example, the immunoassays described herein. In preferred embodiments, the antibody competitively inhibits binding to the epitope by at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 85 %, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, or at least 50%. Antibodies of the present invention may act as agonists or antagonists of the polypeptides of the present invention. For example, the present invention includes antibodies which disrupt the receptor/ligand interactions with the polypeptides of the invention either partially or fully. Preferrably, antibodies of the present invention bind an antigenic epitope disclosed herein, or a portion thereof. The invention features both receptor-specific antibodies and ligand-specific antibodies. The invention also features receptor-specific antibodies which do not prevent ligand binding but prevent receptor activation. Receptor activation (i.e., signaling) may be determined by techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art. For example, receptor activation can be determined by detecting the phosphorylation (e.g., tyrosine or serine/threonine) of the receptor or its substrate by immunoprecipitation followed by western blot analysis (for example, as described supra). In specific embodiments, antibodies are provided that inhibit ligand activity or receptor activity by at least 95%, at least 90%. at least 85%, at least 80%, at least 75%, at least 70%, at least 60%, or at least 50% of the activity in absence of the antibody. The invention also features receptor-specific antibodies which both prevent ligand binding and receptor activation as well as antibodies that recognize the receptor-ligand complex, and, preferably, do not specifically recognize the unbound receptor or the unbound ligand. Likewise, included in the invention are neutralizing antibodies which bind the ligand and prevent binding of the ligand to the receptor, as well as antibodies which bind the ligand, thereby preventing receptor activation, but do not prevent the ligand from binding the receptor. Further included in the invention are antibodies which activate the receptor. These antibodies may act as receptor agonists, i.e., potentiate or activate either all or a subset of the biological activities of the ligand-mediated receptor activation, for example, by inducing dimerization of the receptor. The antibodies may be specified as agonists, antagonists or inverse agonists for biological activities comprising the specific biological activities of the peptides of the invention disclosed herein. The above antibody agonists can be made using methods known in the art. See, e.g., PCT publication WO 96/40281; U.S. Patent No. 5,81 1,097; Deng et al., Blood 92(6): 1981 - 1988 (1998); Chen et al.. Cancer Res. 58(16):3668-3678 (1998); Harrop et al., J. Immunol. 161(4): 1786- 1794 (1998); Zhu et al.. Cancer Res. 58(15):3209-3214 (1998); Yoon et al.. J. Immunol. 160(7):3170- 3 179 ( 1998); Prat et al.. J. Cell. Sci. 1 1 l(Pt2):237-247 ( 1998); Pitard et al., J. Immunol. Methods 205(2): 177- 190 (1997); Liautard et al., Cytokine 9(4):233-241 ( 1997); Carlson et al., J. Biol. Chem. 272(17): ! 1295-1 1301 ( 1997); Taryman et al., Neuron 14(4):755-762 ( 1995); Muller et al., Structure 6(9): 1 153-1 167 ( 1998); Bartunek et al.. Cytokine 8( 1): 14-20 (1996) (which are all incoφorated by reference herein in their entireties). Antibodies of the present invention may be used, for example, but not limited to, to purify, detect, and target the polypeptides of the present invention, including both in vitro and in vivo diagnostic and therapeutic methods. For example, the antibodies have use in immunoassays for qualitatively and quantitatively measuring levels of the polypeptides of the present invention in biological samples. See, e.g., Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988) (incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety). As discussed in more detail below, the antibodies of the present invention may be used either alone or in combination with other compositions. The antibodies may further be recombinantly fused to a heterologous polypeptide at the N- or C-terminus or chemically conjugated (including covalently and non-covalently conjugations) to polypeptides or other compositions. For example, antibodies of the present invention may be recombinantly fused or conjugated to molecules useful as labels in detection assays and effector molecules such as heterologous polypeptides, drugs, radionuclides, or toxins. See, e.g., PCT publications WO 92/08495; WO 91/14438; WO 89/12624; U.S. Patent No. 5,314,995; and EP 396,387. The antibodies of the invention include derivatives that are modified, i.e, by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule to the antibody such that covalent attachment does not prevent the antibody from generating an anti-idiotypic response. For example, but not by way of limitation, the antibody derivatives include antibodies that have been modified, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including, but not limited to specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc. Additionally, the derivative may contain one or more non-classical amino acids. The antibodies of the present invention may be generated by any suitable method known in the art. Polyclonal antibodies to an antigen-of- interest can be produced by various procedures well known in the art. For example, a polypeptide of the invention can be administered to various host animals including, but not limited to, rabbits, mice, rats, etc. to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies specific for the antigen. Various adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, and include but are not limited to, Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions. peptides. oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanins, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and corynebacterium parvum. Such adjuvants are also well known in the art. Monoclonal antibodies can be prepared using a wide variety of techniques known in the art including the use of hybridoma, recombinant, and phage display technologies, or a combination thereof. For example, monoclonal antibodies can be produced using hybridoma techniques including those known in the art and taught, for example, in Harlow et al., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd ed. 1988); Hammerling, et al., in: Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas 563-681 (Elsevier, N.Y., 1981) (said references incoφorated by reference in their entireties). The term "monoclonal antibody" as used herein is not limited to antibodies produced through hybridoma technology. The term "monoclonal antibody" refers to an antibody that is derived from a single clone, including any eukaryotic, prokaryotic. or phage clone, and not the method by which it is produced. Methods for producing and screening for specific antibodies using hybridoma technology are routine and well known in the art and are discussed in detail in the Examples. In a non-limiting example, mice can be immunized with a polypeptide of the invention or a cell expressing such peptide. Once an immune response is detected, e.g., antibodies specific for the antigen are detected in the mouse serum, the mouse spleen is harvested and splenocytes isolated. The splenocytes are then fused by well known techniques to any suitable myeloma cells, for example cells from cell line SP20 available from the ATCC. Hybridomas are selected and cloned by limited dilution. The hybridoma clones are then assayed by methods known in the art for cells that secrete antibodies capable of binding a polypeptide of the invention. Ascites fluid, which generally contains high levels of antibodies, can be generated by immunizing mice with positive hybridoma clones. Accordingly, the present invention provides methods of generating monoclonal antibodies as well as antibodies produced by the method comprising culturing a hybridoma cell secreting an antibody of the invention wherein, preferably, the hybridoma is generated by fusing splenocytes isolated from a mouse immunized with an antigen of the invention with myeloma cells and then screening the hybridomas resulting from the fusion for hybridoma clones that secrete an antibody able to bind a polypeptide of the invention. Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques. For example, Fab and F(ab')2 fragments of the invention may be produced by proteolytic cleavage of immunoglobulin molecules, using enzymes such as papain (to produce Fab fragments) or pepsin (to produce F(ab')2 fragments). F(ab')2 fragments contain the variable region, the light chain constant region and the CHI domain of the heavy chain. For example, the antibodies of the present invention can also be generated using various phage display methods known in the art. In phage display methods, functional antibody domains are displayed on the surface of phage particles which carry the polynucleotide sequences encoding them. In a particular embodiment, such phage can be utilized to display antigen binding domains expressed from a repertoire or combinatorial antibody library (e.g., human or murine). Phage expressing an antigen binding domain that binds the antigen of interest can be selected or identified with antigen, e.g., using labeled antigen or antigen bound or captured to a solid surface or bead. Phage used in these methods are typically filamentous phage including fd and M 13 binding domains expressed from phage with Fab, Fv or disulfide stabilized Fv antibody domains recombinantly fused to either the phage gene III or gene VIII protein. Examples of phage display methods that can be used to make the antibodies of the present invention include those disclosed in Brinkman et al., J. Immunol. Methods 182:41 -50 ( 1995); Ames et al., J. Immunol. Methods 184: 177-186 ( 1995); Kettleborough et al.. Eur. J. Immunol. 24:952-958 ( 1994); Persic et al.. Gene 187 9-18 (1997); Burton et al.. Advances in Immunology 57: 191-280 ( 1994); PCT application No. PCT/GB91/01 134; PCT publications WO 90/02809; WO 91/10737; WO 92/01047; WO 92/18619; WO 93/1 1236; WO 95/15982; WO 95/20401 ; and U.S. Patent Nos. 5,698.426; 5,223,409; 5,403,484; 5,580,717; 5,427,908; 5,750,753; 5,821,047; 5,571 ,698; 5,427,908; 5,516,637; 5,780,225; 5,658,727; 5,733,743 and 5,969,108; each of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. As described in the above references, after phage selection, the antibody coding regions from the phage can be isolated and used to generate whole antibodies, including human antibodies, or any other desired antigen binding fragment, and expressed in any desired host, including mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, yeast, and bacteria, e.g., as described in detail below. For example, techniques to recombinantly produce Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2 fragments can also be employed using methods known in the art such as those disclosed in PCT publication WO 92/22324; Mullinax et al., BioTechniques 12(6):864-869 ( 1992); and Sawai et al., AJRI 34:26- 34 ( 1995); and Better et al., Science 240: 1041-1043 ( 1988) (said references incoφorated by reference in their entireties). Examples of techniques which can be used to produce single-chain Fvs and antibodies include those described in U.S. Patents 4,946,778 and 5,258,498; Huston et al., Methods in Enzymology 203:46-88 ( 1991); Shu et al., PNAS 90:7995-7999 (1993); and Skerra et al.. Science 240: 1038- 1040 (1988). For some uses, including in vivo use of antibodies in humans and in vitro detection assays, it may be preferable to use chimeric, humanized, or human antibodies. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions of the antibody are derived from different animal species, such as antibodies having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region. Methods for producing chimeric antibodies are known in the art. See e.g., Morrison, Science 229: 1202 (1985); Oi et al., BioTechniques 4:214 ( 1986): Gillies et al., (1989) J. Immunol. Methods 125: 191-202; U.S. Patent Nos. 5.807,715; 4,816,567; and 4,816397, which are incoφorated herein by reference in their entirety. Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species antibody that binds the desired antigen having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non- human species and a framework regions from a human immunoglobulin molecule. Often, framework residues in the human framework regions will be substituted with the corresponding residue from the CDR donor antibody to alter, preferably improve, antigen binding. These framework substitutions are identified by methods well known in the art, e.g., by modeling of the interactions of the CDR and framework residues to identify framework residues important for antigen binding and sequence comparison to identify unusual framework residues at particular positions. (See, e.g., Queen et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,585,089; Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323 ( 1988), which are incoφorated herein by reference in their entireties.) Antibodies can be humanized using a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, CDR-grafting (EP 239,400; PCT publication WO 91/09967; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,225,539; 5,530,101 ; and 5,585,089), veneering or resurfacing (EP 592,106; EP 519,596; Padlan, Molecular Immunology 28(4/5):489-498 (1991); Studnicka et al., Protein Engineering 7(6):805-814 (1994); Roguska. et al., PNAS 91 :969-973 (1994)), and chain shuffling (U.S. Patent No. 5,565.332). Completely human antibodies are particularly desirable for therapeutic treatment of human patients. Human antibodies can be made by a variety of methods known in the art including phage display methods described above using antibody libraries derived from human immunoglobulin sequences. See also, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,444,887 and 4.716,1 1 1 ; and PCT publications WO 98/46645, WO 98/50433, WO 98/24893, WO 98/16654, WO 96/34096, WO 96/33735, and WO 91/10741 ; each of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. Human antibodies can also be produced using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing functional endogenous immunoglobulins, but which can express human immunoglobulin genes. For example, the human heavy and light chain immunoglobulin gene complexes may be introduced randomly or by homologous recombination into mouse embryonic stem cells. Alternatively, the human variable region, constant region, and diversity region may be introduced into mouse embryonic stem cells in addition to the human heavy and light chain genes. The mouse heavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes may be rendered nonfunctional separately or simultaneously with the introduction of human immunoglobulin loci by homologous recombination. In particular, homozygous deletion of the JH region prevents endogenous antibody production. The modified embryonic stem cells are expanded and microinjected into blastocysts to produce chimeric mice. The chimeric mice are then bred to produce homozygous offspring which express human antibodies. The transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide of the invention. Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained from the immunized, transgenic mice using conventional hybridoma technology. The human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible to produce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA, IgM and IgE antibodies. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93 (1995). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see, e.g., PCT publications WO 98/24893; WO 92/01047; WO 96/34096; WO 96/33735; European Patent No. 0 598 877; U.S. Patent Nos. 5,413.923; 5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,569.825; 5,661,016; 5,545,806; 5,814,318; 5,885.793; 5,916.771 ; and 5,939,598, which are incoφorated by reference herein in their entirety. In addition, companies such as Abgenix, Inc. (Freemont. CA) and Genpharm (San Jose, CA) can be engaged to provide human antibodies directed against a selected antigen using technology similar to that described above. Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique referred to as "guided selection." In this approach a selected non-human monoclonal antibody, e.g., a mouse antibody, is used to guide the selection of a completely human antibody recognizing the same epitope. (Jespers et al.. Bio/technology 12:899-903 (1988)). Further, antibodies to the polypeptides of the invention can, in turn, be utilized to generate anti-idiotype antibodies that "mimic" polypeptides of the invention using techniques well known to those skilled in the art. (See, e.g., Greenspan & Bona, FASEB J. 7(5):437-444; ( 1989) and Nissinoff. J. Immunol. 147(8):2429-2438 (1991)). For example, antibodies which bind to and competitively inhibit polypeptide multimerization and/or binding of a polypeptide of the invention to a ligand can be used to generate anti-idiotypes that "mimic" the polypeptide multimerization and/or binding domain and, as a consequence, bind to and neutralize polypeptide and/or its ligand. Such neutralizing anti-idiotypes or Fab fragments of such anti-idiotypes can be used in therapeutic regimens to neutralize polypeptide ligand. For example, such anti-idiotypic antibodies can be used to bind a polypeptide of the invention and/or to bind its ligands/receptors. and thereby block its biological activity. Polynucleotides Encoding Antibodies The invention further provides polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding an antibody of the invention and fragments thereof. The invention also encompasses polynucleotides that hybridize under stringent or alternatively, under lower stringency hybridization conditions, e.g., as defined supra, to polynucleotides that encode an antibody, preferably, that specifically binds to a polypeptide of the invention, preferably, an antibody that binds to a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NON. The polynucleotides may be obtained, and the nucleotide sequence of the polynucleotides determined, by any method known in the art. For example, if the nucleotide sequence of the antibody is known, a polynucleotide encoding the antibody may be assembled from chemically synthesized oligonucleotides (e.g., as described in Kutmeier et al.. BioTechniques 17:242 (1994)), which, briefly, involves the synthesis of overlapping oligonucleotides containing portions of the sequence encoding the antibody, annealing and ligating of those oligonucleotides, and then amplification of the ligated oligonucleotides by PCR. Alternatively, a polynucleotide encoding an antibody may be generated from nucleic acid from a suitable source. If a clone containing a nucleic acid encoding a particular antibody is not available, but the sequence of the antibody molecule is known, a nucleic acid encoding the immunoglobulin may be chemically synthesized or obtained from a suitable source (e.g., an antibody cDΝA library, or a cDΝA library generated from, or nucleic acid, preferably poly A+ RΝA, isolated from, any tissue or cells expressing the antibody, such as hybridoma cells selected to express an antibody of the invention) by PCR amplification using synthetic primers hybridizable to the 3' and 5' ends of the sequence or by cloning using an oligonucleotide probe specific for the particular gene sequence to identify, e.g., a cDΝA clone from a cDΝA library that encodes the antibody. Amplified nucleic acids generated by PCR may then be cloned into replicable cloning vectors using any method well known in the art. Once the nucleotide sequence and corresponding amino acid sequence of the antibody is determined, the nucleotide sequence of the antibody may be manipulated using methods well known in the art for the manipulation of nucleotide sequences, e.g., recombinant DΝA techniques, site directed mutagenesis, PCR, etc. (see, for example, the techniques described in Sambrook et al., 1990, Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, 2d Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, ΝY and Ausubel et al., eds., 1998, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, NY, which are both incoφorated by reference herein in their entireties ), to generate antibodies having a different amino acid sequence, for example to create amino acid substitutions, deletions, and/or insertions. In a specific embodiment, the amino acid sequence of the heavy and/or light chain variable domains may be inspected to identify the sequences of the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) by methods that are well know in the art, e.g., by comparison to known amino acid sequences of other heavy and light chain variable regions to determine the regions of sequence hypervariability. Using routine recombinant DNA techniques, one or more of the CDRs may be inserted within framework regions, e.g., into human framework regions to humanize a non- human antibody, as described supra. The framework regions may be naturally occurring or consensus framework regions, and preferably human framework regions (see, e.g., Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol. 278: 457-479 ( 1998) for a listing of human framework regions). Preferably, the polynucleotide generated by the combination of the framework regions and CDRs encodes an antibody that specifically binds a polypeptide of the invention. Preferably, as discussed supra, one or more amino acid substitutions may be made within the framework regions, and, preferably, the amino acid substitutions improve binding of the antibody to its antigen. Additionally, such methods may be used to make amino acid substitutions or deletions of one or more variable region cysteine residues participating in an intrachain disulfide bond to generate antibody molecules lacking one or more intrachain disulfide bonds. Other alterations to the polynucleotide are encompassed by the present invention and within the skill of the art. In addition, techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies" (Morrison et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81 :851-855 (1984); Neuberger et al., Nature 312:604-608 (1984); Takeda et al., Nature 314:452-454 (1985)) by splicing genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used. As described supra, a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region, e.g., humanized antibodies. Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies (U.S. Patent No. 4,946,778; Bird, Science 242:423- 42 ( 1988); Huston et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883 ( 1988); and Ward et al., Nature 334:544-54 (1989)) can be adapted to produce single chain antibodies. Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain polypeptide. Techniques for the assembly of functional Fv fragments in E. coli may also be used (Skerra et al., Science 242: 1038- 1041 (1988)). Methods of Producing Antibodies The antibodies of the invention can be produced by any method known in the art for the synthesis of antibodies, in particular, by chemical synthesis or preferably, by recombinant expression techniques. Recombinant expression of an antibody of the invention, or fragment, derivative or analog thereof, (e.g., a heavy or light chain of an antibody of the invention or a single chain antibody of the invention), requires construction of an expression vector containing a polynucleotide that encodes the antibody. Once a polynucleotide encoding an antibody molecule or a heavy or light chain of an antibody, or portion thereof (preferably containing the heavy or light chain variable domain), of the invention has been obtained, the vector for the production of the antibody molecule may be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art. Thus, methods for preparing a protein by expressing a polynucleotide containing an antibody encoding nucleotide sequence are described herein. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences and appropriate transcriptional and translational control signals. These methods include, for example, in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. The invention, thus, provides replicable vectors comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding an antibody molecule of the invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, or a heavy or light chain variable domain, operably linked to a promoter. Such vectors may include the nucleotide sequence encoding the constant region of the antibody molecule (see, e.g., PCT Publication WO 86/05807; PCT Publication WO 89/01036; and U.S. Patent No. 5,122,464) and the variable domain of the antibody may be cloned into such a vector for expression of the entire heavy or light chain. The expression vector is transferred to a host cell by conventional techniques and the transfected cells are then cultured by conventional techniques to produce an antibody of the invention. Thus, the invention includes host cells containing a polynucleotide encoding an antibody of the invention, or a heavy or light chain thereof, or a single chain antibody of the invention, operably linked to a heterologous promoter. In preferred embodiments for the expression of double-chained antibodies, vectors encoding both the heavy and light chains may be co-expressed in the host cell for expression of the entire immunoglobulin molecule, as detailed below. A variety of host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express the antibody molecules of the invention. Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, express an antibody molecule of the invention in situ. These include but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli, B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; yeast (e.g., Saccharomyces, Pichia) transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing antibody coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing antibody coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing antibody coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g., COS. CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3 cells) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter). Preferably, bacterial cells such as Escherichia coli, and more preferably, eukaryotic cells, especially for the expression of whole recombinant antibody molecule, are used for the expression of a recombinant antibody molecule. For example, mammalian cells such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO), in conjunction with a vector such as the major intermediate early gene promoter element from human cytomegalovirus is an effective expression system for antibodies (Foecking et al.. Gene 45: 101 (1986); Cockett et al., Bio/Technology 8:2 ( 1990)). In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the antibody molecule being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such a protein is to be produced, for the generation of pharmaceutical compositions of an antibody molecule, vectors which direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited, to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al., EMBO J. 2: 1791 (1983)), in which the antibody coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, Nucleic Acids Res. 13:3101-3109 ( 1985); Van Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem. 24:5503- 5509 ( 1989)); and the like. pGEX vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsoφtion and binding to matrix glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. The pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety. In an insect system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes. The virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells. The antibody coding sequence may be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter). In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems may be utilized. In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, the antibody coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non- essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region E l or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing the antibody molecule in infected hosts, (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81 :355-359 ( 1984)). Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted antibody coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. (see Bittner et al., Methods in Enzymol. 153:51-544 (1987)). In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein. Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post- translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed. To this end. eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product may be used. Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO. VERY. BHK, Hela, COS. MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, and in particular, breast cancer cell lines such as, for example, BT483, Hs578T, HTB2, BT20 and T47D, and normal mammary gland cell line such as, for example, CR-L7030 and Hs578Bst. For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is preferred. For example, cell lines which stably express the antibody molecule may be engineered. Rather than using expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication, host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker. Following the introduction of the foreign DNA, engineered cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media. The selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow to form foci which in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines. This method may advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which express the antibody molecule. Such engineered cell lines may be particularly useful in screening and evaluation of compounds that interact directly or indirectly with the antibody molecule. A number of selection systems may be used, including but not limited to the heφes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 1 1 :223 ( 1977)), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 48:202 (1992)), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22:817 (1980)) genes can be employed in tk-, hgprt- or aprt- cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: dhfr, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al., Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:357 (1980); O'Hare et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78: 1527 (1981)); gpt, which confers resistance to mycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:2072 (1981)); neo, which confers resistance to the aminoglycoside G- 418 Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505; Wu and Wu, Biotherapy 3:87-95 ( 1991); Tolstoshev, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596 ( 1993); Mulligan, Science 260:926-932 (1993); and Morgan and Anderson, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 62: 191-217 ( 1993); May, 1993, TIB TECH 1 1(5): 155-215); and hygro, which confers resistance to hygromycin (Santerre et al., Gene 30: 147 (1984)). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technology may be routinely applied to select the desired recombinant clone, and such methods are described, for example, in Ausubel et al. (eds.), Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons. NY (1993); Kriegler, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY ( 1990); and in Chapters 12 and 13, Dracopoli et al. (eds). Current Protocols in Human Genetics. John Wiley & Sons, NY ( 1994); Colberre-Garapin et al., J. Mol. Biol. 150: 1 ( 1981 ), which are incoφorated by reference herein in their entireties. The expression levels of an antibody molecule can be increased by vector amplification (for a review, see Bebbington and Hentschel, The use of vectors based on gene amplification for the expression of cloned genes in mammalian cells in DNA cloning, Vol.3. (Academic Press, New York, 1987)). When a marker in the vector system expressing antibody is amplifiable, increase in the level of inhibitor present in culture of host cell will increase the number of copies of the marker gene. Since the amplified region is associated with the antibody gene, production of the antibody will also increase (Crouse et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 3:257 (1983)). The host cell may be co-transfected with two expression vectors of the invention, the first vector encoding a heavy chain derived polypeptide and the second vector encoding a light chain derived polypeptide. The two vectors may contain identical selectable markers which enable equal expression of heavy and light chain polypeptides. Alternatively, a single vector may be used which encodes, and is capable of expressing, both heavy and light chain polypeptides. In such situations, the light chain should be placed before the heavy chain to avoid an excess of toxic free heavy chain (Proudfoot, Nature 322:52 (1986); Kohler, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:2197 (1980)). The coding sequences for the heavy and light chains may comprise cDNA or genomic DNA. Once an antibody molecule of the invention has been produced by an animal, chemically synthesized, or recombinantly expressed, it may be purified by any method known in the art for purification of an immunoglobulin molecule, for example, by chromatography (e.g., ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins. In addition, the antibodies of the present invention or fragments thereof can be fused to heterologous polypeptide sequences described herein or otherwise known in the art, to facilitate purification. The present invention encompasses antibodies recombinantly fused or chemically conjugated (including both covalently and non-covalently conjugations) to a polypeptide (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of the polypeptide) of the present invention to generate fusion proteins. The fusion does not necessarily need to be direct, but may occur through linker sequences. The antibodies may be specific for antigens other than polypeptides (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 amino acids of the polypeptide) of the present invention. For example, antibodies may be used to target the polypeptides of the present invention to particular cell types, either in vitro or in vivo, by fusing or conjugating the polypeptides of the present invention to antibodies specific for particular cell surface receptors. Antibodies fused or conjugated to the polypeptides of the present invention may also be used in in vitro immunoassays and purification methods using methods known in the art. See e.g., Harbor et al., supra, and PCT publication WO 93/21232; EP 439,095; Naramura et al., Immunol. Lett. 39:91 -99 (1994); U.S. Patent 5,474,981 ; Gillies et al., PNAS 89: 1428-1432 (1992); Fell et al., J. Immunol. 146:2446-2452( 1991), which are incoφorated by reference in their entireties. The present invention further includes compositions comprising the polypeptides of the present invention fused or conjugated to antibody domains other than the variable regions. For example, the polypeptides of the present invention may be fused or conjugated to an antibody Fc region, or portion thereof. The antibody portion fused to a polypeptide of the present invention may comprise the constant region, hinge region, CH I domain. CH2 domain, and CH3 domain or any combination of whole domains or portions thereof. The polypeptides may also be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to form multimers. For example, Fc portions fused to the polypeptides of the present invention can form dimers through disulfide bonding between the Fc portions. Higher multimeric forms can be made by fusing the polypeptides to portions of IgA and IgM. Methods for fusing or conjugating the polypeptides of the present invention to antibody portions are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,336,603; 5,622.929; 5,359,046; 5,349,053; 5,447,851 ; 5,1 12.946; EP 307,434; EP 367,166; PCT publications WO 96/04388; WO 91/06570; Ashkenazi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88: 10535- 10539 (1991 ); Zheng et al., J. Immunol. 154:5590-5600 (1995); and Vil et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89: 1 1337- 1 1341( 1992) (said references incoφorated by reference in their entireties). As discussed, supra, the polypeptides corresponding to a polypeptide, polypeptide fragment, or a variant of SEQ ID NO:Y may be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to increase the in vivo half life of the polypeptides or for use in immunoassays using methods known in the art. Further, the polypeptides corresponding to SEQ ID NO:Y may be fused or conjugated to the above antibody portions to facilitate purification. One reported example describes chimeric proteins consisting of the first two domains of the human CD4-polypeptide and various domains of the constant regions of the heavy or light chains of mammalian immunoglobulins. (EP 394,827; Traunecker et al., Nature 331 :84-86 (1988). The polypeptides of the present invention fused or conjugated to an antibody having disulfide- linked dimeric structures (due to the IgG) may also be more efficient in binding and neutralizing other molecules, than the monomeric secreted protein or protein fragment alone. (Fountoulakis et al., J. Biochem. 270:3958-3964 (1995)). In many cases, the Fc part in a fusion protein is beneficial in therapy and diagnosis, and thus can result in. for example, improved pharmacokinetic properties. (EP A 232,262). Alternatively, deleting the Fc part after the fusion protein has been expressed, detected, and purified, would be desired. For example, the Fc portion may hinder therapy and diagnosis if the fusion protein is used as an antigen for immunizations. In drug discovery, for example, human proteins, such as hIL-5, have been fused with Fc portions for the puφose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists of hIL-5. (See, Bennett et al., J. Molecular Recognition 8:52-58 ( 1995); Johanson et al., J. Biol. Chem. 270:9459-9471 ( 1995). Moreover, the antibodies or fragments thereof of the present invention can be fused to marker sequences, such as a peptide to facilitate purification. In preferred embodiments, the marker amino acid sequence is a hexa-histidine peptide, such as the tag provided in a pQE vector (QIAGEN, Inc., 9259 Eton Avenue. Chatsworth, CA, 9131 1 ), among others, many of which are commercially available. As described in Gentz et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:821 -824 ( 1989), for instance, hexa- histidine provides for convenient purification of the fusion protein. Other peptide tags useful for purification include, but are not limited to, the "HA" tag, which corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin protein (Wilson et al.. Cell 37:767 (1984)) and the "flag" tag. The present invention further encompasses antibodies or fragments thereof conjugated to a diagnostic or therapeutic agent. The antibodies can be used diagnostically to, for example, monitor the development or progression of a tumor as part of a clinical testing procedure to, e.g., determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by coupling the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, radioactive materials, positron emitting metals using various positron emission tomographies, and nonradioactive paramagnetic metal ions. The detectable substance may be coupled or conjugated either directly to the antibody (or fragment thereof) or indirectly, through an intermediate (such as, for example, a linker known in the art) using techniques known in the art. See, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,741,900 for metal ions which can be conjugated to antibodies for use as diagnostics according to the present invention. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin: an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin; and examples of suitable radioactive material include 1251, 1311, 1 1 lln or 99Tc. Further, an antibody or fragment thereof may be conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, e.g., a cytostatic or cytocidal agent, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion, e.g., alpha-emitters such as, for example. 213B A cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include paclitaxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1 - dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan. carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan. dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis- dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin. and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g., vincristine and vinblastine). The conjugates of the invention can be used for modifying a given biological response, the therapeutic agent or drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents. For example, the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity. Such proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin. or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, a-interferon, β-interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogen activator, an apoptotic agent, e.g., TNF-alpha, TNF-beta, AIM I (See, International Publication No. WO 97/33899), AIM II (See. International Publication No. WO 97/3491 1), Fas Ligand (Takahashi et al. Int. Immunol, 6: 1567- 1574 ( 1994)), VEGI (See, International Publication No. WO 99/23105), a thrombotic agent or an anti- angiogenic agent, e.g., angiostatin or endostatin: or, biological response modifiers such as. for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 ("IL-1 "), interleukin-2 ("IL-2"), interleukin-6 ("IL-6"). granulocyte macrophage colony stimulating factor ("GM- CSF"), granulocyte colony stimulating factor ("G-CSF"), or other growth factors. Antibodies may also be attached to solid supports, which are particularly useful for immunoassays or purification of the target antigen. Such solid supports include, but are not limited to. glass, cellulose, polyacrylamide, nylon, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride or polypropylene. Techniques for conjugating such therapeutic moiety to antibodies are well known, see, e.g., Arnon et al., "Monoclonal Antibodies For Immunotargeting Of Drugs In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Reisfeld et al. (eds.), pp. 243-56 (Alan R. Liss, Inc. 1985); Hellstrom et al., "Antibodies For Drug Delivery", in Controlled Drug Delivery (2nd Ed.), Robinson et al. (eds.), pp. 623-53 (Marcel Dekker. Inc. 1987); Thoφe. "Antibody Carriers Of Cytotoxic Agents In Cancer Therapy: A Review", in Monoclonal Antibodies '84: Biological And Clinical Applications, Pinchera et al. (eds.), pp. 475-506 (1985); "Analysis, Results, And Future Prospective Of The Therapeutic Use Of Radiolabeled Antibody In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies For Cancer Detection And Therapy, Baldwin et al. (eds.), pp. 303-16 (Academic Press 1985), and Thoφe et al., "The Preparation And Cytotoxic Properties Of Antibody-Toxin Conjugates", Immunol. Rev. 62: 1 19-58 (1982). Alternatively, an antibody can be conjugated to a second antibody to form an antibody heteroconjugate as described by Segal in U.S. Patent No. 4,676,980, which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. An antibody, with or without a therapeutic moiety conjugated to it, administered alone or in combination with cytotoxic factor(s) and/or cytokine(s) can be used as a therapeutic. Immunophenotyping The antibodies of the invention may be utilized for immunophenotyping of cell lines and biological samples. The translation product of the gene of the present invention may be useful as a cell specific marker, or more specifically as a cellular marker that is differentially expressed at various stages of differentiation and/or maturation of particular cell types. Monoclonal antibodies directed against a specific epitope, or combination of epitopes, will allow for the screening of cellular populations expressing the marker. Various techniques can be utilized using monoclonal antibodies to screen for cellular populations expressing the marker(s), and include magnetic separation using antibody-coated magnetic beads, "panning" with antibody attached to a solid matrix (i.e., plate), and flow cytometry (See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,985,660; and Morrison et al, Cell 96:131-49 ( 1999)). These techniques allow for the screening of particular populations of cells, such as might be found with hematological malignancies (i.e. minimal residual disease (MRD) in acute leukemic patients) and "non-self cells in transplantations to prevent Graft-versus-Host Disease (GVHD). Alternatively, these techniques allow for the screening of hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells capable of undergoing proliferation and/or differentiation, as might be found in human umbilical cord blood. Assays For Antibody Binding The antibodies of the invention may be assayed for immunospecific binding by any method known in the art. The immunoassays which can be used include but are not limited to competitive and non-competitive assay systems using techniques such as western blots, radioimmunoassays, ELISA (enzyme linked immunosorbent assay), "sandwich" immunoassays, immunoprecipitation assays, precipitin reactions, gel diffusion precipitin reactions, immunodiffusion assays, agglutination assays, complement-fixation assays, immunoradiometric assays, fluorescent immunoassays, protein A immunoassays, to name but a few. Such assays are routine and well known in the art (see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.. New York, which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety). Exemplary immunoassays are described briefly below (but are not intended by way of limitation). Immunoprecipitation protocols generally comprise lysing a population of cells in a lysis buffer such as RIPA buffer ( 1% NP-40 or Triton X- 100, 1% sodium deoxycholate, 0.1% SDS, 0.15 M NaCl, 0.01 M sodium phosphate at pH 7.2, 1% Trasylol) supplemented with protein phosphatase and/or protease inhibitors (e.g., EDTA, PMSF, aprotinin. sodium vanadate), adding the antibody of interest to the cell lysate, incubating for a period of time (e.g., 1 -4 hours) at 4° C, adding protein A and/or protein G sepharose beads to the cell lysate, incubating for about an hour or more at 4° C, washing the beads in lysis buffer and resuspending the beads in SDS/sample buffer. The ability of the antibody of interest to immunoprecipitate a particular antigen can be assessed by, e.g., western blot analysis. One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modified to increase the binding of the antibody to an antigen and decrease the background (e.g., pre-clearing the cell lysate with sepharose beads). For further discussion regarding immunoprecipitation protocols see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 10.16.1. Western blot analysis generally comprises preparing protein samples, electrophoresis of the protein samples in a polyacrylamide gel (e.g., 8%- 20% SDS- PAGE depending on the molecular weight of the antigen), transferring the protein sample from the polyacrylamide gel to a membrane such as nitrocellulose, PVDF or nylon, blocking the membrane in blocking solution (e.g., PBS with 3% BSA or nonfat milk), washing the membrane in washing buffer (e.g., PBS-Tween 20), blocking the membrane with primary antibody (the antibody of interest) diluted in blocking buffer, washing the membrane in washing buffer, blocking the membrane with a secondary antibody (which recognizes the primary antibody, e.g., an anti-human antibody) conjugated to an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) or radioactive molecule (e.g., 32P or 1251) diluted in blocking buffer, washing the membrane in wash buffer, and detecting the presence of the antigen. One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modified to increase the signal detected and to reduce the background noise. For further discussion regarding western blot protocols see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 10.8.1. ELISAs comprise preparing antigen, coating the well of a 96 well microtiter plate with the antigen, adding the antibody of interest conjugated to a detectable compound such as an enzymatic substrate (e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase) to the well and incubating for a period of time, and detecting the presence of the antigen. In ELISAs the antibody of interest does not have to be conjugated to a detectable compound; instead, a second antibody (which recognizes the antibody of interest) conjugated to a detectable compound may be added to the well. Further, instead of coating the well with the antigen, the antibody may be coated to the well. In this case, a second antibody conjugated to a detectable compound may be added following the addition of the antigen of interest to the coated well. One of skill in the art would be knowledgeable as to the parameters that can be modified to increase the signal detected as well as other variations of ELISAs known in the art. For further discussion regarding ELISAs see, e.g., Ausubel et al, eds, 1994, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Vol. 1, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York at 1 1.2.1. The binding affinity of an antibody to an antigen and the off-rate of an antibody-antigen interaction can be determined by competitive binding assays. One example of a competitive binding assay is a radioimmunoassay comprising the incubation of labeled antigen (e.g., 3H or 1251) with the antibody of interest in the presence of increasing amounts of unlabeled antigen, and the detection of the antibody bound to the labeled antigen. The affinity of the antibody of interest for a particular antigen and the binding off-rates can be determined from the data by scatchard plot analysis. Competition with a second antibody can also be determined using radioimmunoassays. In this case, the antigen is incubated with antibody of interest conjugated to a labeled compound (e.g., 3H or 1251) in the presence of increasing amounts of an unlabeled second antibody. Therapeutic Uses The present invention is further directed to antibody-based therapies which involve administering antibodies of the invention to an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human, patient for treating one or more of the disclosed diseases, disorders, or conditions. Therapeutic compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, antibodies of the invention (including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof as described herein) and nucleic acids encoding antibodies of the invention (including fragments, analogs and derivatives thereof and anti-idiotypic antibodies as described herein). The antibodies of the invention can be used to treat, inhibit or prevent diseases, disorders or conditions associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention, including, but not limited to, any one or more of the diseases, disorders, or conditions described herein. The treatment and/or prevention of diseases, disorders, or conditions associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention includes, but is not limited to. alleviating symptoms associated with those diseases, disorders or conditions. Antibodies of the invention may be provided in pharmaceutically acceptable compositions as known in the art or as described herein. A summary of the ways in which the antibodies of the present invention may be used therapeutically includes binding polynucleotides or polypeptides of the present invention locally or systemically in the body or by direct cytotoxicity of the antibody, e.g. as mediated by complement (CDC) or by effector cells (ADCC). Some of these approaches are described in more detail below. Armed with the teachings provided herein, one of ordinary skill in the art will know how to use the antibodies of the present invention for diagnostic, monitoring or therapeutic puφoses without undue experimentation. The antibodies of this invention may be advantageously utilized in combination with other monoclonal or chimeric antibodies, or with lymphokines or hematopoietic growth factors (such as, e.g., IL-2, IL-3 and IL-7), for example, which serve to increase the number or activity of effector cells which interact with the antibodies. The antibodies of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with other types of treatments (e.g., radiation therapy, chemotherapy, hormonal therapy, immunotherapy and anti-tumor agents). Generally, administration of products of a species origin or species reactivity (in the case of antibodies) that is the same species as that of the patient is preferred. Thus, in a preferred embodiment, human antibodies, fragments derivatives, analogs, or nucleic acids, are administered to a human patient for therapy or prophylaxis. It is preferred to use high affinity and/or potent in vivo inhibiting and/or neutralizing antibodies against polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention, fragments or regions thereof, for both immunoassays directed to and therapy of disorders related to polynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragments thereof, of the present invention. Such antibodies, fragments, or regions, will preferably have an affinity for polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention, including fragments thereof. Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5 X 10 "2 M, 10 "2 M, 5 X 10 "3 M, 10 "3 M, 5 X 10 " 4 M, 10 "4 M, 5 X 10 "5 M, 10 "5 M, 5 X 10 "6 M, 10 "6 M, 5 X 10 "7 M, 10 "7 M, 5 X 10 "8 M, 10 "8 M, 5 X 10 "9 M, 10 "9 M, 5 X 10 '10 M, 10 "10 M, 5 X 10 " " M, 10 " " M, 5 X 10 "12 M, 10 "12 M, 5 X 10 "13 M, 10 " 13 M, 5 X 10 "14 M, 10 "14 M, 5 X 10 15 M, and 10 "15 M. Gene Therapy In a specific embodiment, nucleic acids comprising sequences encoding antibodies or functional derivatives thereof, are administered to treat, inhibit or prevent a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention, by way of gene therapy. Gene therapy refers to therapy performed by the administration to a subject of an expressed or expressible nucleic 21 , acid. In this embodiment of the invention, the nucleic acids produce their encoded protein that mediates a therapeutic effect. Any of the methods for gene therapy available in the art can be used according to the present invention. Exemplary methods are described below. For general reviews of the methods of gene therapy, see Goldspiel et al., Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505 (1993); Wu and Wu, Biotherapy 3:87-95 (1991); Tolstoshev, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596 ( 1993); Mulligan, Science 260:926-932 ( 1993); and Morgan and Anderson, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 62: 191-217 ( 1993); May, TIBTECH 1 1(5): 155-215 (1993). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technology which can be used are described in Ausubel et al. (eds.), Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons. NY ( 1993); and Kriegler, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY (1990). In a preferred aspect, the compound comprises nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody, said nucleic acid sequences being part of expression vectors that express the antibody or fragments or chimeric proteins or heavy or light chains thereof in a suitable host. In particular, such nucleic acid sequences have promoters operably linked to the antibody coding region, said promoter being inducible or constitutive, and, optionally, tissue-specific. In another particular embodiment, nucleic acid molecules are used in which the antibody coding sequences and any other desired sequences are flanked by regions that promote homologous recombination at a desired site in the genome, thus providing for intrachromosomal expression of the antibody encoding nucleic acids (Koller and Smithies, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 ( 1989). In specific embodiments, the expressed antibody molecule is a single chain antibody; alternatively, the nucleic acid sequences include sequences encoding both the heavy and light chains, or fragments thereof, of the antibody. Delivery of the nucleic acids into a patient may be either direct, in which case the patient is directly exposed to the nucleic acid or nucleic acid- carrying vectors, or indirect, in which case, cells are first transformed with the nucleic acids in vitro, then transplanted into the patient. These two approaches are known, respectively, as in vivo or ex vivo gene therapy. In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid sequences are directly administered in vivo, where it is expressed to produce the encoded product. This can be accomplished by any of numerous methods known in the art, e.g., by constructing them as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that they become intracellular, e.g., by infection using defective or attenuated retrovirals or other viral vectors (see U.S. Patent No. 4,980,286), or by direct injection of naked DNA, or by use of microparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont), or coating with lipids or cell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, or microcapsules, or by administering them in linkage to a peptide which is known to enter the nucleus, by administering it in linkage to a ligand subject to receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu, J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432 (1987)) (which can be used to target cell types specifically expressing the receptors), etc. In another embodiment, nucleic acid-ligand complexes can be formed in which the ligand comprises a fusogenic viral peptide to disrupt endosomes, allowing the nucleic acid to avoid lysosomal degradation. In yet another embodiment, the nucleic acid can be targeted in vivo for cell specific uptake and expression, by targeting a specific receptor (see, e.g., PCT Publications WO 92/06180; WO 92/22635; WO92/20316; WO93/14188, WO 93/20221 ). Alternatively, the nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incoφorated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination (Koller and Smithies, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989); Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 (1989)). In a specific embodiment, viral vectors that contains nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody of the invention are used. For example, a retroviral vector can be used (see Miller et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:581-599 (1993)). These retroviral vectors contain the components necessary for the correct packaging of the viral genome and integration into the host cell DNA. The nucleic acid sequences encoding the antibody to be used in gene therapy are cloned into one or more vectors, which facilitates delivery of the gene into a patient. More detail about retroviral vectors can be found in Boesen et al., Biotherapy 6:291-302 ( 1994), which describes the use of a retroviral vector to deliver the mdrl gene to hematopoietic stem cells in order to make the stem cells more resistant to chemotherapy. Other references illustrating the use of retroviral vectors in gene therapy are: Clowes et al., J. Clin. Invest. 93:644- 651 (1994); Kiem et al., Blood 83: 1467-1473 (1994); Salmons and Gunzberg, Human Gene Therapy 4: 129-141 (1993); and Grossman and Wilson, Curr. Opin. in Genetics and Devel. 3: 1 10-1 14 (1993). Adenoviruses are other viral vectors that can be used in gene therapy. Adenoviruses are especially attractive vehicles for delivering genes to respiratory epithelia. Adenoviruses naturally infect respiratory epithelia where they cause a mild disease. Other targets for adenovirus-based delivery systems are liver, the central nervous system, endothelial cells, and muscle. Adenoviruses have the advantage of being capable of infecting non-dividing cells. Kozarsky and Wilson, Current Opinion in Genetics and Development 3:499-503 ( 1993) present a review of adenovirus-based gene therapy. Bout et al., Human Gene Therapy 5:3-10 (1994) demonstrated the use of adenovirus vectors to transfer genes to the respiratory epithelia of rhesus monkeys. Other instances of the use of adenoviruses in gene therapy can be found in Rosenfeld et al., Science 252:431 -434 (1991 ); Rosenfeld et al., Cell 68: 143- 155 (1992); Mastrangeli et al., J. Clin. Invest. 91 :225-234 ( 1993); PCT Publication WO94/12649; and Wang, et al., Gene Therapy 2:775-783 (1995). In a preferred embodiment, adenovirus vectors are used. Adeno-associated virus (AAV) has also been proposed for use in gene therapy (Walsh et al., Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 204:289-300 (1993); U.S. Patent No. 5,436,146). Another approach to gene therapy involves transferring a gene to cells in tissue culture by such methods as electroporation, lipofection, calcium phosphate mediated transfection, or viral infection. Usually, the method of transfer includes the transfer of a selectable marker to the cells. The cells are then placed under selection to isolate those cells that have taken up and are expressing the transferred gene. Those cells are then delivered to a patient. In this embodiment, the nucleic acid is introduced into a cell prior to administration in vivo of the resulting recombinant cell. Such introduction can be carried out by any method known in the art, including but not limited to transfection, electroporation, microinjection, infection with a viral or bacteriophage vector containing the nucleic acid sequences, cell fusion, chromosome-mediated gene transfer, microcell-mediated gene transfer, spheroplast fusion, etc. Numerous techniques are known in the art for the introduction of foreign genes into cells (see, e.g., Loeffler and Behr, Meth. Enzymol. 217:599-618 (1993); Cohen et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:618-644 (1993): Cline, Pharmac. Ther. 29:69-92m ( 1985) and may be used in accordance with the present invention, provided that the necessary developmental and physiological functions of the recipient cells are not disrupted. The technique should provide for the stable transfer of the nucleic acid to the cell, so that the nucleic acid is expressible by the cell and preferably heritable and expressible by its cell progeny. The resulting recombinant cells can be delivered to a patient by various methods known in the art. Recombinant blood cells (e.g., hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells) are preferably administered intravenously. The amount of cells envisioned for use depends on the desired effect, patient state, etc., and can be determined by one skilled in the art. Cells into which a nucleic acid can be introduced for puφoses of gene therapy encompass any desired, available cell type, and include but are not limited to epithelial cells, endothelial cells, keratinocytes, fibroblasts, muscle cells, hepatocytes; blood cells such as Tlymphocytes, Blymphocytes, monocytes, macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, megakaryocytes, granulocytes; various stem or progenitor cells, in particular hematopoietic stem or progenitor cells, e.g., as obtained from bone marrow, umbilical cord blood, peripheral blood, fetal liver, etc. In a preferred embodiment, the cell used for gene therapy is autologous to the patient. In an embodiment in which recombinant cells are used in gene therapy, nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody are introduced into the cells such that they are expressible by the cells or their progeny, and the recombinant cells are then administered in vivo for therapeutic effect. In a specific embodiment, stem or progenitor cells are used. Any stem and/or progenitor cells which can be isolated and maintained in vitro can potentially be used in accordance with this embodiment of the present invention (see e.g. PCT Publication WO 94/08598; Stemple and Anderson, Cell 71 :973-985 (1992); Rheinwald, Meth. Cell Bio. 21A:229 (1980); and Pittelkow and Scott, Mayo Clinic Proc. 61 :771 (1986)). In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid to be introduced for puφoses of gene therapy comprises an inducible promoter operably linked to the coding region, such that expression of the nucleic acid is controllable by controlling the presence or absence of the appropriate inducer of transcription. Demonstration of Therapeutic or Prophylactic Activity The compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are preferably tested in vitro, and then in vivo for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to use in humans. For example, in vitro assays to demonstrate the therapeutic or prophylactic utility of a compound or pharmaceutical composition include, the effect of a compound on a cell line or a patient tissue sample. The effect of the compound or composition on the cell line and/or tissue sample can be determined utilizing techniques known to those of skill in the art including, but not limited to, rosette formation assays and cell lysis assays. In accordance with the invention, in vitro assays which can be used to determine whether administration of a specific compound is indicated, include in vitro cell culture assays in which a patient tissue sample is grown in culture, and exposed to or otherwise administered a compound, and the effect of such compound upon the tissue sample is observed. Therapeutic/Prophylactic Administration and Composition The invention provides methods of treatment, inhibition and prophylaxis by administration to a subject of an effective amount of a compound or pharmaceutical composition of the invention, preferably a polypeptide or antibody of the invention. In a preferred aspect, the compound is substantially purified (e.g., substantially free from substances that limit its effect or produce undesired side-effects). The subject is preferably an animal, including but not limited to animals such as cows, pigs, horses, chickens, cats, dogs, etc., and is preferably a mammal, and most preferably human. Formulations and methods of administration that can be employed when the compound comprises a nucleic acid or an immunoglobulin are described above; additional appropriate formulations and routes of administration can be selected from among those described herein below. Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer a compound of the invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, recombinant cells capable of expressing the compound, receptor- mediated endocytosis (see, e.g., Wu and Wu. J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432 ( 1987)), construction of a nucleic acid as part of a retroviral or other vector, etc. Methods of introduction include but are not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, and oral routes. The compounds or compositions may be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absoφtion through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with other biologically active agents. Administration can be systemic or local. In addition, it may be desirable to introduce the pharmaceutical compounds or compositions of the invention into the central nervous system by any suitable route, including intraventricular and intrathecal injection; intraventricular injection may be facilitated by an intraventricular catheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommaya reservoir. Pulmonary administration can also be employed, e.g., by use of an inhaler or nebulizer, and formulation with an aerosolizing agent. In a specific embodiment, it may be desirable to administer the pharmaceutical compounds or compositions of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, topical application, e.g., in conjunction with a wound dressing after surgery, by injection, by means of a catheter, by means of a suppository, or by means of an implant, said implant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers. Preferably, when administering a protein, including an antibody, of the invention, care must be taken to use materials to which the protein does not absorb. In another embodiment, the compound or composition can be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 353- 365 (1989); Lopez-Berestein, ibid., pp. 317-327; see generally ibid.) In yet another embodiment, the compound or composition can be delivered in a controlled release system. In one embodiment, a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 ( 1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321 :574 ( 1989)). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Florida (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J., Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61 ( 1983); see also Levy et al., Science 228: 190 (1985); During et al., Ann. Neurol. 25:351 (1989); Howard et al., J.Neurosurg. 71 : 105 (1989)). In yet another embodiment, a controlled release system can be placed in proximity of the therapeutic target, i.e., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 1 15-138 (1984)). Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990)). In a specific embodiment where the compound of the invention is a nucleic acid encoding a protein, the nucleic acid can be administered in vivo to promote expression of its encoded protein, by constructing it as part of an appropriate nucleic acid expression vector and administering it so that it becomes intracellular, e.g., by use of a retroviral vector (see U.S. Patent No. 4,980.286), or by direct injection, or by use of microparticle bombardment (e.g., a gene gun; Biolistic, Dupont), or coating with lipids or cell-surface receptors or transfecting agents, or by administering it in linkage to a homeobox- like peptide which is known to enter the nucleus (see e.g., Joliot et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88: 1864-1868 ( 1991)), etc. Alternatively, a nucleic acid can be introduced intracellularly and incoφorated within host cell DNA for expression, by homologous recombination. The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions. Such compositions comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In a specific embodiment, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable" means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans. The term "carrier" refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. The composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents. These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. The composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and carriers such as triglycerides. Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences" by E.W. Martin. Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. The formulation should suit the mode of administration. In a preferred embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to human beings. Typically, compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueous buffer. Where necessary, the composition may also include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection. Generally, the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration. The compounds of the invention can be formulated as neutral or salt forms. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those formed with anions such as those derived from hydrochloric, phosphoric, acetic, oxalic, tartaric acids, etc., and those formed with cations such as those derived from sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, ferric hydroxides, isopropylamine, triethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine, etc. The amount of the compound of the invention which will be effective in the treatment, inhibition and prevention of a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention can be determined by standard clinical techniques. In addition, in vitro assays may optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges. The precise dose to be employed in the formulation will also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the disease or disorder, and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each patient's circumstances. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems. For antibodies, the dosage administered to a patient is typically 0.1 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg of the patient's body weight. Preferably, the dosage administered to a patient is between 0.1 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg of the patient's body weight, more preferably 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg of the patient's body weight. Generally, human antibodies have a longer half-life within the human body than antibodies from other species due to the immune response to the foreign polypeptides. Thus, lower dosages of human antibodies and less frequent administration is often possible. Further, the dosage and frequency of administration of antibodies of the invention may be reduced by enhancing uptake and tissue penetration (e.g., into the brain) of the antibodies by modifications such as, for example, lipidation. The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration. Diagnosis and Imaging Labeled antibodies, and derivatives and analogs thereof, which specifically bind to a polypeptide of interest can be used for diagnostic puφoses to detect, diagnose, or monitor diseases, disorders, and/or conditions associated with the aberrant expression and/or activity of a polypeptide of the invention. The invention provides for the detection of aberrant expression of a polypeptide of interest, comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of aberrant expression. The invention provides a diagnostic assay for diagnosing a disorder, comprising (a) assaying the expression of the polypeptide of interest in cells or body fluid of an individual using one or more antibodies specific to the polypeptide interest and (b) comparing the level of gene expression with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a particular disorder. With respect to cancer, the presence of a relatively high amount of transcript in biopsied tissue from an individual may indicate a predisposition for the development of the disease, or may provide a means for detecting the disease prior to the appearance of actual clinical symptoms. A more definitive diagnosis of this type may allow health professionals to employ preventative measures or aggressive treatment earlier thereby preventing the development or further progression of the cancer. Antibodies of the invention can be used to assay protein levels in a biological sample using classical immunohistological methods known to those of skill in the art (e.g., see Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell. Biol. 101 :976-985 ( 1985); Jalkanen, et al., J. Cell . Biol. 105:3087-3096 (1987)). Other antibody-based methods useful for detecting protein gene expression include immunoassays, such as the enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA). Suitable antibody assay labels are known in the art and include enzyme labels, such as, glucose oxidase; radioisotopes, such as iodine (1251, 1211), carbon (14C), sulfur (35S), tritium (3H), indium ( 1 12In), and technetium (99Tc); luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin. One aspect of the invention is the detection and diagnosis of a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression of a polypeptide of interest in an animal, preferably a mammal and most preferably a human. In one embodiment, diagnosis comprises: a) administering (for example, parenterally, subcutaneously, or intraperitoneally) to a subject an effective amount of a labeled molecule which specifically binds to the polypeptide of interest; b) waiting for a time interval following the administering for permitting the labeled molecule to preferentially concentrate at sites in the subject where the polypeptide is expressed (and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared to background level); c) determining background level; and d) detecting the labeled molecule in the subject, such that detection of labeled molecule above the background level indicates that the subject has a particular disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression of the polypeptide of interest. Background level can be determined by various methods including, comparing the amount of labeled molecule detected to a standard value previously determined for a particular system. It will be understood in the art that the size of the subject and the imaging system used will determine the quantity of imaging moiety needed to produce diagnostic images. In the case of a radioisotope moiety, for a human subject, the quantity of radioactivity injected will normally range from about 5 to 20 millicuries of 99mTc. The labeled antibody or antibody fragment will then preferentially accumulate at the location of cells which contain the specific protein. In vivo tumor imaging is described in S.W. Burchiel et al., "Immunopharmacokinetics of Radiolabeled Antibodies and Their Fragments." (Chapter 13 in Tumor Imaging: The Radiochemical Detection of Cancer, S.W. Burchiel and B. A. Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc. ( 1982). Depending on several variables, including the type of label used and the mode of administration, the time interval following the administration for permitting the labeled molecule to preferentially concentrate at sites in the subject and for unbound labeled molecule to be cleared to background level is 6 to 48 hours or 6 to 24 hours or 6 to 12 hours. In another embodiment the time interval following administration is 5 to 20 days or 5 to 10 days. In an embodiment, monitoring of the disease or disorder is carried out by repeating the method for diagnosing the disease or disease, for example, one month after initial diagnosis, six months after initial diagnosis, one year after initial diagnosis, etc. Presence of the labeled molecule can be detected in the patient using methods known in the art for in vivo scanning. These methods depend upon the type of label used. Skilled artisans will be able to determine the appropriate method for detecting a particular label. Methods and devices that may be used in the diagnostic methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, computed tomography (CT), whole body scan such as position emission tomography (PET), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), and sonography. In a specific embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a radioisotope and is detected in the patient using a radiation responsive surgical instrument (Thurston et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,441 ,050). In another embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a fluorescent compound and is detected in the patient using a fluorescence responsive scanning instrument. In another embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a positron emitting metal and is detected in the patent using positron emission-tomography. In yet another embodiment, the molecule is labeled with a paramagnetic label and is detected in a patient using magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). Kits The present invention provides kits that can be used in the above methods. In one embodiment, a kit comprises an antibody of the invention, preferably a purified antibody, in one or more containers. In a specific embodiment, the kits of the present invention contain a substantially isolated polypeptide comprising an epitope which is specifically immunoreactive with an antibody included in the kit. Preferably, the kits of the present invention further comprise a control antibody which does not react with the polypeptide of interest. In another specific embodiment, the kits of the present invention contain a means for detecting the binding of an antibody to a polypeptide of interest (e.g., the antibody may be conjugated to a detectable substrate such as a fluorescent compound, an enzymatic substrate, a radioactive compound or a luminescent compound, or a second antibody which recognizes the first antibody may be conjugated to a detectable substrate). In another specific embodiment of the present invention, the kit is a diagnostic kit for use in screening serum containing antibodies specific against proliferative and/or cancerous polynucleotides and polypeptides. Such a kit may include a control antibody that does not react with the polypeptide of interest. Such a kit may include a substantially isolated polypeptide antigen comprising an epitope which is specifically immunoreactive with at least one anti-polypeptide antigen antibody. Further, such a kit includes means for detecting the binding of said antibody to the antigen (e.g., the antibody may be conjugated to a fluorescent compound such as fluorescein or rhodamine which can be detected by flow cytometry). In specific embodiments, the kit may include a recombinantly produced or chemically synthesized polypeptide antigen. The polypeptide antigen of the kit may also be attached to a solid support. In a more specific embodiment the detecting means of the above-described kit includes a solid support to which said polypeptide antigen is attached. Such a kit may also include a non-attached reporter-labeled anti-human antibody. In this embodiment, binding of the antibody to the polypeptide antigen can be detected by binding of the said reporter-labeled antibody. In an additional embodiment, the invention includes a diagnostic kit for use in screening serum containing antigens of the polypeptide of the invention. The diagnostic kit includes a substantially isolated antibody specifically immunoreactive with polypeptide or polynucleotide antigens, and means for detecting the binding of the polynucleotide or polypeptide antigen to the antibody. In one embodiment, the antibody is attached to a solid support. In a specific embodiment, the antibody may be a monoclonal antibody. The detecting means of the kit may include a second, labeled monoclonal antibody. Alternatively, or in addition, the detecting means may include a labeled, competing antigen. In one diagnostic configuration, test serum is reacted with a solid phase reagent having a surface-bound antigen obtained by the methods of the present invention. After binding with specific antigen antibody to the reagent and removing unbound serum components by washing, the reagent is reacted with reporter-labeled anti-human antibody to bind reporter to the reagent in proportion to the amount of bound anti-antigen antibody on the solid support. The reagent is again washed to remove unbound labeled antibody, and the amount of reporter associated with the reagent is determined. Typically, the reporter is an enzyme which is detected by incubating the solid phase in the presence of a suitable fluorometric, luminescent or colorimetric substrate (Sigma, St. Louis, MO). The solid surface reagent in the above assay is prepared by known techniques for attaching protein material to solid support material, such as polymeric beads, dip sticks. 96-well plate or filter material. These attachment methods generally include non-specific adsoφtion of the protein to the support or covalent attachment of the protein, typically through a free amine group, to a chemically reactive group on the solid support, such as an activated carboxyl, hydroxyl, or aldehyde group. Alternatively, streptavidin coated plates can be used in conjunction with biotinylated antigen(s). Thus, the invention provides an assay system or kit for carrying out this diagnostic method. The kit generally includes a support with surface- bound recombinant antigens, and a reporter-labeled anti-human antibody for detecting surface-bound anti-antigen antibody. Uses of the Polvnucleotides Each of the polynucleotides identified herein can be used in numerous ways as reagents. The following description should be considered exemplary and utilizes known techniques. The pancreatic cancer antigen polynucleotides of the present invention are useful for chromosome identification. There exists an ongoing need to identify new chromosome markers, since few chromosome marking reagents, based on actual sequence data (repeat polymoφhisms), are presently available. Each sequence is specifically targeted to and can hybridize with a particular location on an individual human chromosome, thus each polynucleotide of the present invention can routinely be used as a chromosome marker using techniques known in the art. Briefly, sequences can be mapped to chromosomes by preparing PCR primers (preferably at least 15 bp (e.g., 15-25 bp) from the sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:X, or the complement thereto. Primers can optionally be selected using computer analysis so that primers do not span more than one predicted exon in the genomic DNA. These primers are then used for PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual human chromosomes. Only those hybrids containing the human gene corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X will yield an amplified fragment. Similarly, somatic hybrids provide a rapid method of PCR mapping the polynucleotides to particular chromosomes. Three or more clones can be assigned per day using a single thermal cycler. Moreover, sublocalization of the polynucleotides can be achieved with panels of specific chromosome fragments. Other gene mapping strategies that can be used include in situ hybridization, prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes, preselection by hybridization to construct chromosome specific-cDNA libraries, and computer mapping techniques (See, e.g., Shuler, Trends Biotechnol 16:456-459 ( 1998) which is hereby incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Precise chromosomal location of the polynucleotides can also be achieved using fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH) of a metaphase chromosomal spread. This technique uses polynucleotides as short as 500 or 600 bases; however, polynucleotides 2,000-4.000 bp are preferred. For a review of this technique, see Verma et al., "Human Chromosomes: a Manual of Basic Techniques," Pergamon Press, New York ( 1988). For chromosome mapping, the polynucleotides can be used individually (to mark a single chromosome or a single site on that chromosome) or in panels (for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes). Thus, the present invention also provides a method for chromosomal localization which involves (a) preparing PCR primers from the polynucleotide sequences in Table 3 and SEQ ID NO:X and (b) screening somatic cell hybrids containing individual chromosomes. The polynucleotides of the present invention would likewise be useful for radiation hybrid mapping, HAPPY mapping, and long range restriction mapping. For a review of these techniques and others known in the art. see, e.g. Dear. "Genome Mapping: A Practical Approach," IRL Press at Oxford University Press. London ( 1997); Aydin. J. Mol. Med. 77:691-694 ( 1999); Hacia et al., Mol. Psychiatry 3:483- 492 ( 1998); Herrick et al.. Chromosome Res. 7:409-423 (1999); Hamilton et al., Methods Cell Biol. 62:265-280 (2000); and/or Ott, J. Hered. 90:68-70 (1999) each of which is hereby incoφorated by reference in its entirety. Once a polynucleotide has been mapped to a precise chromosomal location, the physical position of the polynucleotide can be used in linkage analysis. Linkage analysis establishes coinheritance between a chromosomal location and presentation of a particular disease. (Disease mapping data are found, for example, in V. McKusick, Mendelian Inheritance in Man (available on line through Johns Hopkins University Welch Medical Library).) Assuming 1 megabase mapping resolution and one gene per 20 kb, a cDNA precisely localized to a chromosomal region associated with the disease could be one of 50-500 potential causative genes. Thus, once coinheritance is established, differences in a polynucleotide of the invention and the corresponding gene between affected and unaffected individuals can be examined. First, visible structural alterations in the chromosomes, such as deletions or translocations. are examined in chromosome spreads or by PCR. If no structural alterations exist, the presence of point mutations are ascertained. Mutations observed in some or all affected individuals, but not in normal individuals, indicates that the mutation may cause the disease. However, complete sequencing of the polypeptide and the corresponding gene from several normal individuals is required to distinguish the mutation from a polymoφhism. If a new polymoφhism is identified, this polymoφhic polypeptide can be used for further linkage analysis. Furthermore, increased or decreased expression of the gene in affected individuals as compared to unaffected individuals can be assessed using the polynucleotides of the invention. Any of these alterations (altered expression, chromosomal rearrangement, or mutation) can be used as a diagnostic or prognostic marker. Thus, the invention provides a method of detecting increased or decreased expression levels of the pancreatic cancer polynucleotides in affected individuals as compared to unaffected individuals using polynucleotides of the present invention and techniques known in the art, including but not limited to the method described in Example 1 1. Any of these alterations (altered expression, chromosomal rearrangement, or mutation) can be used as a diagnostic or prognostic marker. Thus, the invention also provides a diagnostic method useful during diagnosis of a pancreas related disorder, including pancreas cancer, involving measuring the expression level of pancreatic cancer polynucleotides in pancreatic tissue or other cells or body fluid from an individual and comparing the measured gene expression level with a standard pancreatic cancer polynucleotide expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the gene expression level compared to the standard is indicative of a pancreas related disorder. In still another embodiment, the invention includes a kit for analyzing samples for the presence of proliferative and/or cancerous polynucleotides derived from a test subject. In a general embodiment, the kit includes at least one polynucleotide probe containing a nucleotide sequence that will specifically hybridize with a polynucleotide of the invention and a suitable container. In a specific embodiment, the kit includes two polynucleotide probes defining an internal region of the polynucleotide of the invention, where each probe has one strand containing a 31 'mer-end internal to the region. In a further embodiment, the probes may be useful as primers for polymerase chain reaction amplification. Where a diagnosis of a pancreas related disorder, including, for example, diagnosis of a tumor, has already been made according to conventional methods, the present invention is useful as a prognostic indicator, whereby patients exhibiting enhanced or depressed pancreatic cancer polynucleotide expression will experience a worse clinical outcome relative to patients expressing the gene at a level nearer the standard level. By "measuring the expression level of pancreatic cancer polynucleotides" is intended qualitatively or quantitatively measuring or estimating the level of the pancreatic cancer polypeptide or the level of the mRNA encoding the pancreatic cancer polypeptide in a first biological sample either directly (e.g., by determining or estimating absolute protein level or mRNA level) or relatively (e.g., by comparing to the pancreatic cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level in a second biological sample). Preferably, the pancreatic cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level in the first biological sample is measured or estimated and compared to a standard pancreatic cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level, the standard being taken from a second biological sample obtained from an individual not having the pancreas related disorder or being determined by averaging levels from a population of individuals not having a pancreas related disorder. As will be appreciated in the art, once a standard pancreatic cancer polypeptide level or mRNA level is known, it can be used repeatedly as a standard for comparison. By "biological sample" is intended any biological sample obtained from an individual, body fluid, cell line, tissue culture, or other source which contains pancreatic cancer polypeptide or the corresponding mRNA. As indicated, biological samples include body fluids (such as bile, lymph, sera, plasma, urine, synovial fluid and spinal fluid) which contain the pancreatic cancer polypeptide, pancreas tissue, and other tissue sources found to express the pancreatic cancer polypeptide. Methods for obtaining tissue biopsies and body fluids from mammals are well known in the art. Where the biological sample is to include mRNA, a tissue biopsy is the preferred source. The method(s) provided above may preferrably be applied in a diagnostic method and/or kits in which polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention are attached to a solid support. In one exemplary method, the support may be a "gene chip" or a "biological chip" as described in US Patents 5,837,832, 5,874,219, and 5,856,174. Further, such a gene chip with pancreatic cancer polynucleotides attached may be used to identify polymoφhisms between the pancreatic cancer polynucleotide sequences, with polynucleotides isolated from a test subject. The knowledge of such polymoφhisms (i.e. their location, as well as, their existence) would be beneficial in identifying disease loci for many disorders, such as for example, in neural disorders, immune system disorders, muscular disorders, reproductive disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, pulmonary disorders, cardiovascular disorders, renal disorders, proliferative disorders, and/or cancerous diseases and conditions, though most preferably in pancreas related proliferative, and/or cancerous diseases and conditions. Such a method is described in US Patents 5,858,659 and 5,856,104. The US Patents referenced supra are hereby incoφorated by reference in their entirety herein. The present invention encompasses pancreatic cancer polynucleotides that are chemically synthesized, or reproduced as peptide nucleic acids (PNA), or according to other methods known in the art. The use of PNAs would serve as the preferred form if the polynucleotides of the invention are incoφorated onto a solid support, or gene chip. For the puφoses of the present invention, a peptide nucleic acid (PNA) is a polyamide type of DNA analog and the monomeric units for adenine, guanine, thymine and cytosine are available commercially (Perceptive Biosystems). Certain components of DNA, such as phosphorus, phosphorus oxides, or deoxyribose derivatives, are not present in PNAs. As disclosed by P. E. Nielsen, M. Egholm, R. H. Berg and O. Buchardt, Science 254, 1497 (1991 ); and M. Egholm, O. Buchardt, L.Christensen, C. Behrens, S. M. Freier, D. A. Driver, R. H. Berg, S. K. Kim, B. Norden. and P. E. Nielsen, Nature 365. 666 (1993), PNAs bind specifically and tightly to complementary DNA strands and are not degraded by nucleases. In fact, PNA binds more strongly to DNA than DNA itself does. This is probably because there is no electrostatic repulsion between the two strands, and also the polyamide backbone is more flexible. Because of this, PNA/DNA duplexes bind under a wider range of stringency conditions than DNA/DNA duplexes, making it easier to perform multiplex hybridization. Smaller probes can be used than with DNA due to the strong binding. In addition, it is more likely that single base mismatches can be determined with PNA/DNA hybridization because a single mismatch in a PNA/DNA 15-mer lowers the melting point (T.sub.m) by 8°-20° C, vs. 4°-16° C for the DNA/DNA 15- mer duplex. Also, the absence of charge groups in PNA means that hybridization can be done at low ionic strengths and reduce possible interference by salt during the analysis The present invention have uses which include, but are not limited to, detecting cancer in mammals In particular the invention is useful duπng diagnosis of pathological cell proliferative neoplasias which include, but are not limited to acute myelogenous leukemias including acute monocytic leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute erythroleukemia, acute megakaryocytic leukemia, and acute undifferentiated leukemia, etc , and chronic myelogenous leukemias including chronic myelomonocytic leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia, etc Preferred mammals include monkeys, apes, cats, dogs, cows, pigs, horses, rabbits and humans Particularly preferred are humans Pathological cell proliferative disorders are often associated with inappropriate activation of proto-oncogenes (Gelmann, E P et al , "The Etiology of Acute Leukemia Molecular Genetics and Viral Oncology," in Neoplastic Diseases of the Blood, Vol 1 , Wiernik, P H et al. eds , 161 -182 (1985)) Neoplasms are now believed to result from the qualitative alteration of a normal cellular gene product, or from the quantitative modification of gene expression by insertion into the chromosome of a viral sequence, by chromosomal translocation of a gene to a more actively transcribed region, or by some other mechanism (Gelmann et al , supra) It is likely that mutated or altered expression of specific genes is involved in the pathogenesis of some leukemias, among other tissues and cell types (Gelmann et al., supra) Indeed, the human counteφarts of the oncogenes involved in some animal neoplasias have been amplified or translocated in some cases of human leukemia and carcinoma. (Gelmann et al.. supra) For example, c-myc expression is highly amplified in the non-lymphocytic leukemia cell line HL-60 When HL-60 cells are chemically induced to stop proliferation, the level of c-myc is found to be downregulated (International Publication Number WO 91/15580) However, it has been shown that exposure of HL-60 cells to a DNA construct that is complementary to the 5' end of c-myc or c- myb blocks translation of the corresponding mRNAs which downregulates expression of the c-myc or c-myb proteins and causes arrest of cell proliferation and differentiation of the treated cells. (International Publication Number WO 91/15580; Wickstrom et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 85: 1028 ( 1988); Anfossi et al.. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 86:3379 ( 1989)). However, the skilled artisan would appreciate the present invention's usefulness is not limited to treatment of proliferative disorders of hematopoietic cells and tissues, in light of the numerous cells and cell types of varying origins which are known to exhibit proliferative phenotypes. In addition to the foregoing, a pancreatic cancer antigen polynucleotide can be used to control gene expression through triple helix formation or through antisense DNA or RNA. Antisense techniques are discussed, for example, in Okano. J. Neurochem. 56: 560 (1991 ); "Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton. FL ( 1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance Lee et al.. Nucleic Acids Research 6: 3073 ( 1979); Cooney et al., Science 241 : 456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251 : 1360 ( 1991). Both methods rely on binding of the polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA. For these techniques, preferred polynucleotides are usually oligonucleotides 20 to 40 bases in length and complementary to either the region of the gene involved in transcription (triple helix - see Lee et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 6:3073 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241 :456 ( 1988); and Dervan et al.. Science 251 : 1360 (1991) ) or to the mRNA itself (antisense - Okano, J. Neurochem. 56:560 ( 1991 ); Oligodeoxy-nucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988).) Triple helix formation optimally results in a shut-off of RNA transcription from DNA, while antisense RNA hybridization blocks translation of an mRNA molecule into polypeptide. The oligonucleotide described above can also be delivered to cells such that the antisense RNA or DNA may be expressed in vivo to inhibit production of polypeptide of the present invention antigens. Both techniques are effective in model systems, and the information disclosed herein can be used to design antisense or triple helix polynucleotides in an effort to treat disease, and in particular, for the treatment of proliferative diseases and/or conditions. Polynucleotides of the present invention are also useful in gene therapy. One goal of gene therapy is to insert a normal gene into an organism having a defective gene, in an effort to correct the genetic defect. The polynucleotides disclosed in the present invention offer a means of targeting such genetic defects in a highly accurate manner. Another goal is to insert a new gene that was not present in the host genome, thereby producing a new trait in the host cell. The polynucleotides are also useful for identifying individuals from minute biological samples. The United States military, for example, is considering the use of restriction fragment length polymoφhism (RFLP) for identification of its personnel. In this technique, an individual's genomic DNA is digested with one or more restriction enzymes, and probed on a Southern blot to yield unique bands for identifying personnel. This method does not suffer from the current limitations of "Dog Tags" which can be lost, switched, or stolen, making positive identification difficult. The polynucleotides of the present invention can be used as additional DNA markers for RFLP. The polynucleotides of the present invention can also be used as an alternative to RFLP, by determining the actual base-by-base DNA sequence of selected portions of an individual's genome. These sequences can be used to prepare PCR primers for amplifying and isolating such selected DNA, which can then be sequenced. Using this technique, individuals can be identified because each individual will have a unique set of DNA sequences. Once an unique ID database is established for an individual, positive identification of that individual, living or dead, can be made from extremely small tissue samples. Forensic biology also benefits from using DNA-based identification techniques as disclosed herein. DNA sequences taken from very small biological samples such as tissues, e.g., hair or skin, or body fluids, e.g., blood, saliva, semen, synovial fluid, amniotic fluid, breast milk, lymph, pulmonary sputum or surfactant, urine, fecal matter, etc., can be amplified using PCR. In one prior art technique, gene sequences amplified from polymoφhic loci, such as DQa class II HLA gene, are used in forensic biology to identify individuals. (Erlich, H., PCR Technology, Freeman and Co. ( 1992).) Once these specific polymoφhic loci are amplified, they are digested with one or more restriction enzymes, yielding an identifying set of bands on a Southern blot probed with DNA corresponding to the DQa class II HLA gene. Similarly, polynucleotides of the present invention can be used as polymoφhic markers for forensic puφoses. There is also a need for reagents capable of identifying the source of a particular tissue. Such need arises, for example, in forensics when presented with tissue of unknown origin. Appropriate reagents can comprise, for example, DNA probes or primers specific to pancreas or pancreatic cancer polynucleotides prepared from the sequences of the present invention. Panels of such reagents can identify tissue by species and/or by organ type. In a similar fashion, these reagents can be used to screen tissue cultures for contamination. The polynucleotides of the present invention are also useful as hybridization probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) or cell type(s) present in a biological sample. Similarly, polypeptides and antibodies directed to polypeptides of the present invention are useful to provide immunological probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) (e.g., immunohistochemistry assays) or cell type(s) (e.g., immunocytochemistry assays). In addition, for a number of disorders of the above tissues or cells, significantly higher or lower levels of gene expression of the polynucleotides/polypeptides of the present invention may be detected in certain tissues (e.g., tissues expressing polypeptides and/or polynucleotides of the present invention, pancreas and pancreatic cancer tissues and/or cancerous and/or wounded tissues) or bodily fluids (e.g., serum, plasma, urine, synovial fluid or spinal fluid) taken from an individual having such a disorder, relative to a "standard" gene expression level, i.e., the expression level in healthy tissue from an individual not having the disorder. Thus, the invention provides a diagnostic method of a disorder, which involves: (a) assaying gene expression level in cells or body fluid of an individual; (b) comparing the gene expression level with a standard gene expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed gene expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a disorder. In the very least, the polynucleotides of the present invention can be used as molecular weight markers on Southern gels, as diagnostic probes for the presence of a specific mRNA in a particular cell type, as a probe to "subtract-out" known sequences in the process of discovering novel polynucleotides, for selecting and making oligomers for attachment to a "gene chip" or other support, to raise anti-DNA antibodies using DNA immunization techniques, and as an antigen to elicit an immune response. Uses of the Polypeptides Each of the polypeptides identified herein can be used in numerous ways. The following description should be considered exemplary and utilizes known techniques. Polypeptides and antibodies directed to polypeptides of the present invention are useful to provide immunological probes for differential identification of the tissue(s) (e.g., immunohistochemistry assays such as, for example, ABC immunoperoxidase (Hsu et al., J. Histochem. Cytochem. 29:577-580 ( 1981 )) or cell type(s) (e.g., immunocytochemistry assays). Antibodies can be used to assay levels of polypeptides encoded by polynucleotides of the invention in a biological sample using classical immunohistological methods known to those of skill in the art (e.g., see Jalkanen. et al., J. Cell. Biol. 101 :976-985 ( 1985); Jalkanen. et al., J. Cell. Biol. 105:3087-3096 (1987)). Other antibody-based methods useful for detecting protein gene expression include immunoassays, such as the enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA). Suitable antibody assay labels are known in the art and include enzyme labels, such as, glucose oxidase; radioisotopes, such as iodine ( 13 , I, 125 I, 123 I, 121 I), carbon ( 1 C), sulfur ( 35 S), tritium ( 3 H), indium ( 1 15m In, " 3m In, 112 In, m In), and technetium ( 99 Tc, 99m Tc), thallium ( 201 Ti), gallium ( 68 Ga, 67 Ga), palladium ( 103 Pd), molybdenum ( 99 Mo), xenon ( 133 Xe), fluorine ( 18 F), 15 Sm, 177 Lu, ! 59 Gd. ,49 Pm. l ,, La, P5 Yb, , 66 Ho, °°Y, 7 Sc, 186 Re, , 88 Re, , 42 Pr, , 05 Rh, Q7 Ru; luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine. and biotin. In addition to assaying levels of polypeptide of the present invention in a biological sample, proteins can also be detected in vivo by imaging. Antibody labels or markers for in vivo imaging of protein include those detectable by X-radiography, NMR or ESR. For X-radiography, suitable labels include radioisotopes such as barium or cesium, which emit detectable radiation but are not overtly harmful to the subject. Suitable markers for NMR and ESR include those with a detectable characteristic spin, such as deuterium, which may be incoφorated into the antibody by labeling of nutrients for the relevant hybridoma. A protein-specific antibody or antibody fragment which has been labeled with an appropriate detectable imaging moiety, such as a radioisotope (for example, l 3 l I, 112 In, 99m Tc, ( 13 , I, 125 I, 123 I, 121 I), carbon ( 1 C), sulfur ( 35 S), tritium ( 3 H), indium (" 5m ln, " 3m In, " 2 In, m In), and technetium ( 99 Tc, 99m Tc), thallium ( 2ϋl Ti), gallium ( 68 Ga, 67 Ga), palladium ( , 03 Pd), molybdenum ( 99 Mo), xenon ( 133 Xe), fluorine ( , 8 F, 153 Sm, 177 Lu, 159 Gd, 149 Pm, l40 La, 175 Yb, 166 Ho, 90 Y, 7 Sc, 1 6 Re, 188 Re, , 2 Pr, 105 Rh, 97 Ru), a radio-opaque substance, or a material detectable by nuclear magnetic resonance, is introduced (for example, parenterally, subcutaneously or intraperitoneally) into the mammal to be examined for immune system disorder. It will be understood in the art that the size of the subject and the imaging system used will determine the quantity of imaging moiety needed to produce diagnostic images. In the case of a radioisotope moiety, for a human subject, the quantity of radioactivity injected will normally range from about 5 to 20 millicuries of 99m Tc. The labeled antibody or antibody fragment will then preferentially accumulate at the location of cells which express the polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide of the invention. In vivo tumor imaging is described in S.W. Burchiel et al., "Immunopharmacokinetics of Radiolabeled Antibodies and Their Fragments" (Chapter 13 in Tumor Imaging: The Radiochemical Detection of Cancer, S.W. Burchiel and B. A. Rhodes, eds., Masson Publishing Inc. ( 1982)). In one embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific delivery of compositions of the invention to cells by administering polypeptides of the invention (e.g., polypeptides encoded by polynucleotides of the invention and/or antibodies) that are associated with heterologous polypeptides or nucleic acids. In one example, the invention provides a method for delivering a therapeutic protein into the targeted cell. In another example, the invention provides a method for delivering a single stranded nucleic acid (e.g., antisense or ribozymes) or double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA that can integrate into the cell's genome or replicate episomally and that can be transcribed) into the targeted cell. In another embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific destruction of cells (e.g., the destruction of tumor cells) by administering polypeptides of the invention in association with toxins or cytotoxic prodrugs. By "toxin" is meant one or more compounds that bind and activate endogenous cytotoxic effector systems, radioisotopes, holotoxins, modified toxins, catalytic subunits of toxins, or any molecules or enzymes not normally present in or on the surface of a cell that under defined conditions cause the cell's death. Toxins that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes known in the art, compounds such as, for example, antibodies (or complement fixing containing portions thereof) that bind an inherent or induced endogenous cytotoxic effector system, thymidine kinase, endonuclease, RNAse, alpha toxin, ricin, abrin, Pseudomonas exotoxin A, diphtheria toxin, saporin, momordin, gelonin, pokeweed antiviral protein, alpha-sarcin and cholera toxin. "Toxin" also includes a cytostatic or cytocidal agent, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion, e.g., alpha-emitters such as, for example, 213 Bi, or other radioisotopes such as, for example, 103 Pd, l33 Xe, 1 I I, 68 Ge, 57 Co, 65 Zn, 85 Sr, 32 P, 35 S, 90 Y, 153 Sm, , 53 Gd, l69 Yb, 5 , Cr, 54 Mn, 75 Se, 1 1 3 Sn, 90 Yttrium, " 7 Tin, 186 Rhenium, 166 Holmium, and 188 Rhenium; luminescent labels, such as luminol; and fluorescent labels, such as fluorescein and rhodamine, and biotin. Techniques known in the art may be applied to label polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies). Such techniques include, but are not limited to, the use of bifunctional conjugating agents (see e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,756,065; 5.714,631 ; 5,696,239: 5,652,361 ; 5,505,931 ; 5,489.425; 5.435,990; 5,428,139; 5,342,604; 5,274, 1 19; 4,994,560: and 5,808,003; the contents of each of which are hereby incoφorated by reference in its entirety). Thus, the invention provides a diagnostic method of a disorder, which involves (a) assaying the expression level of a pancreatic cancer polypeptide of the present invention in cells or body fluid of an individual, or more preferrably, assaying the expression level of a pancreatic cancer polypeptide of the present invention in pancreatic cells or bile of an individual; and (b) comparing the assayed polypeptide expression level with a standard polypeptide expression level, whereby an increase or decrease in the assayed polypeptide expression level compared to the standard expression level is indicative of a disorder. With respect to cancer, the presence of a relatively high amount of transcript in biopsied tissue from an individual may indicate a predisposition for the development of the disease, or may provide a means for detecting the disease prior to the appearance of actual clinical symptoms. A more definitive diagnosis of this type may allow health professionals to employ preventative measures or aggressive treatment earlier thereby preventing the development or further progression of the cancer. Moreover, pancreatic cancer antigen polypeptides of the present invention can be used to treat or prevent diseases or conditions such as, for example, neural disorders, immune system disorders, muscular disorders, reproductive disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, pulmonary disorders, cardiovascular disorders, renal disorders, proliferative disorders, and/or cancerous diseases and conditions, preferably proliferative disorders of the pancreas, and/or cancerous disease and conditions. For example, patients can be administered a polypeptide of the present invention in an effort to replace absent or decreased levels of the polypeptide (e.g., insulin), to supplement absent or decreased levels of a different polypeptide (e.g., hemoglobin S for hemoglobin B, SOD, catalase, DNA repair proteins), to inhibit the activity of a polypeptide (e.g., an oncogene or tumor supressor), to activate the activity of a polypeptide (e.g., by binding to a receptor), to reduce the activity of a membrane bound receptor by competing with it for free ligand (e.g., soluble TNF receptors used in reducing inflammation), or to bring about a desired response (e.g., blood vessel growth inhibition, enhancement of the immune response to proliferative cells or tissues). Similarly, antibodies directed to a polypeptide of the present invention can also be used to treat disease (as described supra, and elsewhere herein). For example, administration of an antibody directed to a polypeptide of the present invention can bind, and/or neutralize the polypeptide. and/or reduce overproduction of the polypeptide. Similarly, administration of an antibody can activate the polypeptide, such as by binding to a polypeptide bound to a membrane (receptor). At the very least, the polypeptides of the present invention can be used as molecular weight markers on SDS-PAGE gels or on molecular sieve gel filtration columns using methods well known to those of skill in the art. Polypeptides can also be used to raise antibodies, which in turn are used to measure protein expression from a recombinant cell, as a way of assessing transformation of the host cell. Moreover, the polypeptides of the present invention can be used to test the following biological activities. Gene Therapy Methods Another aspect of the present invention is to gene therapy methods for treating or preventing disorders, diseases and conditions. The gene therapy methods relate to the introduction of nucleic acid (DNA, RNA and antisense DNA or RNA) sequences into an animal to achieve expression of the polypeptide of the present invention. This method requires a polynucleotide which codes for a polypeptide of the present invention operatively linked to a promoter and any other genetic elements necessary for the expression of the polypeptide by the target tissue. Such gene therapy and delivery techniques are known in the art, see, for example, WO90/1 1092, which is herein incoφorated by reference. Thus, for example, cells from a patient may be engineered with a polynucleotide (DNA or RNA) comprising a promoter operably linked to a polynucleotide of the present invention ex vivo, with the engineered cells then being provided to a patient to be treated with the polypeptide of the present invention. Such methods are well-known in the art. For example, see Belldegrun, A., et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 85: 207-216 (1993); Ferrantini. M. et al.. Cancer Research 53: 1 107-1 1 12 ( 1993); Ferrantini, M. et al., J. Immunology 153: 4604-4615 (1994); Kaido, T., et al., Int. J. Cancer 60: 221-229 (1995); Ogura, H., et al.. Cancer Research 50: 5102-5106 ( 1990); Santodonato. L., et al., Human Gene Therapy 7: 1-10 (1996); Santodonato, L., et al., Gene Therapy 4: 1246-1255 ( 1997); and Zhang, J.-F. et al.. Cancer Gene Therapy 3: 31-38 ( 1996)), which are herein incoφorated by reference. In one embodiment, the cells which are engineered are arterial cells. The arterial cells may be reintroduced into the patient through direct injection to the artery, the tissues surrounding the artery, or through catheter injection. As discussed in more detail below, the polynucleotide constructs can be delivered by any method that delivers injectable materials to the cells of an animal, such as, injection into the interstitial space of tissues (heart, muscle, skin, lung, liver, and the like). The polynucleotide constructs may be delivered in a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid or aqueous carrier. In one embodiment, the polynucleotide of the present invention is delivered as a naked polynucleotide. The term "naked" polynucleotide, DNA or RNA refers to sequences that are free from any delivery vehicle that acts to assist, promote or facilitate entry into the cell, including viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin or precipitating agents and the like. However, the polynucleotide of the present invention can also be delivered in liposome formulations and lipofectin formulations and the like can be prepared by methods well known to those skilled in the art. Such methods are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,593,972, 5,589,466, and 5,580,859, which are herein incoφorated by reference. The polynucleotide vector constructs used in the gene therapy method are preferably constructs that will not integrate into the host genome nor will they contain sequences that allow for replication. Appropriate vectors include pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl and pSG available from Stratagene; pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG and pSVL available from Pharmacia; and pEFl/V5, pcDNA3.1, and pRc/CMV2 available from Invitrogen. Other suitable vectors will be readily apparent to the skilled artisan. Any strong promoter known to those skilled in the art can be used for driving the expression of the polynucleotide sequence. Suitable promoters include adenoviral promoters, such as the adenoviral major late promoter; or heterologous promoters, such as the cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter; the respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) promoter: inducible promoters, such as the MMT promoter, the metallothionein promoter; heat shock promoters; the albumin promoter; the ApoAI promoter; human globin promoters; viral thymidine kinase promoters, such as the Heφes Simplex thymidine kinase promoter; retroviral LTRs; the b-actin promoter; and human growth hormone promoters. The promoter also may be the native promoter for the polynucleotide of the present invention. Unlike other gene therapy techniques, one major advantage of introducing naked nucleic acid sequences into target cells is the transitory nature of the polynucleotide synthesis in the cells. Studies have shown that non-replicating DNA sequences can be introduced into cells to provide production of the desired polypeptide for periods of up to six months. The polynucleotide construct can be delivered to the interstitial space of tissues within the an animal, including of muscle, skin, brain, lung, liver, spleen, bone marrow, thymus, heart, lymph, blood, bone, cartilage, pancreas, kidney, gall bladder, stomach, intestine, testis, ovary, uterus, rectum, nervous system, eye, gland, and connective tissue. Interstitial space of the tissues comprises the intercellular, fluid, mucopolysaccharide matrix among the reticular fibers of organ tissues, elastic fibers in the walls of vessels or chambers, collagen fibers of fibrous tissues, or that same matrix within connective tissue ensheathing muscle cells or in the lacunae of bone. It is similarly the space occupied by the plasma of the circulation and the lymph fluid of the lymphatic channels. Delivery to the interstitial space of muscle tissue is preferred for the reasons discussed below. They may be conveniently delivered by injection into the tissues comprising these cells. They are preferably delivered to and expressed in persistent, non-dividing cells which are differentiated, although delivery and expression may be achieved in non-differentiated or less completely differentiated cells, such as, for example, stem cells of blood or skin fibroblasts. In vivo muscle cells are particularly competent in their ability to take up and express polynucleotides. For the naked nucleic acid sequence injection, an effective dosage amount of DNA or RNA will be in the range of from about 0.05 mg/kg body weight to about 50 mg/kg body weight. Preferably the dosage will be from about 0.005 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg and more preferably from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg. Of course, as the artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate, this dosage will vary according to the tissue site of injection. The appropriate and effective dosage of nucleic acid sequence can readily be determined by those of ordinary skill in the art and may depend on the condition being treated and the route of administration. The preferred route of administration is by the parenteral route of injection into the interstitial space of tissues. However, other parenteral routes may also be used, such as, inhalation of an aerosol formulation particularly for delivery to lungs or bronchial tissues, throat or mucous membranes of the nose. In addition, naked DNA constructs can be delivered to arteries during angioplasty by the catheter used in the procedure. The naked polynucleotides are delivered by any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, direct needle injection at the delivery site, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, and so-called "gene guns". These delivery methods are known in the art. The constructs may also be delivered with delivery vehicles such as viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin, precipitating agents, etc. Such methods of delivery are known in the art. In certain embodiments, the polynucleotide constructs are complexed in a liposome preparation. Liposomal preparations for use in the instant invention include cationic (positively charged), anionic (negatively charged) and neutral preparations. However, cationic liposomes are particularly preferred because a tight charge complex can be formed between the cationic liposome and the polyanionic nucleic acid. Cationic liposomes have been shown to mediate intracellular delivery of plasmid DNA (Feigner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA ( 1987) 84:7413-7416, which is herein incoφorated by reference): mRNA (Malone et al.. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA ( 1989) 86:6077-6081 , which is herein incoφorated by reference); and purified transcription factors (Debs et al.. J. Biol. Chem. ( 1990) 265: 10189-10192, which is herein incoφorated by reference), in functional form. Cationic liposomes are readily available. For example, N[ l-2.3-dioleyloxy)propyl]-N,N,N-triethylammonium (DOTMA) liposomes are particularly useful and are available under the trademark Lipofectin. from GIBCO BRL. Grand Island. N.Y. (See. also. Feigner et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA ( 1987) 84:7413-7416. which is herein incoφorated by reference). Other commercially available liposomes include transfectace (DDAB/DOPE) and DOTAP/DOPE (Boehringer). Other cationic liposomes can be prepared from readily available materials using techniques well known in the art. See, e.g. PCT Publication No. WO 90/1 1092 (which is herein incoφorated by reference) for a description of the synthesis of DOTAP ( l ,2-bis(oleoyloxy)-3-(trimethylammonio)propane) liposomes. Preparation of DOTMA liposomes is explained in the literature, see, e.g., P. Feigner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:7413-7417. which is herein incoφorated by reference. Similar methods can be used to prepare liposomes from other cationic lipid materials. Similarly, anionic and neutral liposomes are readily available, such as from Avanti Polar Lipids (Birmingham, Ala.), or can be easily prepared using readily available materials. Such materials include phosphatidyl, choline, cholesterol, phosphatidyl ethanolamine, dioleoylphosphatidyl choline (DOPC), dioleoylphosphatidyl glycerol (DOPG), dioleoylphoshatidyl ethanolamine (DOPE), among others. These materials can also be mixed with the DOTMA and DOTAP starting materials in appropriate ratios. Methods for making liposomes using these materials are well known in the art. For example, commercially dioleoylphosphatidyl choline (DOPC), dioleoylphosphatidyl glycerol (DOPG), and dioleoylphosphatidyl ethanolamine (DOPE) can be used in various combinations to make conventional liposomes, with or without the addition of cholesterol. Thus, for example. DOPG/DOPC vesicles can be prepared by drying 50 mg each of DOPG and DOPC under a stream of nitrogen gas into a sonication vial. The sample is placed under a vacuum pump overnight and is hydrated the following day with deionized water. The sample is then sonicated for 2 hours in a capped vial, using a Heat Systems model 350 sonicator equipped with an inverted cup (bath type) probe at the maximum setting while the bath is circulated at 15EC. Alternatively, negatively charged vesicles can be prepared without sonication to produce multilamellar vesicles or by extrusion through nucleopore membranes to produce unilamellar vesicles of discrete size. Other methods are known and available to those of skill in the art. The liposomes can comprise multilamellar vesicles (MLVs). small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs), or large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs), with SUVs being preferred. The various liposome-nucleic acid complexes are prepared using methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Straubinger et al., Methods of Immunology (1983), 101 :512-527, which is herein incoφorated by reference. For example, MLVs containing nucleic acid can be prepared by depositing a thin film of phospholipid on the walls of a glass tube and subsequently hydrating with a solution of the material to be encapsulated. SUVs are prepared by extended sonication of MLVs to produce a homogeneous population of unilamellar liposomes. The material to be entrapped is added to a suspension of preformed MLVs and then sonicated. When using liposomes containing cationic lipids, the dried lipid film is resuspended in an appropriate solution such as sterile water or an isotonic buffer solution such as 10 mM Tris/NaCl, sonicated, and then the preformed liposomes are mixed directly with the DNA. The liposome and DNA form a very stable complex due to binding of the positively charged liposomes to the cationic DNA. SUVs find use with small nucleic acid fragments. LUVs are prepared by a number of methods, well known in the art. Commonly used methods include Ca 2+ -EDTA chelation (Papahadjopoulos et al.. Biochim. Biophys. Acta ( 1975) 394:483; Wilson et al.. Cell ( 1979) 17:77); ether injection (Deamer, D. and Bangham. A., Biochim. Biophys. Acta ( 1976) 443:629; Ostro et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. ( 1977) 76:836; Fraley et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1979) 76:3348); detergent dialysis (Enoch. H. and Strittmatter, P., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (1979) 76: 145); and reverse-phase evaporation (REV) (Fraley et al., J. Biol. Chem. ( 1980) 255: 10431 ; Szoka. F. and Papahadjopoulos. D., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA ( 1978) 75: 145; Schaefer-Ridder et al., Science ( 1982) 215: 166), which are herein incoφorated by reference. Generally, the ratio of DNA to liposomes will be from about 10: 1 to about 1 : 10. Preferably, the ration will be from about 5: 1 to about 1 :5. More preferably, the ration will be about 3: 1 to about 1 :3. Still more preferably, the ratio will be about 1 : 1. U.S. Patent No. 5,676.954 (which is herein incoφorated by reference) reports on the injection of genetic material, complexed with cationic liposomes carriers, into mice. U.S. Patent Nos. 4,897.355, 4,946,787, 5,049,386, 5,459,127, 5,589,466, 5,693,622, 5,580,859, 5,703,055, and international publication no. WO 94/9469 (which are herein incoφorated by reference) provide cationic lipids for use in transfecting DNA into cells and mammals. U.S. Patent Nos. 5,589,466, 5,693,622, 5,580,859, 5,703,055, and international publication no. WO 94/9469 (which are herein incoφorated by reference) provide methods for delivering DNA-cationic lipid complexes to mammals. In certain embodiments, cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, using a retroviral particle containing RNA which comprises a sequence encoding a polypeptide of the present invention. Retroviruses from which the retroviral plasmid vectors may be derived include, but are not limited to. Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus, spleen necrosis virus, Rous sarcoma Virus, Harvey Sarcoma Virus, avian leukosis virus, gibbon ape leukemia virus, human immunodeficiency virus, Myeloproliferative Sarcoma Virus, and mammary tumor virus. The retroviral plasmid vector is employed to transduce packaging cell lines to form producer cell lines. Examples of packaging cells which may be transfected include, but are not limited to, the PE501, PA317, R-2, R-AM, PA12. T19-14X, VT- 19-17-H2, RCRE, RCRIP. GP+E-86, GP+envAml2. and DAN cell lines as described in Miller, Human Gene Therapy 1 :5- 14 ( 1990). which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. The vector may transduce the packaging cells through any means known in the art. Such means include, but are not limited to. electroporation, the use of liposomes. and CaPO precipitation. In one alternative, the retroviral plasmid vector may be encapsulated into a liposome, or coupled to a lipid, and then administered to a host. The producer cell line generates infectious retroviral vector particles which include polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the present invention. Such retroviral vector particles then may be employed, to transduce eukaryotic cells, either in vitro or in vivo. The transduced eukaryotic cells will express a polypeptide of the present invention. In certain other embodiments, cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, with polynucleotide contained in an adenovirus vector. Adenovirus can be manipulated such that it encodes and expresses a polypeptide of the present invention, and at the same time is inactivated in terms of its ability to replicate in a normal lytic viral life cycle. Adenovirus expression is achieved without integration of the viral DNA into the host cell chromosome, thereby alleviating concerns about insertional mutagenesis. Furthermore, adenoviruses have been used as live enteric vaccines for many years with an excellent safety profile (Schwartz, A. R. et al. (1974) Am. Rev. Respir. Dis.109:233-238). Finally, adenovirus mediated gene transfer has been demonstrated in a number of instances including transfer of alpha- 1-antitrypsin and CFTR to the lungs of cotton rats (Rosenfeld, M. A. et al. ( 1991) Science 252:431-434; Rosenfeld et al., (1992) Cell 68: 143-155). Furthermore, extensive studies to attempt to establish adenovirus as a causative agent in human cancer were uniformly negative (Green, M. et al. (1979) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 76:6606). Suitable adenoviral vectors useful in the present invention are described, for example, in Kozarsky and Wilson, Curr. Opin. Genet. Devel. 3:499-503 ( 1993); Rosenfeld et al., Cell 68: 143-155 (1992); Engelhardt et al., Human Genet. Ther. 4:759-769 (1993); Yang et al., Nature Genet. 7:362-369 ( 1994); Wilson et al.. Nature 365:691-692 (1993); and U.S. Patent No. 5,652,224, which are herein incoφorated by reference. For example, the adenovirus vector Ad2 is useful and can be grown in human 293 cells. These cells contain the El region of adenovirus and constitutively express Ela and Elb, which complement the defective adenoviruses by providing the products of the genes deleted from the vector. In addition to Ad2, other varieties of adenovirus (e.g., Ad3, Ad5, and Ad7) are also useful in the present invention. Preferably, the adenoviruses used in the present invention are replication deficient. Replication deficient adenoviruses require the aid of a helper virus and/or packaging cell line to form infectious particles. The resulting virus is capable of infecting cells and can express a polynucleotide of interest which is operably linked to a promoter, but cannot replicate in most cells. Replication deficient adenoviruses may be deleted in one or more of all or a portion of the following genes: Ela, E lb, E3. E4, E2a, or LI through L5. In certain other embodiments, the cells are engineered, ex vivo or in vivo, using an adeno-associated virus (AAV). AAVs are naturally occurring defective viruses that require helper viruses to produce infectious particles (Muzyczka, N., Curr. Topics in Microbiol. Immunol. 158:97 ( 1992)). It is also one of the few viruses that may integrate its DNA into non-dividing cells. Vectors containing as little as 300 base pairs of AAV can be packaged and can integrate, but space for exogenous DNA is limited to about 4.5 kb. Methods for producing and using such AAVs are known in the art. See, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5, 139,941 , 5,173,414, 5,354,678, 5,436.146, 5,474,935, 5,478,745, and 5,589,377. For example, an appropriate AAV vector for use in the present invention will include all the sequences necessary for DNA replication, encapsidation, and host-cell integration. The polynucleotide construct is inserted into the AAV vector using standard cloning methods, such as those found in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press ( 1989). The recombinant AAV vector is then transfected into packaging cells which are infected with a helper virus, using any standard technique, including lipofection, electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitation, etc. helper viruses include adenoviruses, cytomegaloviruses, vaccinia viruses, or heφes viruses. Once the packaging cells are transfected and infected, they will produce infectious AAV viral particles which contain the polynucleotide construct. These viral particles are then used to transduce eukaryotic cells, either ex vivo or in vivo. The transduced cells will contain the polynucleotide construct integrated into its genome, and will express a polypeptide of the invention. Another method of gene therapy involves operably associating heterologous control regions and endogenous polynucleotide sequences (e.g. encoding a polypeptide of the present invention) via homologous recombination (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,641 ,670, issued June 24, 1997; International Publication No. WO 96/2941 1. published September 26, 1996; International Publication No. WO 94/12650, published August 4, 1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 ( 1989); and Zijlstra et al., Nature 342:435-438 ( 1989). This method involves the activation of a gene which is present in the target cells, but which is not normally expressed in the cells, or is expressed at a lower level than desired. Polynucleotide constructs are made, using standard techniques known in the art, which contain the promoter with targeting sequences flanking the promoter. Suitable promoters are described herein. The targeting sequence is sufficiently complementary to an endogenous sequence to permit homologous recombination of the promoter-targeting sequence with the endogenous sequence. The targeting sequence will be sufficiently near the 5' end of the desired endogenous polynucleotide sequence so the promoter will be operably linked to the endogenous sequence upon homologous recombination. The promoter and the targeting sequences can be amplified using PCR. Preferably, the amplified promoter contains distinct restriction enzyme sites on the 5' and 3' ends. Preferably, the 3' end of the first targeting sequence contains the same restriction enzyme site as the 5' end of the amplified promoter and the 5' end of the second targeting sequence contains the same restriction site as the 3' end of the amplified promoter. The amplified promoter and targeting sequences are digested and ligated together. The promoter-targeting sequence construct is delivered to the cells, either as naked polynucleotide, or in conjunction with transfection-facilitating agents, such as liposomes, viral sequences, viral particles, whole viruses, lipofection. precipitating agents, etc., described in more detail above. The P promoter-targeting sequence can be delivered by any method, included direct needle injection, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, particle accelerators, etc. The methods are described in more detail below. The promoter-targeting sequence construct is taken up by cells. Homologous recombination between the construct and the endogenous sequence takes place, such that an endogenous sequence is placed under the control of the promoter. The promoter then drives the expression of the endogenous sequence. Preferably, the polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the present invention contains a secretory signal sequence that facilitates secretion of the protein. Typically, the signal sequence is positioned in the coding region of the polynucleotide to be expressed towards or at the 5' end of the coding region. The signal sequence may be homologous or heterologous to the polynucleotide of interest and may be homologous or heterologous to the cells to be transfected. Additionally, the signal sequence may be chemically synthesized using methods known in the art. Any mode of administration of any of the above-described polynucleotides constructs can be used so long as the mode results in the expression of one or more molecules in an amount sufficient to provide a therapeutic effect. This includes direct needle injection, systemic injection, catheter infusion, biolistic injectors, particle accelerators (i.e., "gene guns"), gelfoam sponge depots, other commercially available depot materials, osmotic pumps (e.g., Alza minipumps), oral or suppositorial solid (tablet or pill) pharmaceutical formulations, and decanting or topical applications during surgery. For example, direct injection of naked calcium phosphate-precipitated plasmid into rat liver and rat spleen or a protein-coated plasmid into the portal vein has resulted in gene expression of the foreign gene in the rat livers (Kaneda et al., Science 243:375 (1989)). A preferred method of local administration is by direct injection. Preferably, a recombinant molecule of the present invention complexed with a delivery vehicle is administered by direct injection into or locally within the area of arteries. Administration of a composition locally within the area of arteries refers to injecting the composition centimeters and preferably, millimeters within arteries. Another method of local administration is to contact a polynucleotide construct of the present invention in or around a surgical wound. For example, a patient can undergo surgery and the polynucleotide construct can be coated on the surface of tissue inside the wound or the construct can be injected into areas of tissue inside the wound. Therapeutic compositions useful in systemic administration, include recombinant molecules of the present invention complexed to a targeted delivery vehicle of the present invention. Suitable delivery vehicles for use with systemic administration comprise liposomes comprising ligands for targeting the vehicle to a particular site. Preferred methods of systemic administration, include intravenous injection, aerosol, oral and percutaneous (topical) delivery. Intravenous injections can be performed using methods standard in the art. Aerosol delivery can also be performed using methods standard in the art (see, for example, Stribling et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 189: 1 1277-1 1281 , 1992, which is incoφorated herein by reference). Oral delivery can be performed by complexing a polynucleotide construct of the present invention to a carrier capable of withstanding degradation by digestive enzymes in the gut of an animal. Examples of such carriers, include plastic capsules or tablets, such as those known in the art. Topical delivery can be performed by mixing a polynucleotide construct of the present invention with a lipophilic reagent (e.g., DMSO) that is capable of passing into the skin. Determining an effective amount of substance to be delivered can depend upon a number of factors including, for example, the chemical structure and biological activity of the substance, the age and weight of the animal, the precise condition requiring treatment and its severity, and the route of administration. The frequency of treatments depends upon a number of factors, such as the amount of polynucleotide constructs administered per dose, as well as the health and history of the subject. The precise amount, number of doses, and timing of doses will be determined by the attending physician or veterinarian. Therapeutic compositions of the present invention can be administered to any animal, preferably to mammals and birds. Preferred mammals include humans, dogs, cats. mice. rats, rabbits sheep, cattle, horses and pigs, with humans being particularly preferred. Biological Activities Polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, can be used in assays to test for one or more biological activities. If these polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, do exhibit activity in a particular assay, it is likely that these molecules may be involved in the diseases associated with the biological activity. Thus, the polynucleotides and polypeptides, and agonists or antagonists could be used to treat the associated disease. Immune Activity A polypeptide or polynucleotide, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may be useful in treating deficiencies or disorders of the immune system, by activating or inhibiting the proliferation, differentiation, or mobilization (chemotaxis) of immune cells. Immune cells develop through a process called hematopoiesis, producing myeloid (platelets, red blood cells, neutrophils, and macrophages) and lymphoid (B and T lymphocytes) cells from pluripotent stem cells. The etiology of these immune deficiencies or disorders may be genetic, somatic, such as cancer or some autoimmune disorders, acquired (e.g., by chemotherapy or toxins), or infectious. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used as a marker or detector of a particular immune system disease or disorder. Polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may be useful in treating or detecting deficiencies or disorders of hematopoietic cells. Polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention could be used to increase differentiation and proliferation of hematopoietic cells, including the pluripotent stem cells, in an effort to treat those disorders associated with a decrease in certain (or many) types hematopoietic cells. Examples of immunologic deficiency syndromes include, but are not limited to: blood protein disorders (e.g. agammaglobulinemia, dysgammaglobulinemia), ataxia telangiectasia. common variable immunodeficiency, Digeorge Syndrome, HIV infection. HTLV-BLV infection, leukocyte adhesion deficiency syndrome, lymphopenia. phagocyte bactericidal dysfunction, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCIDs), Wiskott-Aldrich Disorder, anemia, thrombocytopenia, or hemoglobinuria. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention could also be used to modulate hemostatic (the stopping of bleeding) or thrombolytic activity (clot formation). For example, by increasing hemostatic or thrombolytic activity, polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention could be used to treat blood coagulation disorders (e.g., afibrinogenemia, factor deficiencies), blood platelet disorders (e.g. thrombocytopenia), or wounds resulting from trauma, surgery, or other causes. Alternatively, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention that can decrease hemostatic or thrombolytic activity could be used to inhibit or dissolve clotting. These molecules could be important in the treatment of heart attacks (infarction), strokes, or scarring. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also be useful in treating or detecting autoimmune disorders. Many autoimmune disorders result from inappropriate recognition of self as foreign material by immune cells. This inappropriate recognition results in an immune response leading to the destruction of the host tissue. Therefore, the administration of polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention that can inhibit an immune response, particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of T-cells. may be an effective therapy in preventing autoimmune disorders. Examples of autoimmune disorders that can be treated or detected include, but are not limited to: Addison's Disease, hemolytic anemia, antiphospholipid syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, dermatitis, allergic encephalomyelitis, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's Syndrome, Graves' Disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Myasthenia Gravis, Neuritis, Ophthalmia, Bullous Pemphigoid, Pemphigus, Polyendocrinopathies, Puφura, Reiter's Disease, Stiff-Man Syndrome, Autoimmune Thyroiditis, Systemic Lupus Erythematosus. Autoimmune Pulmonary Inflammation, Guillain-Barre Syndrome, insulin dependent diabetes mellitis, and autoimmune inflammatory eye disease. Similarly, allergic reactions and conditions, such as asthma (particularly allergic asthma) or other respiratory problems, may also be treated by polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Moreover, these molecules can be used to treat anaphylaxis, hypersensitivity to an antigenic molecule, or blood group incompatibility. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also be used to treat and/or prevent organ rejection or graft-versus-host disease (GVHD). Organ rejection occurs by host immune cell destruction of the transplanted tissue through an immune response. Similarly, an immune response is also involved in GVHD, but, in this case, the foreign transplanted immune cells destroy the host tissues. The administration of polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention that inhibits an immune response, particularly the proliferation, differentiation, or chemotaxis of T-cells, may be an effective therapy in preventing organ rejection or GVHD. Similarly, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also be used to modulate inflammation. For example, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may inhibit the proliferation and differentiation of cells involved in an inflammatory response. These molecules can be used to treat inflammatory conditions, both chronic and acute conditions, including chronic prostatitis, granulomatous prostatitis and malacoplakia, inflammation associated with infection (e.g., septic shock, sepsis, or systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS)), ischemia-reperfusion injury, endotoxin lethality, arthritis, complement-mediated hyperacute rejection, nephritis, cytokine or chemokine induced lung injury, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, or resulting from over production of cytokines (e.g., TNF or IL-1.) Hyperproliferative Disorders Polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used to treat or detect hyperproliferative disorders, including neoplasms. Polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may inhibit the proliferation of the disorder through direct or indirect interactions. Alternatively, Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention may proliferate other cells which can inhibit the hypeφroliferative disorder. For example, by increasing an immune response, particularly increasing antigenic qualities of the hyperproliferative disorder or by proliferating, differentiating, or mobilizing T-cells, hypeφroliferative disorders can be treated. This immune response may be increased by either enhancing an existing immune response, or by initiating a new immune response. Alternatively, decreasing an immune response may also be a method of treating hypeφroliferative disorders, such as a chemotherapeutic agent. Examples of hypeφroliferative disorders that can be treated or detected by Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention include, but are not limited to neoplasms located in the: colon, abdomen, bone, breast, digestive system, liver, pancreas, peritoneum, endocrine glands (adrenal, parathyroid, pituitary, testicles, ovary, thymus. thyroid), eye, head and neck, nervous (central and peripheral), lymphatic system, pelvic, skin, soft tissue, spleen, thoracic, and urogenital. .-JO Similarly, other hypeφroliferative disorders can also be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Examples of such hypeφroliferative disorders include, but are not limited to: hypergammaglobulinemia, lymphoproliferative disorders, paraproteinemias, puφura. sarcoidosis. Sezary Syndrome, Waldenstron's Macroglobulinemia, Gaucher's Disease, histiocytosis, and any other hypeφroliferative disease, besides neoplasia, located in an organ system listed above. One preferred embodiment utilizes polynucleotides of the present invention to inhibit aberrant cellular division, by gene therapy using the present invention, and/or protein fusions or fragments thereof. Thus, the present invention provides a method for treating cell proliferative disorders by inserting into an abnormally proliferating cell a polynucleotide of the present invention, wherein said polynucleotide represses said expression. Another embodiment of the present invention provides a method of treating cell-proliferative disorders in individuals comprising administration of one or more active gene copies of the present invention to an abnormally proliferating cell or cells. In a preferred embodiment, polynucleotides of the present invention is a DNA construct comprising a recombinant expression vector effective in expressing a DNA sequence encoding said polynucleotides. In another preferred embodiment of the present invention, the DNA construct encoding the povnucleotides of the present invention is inserted into cells to be treated utilizing a retrovirus, or more preferrably an adenoviral vector (See G J. Nabel, et. al., PNAS 1999 96: 324-326, which is hereby incoφorated by reference). In a most preferred embodiment, the viral vector is defective and will not transform non-proliferating cells, only proliferating cells. Moreover, in a preferred embodiment, the polynucleotides of the present invention inserted into proliferating cells either alone, or in combination with or fused to other polynucleotides, can then be modulated via an external stimulus (i.e. magnetic, specific small molecule, chemical, or drug administration, etc.), which acts upon the promoter upstream of said polynucleotides to induce expression of the encoded protein product. As such the beneficial therapeutic affect of the present invention may be expressly modulated (i.e. to increase, decrease, or inhibit expression of the present invention) based upon said external stimulus. Polynucleotides of the present invention may be useful in repressing expression of oncogenic genes or antigens. By "repressing expression of the oncogenic genes " is intended the suppression of the transcription of the gene, the degradation of the gene transcript (pre-message RNA), the inhibition of splicing, the destruction of the messenger RNA, the prevention of the post-translational modifications of the protein, the destruction of the protein, or the inhibition of the normal function of the protein. For local administration to abnormally proliferating cells, polynucleotides of the present invention may be administered by any method known to those of skill in the art including, but not limited to transfection. electroporation, microinjection of cells, or in vehicles such as liposomes, lipofectin, or as naked polynucleotides, or any other method described throughout the specification. The polynucleotide of the present invention may be delivered by known gene delivery systems such as, but not limited to, retroviral vectors (Gilboa, J. Virology 44:845 (1982); Hocke, Nature 320:275 ( 1986); Wilson, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:3014), vaccinia virus system (Chakrabarty et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 5:3403 ( 1985) or other efficient DNA delivery systems (Yates et al., Nature 313:812 ( 1985)) known to those skilled in the art. These references are exemplary only and are hereby incoφorated by reference. In order to specifically deliver or transfect cells which are abnormally proliferating and spare non-dividing cells, it is preferable to utilize a retrovirus. or adenoviral (as described in the art and elsewhere herein) delivery system known to those of skill in the art. Since host DNA replication is required for retroviral DNA to integrate and the retrovirus will be unable to self replicate due to the lack of the retrovirus genes needed for its life cycle. Utilizing such a retroviral delivery system for polynucleotides of the present invention will target said gene and constructs to abnormally proliferating cells and will spare the non-dividing normal cells. The polynucleotides of the present invention may be delivered directly to cell proliferative disorder/disease sites in internal organs, body cavities and the like by use of imaging devices used to guide an injecting needle directly to the disease site The polynucleotides of the present invention may also be administered to disease sites at the time of surgical intervention. By "cell proliferative disease" is meant any human or animal disease or disorder, affecting any one or any combination of organs, cavities, or body parts, which is characterized by single or multiple local abnormal proliferations of cells, groups of cells, or tissues, whether benign or malignant. Any amount of the polynucleotides of the present invention may be administered as long as it has a biologically inhibiting effect on the proliferation of the treated cells Moreover, it is possible to administer more than one of the polynucleotide of the present invention simultaneously to the same site By "biologically inhibiting" is meant partial or total growth inhibition as well as decreases in the rate of proliferation or growth of the cells The biologically inhibitory dose may be determined by assessing the effects of the polynucleotides of the present invention on target malignant or abnormally proliferating cell growth in tissue culture, tumor growth in animals and cell cultures, or any other method known to one of ordinary skill in the art The present invention is further directed to antibody-based therapies which involve administering of anti-polypeptides and anti-polynucleotide antibodies to a mammalian, preferably human, patient for treating one or more of the described disorders. Methods for producing anti-polypeptides and anti-polynucleotide antibodies polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies are descπbed in detail elsewhere herein. Such antibodies may be provided in pharmaceutically acceptable compositions as known in the art or as described herein. A summary of the ways in which the antibodies of the present invention may be used therapeutically includes binding polynucleotides or polypeptides of the present invention locally or systemically in the body or by direct cytotoxicity of the antibody, e.g as mediated by complement (CDC) or by effector cells (ADCC) Some of these approaches are described in more detail below Armed with the teachings provided herein, one of ordinary skill in the art will know how to use the antibodies of the present invention for diagnostic, monitoring or therapeutic puφoses without undue experimentation. In particular, the antibodies, fragments and derivatives of the present invention are useful for treating a subject having or developing cell proliferative and/or differentiation disorders as described herein. Such treatment comprises administering a single or multiple doses of the antibody, or a fragment, derivative, or a conjugate thereof. The antibodies of this invention may be advantageously utilized in combination with other monoclonal or chimeric antibodies, or with lymphokines or hematopoietic growth factors, for example., which serve to increase the number or activity of effector cells which interact with the antibodies. It is preferred to use high affinity and/or potent in vivo inhibiting and/or neutralizing antibodies against polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention, fragments or regions thereof, for both immunoassays directed to and therapy of disorders related to polynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragements thereof, of the present invention. Such antibodies, fragments, or regions, will preferably have an affinity for polynucleotides or polypeptides, including fragements thereof. Preferred binding affinities include those with a dissociation constant or Kd less than 5X10 "6 M, 10 "6 M, 5X10 "7 M, 10 "7 M, 5X10 "8 M, 10 "8 M, 5X10 "9 M, 10 "9 M, 5X10 ' 10 M, 10 " '°M, 5X10 'π M, 10 " "M, 5X10 " ι: M, 10 " 12 M, 5X10 "13 M, 10 "13 M, 5X10 " 14 M, 10 "14 M, 5X10 '15 M, and 10 ",5 M. Moreover, polypeptides of the present invention are useful in inhibiting the angiogenesis of proliferative cells or tissues, either alone, as a protein fusion, or in combination with other polypeptides directly or indirectly, as described elsewhere herein. In a most preferred embodiment, said anti-angiogenesis effect may be achieved indirectly, for example, through the inhibition of hematopoietic, tumor- specific cells, such as tumor-associated macrophages (See Joseph IB, et al. J Natl Cancer Inst, 90(21): 1648-53 (1998), which is hereby incoφorated by reference). Antibodies directed to polypeptides or polynucleotides of the present invention may also result in inhibition of angiogenesis directly, or indirectly (See Witte L, et al., Cancer Metastasis Rev. 17(2): 155-61 ( 1998), which is hereby incoφorated by reference)). Polypeptides, including protein fusions, of the present invention, or fragments thereof may be useful in inhibiting proliferative cells or tissues through the induction of apoptosis. Said polypeptides may act either directly, or indirectly to induce apoptosis of proliferative cells and tissues, for example in the activation of a death- domain receptor, such as tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor- 1, CD95 (Fas/APO-1), TNF-receptor-related apoptosis-mediated protein (TRAMP) and TNF-related apoptosis-inducing ligand (TRAIL) receptor- 1 and -2 (See Schulze-Osthoff K, et.al., Eur J Biochem 254(3):439-59 (1998), which is hereby incoφorated by reference). Moreover, in another preferred embodiment of the present invention, said polypeptides may induce apoptosis through other mechanisms, such as in the activation of other proteins which will activate apoptosis, or through stimulating the expression of said proteins, either alone or in combination with small molecule drugs or adjuviants, such as apoptonin, galectins, thioredoxins, antiinflammatory proteins (See for example, Mutat Res 400(l-2):447-55 ( 1998), Med Hypotheses.50(5):423-33 (1998), Chem Biol Interact. Apr 24; 1 1 1 -1 12:23-34 (1998), J Mol Med.76(6):402-12 (1998), Int J Tissue React;20(l):3-15 ( 1998), which are all hereby incoφorated by reference). Polypeptides, including protein fusions to, or fragments thereof, of the present invention are useful in inhibiting the metastasis of proliferative cells or tissues. Inhibition may occur as a direct result of administering polypeptides, or antibodies directed to said polypeptides as described elsewere herein, or indirectly, such as activating the expression of proteins known to inhibit metastasis, for example alpha 4 integrins, (See, e.g., Curr Top Microbiol Immunol 1998;231 : 125-41 , which is hereby incoφorated by reference). Such thereapeutic affects of the present invention may be achieved either alone, or in combination with small molecule drugs or adjuvants. In another embodiment, the invention provides a method of delivering compositions containing the polypeptides of the invention (e.g., compositions containing polypeptides or polypeptide antibodes associated with heterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, or prodrugs) to targeted cells expressing the polypeptide of the present invention. Polypeptides or polypeptide antibodes of the invention may be associated with with heterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, or prodrugs via hydrophobic, hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent interactions. Polypeptides, protein fusions to, or fragments thereof, of the present invention are useful in enhancing the immunogenicity and/or antigenicity of proliferating cells or tissues, either directly, such as would occur if the polypeptides of the present invention 'vaccinated' the immune response to respond to proliferative antigens and immunogens, or indirectly, such as in activating the expression of proteins known to enhance the immune response (e.g. chemokines), to said antigens and immunogens. Cardiovascular Disorders Polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may be used to treat cardiovascular disorders, including peripheral artery disease, such as limb ischemia. Cardiovascular disorders include cardiovascular abnormalities, such as arterio- arterial fistula, arteriovenous fistula, cerebral arteriovenous malformations, congenital heart defects, pulmonary atresia, and Scimitar Syndrome. Congenital heart defects include aortic coarctation, cor triatriatum, coronary vessel anomalies, crisscross heart, dextrocardia, patent ductus arteriosus, Ebstein's anomaly, Eisenmenger complex, hypoplastic left heart syndrome, levocardia, tetralogy of fallot, transposition of great vessels, double outlet right ventricle, tricuspid atresia, persistent truncus arteriosus, and heart septal defects, such as aortopulmonary septal defect, endocardial cushion defects, Lutembacher's Syndrome, trilogy of Fallot, ventricular heart septal defects. Cardiovascular disorders also include heart disease, such as arrhythmias, carcinoid heart disease, high cardiac output, low cardiac output, cardiac tamponade, endocarditis (including bacterial), heart aneurysm, cardiac arrest, congestive heart failure, congestive cardiomyopathy, paroxysmal dyspnea, cardiac edema, heart hypertrophy, congestive cardiomyopathy, left ventricular hypertrophy, right ventricular hypertrophy, post-infarction heart rupture, ventricular septal rupture, heart valve diseases, myocardial diseases, myocardial ischemia, pericardial effusion, pericarditis (including constrictive and tuberculous), pneumopericardium, postpericardiotomy syndrome, pulmonary heart disease, rheumatic heart disease, ventricular dysfunction, hyperemia, cardiovascular pregnancy complications, Scimitar Syndrome, cardiovascular syphilis, and cardiovascular tuberculosis. Arrhythmias include sinus arrhythmia, atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, bradycardia. extrasystole. Adams-Stokes Syndrome, bundle-branch block, sinoatrial block, long QT syndrome, parasystole, Lown-Ganong-Levine Syndrome, Mahaim- type pre-excitation syndrome, Wolff-Parkinson-White syndrome, sick sinus syndrome, tachycardias, and ventricular fibrillation. Tachycardias include paroxysmal tachycardia, supraventricular tachycardia, accelerated idioventricular rhythm, atrioventricular nodal reentry tachycardia, ectopic atrial tachycardia, ectopic junctional tachycardia, sinoatrial nodal reentry tachycardia, sinus tachycardia, Torsades de Pointes, and ventricular tachycardia. Heart valve disease include aortic valve insufficiency, aortic valve stenosis, hear murmurs, aortic valve prolapse, mitral valve prolapse, tricuspid valve prolapse, mitral valve insufficiency, mitral valve stenosis, pulmonary atresia, pulmonary valve insufficiency, pulmonary valve stenosis, tricuspid atresia, tricuspid valve insufficiency, and tricuspid valve stenosis. Myocardial diseases include alcoholic cardiomyopathy, congestive cardiomyopathy, hypertrophic cardiomyopathy, aortic subvalvular stenosis, pulmonary subvalvular stenosis, restrictive cardiomyopathy, Chagas cardiomyopathy, endocardial fibroelastosis, endomyocardial fibrosis, Kearns Syndrome, myocardial reperfusion injury, and myocarditis. Myocardial ischemias include coronary disease, such as angina pectoris, coronary aneurysm, coronary arteriosclerosis, coronary thrombosis, coronary vasospasm, myocardial infarction and myocardial stunning. Cardiovascular diseases also include vascular diseases such as aneurysms, angiodysplasia, angiomatosis, bacillary angiomatosis, Hippel-Lindau Disease, Klippel-Trenaunay-Weber Syndrome. Sturge- Weber Syndrome, angioneurotic edema, aortic diseases. Takayasu's Arteritis. aortitis. Leriche's Syndrome, arterial occlusive diseases, arteritis, enarteritis, polyarteritis nodosa, cerebrovascular disorders, diabetic angiopathies, diabetic retinopathy. embolisms, thrombosis, erythromelalgia, hemorrhoids, hepatic veno-occlusive disease, hypertension, hypotension, ischemia, peripheral vascular diseases, phlebitis, pulmonary veno-occlusive disease, Raynaud's disease. CREST syndrome, retinal vein occlusion. Scimitar syndrome, superior vena cava syndrome, telangiectasia, atacia telangiectasia. hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia, varicocele, varicose veins, varicose ulcer, vasculitis, and venous insufficiency. Aneurysms include dissecting aneurysms. false aneurysms. infected aneurysms, ruptured aneurysms, aortic aneurysms. cerebral aneurysms, coronary aneurysms, heart aneurysms, and iliac aneurysms. Arterial occlusive diseases include arteriosclerosis, intermittent claudication, carotid stenosis, fibromuscular dysplasias, mesenteric vascular occlusion, Moyamoya disease, renal artery obstruction, retinal artery occlusion, and thromboangiitis obliterans. Cerebrovascular disorders include carotid artery diseases, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, cerebral aneurysm, cerebral anoxia, cerebral arteriosclerosis, cerebral arteriovenous malformation, cerebral artery diseases, cerebral embolism and thrombosis, carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis, Wallenberg's syndrome, cerebral hemorrhage, epidural hematoma, subdural hematoma, subaraxhnoid hemorrhage, cerebral infarction, cerebral ischemia (including transient), subclavian steal syndrome, periventricular leukomalacia, vascular headache, cluster headache, migraine, and vertebrobasilar insufficiency. Embolisms include air embolisms, amniotic fluid embolisms, cholesterol embolisms, blue toe syndrome, fat embolisms, pulmonary embolisms, and thromoboembolisms. Thrombosis include coronary thrombosis, hepatic vein thrombosis, retinal vein occlusion, carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis, Wallenberg's syndrome, and thrombophlebitis. Ischemia includes cerebral ischemia, ischemic colitis, compartment syndromes, anterior compartment syndrome, myocardial ischemia, reperfusion injuries, and peripheral limb ischemia. Vasculitis includes aortitis. arteritis, Behcet's Syndrome. Churg-Strauss Syndrome, mucocutaneous lymph node syndrome, thromboangiitis obliterans, hypersensitivity vasculitis, Schoenlein-Henoch puφura, allergic cutaneous vasculitis, and Wegener's granulomatosis. Polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the present invention, are especially effective for the treatment of critical limb ischemia and coronary disease. Polypeptides may be administered using any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, direct needle injection at the delivery site, intravenous injection, topical administration, catheter infusion, biolistic injectors, particle accelerators, gelfoam sponge depots, other commercially available depot materials, osmotic pumps, oral or suppositorial solid pharmaceutical formulations, decanting or topical applications during surgery, aerosol delivery. Such methods are known in the art. Polypeptides may be administered as part of a Therapeutic, described in more detail below. Methods of delivering polynucleotides are described in more detail herein. Anti-Angiogenesis Activity The naturally occurring balance between endogenous stimulators and inhibitors of angiogenesis is one in which inhibitory influences predominate. Rastinejad et al. Cell 56:345-355 (1989). In those rare instances in which neovascularization occurs under normal physiological conditions, such as wound healing, organ regeneration, embryonic development, and female reproductive processes, angiogenesis is stringently regulated and spatially and temporally delimited. Under conditions of pathological angiogenesis such as that characterizing solid tumor growth, these regulatory controls fail. Unregulated angiogenesis becomes pathologic and sustains progression of many neoplastic and non-neoplastic diseases. A number of serious diseases are dominated by abnormal neovascularization including solid tumor growth and metastases, arthritis, some types of eye disorders, and psoriasis. See, e.g., reviews by Moses et al, Biotech. 9:630-634 (1991); Folkman et al, N. Engl J. Med., 333: 1757- 1763 ( 1995); Auerbach et al. J. Microvasc. Res. 29:401-41 1 ( 1985); Folkman. Advances in Cancer Research, eds. Klein and Weinhouse. Academic Press, New York, pp. 175-203 ( 1985); Patz, Am. J. Opthal ol 94:1X5-143 ( 1982); and Folkman et al. Science 221:119-125 (1983). In a number of pathological conditions, the process of angiogenesis contributes to the disease state. For example, significant data have accumulated which suggest that the growth of solid tumors is dependent on angiogenesis. Folkman and Klagsbrun, Science 235:442-441 (1987). The polynucleotides encoding a polypeptide of the present invention may be administered along with other polynucleotides encoding an angiogenic protein. Examples of angiogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, acidic and basic fibroblast growth factors, VEGF- 1 , VEGF-2, VEGF-3, epidermal growth factor alpha and beta, platelet-derived endothelial cell growth factor, platelet-derived growth factor, tumor necrosis factor alpha, hepatocyte growth factor, insulin like growth factor, colony stimulating factor, macrophage colony stimulating factor, granulocyte/macrophage colony stimulating factor, and nitric oxide synthase. The present invention provides for treatment of diseases or disorders associated with neovascularization by administration of the polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the invention, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Malignant and metastatic conditions which can be treated with the polynucleotides and polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention include, but are not limited to, malignancies, solid tumors, and cancers described herein and otherwise known in the art (for a review of such disorders, see Fishman et al, Medicine, 2d Ed., J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia (1985)). Thus, the present invention provides a method of treating an angiogenesis-related disease and/or disorder, comprising administering to an individual in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist of the invention. For example, polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be utilized in a variety of additional methods in order to therapeutically treat a cancer or tumor. Cancers which may be treated with polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists include, but are not limited to solid tumors, including pancreas, prostate, lung, breast, ovarian, stomach, larynx, esophagus, testes, liver, parotid, biliary tract, colon, rectum, cervix, uterus, endometrium, kidney, bladder, thyroid cancer; primary tumors and metastases; melanomas; glioblastoma; Kaposi's sarcoma; leiomyosarcoma; non- small cell lung cancer: colorectal cancer; advanced malignancies; and blood born tumors such as leukemias. For example, polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be delivered topically, in order to treat cancers such as skin cancer, head and neck tumors, breast tumors, and Kaposi's sarcoma. Within yet other aspects, polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be utilized to treat superficial forms of bladder cancer by, for example, intravesical administration. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be delivered directly into the tumor, or near the tumor site, via injection or a catheter. Of course, as the artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate, the appropriate mode of administration will vary according to the cancer to be treated. Other modes of delivery are discussed herein. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists may be useful in treating other disorders, besides cancers, which involve angiogenesis. These disorders include, but are not limited to: benign tumors, for example hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas; artheroscleric plaques; ocular angiogenic diseases, for example, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, uvietis and Pterygia (abnormal blood vessel growth) of the eye; rheumatoid arthritis; psoriasis; delayed wound healing; endometriosis; vasculogenesis; granulations; hypertrophic scars (keloids); nonunion fractures; scleroderma; trachoma; vascular adhesions; myocardial angiogenesis; coronary collaterals; cerebral collaterals; arteriovenous malformations; ischemic limb angiogenesis; Osier- Webber Syndrome; plaque neovascularization; telangiectasia; hemophiliac joints; angiofibroma; fibromuscular dysplasia: wound granulation; Crohn's disease; and atherosclerosis. For example, within one aspect of the present invention methods are provided for treating hypertrophic scars and keloids. comprising the step of administering a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist of the invention to a hypertrophic scar or keloid. Within one embodiment of the present invention polynucleotides, polypeptides, antagonists and/or agonists are directly injected into a hypertrophic scar or keloid, in order to prevent the progression of these lesions. This therapy is of particular value in the prophylactic treatment of conditions which are known to result in the development of hypertrophic scars and keloids (e.g.. burns), and is preferably initiated after the proliferative phase has had time to progress (approximately 14 days after the initial injury), but before hypertrophic scar or keloid development. As noted above, the present invention also provides methods for treating neovascular diseases of the eye, including for example, corneal neovascularization, neovascular glaucoma, proliferative diabetic retinopathy, retrolental fibroplasia and macular degeneration. Moreover, Ocular disorders associated with neovascularization which can be treated with the polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention (including agonists and/or antagonists) include, but are not limited to: neovascular glaucoma, diabetic retinopathy, retinoblastoma, retrolental fibroplasia. uveitis, retinopathy of prematurity macular degeneration, corneal graft neovascularization, as well as other eye inflammatory diseases, ocular tumors and diseases associated with choroidal or iris neovascularization. See, e.g., reviews by Waltman et al, Am. J. Ophthal 55:704- 710 (1978) and Gartner et al, Surv. Ophthal. 22:291-312 (1978). Thus, within one aspect of the present invention methods are provided for treating neovascular diseases of the eye such as corneal neovascularization (including corneal graft neovascularization), comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound (as described above) to the cornea, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. Briefly, the cornea is a tissue which normally lacks blood vessels. In certain pathological conditions however. capillaries may extend into the cornea from the pericorneal vascular plexus of the limbus. When the cornea becomes vascularized, it also becomes clouded, resulting in a decline in the patient's visual acuity. Visual loss may become complete if the cornea completely opacitates. A wide variety of disorders can result in corneal neovascularization, including for example, corneal infections (e.g., trachoma, heφes simplex keratitis, leishmaniasis and onchocerciasis), immunological processes (e.g., graft rejection and Stevens-Johnson's syndrome), alkali burns, trauma, inflammation (of any cause), toxic and nutritional deficiency states, and as a complication of wearing contact lenses. Within particularly preferred embodiments of the invention, may be prepared for topical administration in saline (combined with any of the preservatives and antimicrobial agents commonly used in ocular preparations), and administered in eyedrop form. The solution or suspension may be prepared in its pure form and administered several times daily. Alternatively, anti-angiogenic compositions, prepared as described above, may also be administered directly to the cornea. Within preferred embodiments, the anti-angiogenic composition is prepared with a muco- adhesive polymer which binds to cornea. Within further embodiments, the anti- angiogenic factors or anti-angiogenic compositions may be utilized as an adjunct to conventional steroid therapy. Topical therapy may also be useful prophylactically in corneal lesions which are known to have a high probability of inducing an angiogenic response (such as chemical burns). In these instances the treatment, likely in combination with steroids, may be instituted immediately to help prevent subsequent complications. Within other embodiments, the compounds described above may be injected directly into the corneal stroma by an ophthalmologist under microscopic guidance. The preferred site of injection may vary with the moφhology of the individual lesion, but the goal of the administration would be to place the composition at the advancing front of the vasculature (i.e., interspersed between the blood vessels and the normal cornea). In most cases this would involve perilimbic comeal injection to "protect" the cornea from the advancing blood vessels. This method may also be utilized shortly after a corneal insult in order to prophylactically prevent corneal neovascularization. In this situation the material could be injected in the perilimbic cornea interspersed between the corneal lesion and its undesired potential limbic blood supply. Such methods may also be utilized in a similar fashion to prevent capillary invasion of transplanted corneas. In a sustained-release form injections might only be required 2- 3 times per year. A steroid could also be added to the injection solution to reduce inflammation resulting from the injection itself. -. Within another aspect of the present invention, methods are provided for treating neovascular glaucoma, comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist to the eye, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. In one embodiment, the compound may be administered topically to the eye in order to treat early forms of neovascular glaucoma. Within other embodiments, the compound may be implanted by injection into the region of the anterior chamber angle. Within other embodiments, the compound may also be placed in any location such that the compound is continuously released into the aqueous humor. Within another aspect of the present invention, methods are provided for treating proliferative diabetic retinopathy, comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist to the eyes, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. Within particularly preferred embodiments of the invention, proliferative diabetic retinopathy may be treated by injection into the aqueous humor or the vitreous, in order to increase the local concentration of the polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist in the retina. Preferably, this treatment should be initiated prior to the acquisition of severe disease requiring photocoagulation. Within another aspect of the present invention, methods are provided for treating retrolental fibroplasia, comprising the step of administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a polynucleotide, polypeptide, antagonist and/or agonist to the eye, such that the formation of blood vessels is inhibited. The compound may be administered topically, via intravitreous injection and/or via intraocular implants. Additionally, disorders which can be treated with the polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists include, but are not limited to, hemangioma, arthritis, psoriasis, angiofibroma, atherosclerotic plaques, delayed wound healing, granulations, hemophilic joints, hypertrophic scars, nonunion fractures, Osier- Weber syndrome, pyogenic granuloma, scleroderma, trachoma, and vascular adhesions. Moreover, disorders and/or states, which can be treated with be treated with the the polynucleotides, polypeptides. agonists and/or agonists include, but are not limited to, solid tumors, blood born tumors such as leukemias, tumor metastasis, Kaposi's sarcoma, benign tumors, for example hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas. rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, ocular angiogenic diseases, for example, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, and uvietis, delayed wound healing, endometriosis, vascluogenesis, granulations, hypertrophic scars (keloids), nonunion fractures, scleroderma, trachoma, vascular adhesions, myocardial angiogenesis, coronary collaterals, cerebral collaterals, arteriovenous malformations, ischemic limb angiogenesis, Osier-Webber Syndrome, plaque neovascularization, telangiectasia, hemophiliac joints, angiofibroma fibromuscular dysplasia, wound granulation, Crohn's disease, atherosclerosis, birth control agent by preventing vascularization required for embryo implantation controlling menstruation, diseases that have angiogenesis as a pathologic consequence such as cat scratch disease (Rochele minalia quintosa), ulcers (Helicobacter pylori), Bartonellosis and bacillary angiomatosis. In one aspect of the birth control method, an amount of the compound sufficient to block embryo implantation is administered before or after intercourse and fertilization have occurred, thus providing an effective method of birth control, possibly a "morning after" method. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists may also be used in controlling menstruation or administered as either a peritoneal lavage fluid or for peritoneal implantation in the treatment of endometriosis. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists of the present invention may be incoφorated into surgical sutures in order to prevent stitch granulomas. Polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists may be utilized in a wide variety of surgical procedures. For example, within one aspect of the present invention a compositions (in the form of, for example, a spray or film) may be utilized to coat or spray an area prior to removal of a tumor, in order to isolate normal surrounding tissues from malignant tissue, and/or to prevent the spread of disease to surrounding tissues. Within other aspects of the present invention, compositions (e.g., in the form of a spray) may be delivered via endoscopic procedures in order to coat tumors, or inhibit angiogenesis in a desired locale. Within yet other aspects of the present invention, surgical meshes which have been coated with anti- angiogenic compositions of the present invention may be utilized in any procedure wherein a surgical mesh might be utilized. For example, within one embodiment of the invention a surgical mesh laden with an anti-angiogenic composition may be utilized during abdominal cancer resection surgery (e.g., subsequent to colon resection) in order to provide support to the structure, and to release an amount of the anti- angiogenic factor. Within further aspects of the present invention, methods are provided for treating tumor excision sites, comprising administering a polynucleotide, polypeptide, agonist and/or agonist to the resection margins of a tumor subsequent to excision, such that the local recurrence of cancer and the formation of new blood vessels at the site is inhibited. Within one embodiment of the invention, the anti-angiogenic compound is administered directly to the tumor excision site (e.g., applied by swabbing, brushing or otherwise coating the resection margins of the tumor with the anti-angiogenic compound). Alternatively, the anti-angiogenic compounds may be incoφorated into l nown surgical pastes prior to administration. Within particularly preferred embodiments of the invention, the anti-angiogenic compounds are applied after hepatic resections for malignancy, and after neurosurgical operations. Within one aspect of the present invention, polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists may be administered to the resection margin of a wide variety of tumors, including for example, breast, colon, brain and hepatic tumors. For example, within one embodiment of the invention, anti-angiogenic compounds may be administered to the site of a neurological tumor subsequent to excision, such that the formation of new blood vessels at the site are inhibited. The polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or agonists of the present invention may also be administered along with other anti-angiogenic factors. Representative examples of other anti-angiogenic factors include: Anti-Invasive Factor, retinoic acid and derivatives thereof, paclitaxel, Suramin, Tissue Inhibitor of Metalloproteinase-1, Tissue Inhibitor of Metalloproteinase-2, Plasminogen Activator Inhibitor- 1 , Plasminogen Activator Inhibitor-2, and various forms of the lighter "d group" transition metals. Lighter "d group" transition metals include, for example, vanadium, molybdenum, tungsten, titanium, niobium, and tantalum species. Such transition metal species may form transition metal complexes. Suitable complexes of the above-mentioned transition metal species include oxo transition metal complexes. Representative examples of vanadium complexes include oxo vanadium complexes such as vanadate and vanadyl complexes. Suitable vanadate complexes include metavanadate and orthovanadate complexes such as, for example, ammonium metavanadate, sodium metavanadate, and sodium orthovanadate. Suitable vanadyl complexes include, for example, vanadyl acetylacetonate and vanadyl sulfate including vanadyl sulfate hydrates such as vanadyl sulfate mono- and trihydrates. Representative examples of tungsten and molybdenum complexes also include oxo complexes. Suitable oxo tungsten complexes include tungstate and tungsten oxide complexes. Suitable tungstate complexes include ammonium tungstate, calcium tungstate, sodium tungstate dihydrate, and tungstic acid. Suitable tungsten oxides include tungsten (IV) oxide and tungsten (VI) oxide. Suitable oxo molybdenum complexes include molybdate. molybdenum oxide, and, molybdenyl complexes. Suitable molybdate complexes include ammonium molybdate and its hydrates, sodium molybdate and its hydrates, and potassium molybdate and its hydrates. Suitable molybdenum oxides include molybdenum (VI) oxide, molybdenum (VI) oxide, and molybdic acid. Suitable molybdenyl complexes include, for example, molybdenyl acetylacetonate. Other suitable tungsten and molybdenum complexes include hydroxo derivatives derived from, for example, glycerol, tartaric acid, and sugars. A wide variety of other anti-angiogenic factors may also be utilized within the context of the present invention. Representative examples include platelet factor 4; protamine sulphate; sulphated chitin derivatives (prepared from queen crab shells), (Murata et al.. Cancer Res. 51 :22-26, 1991 ); Sulphated Polysaccharide Peptidoglycan Complex (SP- PG) (the function of this compound may be enhanced by the presence of steroids such as estrogen, and tamoxifen citrate); Staurosporine; modulators of matrix metabolism, including for example, proline analogs, cishydroxyproline, d,L- 3,4-dehydroproline, Thiaproline, alpha,alpha-dipyridyl, aminopropionitrile fumarate; 4-propyl-5-(4-pyridinyl)-2(3H)-oxazolone; Methotrexate; Mitoxantrone; Heparin; Interferons; 2 Macroglobulin-serum; ChIMP-3 (Pavloff et al., J. Bio. Chem. 267: 17321-17326, 1992); Chymostatin (Tomkinson et al., Biochem J. 286:475-480, 1992); Cvclodextrin Tetradecasulfate; Eponemvcin; Camptothecin; Fumagillin (Ingber et al., Nature 348:555-557, 1990); Gold Sodium Thiomalate ("GST"; Matsubara and Ziff, J. Clin. Invest. 79: 1440- 1446, 1987); anticollagenase-serum; alpha2-antiplasmin (Holmes et al., J. Biol. Chem. 262(4): 1659- 1664, 1987); Bisantrene (National Cancer Institute); Lobenzarit disodium (N-(2)-carboxyphenyl-4- chloroanthronilic acid disodium or "CCA"; Takeuchi et al., Agents Actions 36:312- 316, 1992); Thalidomide; Angostatic steroid; AGM-1470; carboxynaminolmidazole; and metalloproteinase inhibitors such as BB94. Diseases at the Cellular Level Diseases associated with increased cell survival or the inhibition of apoptosis that could be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as antagonists or agonists of the present invention, include cancers (such as follicular lymphomas, carcinomas with p53 mutations, and hormone-dependent tumors, including, but not limited to colon cancer, cardiac tumors, pancreatic cancer, melanoma, retinoblastoma. glioblastoma, lung cancer, intestinal cancer, testicular cancer, stomach cancer, neuroblastoma. myxoma. myoma, lymphoma, endothelioma, osteoblastoma, osteoclastoma, osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, adenoma, breast cancer, prostate cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma and ovarian cancer); autoimmune disorders (such as. multiple sclerosis. Sjogren ' s syndrome. Hashimoto's thyroiditis, biliary cirrhosis, Behcet's disease, Crohn ' s disease, polymyositis, systemic lupus erythematosus and immune-related glomerulonephritis and rheumatoid arthritis) and viral infections (such as heφes viruses, pox viruses and adenoviruses), inflammation, graft v. host disease, acute graft rejection, and chronic graft rejection. In preferred embodiments, polynucleotides, polypeptides, and/or antagonists of the invention are used to inhibit growth, progression, and/or metasis of cancers, in particular those listed above. Additional diseases or conditions associated with increased cell survival that could be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the present invention include, but are not limited to, progression, and/or metastases of malignancies and related disorders such as leukemia (including acute leukemias (e.g., acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia (including myeloblastic, promyelocytic. myelomonocytic, monocytic, and erythroleukemia)) and chronic leukemias (e.g., chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia and chronic lymphocytic leukemia)), polycythemia vera, lymphomas (e.g., Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease), multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and solid tumors including, but not limited to, sarcomas and carcinomas such as fibrosarcoma. myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma. lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendothehosarcoma, synovioma. mesothehoma. Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma. rhabdomyosarcoma. colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma adenocarcinoma. sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcmomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choπocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma. Wilm's tumor, cervical cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma. hemangioblastoma. acoustic neuroma, o godendroglioma. menangioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma Diseases associated with increased apoptosis that could be treated or detected by polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, include AIDS, neurodegenerative disorders (such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Retinitis pigmentosa. Cerebellar degeneration and brain tumor or prior associated disease), autoimmune disorders (such as. multiple sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, biliary cirrhosis, Behcet's disease, Crohn's disease, polymyositis, systemic lupus erythematosus and immune-related glomerulonephritis and rheumatoid arthritis) myelodysplastic syndromes (such as aplastic anemia), graft v host disease, ischemic injury (such as that caused by myocardial infarction, stroke and reperfusion injury), liver injury (e g , hepatitis related liver injury, ischemia/reperfusion injury, cholestosis (bile duct injury) and liver cancer), toxin-induced liver disease (such as that caused by alcohol), septic shock, cachexia and anorexia Wound Healing and Epithelial Cell Proliferation In accordance with yet a further aspect of the present invention, there is provided a process for utilizing polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, for therapeutic puφoses. for example, to stimulate epithelial cell proliferation and basal keratmocytes for the puφose of wound healing, and to stimulate hair follicle production and healing of dermal wounds Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may be clinically useful in stimulating wound healing including surgical wounds, excisional wounds, deep wounds involving damage of the dermis and epidermis, eye tissue wounds, dental tissue wounds, oral cavity wounds, diabetic ulcers, dermal ulcers, cubitus ulcers, arterial ulcers, venous stasis ulcers, burns resulting from heat exposure or chemicals, and other abnormal wound healing conditions such as uremia, malnutrition, vitamin deficiencies and complications associted with systemic treatment with steroids, radiation therapy and antineoplastic drugs and antimetabolites. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to promote dermal reestab shment subsequent to dermal loss Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to increase the adherence of skin grafts to a wound bed and to stimulate re-epithehalization from the wound bed. The following are types of grafts that polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to increase adherence to a wound bed: autografts, artificial skin, allografts, autodermic graft, autoepdermic grafts, avacular grafts. Blair-Brown grafts, bone graft, brephoplastic grafts, cutis graft, delayed graft, dermic graft, epidermic graft, fascia graft, full thickness graft, heterologous graft, xenograft, homologous graft, hypeφlastic graft, lamellar graft, mesh graft, mucosal graft, Olher- Thiersch graft, omenpal graft, patch graft, pedicle graft, penetrating graft, split skin graft, thick split graft. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, can be used to promote skin strength and to improve the appearance of aged skin. It is believed that polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, will also produce changes in hepatocyte proliferation, and epithelial cell proliferation in the lung, breast, pancreas, stomach, small intesting, and large intestine. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could promote proliferation of :76 epithelial cells such as sebocytes. hair follicles, hepatocytes. type II pneumocytes, muαn-producing goblet cells, and other epithelial cells and their progenitors contained within the skin, lung, liver, and gastrointestinal tract. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may promote proliferation of endothelial cells, keratmocytes, and basal keratmocytes. Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could also be used to reduce the side effects of gut toxicity that result from radiation, chemotherapy treatments or viral infections. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may have a cytoprotective effect on the small intestine mucosa. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may also stimulate healing of mucositis (mouth ulcers) that result from chemotherapy and viral infections. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could further be used in full regeneration of skin in full and partial thickness skin defects, including burns, (i.e., repopulation of hair follicles, sweat glands, and sebaceous glands), treatment of other skin defects such as psoriasis. Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to treat epidermolysis bullosa, a defect m adherence of the epidermis to the underlying dermis which results in frequent, open and painful blisters by accelerating reepithehahzation of these lesions Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could also be used to treat gastπc and doudenal ulcers and help heal by scar formation of the mucosal lining and regeneration of glandular mucosa and duodenal mucosal lining more rapidly. Inflamamatory bowel diseases, such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis, are diseases which result in destruction of the mucosal surface of the small or large intestine, respectively. Thus, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to promote the resurfacing of the mucosal surface to aid more rapid healing and to prevent progression of inflammatory bowel disease Treatment with polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention, is expected to have a significant effect on the production of mucus throughout the gastrointestinal tract and could be used to protect the intestinal mucosa from injurious substances that are ingested or following surgery. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to treat diseases associate with the under expression. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to prevent and heal damage to the lungs due to various pathological states. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, which could stimulate proliferation and differentiation and promote the repair of alveoli and brochiolar epithelium to prevent or treat acute or chronic lung damage. For example, emphysema, which results in the progressive loss of aveoli, and inhalation injuries, i.e., resulting from smoke inhalation and burns, that cause necrosis of the bronchiolar epithelium and alveoli could be effectively treated using polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the present invention. Also, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to stimulate the proliferation of and differentiation of type II pneumocytes, which may help treat or prevent disease such as hyaline membrane diseases, such as infant respiratory distress syndrome and bronchopulmonary displasia, in premature infants. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could stimulate the proliferation and differentiation of hepatocytes and, thus, could be used to alleviate or treat liver diseases and pathologies such as fulminant liver failure caused by cirrhosis, liver damage caused by viral hepatitis and toxic substances (i.e., acetaminophen, carbon tetraholoride and other hepatotoxins known in the art). In addition, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used treat or prevent the onset of diabetes mellitus. In patients with newly diagnosed Types I and II diabetes, where some islet cell function remains, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used to maintain the islet function so as to alleviate, delay or prevent permanent manifestation of the disease. Also, polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, could be used as an auxiliary in islet cell transplantation to improve or promote islet cell function. Neurological Diseases In accordance with yet a further aspect of the present invention, there is provided a process for utilizing polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, for therapeutic puφoses. for example, to stimulate neurological cell proliferation and/or differentiation. Therefore, polynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists and/or antagonists of the invention may be used to treat and/or detect neurologic diseases. Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used as a marker or detector of a particular nervous system disease or disorder. Examples of neurologic diseases which can be treated or detected with polynucleotides. polypeptides. agonists, and/or antagonists of the present invention include brain diseases, such as metabolic brain diseases which includes phenylketonuria such as maternal phenylketonuria, pyruvate carboxylase deficiency, pyruvate dehydrogenase complex deficiency, Wernicke's Encephalopathy, brain edema, brain neoplasms such as cerebellar neoplasms which include infratentorial neoplasms, cerebral ventricle neoplasms such as choroid plexus neoplasms, hypothalamic neoplasms, supratentorial neoplasms, canavan disease, cerebellar diseases such as cerebellar ataxia which include spinocerebellar degeneration such as ataxia telangiectasia, cerebellar dyssynergia, Friederich's Ataxia, Machado-Joseph Disease, olivopontocerebellar atrophy, cerebellar neoplasms such as infratentorial neoplasms, diffuse cerebral sclerosis such as encephalitis periaxialis, globoid cell leukodystrophy, metachromatic leukodystrophy and subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, cerebrovascular disorders (such as carotid artery diseases which include carotid artery thrombosis, carotid stenosis and Moyamoya Disease, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, cerebral aneurysm, cerebral anoxia, cerebral arteriosclerosis, cerebral arteriovenous malformations, cerebral artery diseases, cerebral embolism and 2^9 thrombosis such as carotid artery thrombosis, sinus thrombosis and Wallenberg's Syndrome, cerebral hemorrhage such as epidural hematoma. subdural hematoma and subarachnoid hemorrhage, cerebral infarction, cerebral ischemia such as transient cerebral ischemia. Subclavian Steal Syndrome and vertebrobasilar insufficiency, vascular dementia such as multi-infarct dementia, periventricular leukomalacia, vascular headache such as cluster headache, migraine, dementia such as AIDS Dementia Complex, presenile dementia such as Alzheimer's Disease and Creutzfeldt- Jakob Syndrome, senile dementia such as Alzheimer's Disease and progressive supranuclear palsy, vascular dementia such as multi-infarct dementia, encephalitis which include encephalitis periaxialis. viral encephalitis such as epidemic encephalitis, Japanese Encephalitis, St. Louis Encephalitis, tick-borne encephalitis and West Nile Fever, acute disseminated encephalomyelitis, meningoencephalitis such as uveomeningoencephalitic syndrome, Postencephalitic Parkinson Disease and subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, encephalomalacia such as periventricular leukomalacia, epilepsy such as generalized epilepsy which includes infantile spasms, absence epilepsy, myoclonic epilepsy which includes MERRF Syndrome, tonic- clonic epilepsy, partial epilepsy such as complex partial epilepsy, frontal lobe epilepsy and temporal lobe epilepsy, post-traumatic epilepsy, status epilepticus such as Epilepsia Partialis Continua, Hallervorden-Spatz Syndrome, hydrocephalus such as Dandy-Walker Syndrome and normal pressure hydrocephalus, hypothalamic diseases such as hypothalamic neoplasms, cerebral malaria, narcolepsy which includes cataplexy, bulbar poliomyelitis, cerebri pseudotumor, Rett Syndrome. Reye's Syndrome, thalamic diseases, cerebral toxoplasmosis, intracranial tuberculoma and Zellweger Syndrome, central nervous system infections such as AIDS Dementia Complex, Brain Abscess, subdural empyema, encephalomyelitis such as Equine Encephalomyelitis, Venezuelan Equine Encephalomyelitis, Necrotizing Hemorrhagic Encephalomyelitis, Visna. cerebral malaria, meningitis such as arachnoiditis, aseptic meningtitis such as viral meningtitis which includes lymphocytic choriomeningitis. Bacterial meningtitis which includes Haemophilus Meningtitis, Listeria Meningtitis, Meningococcal Meningtitis such as Waterhouse-Friderichsen Syndrome, Pneumococcal Meningtitis and meningeal tuberculosis, fungal meningitis such as Cryptococcal Meningtitis, subdural effusion, meningoencephalitis such as uvemeningoencephalitic syndrome, myelitis such as transverse myelitis, neurosyphilis such as tabes dorsalis, poliomyelitis which includes bulbar poliomyelitis and postpoliomyelitis syndrome, prion diseases (such as Creutzfeldt-Jakob Syndrome, Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy, Gerstmann-Straussler Syndrome. Kuru, Scrapie) cerebral toxoplasmosis, central nervous system neoplasms such as brain neoplasms that include cerebellear neoplasms such as infratentorial neoplasms, cerebral ventricle neoplasms such as choroid plexus neoplasms, hypothalamic neoplasms and supratentorial neoplasms, meningeal neoplasms, spinal cord neoplasms which include epidural neoplasms, demyelinating diseases such as Canavan Diseases, diffuse cerebral sceloris which includes adrenoleukodystrophy, encephalitis periaxialis, globoid cell leukodystrophy, diffuse cerebral sclerosis such as metachromatic leukodystrophy, allergic encephalomyelitis, necrotizing hemorrhagic encephalomyelitis, progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy, multiple sclerosis, central pontine myelinolysis, transverse myelitis, neuromyelitis optica, Scrapie, Swayback, Chronic Fatigue Syndrome, Visna, High Pressure Nervous Syndrome, Meningism, spinal cord diseases such as amyotonia congenita. amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, spinal muscular atrophy such as Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease, spinal cord compression, spinal cord neoplasms such as epidural neoplasms, syringomyelia. Tabes Dorsalis, Stiff-Man Syndrome, mental retardation such as Angelman Syndrome, Cri-du-Chat Syndrome, De Lange's Syndrome, Down Syndrome, Gangliosidoses such as gangliosidoses G(M1), Sandhoff Disease, Tay-Sachs Disease, Hartnup Disease, homocystinuria, Laurence-Moon- Biedl Syndrome, Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome, Maple Syrup Urine Disease, mucolipidosis such as fucosidosis, neuronal ceroid-lipofuscinosis, oculocerebrorenal syndrome, phenylketonuria such as maternal phenylketonuria, Prader-Willi Syndrome, Rett Syndrome, Rubinstein-Taybi Syndrome, Tuberous Sclerosis, WAGR Syndrome, nervous system abnormalities such as holoprosencephaly, neural tube defects such as anencephaly which includes hydrangencephaly, Arnold-Chairi Deformity, encephalocele. meningocele, meningomyelocele. spinal dysraphism such as spina bifida cystica and spina bifida occulta. hereditary motor and sensory neuropathies which include Charcot-Maπe Disease, Hereditary optic atrophy, Refsum's Disease, hereditary spastic paraplegia, Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease, Hereditary Sensory and Autonomic Neuropathies such as Congenital Analgesia and Familial Dysautonomia. Neurologic manifestations (such as agnosia that include Gerstmann's Syndrome. Amnesia such as retrograde amnesia, apraxia. neurogemc bladder, cataplexy, communicative disorders such as hearing disorders that includes deafness, partial hearing loss, loudness recruitment and tinnitus, language disorders such as aphasia which include agraphia, anomia, broca aphasia, and Wemicke Aphasia, Dyslexia such as Acquired Dyslexia, language development disorders, speech disorders such as aphasia which includes anomia, broca aphasia and Wemicke Aphasia, articulation disorders, communicative disorders such as speech disorders which include dysarthπa, echolaha, mutism and stuttering, voice disorders such as aphonia and hoarseness, decerebrate state, delirium, fasciculation. hallucinations, meningism, movement disorders such as angelman syndrome, ataxia. athetosis, chorea, dystonia. hypokinesia, muscle hypotonia, myoclonus, tic, torticollis and tremor, muscle hypertonia such as muscle rigidity such as stiff-man syndrome, muscle spasticity, paralysis such as facial paralysis which includes Heφes Zoster Oticus, Gastroparesis, Hemiplegia, ophthalmoplegia such as diplopia. Duane's Syndrome, Homer's Syndrome, Chronic progressive external ophthalmoplegia such as Kearns Syndrome, Bulbar Paralysis. Tropical Spastic Paraparesis, Paraplegia such as Brown-Sequard Syndrome, quadπplegia, respiratory paralysis and vocal cord paralysis, paresis, phantom limb, taste disorders such as ageusia and dysgeusia, vision disorders such as amblyopia, blindness, color vision defects, diplopia, hemianopsia, scotoma and subnormal vision, sleep disorders such as hypersomnia which includes Kleme-Levin Syndrome, insomnia, and somnambulism, spasm such as tπsmus. unconsciousness such as coma, persistent vegetative state and syncope and vertigo, neuromuscular diseases such as amyotonia congenita, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Lambert-Eaton Myasthenic Syndrome, motor neuron disease, muscular atrophy such as spinal muscular atrophy. Charcot-Maπe Disease and Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease. Postpoliomyelitis Syndrome. Muscular Dystrophy, Myasthenia Gravis, Myotonia Atrophica. Myotonia Confenita. Nemaline Myopathy, Familial Periodic Paralysis, Multiplex Paramyloclonus. Tropical Spastic Paraparesis and Stiff-Man Syndrome, peripheral nervous system diseases such as acrodynia, amyloid neuropathies, autonomic nervous system diseases such as Adie's Syndrome, Barre-Lieou Syndrome. Familial Dysautonomia, Homer's Syndrome, Reflex Sympathetic Dystrophy and Shy-Drager Syndrome. Cranial Nerve Diseases such as Acoustic Nerve Diseases such as Acoustic Neuroma which includes Neurofibromatosis 2, Facial Nerve Diseases such as Facial Neuralgia,Melkersson- Rosenthal Syndrome, ocular motility disorders which includes amblyopia, nystagmus, oculomotor nerve paralysis, ophthalmoplegia such as Duane's Syndrome, Homer's Syndrome. Chronic Progressive External Ophthalmoplegia which includes Keams Syndrome. Strabismus such as Esotropia and Exotropia, Oculomotor Nerve Paralysis, Optic Nerve Diseases such as Optic Atrophy which includes Hereditary Optic Atrophy, Optic Disk Drusen, Optic Neuritis such as Neuromyelitis Optica, Papilledema. Trigeminal Neuralgia, Vocal Cord Paralysis, Demyelinating Diseases such as Neuromyelitis Optica and Swayback, Diabetic neuropathies such as diabetic foot, nerve compression syndromes such as caφal tunnel syndrome, tarsal tunnel syndrome, thoracic outlet syndrome such as cervical rib syndrome, ulnar nerve compression syndrome, neuralgia such as causalgia, cervico-brachial neuralgia, facial neuralgia and trigeminal neuralgia, neuritis such as experimental allergic neuritis, optic neuritis, polyneuritis, polyradiculoneuritis and radiculities such as polyradiculitis, hereditary motor and sensory neuropathies such as Charcot-Marie Disease, Hereditary Optic Atrophy, Refsum's Disease, Hereditary Spastic Paraplegia and Werdnig-Hoffmann Disease. Hereditary Sensory and Autonomic Neuropathies which include Congenital Analgesia and Familial Dysautonomia, POEMS Syndrome, Sciatica. Gustatory Sweating and Tetany). Infectious Disease Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used to treat or detect infectious agents For example, by increasing the immune response, particularly increasing the proliferation and differentiation of B and/or T cells, infectious diseases may be treated The immune response may be increased by either enhancing an existing immune response, or by initiating a new immune response Alternatively, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may also directly inhibit the infectious agent, without necessarily eliciting an immune response Viruses are one example of an infectious agent that can cause disease or symptoms that can be treated or detected by a polynucleotide or polypeptide and/or agonist or antagonist of the present invention Examples of viruses, include, but are not limited to Examples of vimses, include, but are not limited to the following DNA and RNA viruses and viral families Axbovirus, Adenoviπdae, Arenaviπdae, Arteπvirus, Bimaviπdae, Bunyaviπdae, Caliciviπdae, Circoviπdae, Coronaviπdae, Dengue, EBV, HIV, Flaviviπdae, Hepadnaviπdae (Hepatitis), Heφesviπdae (such as, Cytomegalovirus, Herpes Simplex, Herpes Zoster), Mononegavirus (e g , Paramyxoviπdae, Morbil virus, Rhabdoviπdae), Orthomyxoviπdae (e g , Influenza A, Influenza B, and parainfluenza), Papiloma vims, Papovaviπdae, Parvoviπdae, Picornaviπdae, Poxviπdae (such as Smallpox or Vaccinia), Reoviπdae (e g , Rotavirus), Retroviπdae (HTLV-I, HTLV-II, Lentivirus), and Togaviπdae (e g , Rubivirus) Vimses falling within these families can cause a variety of diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to arthritis, bronchiolhtis, respiratory syncytial virus, encephalitis, eye infections (e g , conjunctivitis, keratitis), chronic fatigue syndrome, hepatitis (A, B, C, E, Chronic Active, Delta), Japanese B encephalitis, Junin, Chikungunya, Rift Valley fever, yellow fever, meningitis, opportunistic infections (e g , AIDS), pneumonia, Burkitt's Lymphoma, chickenpox, hemorrhagic fever, Measles, Mumps, Parainfluenza. Rabies, the common cold, Polio, leukemia, Rubella, sexually transmitted diseases, skin diseases (e g , Kaposi's, warts), and viremia polynucleotides or polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used to treat or detect any of these symptoms or diseases In specific embodiments, polynucleotides. polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat: meningitis, Dengue, EBV, and/or hepatitis (e.g., hepatitis B). In an additional specific embodiment polynucleotides, polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat patients nonresponsive to one or more other commercially available hepatitis vaccines. In a further specific embodiment polynucleotides, polypeptides. or agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat AIDS. Similarly, bacterial or fungal agents that can cause disease or symptoms and that can be treated or detected by a polynucleotide or polypeptide and/or agonist or antagonist of the present invention include, but not limited to. include, but not limited to, the following Gram-Negative and Gram-positive bacteria and bacterial families and fungi: Actinomycetales (e.g., Corynebacterium, Mycobacterium, Norcardia), Cryptococcus neoformans, Aspergillosis, Bacillaceae (e.g., Anthrax, Clostridium), Bacteroidaceae, Blastomycosis, Bordetella, Borrelia (e.g., Borrelia burgdorferi, Brucellosis, Candidiasis, Campylobacter, Coccidioidomycosis, Cryptococcosis, Dermatocycoses, E. coli (e.g., Enterotoxigenic E. coli and Enterohemorrhagic E. coli), Enterobacteriaceae (Klebsiella, Salmonella (e.g., Salmonella typhi, and Salmonella paratyphi), Serratia, Yersinia), Erysipelothrix, Helicobacter, Legionellosis. Leptospirosis, Listeria. Mycoplasmatales, Mycobacterium leprae, Vibrio cholerae. Neisseriaceae (e.g., Acinetobacter. Gonorrhea, Menigococcal), Meisseria meningitidis. Pasteurellacea Infections (e.g., Actinobacillus, Heamophilus (e.g., Heamophilus influenza type B), Pasteurella), Pseudomonas, Rickettsiaceae, Chlamydiaceae, Syphilis, Shigella spp., Staphylococcal, Meningiococcal, Pneumococcal and Streptococcal (e.g., Streptococcus pneumoniae and Group B Streptococcus). These bacterial or fungal families can cause the following diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to: bacteremia, endocarditis, eye infections (conjunctivitis, tuberculosis, uveitis), gingivitis, opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS related infections), paronychia, prosthesis-related infections, Reiter's Disease, respiratory tract infections, such as Whooping Cough or Empyema, sepsis, Lyme Disease. Cat-Scratch Disease. Dysentery, Paratyphoid Fever, food poisoning, Typhoid, pneumonia. Gonorrhea, meningitis (e.g., mengitis types A and B), Chlamydia. Syphilis, Diphtheria, Leprosy. Paratuberculosis. Tuberculosis, Lupus, Botulism, gangrene, tetanus, impetigo, Rheumatic Fever. Scarlet Fever, sexually transmitted diseases, skin diseases (e.g., cellulitis. dermatocycoses). toxemia, urinary tract infections, wound infections. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used to treat or detect any of these symptoms or diseases. In specific embodiments, Ppolynucleotides, polypeptides, agonists or antagonists of the invention are used to treat: tetanus, Diptheria. botulism, and/or meningitis type B. Moreover, parasitic agents causing disease or symptoms that can be treated or detected by a polynucleotide or polypeptide and/or agonist or antagonist of the present invention include, but not limited to. the following families or class: Amebiasis, Babesiosis, Coccidiosis. Cryptosporidiosis. Dientamoebiasis, Dourine, Ectoparasitic, Giardiasis, Helminthiasis, Leishmaniasis, Theileriasis. Toxoplasmosis, Trypanosomiasis, and Trichomonas and Sporozoans (e.g., Plasmodium virax, Plasmodium falciparium, Plasmodium malariae and Plasmodium ovale). These parasites can cause a variety of diseases or symptoms, including, but not limited to: Scabies, Trombiculiasis, eye infections, intestinal disease (e.g., dysentery, giardiasis), liver disease, lung disease, opportunistic infections (e.g., AIDS related), malaria, pregnancy complications, and toxoplasmosis. polynucleotides or polypeptides, or agonists or antagonists of the invention, can be used to treat or detect any of these symptoms or diseases. Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention of the present invention could either be by administering an effective amount of a polypeptide to the patient, or by removing cells from the patient, supplying the cells with a polynucleotide of the present invention, and returning the engineered cells to the patient (ex vivo therapy). Moreover, the polypeptide or polynucleotide of the present invention can be used as an antigen in a vaccine to raise an immune response against infectious disease. Regeneration Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention can be used to differentiate, proliferate, and attract cells, leading to the regeneration of tissues (See. Science 276 59-87 ( 1997) ) The regeneration of tissues could be used to repair, replace, or protect tissue damaged by congenital defects, trauma (wounds, bums, incisions, or ulcers), age, disease (e g. osteoporosis, osteocarthπtis, peπodontal disease, liver failure), surgery, including cosmetic plastic surgery, fibrosis, reperfusion injury, or systemic cytokine damage Tissues that could be regenerated using the present invention include organs (e , pancreas, liver, intestine, kidney, skin, endothehum). muscle (smooth, skeletal or cardiac), vasculature (including vascular and lymphatics), nervous, hematopoietic, and skeletal (bone, cartilage, tendon, and ligament) tissue Preferably, regeneration occurs without or decreased scarπng Regeneration also may include angiogenesis Moreover, polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, may increase regeneration of tissues difficult to heal For example, increased tendon/ligament regeneration would quicken recovery time after damage Polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention could also be used prophylactically in an effort to avoid damage Specific diseases that could be treated include of tendinitis, caφal tunnel syndrome, and other tendon or ligament defects A further example of tissue regeneration of non-healing wounds includes pressure ulcers, ulcers associatedwith vascular insufficiency, surgical, and traumatic wounds Similarly, nerve and brain tissue could also be regenerated by using polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention, to proliferate and differentiate nerve cells Diseases that could be treated using this method include central and peripheral nervous system diseases, neuropathies, or mechanical and traumatic disorders (e g , spinal cord disorders, head trauma, cerebrovascular disease, and stoke) Specifically, diseases associated with peripheral nerve injuries, peripheral neuropathy (e g , resulting from chemotherapy or other medical therapies), localized neuropathies, and central nervous system diseases (e.g . Alzheimer's disease. Parkinson's disease. Huntington's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, and Shy-Drager syndrome), could all be treated using the polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention Chemotaxis Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may have chemotaxis activity A chemotaxic molecule attracts or mobilizes cells (e.g., monocytes, fibroblasts, neutrophils, T-cells, mast cells, eosinophils. epithelial and/or endothelial cells) to a particular site in the body, such as inflammation, infection, or site of hypeφrohferation. The mobilized cells can then fight off and/or heal the particular trauma or abnormality Polynucleotides or polypeptides. as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may increase chemotaxic activity of particular cells. These chemotactic molecules can then be used to treat inflammation, infection, hypeφro ferative disorders, or any immune system disorder by increasing the number of cells targeted to a particular location in the body For example, chemotaxic molecules can be used to treat wounds and other trauma to tissues by attracting immune cells to the injured location. Chemotactic molecules of the present invention can also attract fibroblasts, which can be used to treat wounds. It is also contemplated that polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention may inhibit chemotactic activity. These molecules could also be used to treat disorders. Thus, polynucleotides or polypeptides, as well as agonists or antagonists of the present invention could be used as an inhibitor of chemotaxis Binding Activity A polypeptide of the present invention may be used to screen for molecules that bind to the polypeptide or for molecules to which the polypeptide binds. The binding of the polypeptide and the molecule may activate (agonist), increase, inhibit (antagonist), or decrease activity of the polypeptide or the molecule bound. Examples of such molecules include antibodies, oligonucleotides. proteins (e.g., receptorsj.or small molecules. Preferably, the molecule is closely related to the natural ligand of the polypeptide, e.g., a fragment of the ligand, or a natural substrate, a ligand, a stmctural or functional mimetic. (See, Coligan et al., Current Protocols in Immunology l(2):Chapter 5 (1991).) Similarly, the molecule can be closely related to the natural receptor to which the polypeptide binds, or at least, a fragment of the receptor capable of being bound by the polypeptide (e.g., active site). In either case, the molecule can be rationally designed using known techniques. Preferably, the screening for these molecules involves producing appropriate cells which express the polypeptide. Preferred cells include cells from mammals, yeast, Drosophila, or E. coli. Cells expressing the polypeptide (or cell membrane containing the expressed polypeptide) are then preferably contacted with a test compound potentially containing the molecule to observe binding, stimulation, or inhibition of activity of either the polypeptide or the molecule. The assay may simply test binding of a candidate compound to the polypeptide, wherein binding is detected by a label, or in an assay involving competition with a labeled competitor. Further, the assay may test whether the candidate compound results in a signal generated by binding to the polypeptide. Alternatively, the assay can be carried out using cell-free preparations, polypeptide/molecule affixed to a solid support, chemical libraries, or natural product mixtures. The assay may also simply comprise the steps of mixing a candidate compound with a solution containing a polypeptide, measuring polypeptide/molecule activity or binding, and comparing the polypeptide/molecule activity or binding to a standard. Preferably, an ELISA assay can measure polypeptide level or activity in a sample (e.g., biological sample) using a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody. The antibody can measure polypeptide level or activity by either binding, directly or indirectly, to the polypeptide or by competing with the polypeptide for a substrate. Additionally, the receptor to which the polypeptide of the present invention binds can be identified by numerous methods known to those of skill in the art, for example, ligand panning and FACS sorting (Coligan, et al., Current Protocols in Immun., 1(2), Chapter 5, ( 1991)). For example, expression cloning is employed wherein polyadenylated RNA is prepared from a cell responsive to the polypeptides, for example, NIH3T3 cells which are known to contain multiple receptors for the FGF family proteins, and SC-3 cells, and a cDNA library created from this RNA is divided into pools and used to transfect COS cells or other cells that are not responsive to the polypeptides. Transfected cells which are grown on glass slides are exposed to the polypeptide of the present invention, after they have been labelled. The polypeptides can be labeled by a variety of means including iodination or inclusion of a recognition site for a site-specific protein kinase. Following fixation and incubation, the slides are subjected to auto- radiographic analysis. Positive pools are identified and sub-pools are prepared and re-transfected using an iterative sub-pooling and re-screening process, eventually yielding a single clones that encodes the putative receptor. As an alternative approach for receptor identification, the labeled polypeptides can be photoaffinity linked with cell membrane or extract preparations that express the receptor molecule. Cross-linked material is resolved by PAGE analysis and exposed to X-ray film. The labeled complex containing the receptors of the polypeptides can be excised, resolved into peptide fragments, and subjected to protein microsequencing. The amino acid sequence obtained from microsequencing would be used to design a set of degenerate oligonucleotide probes to screen a cDNA library to identify the genes encoding the putative receptors. Moreover, the techniques of gene-shuffling, motif-shuffling, exon-shuffling, and/or codon-shuffling (collectively referred to as "DNA shuffling") may be employed to modulate the activities of the polypeptide of the present invention thereby effectively generating agonists and antagonists of the polypeptide of the present invention. See generally, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,605,793, 5,81 1 ,238, 5,830,721, 5,834.252, and 5.837,458, and Patten, P. A., et al. Curr. Opinion Biotechnol. 8:724- 33 ( 1997); Harayama, S. Trends Biotechnol. 16(2): 76-82 ( 1998); Hansson, L. O., et al.. J. Mol. Biol. 287:265-76 ( 1999); and Lorenzo. M. M. and Blasco, R. Biotechniques 24(2):308-13 ( 1998) (each of these patents and publications are hereby incoφorated by reference). In one embodiment, alteration of polynucleotides and corresponding polypeptides may be achieved by DNA shuffling. DNA shuffling involves the assembly of two or more DNA segments into a desired molecule by homologous, or site-specific, recombination. In another embodiment, polynucleotides and corresponding polypeptides may be alterred by being subjected to random mutagenesis by error-prone PCR, random nucleotide insertion or other methods prior to recombination. In another embodiment, one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc., of the polypeptide of the present invention may be recombined with one or more components, motifs, sections, parts, domains, fragments, etc. of one or more heterologous molecules. In preferred embodiments, the heterologous molecules are family members. In further preferred embodiments, the heterologous molecule is a growth factor such as, for example, platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF), insulin-like growth factor (IGF-I), transforming growth factor (TGF)-alpha, epidermal growth factor (EGF), fibroblast growth factor (FGF), TGF- beta, bone moφhogenetic protein (BMP)-2, BMP-4, BMP-5, BMP-6, BMP-7, activins A and B, decapentaplegic(dpp), 60A, OP-2, dorsalin, growth differentiation factors (GDFs), nodal, MIS, inhibin-alpha, TGF-betal, TGF-beta2, TGF-beta3. TGF- beta5, and glial-derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF). Other preferred fragments are biologically active fragments of the polypeptide of the present invention. Biologically active fragments are those exhibiting activity similar, but not necessarily identical, to an activity of the polypeptide of the present invention. The biological activity of the fragments may include an improved desired activity, or a decreased undesirable activity. Additionally, this invention provides a method of screening compounds to identify those which modulate the action of the polypeptide of the present invention. An example of such an assay comprises combining a mammalian fibroblast cell, a the polypeptide of the present invention, the compound to be screened and J [H] thymidine under cell culture conditions where the fibroblast cell would normally proliferate. A control assay may be performed in the absence of the compound to be screened and compared to the amount of fibroblast proliferation in the presence of the compound to determine if the compound stimulates proliferation by determining the uptake of 3[H] thymidine in each case. The amount of fibroblast cell proliferation is measured by liquid scintillation chromatography which measures the incoφoration of [H] thymidine. Both agonist and antagonist compounds may be identified by this procedure. In another method, a mammalian cell or membrane preparation expressing a receptor for a polypeptide of the present invention is incubated with a labeled polypeptide of the present invention in the presence of the compound. The ability of the compound to enhance or block this interaction could then be measured. Alternatively, the response of a known second messenger system following interaction of a compound to be screened and the receptor is measured and the ability of the compound to bind to the receptor and elicit a second messenger response is measured to determine if the compound is a potential agonist or antagonist. Such second messenger systems include but are not limited to, cAMP guanylate cyclase, ion channels or phosphoinositide hydrolysis. All of these above assays can be used as diagnostic or prognostic markers. The molecules discovered using these assays can be used to treat disease or to bring about a particular result in a patient (e.g.. blood vessel growth) by activating or inhibiting the polypeptide/molecule. Moreover, the assays can discover agents which may inhibit or enhance the production of the polypeptides of the invention from suitably manipulated cells or tissues. Therefore, the invention includes a method of identifying compounds which bind to a polypeptide of the invention comprising the steps of: (a) incubating a candidate binding compound with a polypeptide of the present invention; and (b) determining if binding has occurred. Moreover, the invention includes a method of identifying agonists/antagonists comprising the steps of: (a) incubating a candidate compound with a polypeptide of the present invention, (b) assaying a biological activity, and (b) determining if a biological activity of the polypeptide has been altered. Targeted Delivery In another embodiment, the invention provides a method of delivering compositions to targeted cells expressing a receptor for a polypeptide of the invention, or cells expressing a cell bound form of a polypeptide of the invention. As discussed herein, polypeptides or antibodies of the invention may be associated with heterologous polypeptides, heterologous nucleic acids, toxins, or prodrugs via hydrophobic. hydrophilic, ionic and/or covalent interactions. In one embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific delivery of compositions of the invention to cells by administering polypeptides of the invention (including antibodies) that are associated with heterologous polypeptides or nucleic acids. In one example, the invention provides a method for delivering a therapeutic protein into the targeted cell. In another example, the invention provides a method for delivering a single stranded nucleic acid (e.g., antisense or ribozymes) or double stranded nucleic acid (e.g., DNA that can integrate into the cell's genome or replicate episomally and that can be transcribed) into the targeted cell. In another embodiment, the invention provides a method for the specific destmction of cells (e.g., the destmction of tumor cells) by administering polypeptides of the invention (e.g., polypeptides of the invention or antibodies of the invention) in association with toxins or cytotoxic prodmgs. By "toxin" is meant compounds that bind and activate endogenous cytotoxic effector systems, radioisotopes, holotoxins, modified toxins, catalytic subunits of toxins, or any molecules or enzymes not normally present in or on the surface of a cell that under defined conditions cause the cell's death. Toxins that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes known in the art. compounds such as, for example, antibodies (or complement fixing containing portions thereof) that bind an inherent or induced endogenous cytotoxic effector system, thymidine kinase. endonuclease, RNAse, alpha toxin, ricin. abrin. Pseudomonas exotoxin A, diphtheria toxin, saporin, momordin, gelonin, pokeweed antiviral protein, alpha-sarcin and cholera toxin. By "cytotoxic prodrug" is meant a non-toxic compound that is converted by an enzyme, normally present in the cell, into a cytotoxic compound. Cytotoxic prodmgs that may be used according to the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, glutamyl derivatives of benzoic acid mustard alkylating agent, phosphate derivatives of etoposide or mitomycin C, cytosine arabinoside, daunombisin, and phenoxyacetamide derivatives of doxombicin. Drug Screening Further contemplated is the use of the polypeptides of the present invention, or the polynucleotides encoding these polypeptides, to screen for molecules which modify the activities of the polypeptides of the present invention. Such a method would include contacting the polypeptide of the present invention with a selected compound(s) suspected of having antagonist or agonist activity, and assaying the activity of these polypeptides following binding. This invention is particularly useful for screening therapeutic compounds by using the polypeptides of the present invention, or binding fragments thereof, in any of a variety of d g screening techniques. The polypeptide or fragment employed in such a test may be affixed to a solid support, expressed on a cell surface, free in solution, or located intracellularly. One method of d g screening utilizes eukaryotic or prokaryotic host cells which are stably transformed with recombinant nucleic acids expressing the polypeptide or fragment. Dmgs are screened against such transformed cells in competitive binding assays. One may measure, for example, the formulation of complexes between the agent being tested and a polypeptide of the present invention. Thus, the present invention provides methods of screening for d gs or any other agents which affect activities mediated by the polypeptides of the present invention. These methods comprise contacting such an agent with a polypeptide of the present invention or a fragment thereof and assaying for the presence of a complex between the agent and the polypeptide or a fragment thereof, by methods well known in the art In such a competitive binding assay, the agents to screen are typically labeled Following incubation, free agent is separated from that present in bound form, and the amount of free or uncomplexed label is a measure of the ability of a particular agent to bind to the polypeptides of the present invention Another technique for dmg screening provides high throughput screening for compounds having suitable binding affinity to the polypeptides of the present invention, and is described in great detail in European Patent Application 84/03564, published on September 13. 1984, which is incoφorated herein by reference herein Briefly stated, large numbers of different small peptide test compounds are synthesized on a solid substrate, such as plastic pins or some other surface The peptide test compounds are reacted with polypeptides of the present invention and washed Bound polypeptides are then detected by methods well known in the art Purified polypeptides are coated directly onto plates for use in the aforementioned dmg screening techniques In addition, non-neutralizing antibodies may be used to capture the peptide and immobilize it on the solid support This invention also contemplates the use of competitive dmg screening assays in which neutralizing antibodies capable of binding polypeptides of the present invention specifically compete with a test compound for binding to the polypeptides or fragments thereof In this manner, the antibodies are used to detect the presence of any peptide which shares one or more antigenic epitopes with a polypeptide of the invention Antisense And Ribozvme (Antagonists) In specific embodiments, antagonists according to the present invention are nucleic acids corresponding to the sequences contained in SEQ ID NO X, or the complementary strand thereof, and/or to nucleotide sequences contained in the cDNA contained in the related cDNA clone identified in Table 1 In one embodiment, antisense sequence is generated internally, by the organism, in another embodiment, the antisense sequence is separately administered (see, for example, O'Connor. J , Neurochem. 56:560 (1991). Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988). Antisense technology can be used to control gene expression through antisense DNA or RNA, or through triple-helix formation. Antisense techniques are discussed for example, in Okano, J., Neurochem. 56:560 ( 1991 ); Oligodeoxynucleotides as Antisense Inhibitors of Gene Expression, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1988). Triple helix formation is discussed in, for instance, Lee et al., Nucleic Acids Research 6:3073 (1979); Cooney et al., Science 241 :456 (1988); and Dervan et al., Science 251 : 1300 (1991 ). The methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to a complementary DNA or RNA. For example, the use of c-myc and c-myb antisense RNA constructs to inhibit the growth of the non-lymphocytic leukemia cell line HL-60 and other cell lines was previously described. (Wickstrom et al. ( 1988); Anfossi et al. (1989)). These experiments were performed in vitro by incubating cells with the oligoribonucleotide. A similar procedure for in vivo use is described in WO 91/15580. Briefly, a pair of oligonucleotides for a given antisense RNA is produced as follows: A sequence complimentary to the first 15 bases of the open reading frame is flanked by an EcoRI site on the 5 end and a Hindlll site on the 3 end. Next, the pair of oligonucleotides is heated at 90°C for one minute and then annealed in 2X ligation buffer (20mM TRIS HCl pH 7.5, lOmM MgC12, 10MM dithiothreitol (DTT) and 0.2 mM ATP) and then ligated to the EcoRl/Hind III site of the retroviral vector PMV7 (WO 91/15580). For example, the 5' coding portion of a polynucleotide that encodes the polypeptide of the present invention may be used to design an antisense RNA oligonucleotide of from about 10 to 40 base pairs in length. A DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription thereby preventing transcription and the production of the receptor. The antisense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecule into receptor polypeptide. In one embodiment, the antisense nucleic acid of the invention is produced intracellularly by transcription from an exogenous sequence. For example, a vector or a portion thereof, is transcribed, producing an antisense nucleic acid (RNA) of the invention. Such a vector would contain a sequence encoding the antisense nucleic acid. Such a vector can remain episomal or become chromosomally integrated, as long as it can be transcribed to produce the desired antisense RNA. Such vectors can be constmcted by recombinant DNA technology methods standard in the art. Vectors can be plasmid, viral, or others known in the art, used for replication and expression in vertebrate cells. Expression of the sequence encoding the polypeptide of the present invnetion or fragments thereof, can be by any promoter known in the art to act in vertebrate, preferably human cells. Such promoters can be inducible or constitutive. Such promoters include, but are not limited to, the SV40 early promoter region (Bemoist and Chambon, Nature 29:304-310 (1981), the promoter contained in the 3' long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma vims (Yamamoto et al., Cell 22:787-797 (1980), the heφes thymidine promoter (Wagner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 78: 1441-1445 (1981 ), the regulatory sequences of the metallothionein gene (Brinster, et al., Nature 296:39-42 ( 1982)), etc. The antisense nucleic acids of the invention comprise a sequence complementary to at least a portion of an RNA transcript of a gene of the present invention. However, absolute complementarity, although preferred, is not required. A sequence "complementary to at least a portion of an RNA," referred to herein, means a sequence having sufficient complementarity to be able to hybridize with the RNA, forming a stable duplex; in the case of double stranded antisense nucleic acids, a single strand of the duplex DNA may thus be tested, or triplex formation may be assayed. The ability to hybridize will depend on both the degree of complementarity and the length of the antisense nucleic acid. Generally, the larger the hybridizing nucleic acid, the more base mismatches with a RNA it may contain and still form a stable duplex (or triplex as the case may be). One skilled in the art can ascertain a tolerable degree of mismatch by use of standard procedures to determine the melting point of the hybridized complex. Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5' end of the message, e.g., the 5' untranslated sequence up to and including the AUG initiation codon, should work most efficiently at inhibiting translation. However, sequences complementary to the 3' untranslated sequences of mRNAs have been shown to be effective at inhibiting translation of mRNAs as well. See generally, Wagner, R., 1994. Nature 372:333-335. Thus, oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5'- or 3'- non- translated, non- coding regions of polynucleotide sequences described herein could be used in an antisense approach to inhibit translation of endogenous mRNA. Oligonucleotides complementary to the 5' untranslated region of the mRNA should include the complement of the AUG start codon. Antisense oligonucleotides complementary to mRNA coding regions are less efficient inhibitors of translation but could be used in accordance with the invention. Whether designed to hybridize to the 5'-, 3'- or coding region of mRNA of the present invention, antisense nucleic acids should be at least six nucleotides in length, and are preferably oligonucleotides ranging from 6 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In specific aspects the oligonucleotide is at least 10 nucleotides, at least 17 nucleotides. at least 25 nucleotides or at least 50 nucleotides. The polynucleotides of the invention can be DNA or RNA or chimeric mixtures or derivatives or modified versions thereof, single-stranded or double- stranded. The oligonucleotide can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety, or phosphate backbone, for example, to improve stability of the molecule, hybridization, etc. The oligonucleotide may include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:6553- 6556; Lemaitre et al., 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. WO88/09810, published December 15, 1988) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO89/10134, published April 25, 1988), hybridization- triggered cleavage agents. (See, e.g., Krol et al., 1988, BioTechniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents. (See, e.g., Zon, 1988, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549). To this end, the oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc. The antisense oligonucleotide may comprise at least one modified base moiety which is selected from the group including, but not limited to. 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil. 5-iodouracil. hypoxanthine. xantine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil. 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, ino s i n e, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1 -methylguanine, 1 -methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine. 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5 - m e t ho xy a m i n o m e th y l - 2 - t h i o u ra c i l , b e ta - D-mannosylqueosine, 5'-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil, 2 -methyl thio-N6- isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine. 2-thiocytosine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil. uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine. The antisense oligonucleotide may also comprise at least one modified sugar moiety selected from the group including, but not limited to, arabinose, 2-fluoroarabinose, xylulose, and hexose. In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide comprises at least one modified phosphate backbone selected from the group including, but not limited to, a phosphorothioate, a phosphorodithioate, a phosphoramidothioate, a phosphoramidate, a phosphordiamidate. a methylphosphonate, an alkyl phosphotriester, and a formacetal or analog thereof. In yet another embodiment, the antisense oligonucleotide is an a-anomeric oligonucleotide. An a-anomeric oligonucleotide forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual b-units, the strands mn parallel to each other (Gautier et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6625-6641). The oligonucleotide is a 2'-0-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., 1987, Nucl. Acids Res. 15:6131-6148), or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al., 1987, FEBS Lett. 215:327-330). Polynucleotides of the invention may be synthesized by standard methods known in the art. e.g. by use of an automated DNA synthesizer (such as are commercially available from Biosearch. Applied Biosystems, etc.). As examples, phosphorothioate oligonucleotides may be synthesized by the method of Stein et al. ( 1988, Nucl. Acids Res. 16:3209), methylphosphonate oligonucleotides can be prepared by use of controlled pore glass polymer supports (Sarin et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:7448-7451), etc. While antisense nucleotides complementary to the coding region sequence could be used, those complementary to the transcribed untranslated region are most preferred. Potential antagonists according to the invention also include catalytic RNA, or a ribozyme (See, e.g., PCT International Publication WO 90/1 1364, published October 4. 1990; Sarver et al, Science 247: 1222-1225 ( 1990). While ribozymes that cleave mRNA at site specific recognition sequences can be used to destroy mRNAs, the use of hammerhead ribozymes is preferred. Hammerhead ribozymes cleave mRNAs at locations dictated by flanking regions that form complementary base pairs with the target mRNA. The sole requirement is that the target mRNA have the following sequence of two bases: 5'-UG-3'. The construction and production of hammerhead ribozymes is well known in the art and is described more fully in Haseloff and Gerlach, Nature 334:585-591 (1988). There are numerous potential hammerhead ribozyme cleavage sites within the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X. Preferably, the ribozyme is engineered so that the cleavage recognition site is located near the 5' end of the mRNA; i.e., to increase efficiency and minimize the intracellular accumulation of non-functional mRNA transcripts. As in the antisense approach, the ribozymes of the invention can be composed of modified oligonucleotides (e.g. for improved stability, targeting, etc.) and should be delivered to cells which express in vivo. DNA constmcts encoding the ribozyme may be introduced into the cell in the same manner as described above for the introduction of antisense encoding DNA. A preferred method of delivery involves using a DNA constmct "encoding" the ribozyme under the control of a strong constitutive promoter, such as, for example, pol III or pol II promoter, so that transfected cells will produce sufficient quantities of the ribozyme to destroy endogenous messages and inhibit translation. Since ribozymes unlike antisense molecules, are catalytic, a lower intracellular concentration is required for efficiency. Antagonist/agonist compounds may be employed to inhibit the cell growth and proliferation effects of the polypeptides of the present invention on neoplastic cells and tissues, i.e. stimulation of angiogenesis of tumors, and, therefore, retard or prevent abnormal cellular growth and proliferation, for example, in tumor formation or growth. The antagonist/agonist may also be employed to prevent hyper-vascular diseases, and prevent the proliferation of epithelial lens cells after extracapsular cataract surgery. Prevention of the mitogenic activity of the polypeptides of the present invention may also be desirous in cases such as restenosis after balloon angioplasty. The antagonist/agonist may also be employed to prevent the growth of scar tissue during wound healing. The antagonist/agonist may also be employed to treat the diseases described herein. Thus, the invention provides a method of treating disorders or diseases, including but not limited to the disorders or diseases listed throughout this application, associated with overexpression of a polynucleotide of the present invention by administering to a patient (a) an antisense molecule directed to the polynucleotide of the present invention, and/or (b) a ribozyme directed to the polynucleotide of the present invention. Other Activities A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention, as a result of the ability to stimulate vascular endothelial cell growth, may be employed in treatment for stimulating re-vascularization of ischemic tissues due to various disease conditions such as thrombosis, arteriosclerosis, and other cardiovascular conditions. The polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed to stimulate angiogenesis and limb regeneration, as discussed above. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed for treating wounds due to injuries, bums, post-operative tissue repair, and ulcers since they are mitogenic to various cells of different origins, such as fibroblast cells and skeletal muscle cells, and therefore, facilitate the repair or replacement of damaged or diseased tissue. A polypeptide, polynucleotide. agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed stimulate neuronal growth and to treat and prevent neuronal damage which occurs in certain neuronal disorders or neuro-degenerative conditions such as Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, and AIDS-related complex. A polypeptide. polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may have the ability to stimulate chondrocyte growth, therefore, they may be employed to enhance bone and periodontal regeneration and aid in tissue transplants or bone grafts. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be also be employed to prevent skin aging due to sunburn by stimulating keratinocyte growth. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed for preventing hair loss, since FGF family members activate hair-forming cells and promotes melanocyte growth. Along the same lines, a polypeptide. polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be employed to stimulate growth and differentiation of hematopoietic cells and bone marrow cells when used in combination with other cytokines. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed to maintain organs before transplantation or for supporting cell culture of primary tissues. A polypeptide. polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be employed for inducing tissue of mesodermal origin to differentiate in early embryos. A polypeptide. polynucleotide. agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also increase or decrease the differentiation or proliferation of embryonic stem cells, besides, as discussed above, hematopoietic lineage. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be used to modulate mammalian characteristics, such as body height, weight, hair color, eye color, skin, percentage of adipose tissue, pigmentation, size, and shape (e.g., cosmetic surgery). Similarly, a polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be used to modulate mammalian metabolism affecting catabolism, anabolism, processing, utilization, and storage of energy. A polypeptide, polynucleotide. agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may be used to change a mammal's mental state or physical state by influencing biorhythms. caricadic rhythms, depression (including depressive disorders), tendency for violence, tolerance for pain, reproductive capabilities (preferably by Activin or Inhibin-like activity), hormonal or endocrine levels, appetite, libido, memory, stress, or other cognitive qualities. A polypeptide, polynucleotide, agonist, or antagonist of the present invention may also be used as a food additive or preservative, such as to increase or decrease storage capabilities, fat content, lipid, protein, carbohydrate, vitamins, minerals, cofactors or other nutritional components. The above-recited applications have uses in a wide variety of hosts. Such hosts include, but are not limited to, human, murine, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, camel, horse, mouse, rat, hamster, pig, micro-pig, chicken, goat, cow, sheep, dog, cat, non- human primate, and human. In specific embodiments, the host is a mouse, rabbit, goat, guinea pig, chicken, rat, hamster, pig, sheep, dog or cat. In preferred embodiments, the host is a mammal. In most preferred embodiments, the host is a human. Other Preferred Embodiments Other preferred embodiments of the claimed invention include an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 50 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is a nucleic acid molecule wherein said sequence of contiguous nucleotides is included in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X in the range of positions identified as "Start" and "End" in columns 7 and 8 as defined for SEQ ID NO:X in Table 1. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 150 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 500 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. A further preferred embodiment is a nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X in the range of positions identified as "Start" and "End" in columns 7 and 8 as defined for SEQ ID NO:X in Table 1. A further preferred embodiment is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to the complete nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule which hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the complementary strand thereto, and/or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit, wherein said nucleic acid molecule which hybridizes does not hybridize under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence consisting of only A residues or of only T residues Also preferred is a composition of matter comprising a DNA molecule which comprises a cDNA clone contained in the deposit Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence of the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule, wherein said sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides is included in the nucleotide sequence of an open reading frame sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to sequence of at least 150 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit A further preferred embodiment is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to sequence of at least 500 contiguous nucleotides in the nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit A further preferred embodiment is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to the complete nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. A further preferred embodiment is a method for detecting in a biological sample a nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO X or the 10 complementary strand thereto, and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit, which method comprises a step of compaπng a nucleotide sequence of at least one nucleic acid molecule in said sample with a sequence selected from said group and determining whether the sequence of said nucleic acid molecule in said sample is at least 95% identical to said selected sequence Also preferred is the above method wherein said step of compaπng sequences compπses determining the extent of nucleic acid hybridization between nucleic acid molecules in said sample and a nucleic acid molecule comprising said sequence selected from said group Similarly, also preferred is the above method wherein said step of comparing sequences is performed by comparing the nucleotide sequence determined from a nucleic acid molecule in said sample with said sequence selected from said group The nucleic acid molecules can comprise DNA molecules or RNA molecules A further preferred embodiment is a method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample which method comprises a step of detecting nucleic acid molecules in said sample, if any, comprising a nucleotide sequence that is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO X or the complementary strand thereto, and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit Also preferred is the above method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample which comprises a step of detecting nucleic acid molecules comprising a nucleotide sequence in a panel of at least two nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from said group Also preferred is a method for diagnosing in a subject a pathological condition associated with abnormal stmcture or expression of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO X, or the cDNA in the related cDNA clone identified in Table 1 which encodes a protein, w herein the method compπses a step of detecting in a biological sample 106 obtained from said subject nucleic acid molecules, if anv. comprising a nucleotide sequence that is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO X or the complementary strand thereto, and a nucleotide sequence of the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit Also preferred is the above method for diagnosing a pathological condition which comprises a step of detecting nucleic acid molecules comprising a nucleotide sequence in a panel of at least two nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from said group .Mso preferred is a composition of matter comprising isolated nucleic acid molecules wherein the nucleotide sequences of said nucleic acid molecules comprise a panel of at least two nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO X or the complementary strand thereto, and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit The nucleic acid molecules can comprise DNA molecules or RNA molecules Also preferred is a composition of matter comprising isolated nucleic acid molecules wherein the nucleotide sequences of said nucleic acid molecules comprise a DNA microarray or "chip" of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000 or 4000 nucleotide sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said DNA microarray or "chip" is at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least 50 contiguous nucleotides in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO X or the complementary strand thereto, and a nucleotide sequence encoded by the cDNA in the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 The nucleic acid molecules can comprise DNA molecules or RNA molecules Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least about 10 contiguous amino acids in the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NON: a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID ΝO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 30 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 100 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to the complete amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit. Further preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least about 10 contiguous amino acids in the complete amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Also preferred is a polypeptide wherein said sequence of contiguous amino acids is included in the amino acid sequence of a portion of said polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 ; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X; and/or the polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO:Y. Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 30 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1. Λ.lso preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence of at least about 100 contiguous amino acids in the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 Also preferred is an isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 Further preferred is an isolated antibody which binds specifically to a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X, and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone contained in the deposit Further preferred is a method for detecting in a biological sample a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence which is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X, and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 , which method comprises a step of compaπng an ammo acid sequence of at least one polypeptide molecule in said sample with a sequence selected from said group and determining whether the sequence of said polypeptide molecule in said sample is at least 90% identical to said sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids Also preferred is the above method wherein said step of comparing an amino acid sequence of at least one polypeptide molecule in said sample with a sequence selected from said group compπses determining the extent of specific binding of polypeptides in said sample to an antibody which binds specifically to a polypeptide comprising an ammo acid sequence that is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of a polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X, 109 and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 Also preferred is the above method wherein said step of comparing sequences is performed by compaπng the amino acid sequence determined from a polypeptide molecule in said sample with said sequence selected from said group Also preferred is a method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample which method comprises a step of detecting polypeptide molecules in said sample, if any, comprising an amino acid sequence that is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X, and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 Also preferred is the above method for identifying the species, tissue or cell type of a biological sample, which method compπses a step of detecting polypeptide molecules comprising an amino acid sequence in a panel of at least two amino acid sequences, w herein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the above group Also preferred is a method for diagnosing in a subject a pathological condition associated with abnormal stmcture or expression of a nucleic acid sequence identified in Table 1 encoding a polypeptide, which method compπses a step of detecting in a biological sample obtained from said subject polypeptide molecules comprising an amino acid sequence in a panel of at least two amino acid sequences, wherein at least one sequence in said panel is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous ammo acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X, and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 In any of these methods, the step of detecting said polypeptide molecules includes using an antibody Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a nucleotide sequence which is at least 95% identical to a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide wherein said polypeptide comprises an amino acid sequence that is at least 90% identical to a sequence of at least 10 contiguous amino acids in a sequence selected from the group consisting of polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X. and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule, wherein said nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide has been optimized for expression of said polypeptide in a prokaryotic host Also preferred is an isolated nucleic acid molecule, wherein said polypeptide compπses an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y, a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X, and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced m Table 1 Further preferred is a method of making a recombinant vector comprising inserting any of the above isolated nucleic acid molecule into a vector. Also preferred is the recombinant vector produced by this method Also preferred is a method of making a recombinant host cell comprising introducing the vector into a host cell, as well as the recombinant host cell produced by this method Also preferred is a method of making an isolated polypeptide comprising culturing this recombinant host cell under conditions such that said polypeptide is expressed and recovering said polypeptide Also preferred is this method of making an isolated polypeptide, wherein said recombinant host cell is a eukaryotic cell and said polypeptide is a human protein comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of polypeptide sequence of SEQ ID NO Y; a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO X, and a polypeptide encoded by the cDNA in the related cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 The isolated polypeptide produced by this method is also preferred Also preferred is a method of treatment of an individual in need of an increased level of a protein activity, which method comprises administering to such an individual a Therapeutic comprising an amount of an isolated polypeptide, polynucleotide. immunogenic fragment or analogue thereof, binding agent, antibody, or antigen binding fragment of the claimed invention effective to increase the level of said protein activity in said individual Also preferred is a method of treatment of an individual in need of a decreased level of a protein activity, which method comprised administering to such an individual a Therapeutic comprising an amount of an isolated polypeptide, polynucleotide, immunogenic fragment or analogue thereof, binding agent, antibody, or antigen binding fragment of the claimed invention effective to decrease the level of said protein activity in said individual Having generally descπbed the invention, the same will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are provided by way of illustration and are not intended as limiting Examples Example I: Isolation of a Selected cDN A Clone From the Deposited Sample Each deposited cDNA clone is contained in a plasmid vector. Table 5 identifies the vectors used to constmct the cDNA library from which each clone was isolated. In many cases, the vector used to constmct the library is a phage vector from which a plasmid has been excised. The following correlates the related plasmid for each phage vector used in constructing the cDNA library. For example, where a particular clone is identified in Table 5 as being isolated in the vector "Lambda Zap," the corresponding deposited clone is in "pBluescript." Vector Used to Constmct Library Corresponding Deposited Plasmid Lambda Zap pBluescript (pBS) Uni-Zap XR pBluescπpt (pBS) Zap Express pBK lafmid BA plafmid BA pSportl pSportl pCMVSport 2.0 pCMVSport 2.0 pCMVSport 3.0 pCMVSport 3.0 pCR & 2.1 pCR^2.1 Vectors Lambda Zap (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128.256 and 5,286,636), Uni-Zap XR (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128, 256 and 5,286,636), Zap Express (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,128,256 and 5,286,636), pBluescript (pBS) (Short. J. M. et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 16:7583-7600 (1988); Alting-Mees, M. A. and Short, J. M., Nucleic Acids Res. 17:9494 (1989)) and pBK (Alting-Mees, M. A. et al.. Strategies 5:58-61 (1992)) are commercially available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, Inc., 1 101 1 N. Torrey Pines Road, La Jolla, CA. 92037. pBS contains an ampicillin resistance gene and pBK contains a neomycin resistance gene. Both can be transformed into E. coli strain XL-1 Blue, also available from Stratagene. pBS comes in 4 forms SK+. SK-, KS+ and KS. The S and K refers to the orientation of the polylinker to the T7 and T3 11 pnmer sequences which flank the polylinker region ("S" is for Sad and "K" is for Kpnl which are the first sites on each respective end of the linker) "+" or "-" refer to the orientation of the fl origin of replication ("on"), such that in one orientation, single stranded rescue initiated from the f 1 on generates sense strand DNA and in the other, antisense Vectors pSportl . pCMVSport 2 0 and pCMVSport 3 0. were obtained from Life Technologies. Inc , P O Box 6009. Gaithersburg, MD 20897 All Sport vectors contain an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E. coli strain DH10B, also available from Life Technologies (See, for instance. Gmber, C E , et al , Focus 15 59 (1993) ) Vector lafmid BA (Bento Soares, Columbia University. NY) contains an ampicillin resistance gene and can be transformed into E coli strain XL- 1 Blue Vector pCR' β 2 1, which is available from Invitrogen, 1600 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad. CA 92008, contains an ampicillin resistance gene and may be transformed into E coli strain DH10B, available from Life Technologies (See, for instance, Clark. J M . Nue Acids Res 16 9677-9686 (1988) and Mead, D et al . Bio/Technology 9 (1991) ) Preferably, a polynucleotide of the present invention does not comprise the phage vector sequences identified for the particular clone in Table 5, as well as the corresponding plasmid vector sequences designated above The deposited material in the sample assigned the ATCC Deposit Number cited by reference to Table 2 and 5 for any given cDNA clone also may contain one or more additional plasmids, each comprising a cDNA clone different from that given clone Thus, deposits sharing the same ATCC Deposit Number contain at least a plasmid for each cDNA clone referenced in Table 1 TABLE 5 lM Two approaches can be used to isolate a particular clone from the deposited sample of plasmid DNAs cited for that clone in Table 5. First, a plasmid is directly isolated by screening the clones using a polynucleotide probe corresponding to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X. Particularly, a specific polynucleotide with 30-40 nucleotides is synthesized using an Applied Biosystems DNA synthesizer according to the sequence reported. The oligonucleotide is labeled, for instance, with " P-γ-ATP using T4 polynucleotide kinase and purified according to routine methods. (E.g., Maniatis et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring, NY ( 1982).) The plasmid mixture is transformed into a suitable host, as indicated above (such as XL- 1 Blue (Stratagene)) using techniques known to those of skill in the art, such as those provided by the vector supplier or in related publications or patents cited above. The transformants are plated on 1.5% agar plates (containing the appropriate selection agent, e.g., ampicillin) to a density of about 150 transformants (colonies) per plate. These plates are screened using Nylon membranes according to routine methods for bacterial colony screening (e.g., Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Edit., (1989), Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, pages 1.93 to 1.104), or other techniques known to those of skill in the art. Alternatively, two primers of 17-20 nucleotides derived from both ends of the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X are synthesized and used to amplify the desired cDNA using the deposited cDNA plasmid as a template. The polymerase chain reaction is carried out under routine conditions, for instance, in 25 μl of reaction mixture with 0.5 ug of the above cDNA template. A convenient reaction mixture is 1.5-5 mM MgCl 2 , 0.01% (w/v) gelatin, 20 μM each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP, 25 pmol of each primer and 0.25 Unit of Taq polymerase. Thirty five cycles of PCR (denaturation at 94°C for 1 min; annealing at 55°C for 1 min; elongation at 72°C for 1 min) are performed with a Perkin-Elmer Cetus automated thermal cycler. The amplified product is analyzed by agarose gel electrophoresis and the DNA band with expected molecular weight is excised and purified. The PCR product is verified to be the selected sequence by subcloning and sequencing the DNA product. S Several methods are available for the identification of the 5' or 3' non-coding portions of a gene which may not be present in the deposited clone These methods include but are not limited to, filter probing, clone enrichment using specific probes, and protocols similar or identical to 5' and 3' "RACE" protocols which are well known in the art For instance, a method similar to 5' RACE is available for generating the missing 5' end of a desired full-length transcript (Fromont-Racine et al , Nucleic Acids Res 21(7) 1683-1684 (1993) ) Briefly, a specific RNA oligonucleotide is ligated to the 5' ends of a population of RNA presumably containing full-length gene RNA transcripts A primer set containing a primer specific to the ligated RNA oligonucleotide and a primer specific to a known sequence of the gene of interest is used to PCR amplify the 5' portion of the desired full-length gene This amplified product may then be sequenced and used to generate the full length gene This above method starts with total RNA isolated from the desired source, although poly-A+ RNA can be used The RNA preparation can then be treated with phosphatase if necessary to eliminate 5' phosphate groups on degraded or damaged RNA which may interfere with the later RNA ligase step The phosphatase should then be inactivated and the RNA treated with tobacco acid pyrophosphatase in order to remove the cap structure present at the 5' ends of messenger RNAs This reaction leaves a 5' phosphate group at the 5' end of the cap cleaved RNA which can then be ligated to an RNA oligonucleotide using T4 RNA ligase This modified RNA preparation is used as a template for first strand cDNA synthesis using a gene specific oligonucleotide The first strand synthesis reaction is used as a template for PCR amplification of the desired 5' end using a pnmer specific to the ligated RNA oligonucleotide and a primer specific to the known sequence of the gene of interest The resultant product is then sequenced and analyzed to confirm that the 5' end sequence belongs to the desired gene Example 2: Isolation of Genomic Clones Corresponding to a Polynucleotide A human genomic PI library (Genomic Systems, Inc.) is screened by PCR using primers selected for the sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO:X, according to the method descπbed in Example 1 (See also, Sambrook.) Example 3: Tissue specific expression analysis The Human Genome Sciences, Inc (HGS) database is derived from sequencing tissue specific cDNA libraries Libraries generated from a particular tissue are selected and the specific tissue expression pattern of EST groups or assembled contigs within these libraries is determined by comparison of the expression patterns of those groups or contigs within the entire database ESTs which show tissue specific expression are selected The original clone from which the specific EST sequence was generated, is obtained from the catalogued library of clones and the insert amplified by PCR using methods known in the art The PCR product is denatured then transferred in 96 well format to a nylon membrane (Schleicher and Scheull) generating an array filter of tissue specific clones. Housekeeping genes, maize genes, and known tissue specific genes are included on the filters These targets can be used in signal normalization and to validate assay sensitivity Additional targets are included to monitor probe length and specificity of hybridization Radioactively labeled hybridization probes are generated by first strand cDNA synthesis per the manufacturer's instructions (Life Technologies) from mRNA/RNA samples prepared from the specific tissue being analyzed The hybridization probes are purified by gel exclusion chromatography, quantitated, and hybridized with the array filters in hybridization bottles at 65°C overnight The filters are washed under stringent conditions and signals are captured using a Fuji phosphoπmager. Data is extracted using AIS software and following background subtraction, signal normalization is performed This includes a normalization of filter-wide expression levels between different experimental runs Genes that are differentially expressed in the tissue of interest are identified and the full length sequence of these clones is generated Example 4: Chromosomal Mapping of the Polynucleotides An oligonucleotide primer set is designed according to the sequence at the 5' end of SEQ ID NO X This primer preferably spans about 100 nucleotides This primer set is then used in a polymerase chain reaction under the following set of conditions 30 seconds, 95°C, 1 minute. 56°C. 1 minute. 70°C This cycle is repeated 32 times followed by one 5 minute cycle at 70°C Human, mouse, and hamster DNA is used as template in addition to a somatic cell hybrid panel containing individual chromosomes or chromosome fragments (Bios, Inc) The reactions is analyzed on either 8% polyacrylamide gels or 3.5 % agarose gels Chromosome mapping is determined by the presence of an approximately 100 bp PCR fragment in the particular somatic cell hybrid Example 5: Bacterial Expression of a Polypeptide A polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of the present invention is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3' ends of the DNA sequence, as outlined in Example 1 , to synthesize insertion fragments The primers used to amplify the cDNA insert should preferably contain restriction sites, such as BamHI and Xbal, at the 5' end of the primers in order to clone the amplified product into the expression vector For example, BamHI and Xbal correspond to the restriction enzyme sites on the bacterial expression vector pQE-9 (Qiagen. Inc , Chatsworth. CA) This plasmid vector encodes antibiotic resistance (Amp r ), a bacterial origin of replication (on), an IPTG-regulatable promoter/operator (P/O), a ribosome binding site (RBS), a 6-histidine tag (6-His). and restriction enzyme cloning sites. The pQE-9 vector is digested with BamHI and Xbal and the amplified fragment is ligated into the pQE-9 vector maintaining the reading frame initiated at the bacterial RBS. The ligation mixture is then used to transform the E. coli strain M15/rep4 (Qiagen, Inc.) which contains multiple copies of the plasmid pREP4, which expresses the lad repressor and also confers kanamycin resistance (Kan 1" )- Transformants are identified by their ability to grow on LB plates and ampicillin/kanamycin resistant colonies are selected. Plasmid DNA is isolated and confirmed by restriction analysis. Clones containing the desired constructs are grown overnight (O N) in liquid culture in LB media supplemented with both Amp ( 100 ug/ml) and Kan (25 ug/ml). The O N culture is used to inoculate a large culture at a ratio of 1 : 100 to 1 :250. The cells are grown to an optical density 600 (O.D. 600 ) of between 0.4 and 0.6. IPTG (Isopropyl-B-D-thiogalacto pyranoside) is then added to a final concentration of 1 mM. IPTG induces by inactivating the lad repressor, clearing the P/O leading to increased gene expression. Cells are grown for an extra 3 to 4 hours. Cells are then harvested by centrifugation (20 mins at 6000Xg). The cell pellet is solubilized in the chaotropic agent 6 Molar Guanidine HCl by stirring for 3-4 hours at 4°C. The cell debris is removed by centrifugation. and the supernatant containing the polypeptide is loaded onto a nickel-nitrilo-tri-acetic acid ("Ni-NTA") affinity resin column (available from QIAGEN, Inc., supra). Proteins with a 6 x His tag bind to the Ni-NTA resin with high affinity and can be purified in a simple one-step procedure (for details see: The QIAexpressionist (1995) QIAGEN, Inc., supra). Briefly, the supernatant is loaded onto the column in 6 M guanidine-HCl, pH 8, the column is first washed with 10 volumes of 6 M guanidine-HCl, pH 8, then washed with 10 volumes of 6 M guanidine-HCl pH 6. and finally the polypeptide is eluted with 6 M guanidine-HCl, pH 5. The purified protein is then renatured by dialyzing it against phosphate- buffered saline (PBS) or 50 mM Na-acetate. pH 6 buffer plus 200 mM NaCl. Alternatively, the protein can be successfully refolded while immobilized on the Ni- NTA column. The recommended conditions are as follows- renature using a linear 6M-1M urea gradient in 500 mM NaCl, 20% glycerol, 20 mM Tπs/HCl pH 7.4, containing protease inhibitors The renaturation should be performed over a period of 1.5 hours or more. After renaturation the proteins are eluted by the addition of 250 mM immidazole. Immidazole is removed by a final dialyzing step against PBS or 50 mM sodium acetate pH 6 buffer plus 200 mM NaCl. The purified protein is stored at 4° C or frozen at -80° C. In addition to the above expression vector, the present invention further includes an expression vector comprising phage operator and promoter elements operatively linked to a polynucleotide of the present invention, called pHE4a. (ATCC Accession Number 209645, deposited on February 25, 1998.) This vector contains 1) a neomycinphosphotransferase gene as a selection marker, 2) an E. coli origin of replication, 3) a T5 phage promoter sequence, 4) two lac operator sequences, 5) a Shine-Delgarno sequence, and 6) the lactose operon repressor gene (laclq). The origin of replication (oπC) is deπved from pUC 19 (LTI, Gaithersburg, MD) The promoter sequence and operator sequences are made synthetically. DNA can be inserted into the pHEa by restricting the vector with Ndel and Xbal, BamHI, Xhol, or Asp718, running the restricted product on a gel, and isolating the larger fragment (the sniffer fragment should be about 310 base pairs). The DNA insert is generated according to the PCR protocol described in Example 1 , using PCR primers having restriction sites for Ndel (5' primer) and Xbal, BamHI, Xhol, or Asp718 (3' primer). The PCR insert is gel purified and restricted with compatible enzymes The insert and vector are ligated according to standard protocols. The engineered vector could easily be substituted in the above protocol to express protein in a bacterial system. Example 6: Purification of a Polypeptide from an Inclusion Body The following alternative method can be used to purify a polypeptide expressed in E coli when it is present in the form of inclusion bodies. Unless otherwise specified, all of the following steps are conducted at 4-10°C. Upon completion of the production phase of the E. coli fermentation, the cell culture is cooled to 4-10°C and the cells harvested by continuous centrifugation at 15,000 rpm (Heraeus Sepatech). On the basis of the expected yield of protein per unit weight of cell paste and the amount of purified protein required, an appropriate amount of cell paste, by weight, is suspended in a buffer solution containing 100 mM Tris, 50 mM ΕDTA, pH 7.4. The cells are dispersed to a homogeneous suspension using a high shear mixer. The cells are then lysed by passing the solution through a microfluidizer (Microfuidics, Corp. or APV Gaulin. Inc.) twice at 4000-6000 psi. The homogenate is then mixed with NaCl solution to a final concentration of 0.5 M NaCl, followed by centrifugation at 7000 xg for 15 min. The resultant pellet is washed again using 0.5M NaCl, 100 mM Tris, 50 mM ΕDTA, pH 7.4. The resulting washed inclusion bodies are solubilized with 1.5 M guanidine hydrochloride (GuHCl) for 2-4 hours. After 7000 xg centrifugation for 15 min., the pellet is discarded and the polypeptide containing supernatant is incubated at 4°C overnight to allow further GuHCl extraction. Following high speed centrifugation (30,000 xg) to remove insoluble particles, the GuHCl solubilized protein is refolded by quickly mixing the GuHCl extract with 20 volumes of buffer containing 50 mM sodium, pH 4.5, 150 mM NaCl, 2 mM ΕDTA by vigorous stirring. The refolded diluted protein solution is kept at 4°C without mixing for 12 hours prior to further purification steps. To clarify the refolded polypeptide solution, a previously prepared tangential filtration unit equipped with 0.16 μm membrane filter with appropriate surface area (e.g., Filtron), equilibrated with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6.0 is employed. The filtered sample is loaded onto a cation exchange resin (e.g., Poros HS-50, Perseptive Biosystems) The column is washed with 40 mM sodium acetate. pH 6 0 and eluted with 250 mM. 500 mM, 1000 mM. and 1500 mM NaCl in the same buffer, in a stepwise manner The absorbance at 280 nm of the effluent is continuously monitored Fractions are collected and further analyzed by SDS-PAGE Fractions containing the polypeptide are then pooled and mixed with 4 volumes of water The diluted sample is then loaded onto a previously prepared set of tandem columns of strong anion (Poros HQ-50, Perseptive Biosystems) and weak anion (Poros CM-20, Perseptive Biosystems) exchange resins The columns are equilibrated with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6 0 Both columns are washed with 40 mM sodium acetate, pH 6 0. 200 mM NaCl The CM-20 column is then eluted using a 10 column volume linear gradient ranging from 0 2 M NaCl, 50 mM sodium acetate. pH 6 0 to 1 0 M NaCl, 50 mM sodium acetate, pH 6 5 Fractions are collected under constant A 8u monitoring of the effluent Fractions containing the polypeptide (determined, for instance, by 16% SDS-PAGE) are then pooled The resultant polypeptide should exhibit greater than 95% purity after the above refolding and purification steps No major contaminant bands should be observed from Commassie blue stained 16% SDS-PAGE gel when 5 μg of purified protein is loaded The purified protein can also be tested for endotoxin/LPS contamination, and typically the LPS content is less than 0 1 ng/ml according to LAL assays Example 7 Cloning and Expression of a Polypeptide in a Baculovirus Expression System In this example, the plasmid shuttle vector pA2 is used to insert a polynucleotide into a baculovirus to express a polypeptide This expression vector contains the strong polyhedrin promoter of the Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcMNPV) followed by convenient restriction sites such as BamHI. Xba I and Asp7l S The polvadenylation site of the simian virus 40 ("SV40") is used for efficient polyadenylation. For easy selection of recombinant virus, the plasmid contains the beta-galactosidase gene from E. coli under control of a weak Drosophila promoter in the same orientation, followed by the polyadenylation signal of the polyhedrin gene. The inserted genes are flanked on both sides by viral sequences for cell-mediated homologous recombination with wild-type viral DNA to generate a viable virus that express the cloned polynucleotide. Many other baculovirus vectors can be used in place of the vector above, such as pAc373, pVL941, and pAcIM l , as one skilled in the art would readily appreciate, as long as the construct provides appropriately located signals for transcription, translation, secretion and the like, including a signal peptide and an in-frame AUG as required. Such vectors are described, for instance, in Luckow et al., Virology 170:31- 39 (1989). Specifically, the cDNA sequence contained in the deposited clone, including the AUG initiation codon, is amplified using the PCR protocol described in Example 1. If a naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce the polypeptide of the present invention, the pA2 vector does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, the vector can be modified (pA2 GP) to include a baculovirus leader sequence, using the standard methods described in Summers et al., "A Manual of Methods for Baculovirus Vectors and Insect Cell Culture Procedures," Texas Agricultural Experimental Station Bulletin No. 1555 (1987). The amplified fragment is isolated from a 1 % agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean," BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). The fragment then is digested with appropriate restriction enzymes and again purified on a 1% agarose gel. The plasmid is digested with the corresponding restriction enzymes and optionally, can be dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase, using routine procedures known in the art. The DNA is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean" BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). The fragment and the dephosphorylated plasmid are ligated together with T4 DNA ligase. E. coli HB 101 or other suitable E. coli hosts such as XL- 1 Blue (Stratagene Cloning Systems. La Jolla, CA) cells are transformed with the ligation mixture and spread on culture plates Bacteria containing the plasmid are identified by digesting DNA from individual colonies and analyzing the digestion product by gel electrophoresis The sequence of the cloned fragment is confirmed by DNA sequencing Five μg of a plasmid containing the polynucleotide is co-transfected with 1 0 μg of a commercially available linearized baculovirus DNA ("BaculoGold™ baculovirus DNA", Pharmingen, San Diego, CA), using the lipofection method described by Feigner et al , Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 84 7413-7417 (1987) One μg of BaculoGold™ virus DNA and 5 μg of the plasmid are mixed in a sterile well of a microtiter plate containing 50 μl of serum-free Grace's medium (Life Technologies Inc , Gaithersburg, MD) Afterwards. 10 μl Lipofectin plus 90 μl Grace's medium are added, mixed and incubated for 15 minutes at room temperature Then the transfection mixture is added drop-wise to Sf9 insect cells (ATCC CRL 171 1) seeded in a 35 mm tissue culture plate with 1 ml Grace's medium without serum The plate is then incubated for 5 hours at 27° C The transfection solution is then removed from the plate and 1 ml of Grace's insect medium supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum is added Cultivation is then continued at 27° C for four days After four days the supernatant is collected and a plaque assay is performed, as described by Summers and Smith, supt a An agarose gel with "Blue Gal" (Life Technologies Inc , Gaithersburg) is used to allow easy identification and isolation of gal-expressing clones, which produce blue-stained plaques (A detailed description of a "plaque assay" of this type can also be found in the user's guide for insect cell culture and baculovirology distributed by Life Technologies Inc , Gaithersburg, page 9-10 ) After appropriate incubation, blue stained plaques are picked with the tip of a micropipettor (e g , Eppendorf) The agar containing the recombinant viruses is then resuspended in a microcentπfuge tube containing 200 μl of Grace's medium and the suspension containing the recombinant baculovirus is used to infect Sf9 cells seeded in 35 mm dishes Four days later the supernatants of these culture dishes are harvested and then they are stored at 4° C To verify the expression of the polypeptide. Sf9 cells are grown in Grace's medium supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated FBS The cells are infected with the recombinant baculovirus containing the polynucleotide at a multiplicity of infection ("MOI") of about 2 If radiolabeled proteins are desired, 6 hours later the medium is removed and is replaced with SF900 II medium minus methionine and cysteine (available from Life Technologies Inc . Rockville, MD) After 42 hours, 5 μCi of 3S S-methιonιne and 5 μCi J3 S-cysteιne (available from Amersham) are added The cells are further incubated for 16 hours and then are harvested by centrifugation The proteins in the supernatant as well as the intracellular proteins are analyzed by SDS-PAGE followed by autoradiography (if radiolabeled) Microsequencing of the amino acid sequence of the amino terminus of purified protein may be used to determine the amino terminal sequence of the produced protein Example 8 Expression of a Polypeptide in Mammalian Cells The polypeptide of the present invention can be expressed in a mammalian cell A typical mammalian expression vector contains a promoter element, which mediates the initiation of transcription of mRNA a protein coding sequence, and signals required for the termination of transcription and polyadenylation of the transcript Additional elements include enhancers, Kozak sequences and intervening sequences flanked by donor and acceptor sites for RNA splicing Highly efficient transcription is achieved with the early and late promoters from SV40, the long terminal repeats (LTRs) from Retroviruses, e g , RSV, HTLVI, HIVI and the early promoter of the cytomegalovirus (CMV) However, cellular elements can also be used (e g , the human actin promoter) Suitable expression vectors for use in practicing the present invention include, for example, vectors such as pSVL and pMSG (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), pRSVcat (ATCC 37152), pSV2dhfr (ATCC 37146), pBC12MI ( VTCC 67109), pCMVSport 2.0. and pCMVSport 3.0. Mammalian host cells that could be used include, human Hela. 293. H9 and Jurkat cells, mouse NIH3T3 and C127 cells, Cos 1, Cos 7 and CV 1, quail QC 1 -3 cells, mouse L cells and Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells. Alternatively, the polypeptide can be expressed in stable cell lines containing the polynucleotide integrated into a chromosome. The co-transfection with a selectable marker such as DHFR, gpt, neomycin, hygromycin allows the identification and isolation of the transfected cells. The transfected gene can also be amplified to express large amounts of the encoded protein. The DHFR (dihvdrofolate reductase) marker is useful in developing cell lines that carry several hundred or even several thousand copies of the gene of interest. (See. e.g., Alt, F. W., et al., J. Biol. Chem. 253: 1357-1370 (1978); Hamlin, J. L. and Ma, C. Biochem. et Biophys. Acta, 1097: 107-143 (1990); Page, M. J. and Sydenham, M. A., Biotechnology 9:64-68 (1991).) Another useful selection marker is the enzyme glutamine synthase (GS) (Murphy et al., Biochem J. 227:277-279 (1991 ); Bebbington et al., Bio/Technology 10: 169-175 (1992). Using these markers, the mammalian cells are grown in selective medium and the cells with the highest resistance are selected. These cell lines contain the amplified gene(s) integrated into a chromosome. Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) and NSO cells are often used for the production of proteins. Derivatives of the plasmid pSV2-dhfr (ATCC Accession No. 37146), the expression vectors pC4 (ATCC Accession No. 209646) and pC6 (ATCC Accession No.209647) contain the strong promoter (LTR) of the Rous Sarcoma Virus (Cullen et al., Molecular and Cellular Biology, 438-447 (March, 1985)) plus a fragment of the CMV-enhancer (Boshart et al., Cell 41 :521-530 (1985).) Multiple cloning sites, e.g., with the restriction enzyme cleavage sites BamHI, Xbal and Asp718. facilitate the cloning of the gene of interest. The vectors also contain the 3' intron, the polyadenylation and termination signal of the rat preproinsuhn gene, and the mouse DHFR gene under control of the S V40 early promoter. Specifically, the plasmid pC6, for example, is digested with appropriate restriction enzymes and then dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphates by procedures known in the art. The vector is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel. A polynucleotide of the present invention is amplified according to the protocol outlined in Example 1. If a naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce the polypeptide of the present invention, the vector does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, if a naturally occurring signal sequence is not used, the vector can be modified to include a heterologous signal sequence. (See, e.g., WO 96/34891.) The amplified fragment is isolated from a 1 % agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean," BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, Ca.). The fragment then is digested with appropriate restriction enzymes and again purified on a 1% agarose gel. The amplified fragment is then digested with the same restriction enzyme and purified on a 1% agarose gel. The isolated fragment and the dephosphorylated vector are then ligated with T4 DNA ligase. E. coli HB101 or XL- 1 Blue cells are then transformed and bacteria are identified that contain the fragment inserted into plasmid pC6 using, for instance, restriction enzyme analysis. Chinese hamster ovary cells lacking an active DHFR gene is used for transfection. Five μg of the expression plasmid pC6 or pC4 is cotransfected with 0.5 μg of the plasmid pSVneo using lipofectin (Feigner et al., supra). The plasmid pSV2- neo contains a dominant selectable marker, the neo gene from Tn5 encoding an enzyme that confers resistance to a group of antibiotics including G418. The cells are seeded in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 1 mg/ml G418. After 2 days, the cells are trypsinized and seeded in hybridoma cloning plates (Greiner, Germany) in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 10, 25, or 50 ng/ml of metothrexate plus 1 mg/ml G418. After about 10-14 days single clones are trypsinized and then seeded in 6- well petri dishes or 10 ml flasks using different concentrations of methotrexate (50 nM, 100 nM, 200 nM, 400 nM, 800 nM). Clones growing at the highest concentrations of methotrexate are then transferred to new 6-well plates containing even higher concentrations of methotrexate ( 1 μM, 2 μM. 5 μM, 10 mM, 20 mM). The same procedure is repeated until clones are obtained which grow at a concentration of 100 - 200 μM. Expression of the desired gene product is analyzed, for instance, by SDS-PAGE and Western blot or by reversed phase HPLC analysis. Example 9: Protein Fusions The polypeptides of the present invention are preferably fused to other proteins. These fusion proteins can be used for a variety of applications. For example, fusion of the present polypeptides to His-tag, HA-tag, protein A, IgG domains, and maltose binding protein facilitates purification. (See Example 5: see also EP A 394,827; Traunecker. et al.. Nature 331 :84-86 ( 1988).) Similarly, fusion to IgG- 1. IgG-3. and albumin increases the halflife time in vivo. Nuclear localization signals fused to the polypeptides of the present invention can target the protein to a specific subcellular localization, while covalent heterodimer or homodimers can increase or decrease the activity of a fusion protein. Fusion proteins can also create chimeric molecules having more than one function. Finally, fusion proteins can increase solubility and/or stability of the fused protein compared to the non-fused protein. All of the types of fusion proteins described above can be made by modifying the following protocol, which outlines the fusion of a polypeptide to an IgG molecule, or the protocol described in Example 5. Briefly, the human Fc portion of the IgG molecule can be PCR amplified, using primers that span the 5' and 3 ' ends of the sequence described below. These primers also should have convenient restriction enzyme sites that will facilitate cloning into an expression vector, preferably a mammalian expression vector. For example, if pC4 (Accession No. 209646) is used, the human Fc portion can be ligated into the BamHI cloning site. Note that the 3' BamHI site should be destroyed. Next, the vector containing the human Fc portion is re-restricted with BamHI. linearizing the vector, and a polynucleotide of the present invention, isolated by the PCR protocol described in Example 1. is ligated into this BamHI site. Note that the polynucleotide is cloned without a stop codon. otherwise a fusion protein will not be produced. If the naturally occurring signal sequence is used to produce the polypeptide of the present invention, pC4 does not need a second signal peptide. Alternatively, if the naturally occurring signal sequence is not used, the vector can be modified to include a heterologous signal sequence. (See, e.g., WO 96/34891.) Human IgG Fc region: GGGATCCGGAGCCCAAATCTTCTGACAAAACTCACACATGCCCACCGTGC CCAGCACCTGAATTCGAGGGTGCACCGTCAGTCTTCCTCTTCCCCCCAAAA CCC AAGGAC ACCCTC ATG ATCTCCCGGACTCCTGAGGTCACATGCGTGGT GGTGGACGTAAGCCACGAAGACCCTGAGGTCAAGTTCAACTGGTACGTGG ACGGCGTGGAGGTGCATAATGCCAAGACAAAGCCGCGGGAGGAGCAGTA CAACAGCACGTACCGTGTGGTCAGCGTCCTCACCGTCCTGCACCAGGACT GGCTGAATGGCAAGGAGTACAAGTGCAAGGTCTCCAACAAAGCCCTCCCA ACCCCCATCGAGAAAACCATCTCCAAAGCCAAAGGGCAGCCCCGAGAAC CACAGGTGTACACCCTGCCCCCATCCCGGGATGAGCTGACCAAGAACCAG GTCAGCCTGACCTGCCTGGTCAAAGGCTTCTATCCAAGCGACATCGCCGT GGAGTGGGAGAGCAATGGGCAGCCGGAGAACAACTACAAGACCACGCCT CCCGTGCTGGACTCCGACGGCTCCTTCTTCCTCTACAGCAAGCTCACCGTG GACAAGAGCAGGTGGCAGCAGGGGAACGTCTTCTCATGCTCCGTGATGCA TGAGGCTCTGCACAACCACTACACGCAGAAGAGCCTCTCCCTGTCTCCGG GTAAATGAGTGCGACGGCCGCGACTCTAGAGGAT (SEQ ID NO:919) Example 10: Production of an Antibody from a Polypeptide a) Hybridoma Technology The antibodies of the present invention can be prepared by a variety of methods. (See. Current Protocols, Chapter 2.) As one example of such methods, cells expressing polypeptide of the present invention are administered to an animal to induce the production of sera containing polyclonal antibodies. In a preferred method, 42 a preparation of polvpeptide of the present invention is prepared and purified to render it substantially free of natural contaminants Such a preparation is then introduced into an animal in order to produce polyclonal antisera of greater specific activity Monoclonal antibodies specific for polypeptide of the present invention are prepared using hybridoma technology (Kohler et al . Nature 256 495 (1975), Kohler et al . Eur J Immunol 6 51 1 (1976), Kohler et al , Eur J Immunol 6 292 (1976), Hammerhng et al , in Monoclonal Antibodies and T-Cell Hybridomas, Elsevier, N Y , pp 563-681 (1981)) In general, an animal (preferably a mouse) is immunized with polypeptide of the present invention or, more preferably, with a secreted polypeptide of the present invention-expressing cell Such polypeptide-expressing cells are cultured in any suitable tissue culture medium, preferably in Earle's modified Eagle's medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (inactivated at about 56°C), and supplemented with about 10 g/1 of nonessential amino acids, about 1,000 U/ml of penicillin, and about 100 μg/ml of streptomycin The splenocytes of such mice are extracted and fused with a suitable myeloma cell line Any suitable myeloma cell line may be employed in accordance with the present invention, however, it is preferable to employ the parent myeloma cell line (SP2O), available from the ATCC After fusion, the resulting hybridoma cells are selectively maintained in HAT medium, and then cloned by limiting dilution as described by Wands et al (Gastroenterology 80 225-232 ( 1981)) The hybridoma cells obtained through such a selection are then assayed to identify clones which secrete antibodies capable of binding the polypeptide of the present invention Alternatively, additional antibodies capable of binding to polypeptide of the present invention can be produced in a two-step procedure using anti-idiotypic antibodies Such a method makes use of the fact that antibodies are themselves antigens, and therefore, it is possible to obtain an antibody which binds to a second antibody In accordance with this method, protein specific antibodies are used to immunize an animal, preferably a mouse The splenocytes of such an animal are then used to produce hybridoma cells, and the hybridoma cells are screened to identify 4 clones which produce an antibody whose ability to bind to the polypeptide of the present invention-specific antibody can be blocked by polypeptide of the present invention Such antibodies comprise anti-idiotypic antibodies to the polypeptide of the present invention-specific antibody and are used to immunize an animal to induce formation of further polypeptide of the present invention-specific antibodies. For in vivo use of antibodies in humans, an antibody is "humanized". Such antibodies can be produced using genetic constructs derived from hybridoma cells producing the monoclonal antibodies described above Methods for producing chimeric and humanized antibodies are known in the art and are discussed herein (See, for review, Morrison. Science 229: 1202 ( 1985), Oi et al. BioTechniques 4 214 (1986), Cabilly et al . U.S Patent No 4.816.567. Taniguchi et al., EP 171496, Morrison et al , EP 173494, Neuberger et al., WO 8601533, Robinson et al., WO 8702671 , Bouhanne et al., Nature 312.643 ( 1984), Neuberger et al.. Nature 314.268 (1985) ) b) Isolation Of Antibody Fragments Directed Against Polypeptide of the Present Invention From A Library Of scFvs Naturally occurring V-genes isolated from human PBLs are constructed into a library of antibody fragments which contain reactivities against polypeptide of the present invention to which the donor may or may not have been exposed (see e g , U.S Patent 5,885,793 incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Rescue of the Library. A library of scFvs is constructed from the RNA of human PBLs as described in PCT publication WO 92/01047 To rescue phage displaying antibody fragments, approximately 109 E coli harboring the phagemid are used to inoculate 50 ml of 2xTY containing 1% glucose and 100 μg/ml of ampicillin (2xTY-AMP-GLU) and grown to an O.D. of 0 8 with shaking. Five ml of this culture is used to innoculate 50 ml of 2xTY-AMP-GLU. 2 x 108 TU of delta gene 3 helper (Ml 3 delta gene III, see PCT publication WO 92/01047) are added and the culture incubated at 37°C for 45 minutes without shaking and then at 37°C for 45 minutes with shaking The culture is centrifuged at 4000 r p m for 10 mm and the pellet ^44 resuspended in 2 liters of 2xTY containing 100 μg/ml ampicillin and 50 ug/ml kanamycin and grown overnight Phage are prepared as descπbed in PCT publication WO 92/01047 M 13 delta gene III is prepared as follows M 13 delta gene III helper phage does not encode gene III protein, hence the phage(mιd) displaying antibody fragments have a greater avidity of binding to antigen Infectious M 13 delta gene III particles are made by growing the helper phage in cells harboπng a pUC19 derivative supplying the wild type gene III protein during phage morphogenesis The culture is incubated for 1 hour at 37° C without shaking and then for a further hour at 37°C with shaking Cells are spun down (IEC-Centra 8,400 r p m for 10 min), resuspended in 300 ml 2xTY broth containing 100 μg ampicillin/ml and 25 μg kanamycin/ml (2xTY- AMP-KAN) and grown overnight, shaking at 37°C Phage particles are purified and concentrated from the culture medium by two PEG-precipitations (Sambrook et al , 1990). resuspended in 2 ml PBS and passed through a 0 45 μm filter (Minisart NML, Sartoπus) to give a final concentration of approximately 1013 transducing units/ml (ampicilhn-resistant clones) Panning of the Library Immunotubes (Nunc) are coated overnight in PBS with 4 ml of either 100 μg/ml or 10 μg/ml of a polypeptide of the present invention Tubes are blocked with 2% Marvel-PBS for 2 hours at 37°C and then washed 3 times in PBS Approximately 1013 TU of phage is applied to the tube and incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature tumbling on an over and under turntable and then left to stand for another 1 5 hours Tubes are washed 10 times with PBS 0 1% Tween-20 and 10 times with PBS Phage are eluted by adding 1 ml of 100 mM tπethylamine and rotating 15 minutes on an under and over turntable after which the solution is immediately neutralized with 0 5 ml of 1 0M Tπs-HCl, pH 7 4 Phage are then used to infect 10 ml of mid-log E coli TGI by incubating eluted phage with bacteria for 30 minutes at 37°C The E coli are then plated on TYE plates containing 1% glucose and 100 μg/ml ampicillin The resulting bacterial library is then rescued with delta gene 3 helper phage as descπbed above to prepare phage for a subsequent round of selection This process is then repeated for a total of 4 rounds of affinity purification 343 with tube-washing increased to 20 times with PBS. 0 1 % Tween-20 and 20 times with PBS for rounds 3 and 4 Characterization of Binders Eluted phage from the 3rd and 4th rounds of selection are used to infect E. coli HB 2151 and soluble scFv is produced (Marks, et al., 1991 ) from single colonies for assay ELISAs are performed with microtitre plates coated with either 10 pg/ml of the polypeptide of the present invention in 50 mM bicarbonate pH 9.6 Clones positive in ELISA are further characterized by PCR fingerprinting (see, e.g.. PCT publication WO 92/01047) and then by sequencing. These ELISA positive clones may also be further characterized by techniques known in the art. such as, for example, epitope mapping, binding affinity, receptor signal transduction, ability to block or competitively inhibit antibody/antigen binding, and competitive agonistic or antagonistic activity. Example 11: Method of Determining Alterations in a Gene Corresponding to a Polynucleotide RNA isolated from entire families or individual patients presenting with a phenotype of interest (such as a disease) is be isolated cDNA is then generated from these RNA samples using protocols known in the art. (See, Sambrook.) The cDNA is then used as a template for PCR, employing pπmers surrounding regions of interest in SEQ ID NO:X; and or the nucleotide sequence of the related cDNA in the cDNA clone contained in a deposited library Suggested PCR conditions consist of 35 cycles at 95 degrees C for 30 seconds; 60-120 seconds at 52-58 degrees C; and 60- 120 seconds at 70 degrees C. using buffer solutions described in Sidransky et al., Science 252:706 (1991). PCR products are then sequenced using pπmers labeled at their 5' end with T4 polynucleotide kinase. employing SequiTherm Polymerase (Epicentre Technologies). The intron-exon borders of selected exons is also determined and genomic PCR products analyzed to confirm the results. PCR products harboring suspected mutations is then cloned and sequenced to validate the results of the direct sequencing. PCR products is cloned into T-tailed vectors as described in Holton et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 19: 1 156 (1991) and sequenced with T7 polymerase (United States Biochemical). Affected individuals are identified by mutations not present in unaffected individuals. Genomic rearrangements are also observed as a method of determining alterations in a gene corresponding to a polynucleotide. Genomic clones isolated according to Example 2 are nick-translated with digoxigenindeoxy-uridine 5'- triphosphate (Boehringer Manheim), and FISH performed as described in Johnson et al., Methods Cell Biol. 35:73-99 (1991). Hybridization with the labeled probe is carried out using a vast excess of human cot-1 DNA for specific hybridization to the corresponding genomic locus. Chromosomes are counterstained with 4,6-diamino-2-phenylidole and propidium iodide, producing a combination of C- and R-bands. Aligned images for precise mapping are obtained using a triple-band filter set (Chroma Technology, Brattleboro, VT) in combination with a cooled charge-coupled device camera (Photometries, Tucson, AZ) and variable excitation wavelength filters. (Johnson et al., Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl., 8:75 (1991 ).) Image collection, analysis and chromosomal fractional length measurements are performed using the ISee Graphical Program System. (Inovision Coφoration, Durham, NC.) Chromosome alterations of the genomic region hybridized by the probe are identified as insertions, deletions, and translocations. These alterations are used as a diagnostic marker for an associated disease. Example 12: Method of Detecting Abnormal Levels of a Polypeptide in a Biological Sample A polypeptide of the present invention can be detected in a biological sample. and if an increased or decreased level of the polypeptide is detected, this polypeptide is a marker for a particular phenotype. Methods of detection are numerous, and thus, it is understood that one skilled in the art can modify the following assay to fit their particular needs. For example, antibody-sandwich ELISAs are used to detect polypeptides in a sample, preferably a biological sample. Wells of a microtiter plate are coated with specific antibodies, at a final concentration of 0.2 to 10 ug/ml. The antibodies are either monoclonal or polyclonal and are produced by the method described in Example 10. The wells are blocked so that non-specific binding of the polypeptide to the well is reduced. The coated wells are then incubated for > 2 hours at RT with a sample containing the polypeptide. Preferably, serial dilutions of the sample should be used to validate results. The plates are then washed three times with deionized or distilled water to remove unbounded polypeptide. Next, 50 ul of specific antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate, at a concentration of 25-400 ng, is added and incubated for 2 hours at room temperature. The plates are again washed three times with deionized or distilled water to remove unbounded conjugate. Add 75 ul of 4-methylumbelliferyl phosphate (MUP) or p-nitrophenyl phosphate (NPP) substrate solution to each well and incubate 1 hour at room temperature. Measure the reaction by a microtiter plate reader. Prepare a standard curve, using serial dilutions of a control sample, and plot polypeptide concentration on the X-axis (log scale) and fluorescence or absorbance of the Y-axis (linear scale). Inteφolate the concentration of the polypeptide in the sample using the standard curve. Example 13: Formulation The invention also provides methods of treatment and/or prevention of 148 diseases or disorders (such as. for example, any one or more of the diseases or disorders disclosed herein) by administration to a subject of an effective amount of a Therapeutic By therapeutic is meant a polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (including fragments and variants), agonists or antagonists thereof, and/or antibodies thereto, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier type (e.g., a sterile carrier) The Therapeutic will be formulated and dosed in a fashion consistent with good medical practice, taking into account the clinical condition of the individual patient (especially the side effects of treatment with the Therapeutic alone), the site of delivery, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to practitioners The "effective amount" for puφoses herein is thus determined by such considerations. As a general proposition, the total pharmaceutically effective amount of the Therapeutic administered parenterally per dose will be in the range of about lug/kg/day to 10 mg/kg/day of patient body weight, although, as noted above, this will be subject to therapeutic discretion. More preferably, this dose is at least 0.01 mg/kg/day, and most preferably for humans between about 0.01 and 1 mg/kg/day for the hormone. If given continuously, the Therapeutic is typically administered at a dose rate of about 1 ug/kg/hour to about 50 ug/kg/hour, either by 1-4 injections per day or by continuous subcutaneous infusions, for example, using a mini-pump An intravenous bag solution may also be employed. The length of treatment needed to observe changes and the interval following treatment for responses to occur appears to vary depending on the desired effect. Therapeutics can be are administered orally, rectally, parenterally, mtracistemally, intravagmally, mtraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, gels, drops or transdermal patch), bucally, or as an oral or nasal spray "Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" refers to a non-toxic solid, semisohd or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any The term "parenteral" as used herein refers to modes of administration which include intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal. subcutaneous and intraarticular injection and infusion. Therapeutics of the invention are also suitably administered by sustained- release systems. Suitable examples of sustained-release Therapeutics are administered orally, rectally, parenterally. mtracistemally, intravaginally, mtraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, gels, drops or transdermal patch), bucally, or as an oral or nasal spray. "Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" refers to a non-toxic solid, semisolid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type. The term "parenteral" as used herein refers to modes of administration which include intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal, subcutaneous and intraarticular injection and infusion. Therapeutics of the invention are also suitably administered by sustained- release systems. Suitable examples of sustained-release Therapeutics include suitable polymeric materials (such as, for example, semi-permeable polymer matrices in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or mirocapsules), suitable hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, and sparingly soluble derivatives (such as, for example, a sparingly soluble salt). Sustained-release matrices include polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919, EP 58,481 ), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al., Biopolymers 22:547-556 (1983)), poly (2- hydroxyethyl methacrylate) (Langer et al., J. Biomed. Mater. Res. 15: 167-277 (1981), and Langer, Chem. Tech. 12:98-105 (1982)), ethylene vinyl acetate (Langer et al.. Id.) or poly-D- (-)-3 -hydro xybutyric acid (EP 133,988). Sustained-release Therapeutics also include liposomally entrapped Therapeutics of the invention (see generally, Langer, Science 249:1527-1533 (1990); Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapy of Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez- Berestein and Fidler (eds.), Liss, New York, pp. 317 -327 and 353-365 (1989)). Liposomes containing the Therapeutic are prepared by methods known per se: DE 3,218, 121 ; Epstein et al.. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (USA) 82:3688-3692 (1985); Hwang et al.. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.(USA) 77:4030-4034 (1980); EP 52,322; EP 36,676; EP 88,046; EP 143,949; EP 142,641 ; Japanese Pat. Appl. 83-1 18008; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485.045 and 4.544,545: and EP 102.324. Ordinarily, the liposomes are of the small (about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamellar type in which the lipid content is greater than about 30 mol. percent cholesterol, the selected proportion being adjusted for the optimal Therapeutic. In yet an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are delivered by way of a pump (see Langer, supra; Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201 (1987); Buchwald et al., Surgery 88:507 (1980); Saudek et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574 (1989)). Other controlled release systems are discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249: 1527-1533 (1990)). For parenteral administration, in one embodiment, the Therapeutic is formulated generally by mixing it at the desired degree of purity, in a unit dosage injectable form (solution, suspension, or emulsion), with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, i.e., one that is non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed and is compatible with other ingredients of the formulation. For example, the formulation preferably does not include oxidizing agents and other compounds that are known to be deleterious to the Therapeutic. Generally, the formulations are prepared by contacting the Therapeutic uniformly and intimately with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both. Then, if necessary, the product is shaped into the desired formulation. Preferably the carrier is a parenteral carrier, more preferably a solution that is isotonic with the blood of the recipient. Examples of such carrier vehicles include water, saline, Ringer's solution, and dextrose solution. Non-aqueous vehicles such as fixed oils and ethyl oleate are also useful herein, as well as liposomes. The carrier suitably contains minor amounts of additives such as substances that enhance isotonicity and chemical stability. Such materials are non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed, and include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, succinate, acetic acid, and other organic acids or their salts; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid; low molecular weight (less than about ten residues) polypeptides, e.g., polyarginine or tripeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids, such as glycine. glutamic acid, aspartic acid, or arginine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates including cellulose or its derivatives, glucose, manose. or dextπns; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; counterions such as sodium; and/or nonionic surfactants such as polysorbates, poloxamers, or PEG. The Therapeutic is typically formulated in such vehicles at a concentration of about 0.1 mg/ml to 100 mg/ml, preferably 1-10 mg/ml, at a pH of about 3 to 8. It will be understood that the use of certain of the foregoing excipients, carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of polypeptide salts. Any pharmaceutical used for therapeutic administration can be sterile. Sterility is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes (e.g., 0.2 micron membranes). Therapeutics generally are placed into a container having a sterile access port, for example, an intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle. Therapeutics ordinarily will be stored in unit or multi-dose containers, for example, sealed ampoules or vials, as an aqueous solution or as a lyophilized formulation for reconstitution. As an example of a lyophilized formulation, 10-ml vials are filled with 5 ml of sterile-filtered 1% (w/v) aqueous Therapeutic solution, and the resulting mixture is lyophilized. The infusion solution is prepared by reconstituting the lyophilized Therapeutic using bacteπostatic Water-for-Injection. The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the Therapeutics of the invention. Associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration. In addition, the Therapeutics may be employed in conjunction with other therapeutic compounds. The Therapeutics of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with adjuvants. Adjuvants that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to. alum, alum plus deoxycholate (ImmunoAg), MTP-PE (Biocine Coφ.), QS21 (Genentech, Inc.), BCG, and MPL. In a specific embodiment. Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with alum. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with QS-21. Further adjuvants that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, Monophosphoryl lipid immunomodulator. AdjuVax 100a, QS-21 , QS-18, CRL 1005, Aluminum salts, MF-59, and Virosomal adjuvant technology. Vaccines that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, vaccines directed toward protection against MMR (measles, mumps, rubella), polio, varicella, tetanus/diptheria, hepatitis A, hepatitis B, haemophilus influenzae B, whooping cough, pneumonia, influenza, Lyme's Disease, rotavirus, cholera, yellow fever, Japanese encephalitis, poliomyelitis, rabies, typhoid fever, and pertussis. Combinations may be administered either concomitantly, e.g., as an admixture, separately but simultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includes presentations in which the combined agents are administered together as a therapeutic mixture, and also procedures in which the combined agents are administered separately but simultaneously, e.g., as through separate intravenous lines into the same individual. Administration "in combination" further includes the separate administration of one of the compounds or agents given first, followed by the second. The Therapeutics of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents. Therapeutic agents that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include but not limited to, other members of the TNF family, chemotherapeutic agents, antibiotics, steroidal and non-steroidal anti-inflammatories, conventional immunotherapeutic agents, cytokines and/or growth factors. Combinations may be administered either concomitantly, e.g., as an admixture, separately but simultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includes presentations in which the combined agents are administered together as a therapeutic mixture, and also procedures in which the combined agents are administered separately but simultaneously, e.g., as through separate intravenous lines into the same individual -administration "in combination" further includes the separate administration of one of the compounds or agents given first, followed by the second In one embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with members of the TNF family TNF, TNF-related or TNF-like molecules that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, soluble forms of TNF-alpha. lymphotoxin-alpha (LT-alpha, also known as TNF-beta), LT-beta (found in complex heterotrimer LT-alpha2-beta), OPGL, FasL, CD27L, CD30L, CD40L, 4- 1BBL. DcR3, OX40L, TNF-gamma (International Publication No WO 96/14328), AIM-I (International Publication No WO 97/33899). endokine-alpha (International Publication No WO 98/07880), TR6 (International Publication No WO 98/30694), OPG, and neutrokine-alpha (International Publication No WO 98/18921, OX40. and nerve growth factor (NGF), and soluble forms of Fas, CD30, CD27, CD40 and 4-IBB, TR2 (International Publication No WO 96/34095), DR3 (International Publication No WO 97/33904), DR4 (International Publication No WO 98/32856), TR5 (International Publication No WO 98/30693), TR6 (International Publication No WO 98/30694), TR7 (International Publication No WO 98/41629), TRANK, TR9 (International Publication No WO 98/56892),TR10 (International Publication No WO 98/54202), 312C2 (International Publication No WO 98/06842), and TR12, and soluble forms CD 154, CD70, and CD 153 In certain embodiments, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with antiretroviral agents, nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, and/or protease inhibitors Nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to, RETRO VIR™ (zidovudme/AZT), VIDEX™ (didanosine/ddl), HIVID ™ (zalcitabine/ddC), ZERIT™ (stavudιne/d4T), EPIVIR™ (lamιvudιne/3TC), and COMBIVIR ™ (zidovudine/lamivudine) Non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to. VIRAMUNE™ (nevirapine). RESCRIPTOR™ (delavirdine), and SUSTIVA™ (efavirenz). Protease inhibitors that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to. CRIXIVAN™ (indinavir). NORVIR™ (ritonavir), INVIRASE™ (saquinavir), and VIRACEPT™ (nelfinavir). In a specific embodiment, antiretroviral agents, nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors, and/or protease inhibitors may be used in any combination with Therapeutics of the invention to treat AIDS and/or to prevent or treat HIV infection. In other embodiments, Therapeutics of the invention may be administered in combination with anti-opportunistic infection agents. Anti-opportunistic agents that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention, include, but are not limited to, TRIMETHOPRIM-SULFAMETHOXAZOLE™, DAPSONE™, PENTAMIDINE™ , ATOVAQUONE ™ , I S ONI AZID ™ , RIFAMPIN ™ , PYRAZINAMIDE™, ETHAMBUTOL ™ , RIFABUTIN ™ , CLARITHROMYCIN™, AZITHROMYCIN ™ , GANCICLOVIR™ , FOSCARNET™ , CIDOFOVIR™, FLUCONAZOLE™, ITRACONAZOLE™, KETOCONAZOLE™, ACYCLOVIR™, FAMCICOLVIR™ , PYRIMETHAMINE™ , LEUCOVORIN ™ , NEUPOGEN™ (filgrastim/G-CSF), and LEUKINE ™ (sargramostim/GM-CSF). In a specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with TRIMETHOPRIM-SULFAMETHOXAZOLE™, DAPSONE ™ , PENTAMIDINE ™ , and/or ATOVAQUONE™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with ISONIAZID™ , RIFAMPIN™, PYRAZINAMIDE™, and/or ETHAMBUTOL™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Mycobacterium avium complex infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with RIFABUTIN ™ , CLARITHROMYCIN™ , and/or AZITHROMYCIN ™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection. In another specific embodiment. Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with GANCICLOVIR™ , FOSCARNET™ , and/or CIDOFOVIR™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic cytomegalovirus infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with FLUCONAZOLE™, ITRACONAZOLE™ , and/or KETOCONAZOLE™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic fungal infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with ACYCLOVIR™ and/or FAMCICOLVIR™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic heφes simplex virus type I and/or type II infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with PYRIMETHAMINE™ and/or LEUCOVORIN™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic Toxoplasma gondii infection. In another specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are used in any combination with LEUCOVORIN™ and/or NEUPOGEN™ to prophylactically treat or prevent an opportunistic bacterial infection. In a further embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with an antiviral agent. Antiviral agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, acyclovir, ribavirin, amantadine, and remantidine. In a further embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with an antibiotic agent. Antibiotic agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, amoxicillin, beta- lactamases, aminoglycosides, beta-lactam (glycopeptide), beta-lactamases, Clindamycin, chloramphenicol. cephalosporins, ciprofloxacin, ciprofloxacin, erythromycin, fluoroquinolones, macrolides, metronidazole, penicillins, quinolones, rifampin, streptomycin, sulfonamide, tetracyclines, trimethoprim. trimethoprim- sulfamthoxazole, and vancomycin. Conventional nonspecific immunosuppressive agents, that may be administered in combination with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, steroids, cyclosporine, cyclosporine analogs, cyclophosphamide methylprednisone, prednisone. azathioprine, FK-506, 15-deoxyspergualin. and other immunosuppressive agents that act by suppressing the function of responding T cells. In specific embodiments. Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with immunosuppressants. Immunosuppressants preparations that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, ORTHOCLONE™ (OKT3 ), SANDIMMUN E™/NEORAL™/SANGDYA™ (cyclosporin), PROGRAF ™ (tacrolimus), CELLCEPT™ (mycophenolate), Azathioprine. glucorticosteroids, and RAPAMUNE™ (sirolimus). In a specific embodiment, immunosuppressants may be used to prevent rejection of organ or bone marrow transplantation. In an additional embodiment. Therapeutics of the invention are administered alone or in combination with one or more intravenous immune globulin preparations. Intravenous immune globulin preparations that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but not limited to. GAMMAR™, IVEEGAM™, SANDOGLOBULIN™, GAMMAGARD S/D™, and GAMIMUNE™ . In a specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with intravenous immune globulin preparations in transplantation therapy (e.g., bone marrow transplant). In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered alone or in combination with an anti-inflammatory agent. Anti- inflammatory agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, glucocorticoids and the nonsteroidal anti- inflammatories, aminoarylcarboxylic acid derivatives, arylacetic acid derivatives, arylbutyric acid derivatives, arylcarboxylic acids, arylpropionic acid derivatives, pyrazoles, pyrazolones, salicylic acid derivatives, thiazinecarboxamides, e- acetamidocaproic acid, S-adenosylmethionine, 3-amino-4-hydroxybutyric acid, amixetrine, bendazac, benzydamine, bucolome, difenpiramide. ditazol, emorfazone, guaiazulene, nabumetone, nimesulide, orgotein, oxaceprol, paranyline, perisoxal, pifoxime, proquazone, proxazole, and tenidap. In another embodiment, compostions of the invention are administered in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent. Chemotherapeutic agents that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, antibiotic derivatives (e.g., doxorubicin. bleomycin, daunorubicin, and dactinomycin); antiestrogens (e.g., tamoxifen); antimetabolites (e.g., fluorouracil. 5-FU, methotrexate, floxuridine, interferon alpha-2b, glutamic acid, plicamycin, mercaptopurine, and 6-thioguanine); cytotoxic agents (e.g., carmustine, BCNU, lomustine, CCNU, cytosine arabinoside, cyclophosphamide, estramustine, hydroxyurea, procarbazine, mitomycin. busulfan, cis-platin, and vincristine sulfate); hormones (e.g., medroxyprogesterone, estramustine phosphate sodium, ethinyl estradiol, estradiol, megestrol acetate, methyltestosterone, diethylstilbestrol diphosphate, chlorotrianisene, and testolactone); nitrogen mustard derivatives (e.g., mephalen, chorambucil, mechlorethamine (nitrogen mustard) and thiotepa); steroids and combinations (e.g., bethamethasone sodium phosphate); and others (e.g., dicarbazine, asparaginase, mitotane, vincristine sulfate, vinblastine sulfate, and etoposide). In a specific embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with CHOP (cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine, and prednisone) or any combination of the components of CHOP. In another embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with Rituximab. In a further embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention are administered with Rituxmab and CHOP, or Rituxmab and any combination of the components of CHOP. In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with cytokines. Cytokines that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, IL2, IL3, IL4, IL5, IL6, IL7, IL10, IL12, IL13, IL15, anti-CD40, CD40L, IFN-gamma and TNFalpha. In another embodiment, Therapeutics of the invention may be administered with any interleukin, including, but not limited to, IL-1 alpha, IL-lbeta, IL-2, IL-3, IL- 4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-1 1 , IL-12, IL-13, IL-14, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17, IL-18, IL- 19, IL-20, and IL-21. In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with angiogenic proteins. Angiogenic proteins that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, Glioma Derived Growth Factor (GDGF), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-399816; Platelet Derived Growth Factor-A (PDGF-A), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-6821 10; Platelet Derived Growth Factor-B (PDGF-B), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-282317; Placental Growth Factor (P1GF), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 92/06194; Placental Growth Factor-2 (P1GF-2), as disclosed in Hauser et al., Gorwth Factors, 4:259-268 (1993); Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor (VEGF), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 90/13649; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-A (VEGF-A), as disclosed in European Patent Number EP-506477; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-2 (VEGF-2), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 96/39515; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor B (VEGF-3); Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor B-186 (VEGF-B186), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 96/26736; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-D (VEGF-D), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 98/02543; Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-D (VEGF-D), as disclosed in International Publication Number WO 98/07832; and Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor-E (VEGF-E), as disclosed in German Patent Number DE19639601. The above mentioned references are incoφorated herein by reference herein. In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with hematopoietic growth factors. Hematopoietic growth factors that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, LEUKINE ™ (SARGRAMOSTIM™ ) and NEUPOGEN™ (FILGRASTIM™). In an additional embodiment, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with Fibroblast Growth Factors. Fibroblast Growth Factors that may be administered with the Therapeutics of the invention include, but are not limited to, FGF-1 , FGF-2, FGF-3, FGF-4, FGF-5, FGF-6, FGF-7, FGF-8, FGF-9, FGF- 10, FGF-1 1, FGF- 12. FGF- 13. FGF- 14, and FGF- 15. In additional embodiments, the Therapeutics of the invention are administered in combination with other therapeutic or prophylactic regimens, such as, for example, radiation therapy. Example 14: Method of Treating Decreased Levels of the Polypeptide The present invention relates to a method for treating an individual in need of an increased level of a polypeptide of the invention in the body comprising administering to such an individual a composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an agonist of the invention (including polypeptides of the invention). Moreover, it will be appreciated that conditions caused by a decrease in the standard or normal expression level of a polypeptide of the present invention in an individual can be treated by administering the agonist or antagonist of the present invention. Thus, the invention also provides a method of treatment of an individual in need of an increased level of the polypeptide comprising administering to such an individual a Therapeutic comprising an amount of the agonist or antagonist to increase the activity level of the polypeptide in such an individual. For example, a patient with decreased levels of a polypeptide receives a daily dose 0.1-100 ug/kg of the agonist or antagonist for six consecutive days. The exact details of the dosing scheme, based on administration and formulation, are provided in Example 13. Example 15: Method of Treating Increased Levels of the Polypeptide The present invention also relates to a method of treating an individual in need of a decreased level of a polypeptide of the invention in the body comprising administering to such an individual a composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of the invention (including polypeptides and antibodies of the invention). In one example, antisense technology is used to inhibit production of a polypeptide of the present invention. This technology is one example of a method of decreasing levels of a polypeptide, due to a variety of etiologies, such as cancer. For example, a patient diagnosed with abnormally increased levels of a polypeptide is administered intravenously antisense polynucleotides at 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 and 3.0 mg/kg day for 21 days. This treatment is repeated after a 7-day rest period if the treatment was well tolerated. The formulation of the antisense polynucleotide is provided in Example 13. Example 16: Method of Treatment Using Gene Therapy-Ex Vivo One method of gene therapy transplants fibroblasts, which are capable of expressing a polypeptide, onto a patient. Generally, fibroblasts are obtained from a subject by skin biopsy. The resulting tissue is placed in tissue-culture medium and separated into small pieces. Small chunks of the tissue are placed on a wet surface of a tissue culture flask, approximately ten pieces are placed in each flask. The flask is turned upside down, closed tight and left at room temperature over night. After 24 hours at room temperature, the flask is inverted and the chunks of tissue remain fixed to the bottom of the flask and fresh media (e.g., Ham's F12 media, with 10% FBS, penicillin and streptomycin) is added. The flasks are then incubated at 37 degree C for approximately one week. At this time, fresh media is added and subsequently changed every several days. After an additional two weeks in culture, a monolayer of fibroblasts emerge. The monolayer is trypsinized and scaled into larger flasks. pMV-7 (Kirschmeier, P.T. et al., DNA, 7:219-25 (1988)), flanked by the long terminal repeats of the Moloney murine sarcoma virus, is digested with EcoRI and Hindlll and subsequently treated with calf intestinal phosphatase. The linear vector is fractionated on agarose gel and purified, using glass beads. The cDNA encoding a polypeptide of the present invention can be amplified using PCR primers which correspond to the 5' and 3' end sequences respectively as set forth in Example 1 using primers and having appropriate restriction sites and initiation/stop codons, if necessary. Preferably, the 5' primer contains an EcoRI site and the 3' primer includes a Hindlll site. Equal quantities of the Moloney murine sarcoma virus linear backbone and the amplified EcoRI and Hindlll fragment are added together, in the presence of T4 DNA ligase. The resulting mixture is maintained under conditions appropriate for ligation of the two fragments. The ligation mixture is then used to transform bacteria HB101 , which are then plated onto agar containing kanamycin for the puφose of confirming that the vector has the gene of interest properly inserted. The amphotropic pA317 or GP+aml2 packaging cells are grown in tissue culture to confluent density in Dulbecco's Modified Eagles Medium (DMEM) with 10% calf serum (CS), penicillin and streptomycin. The MSV vector containing the gene is then added to the media and the packaging cells transduced with the vector. The packaging cells now produce infectious viral particles containing the gene (the packaging cells are now referred to as producer cells). Fresh media is added to the transduced producer cells, and subsequently, the media is harvested from a 10 cm plate of confluent producer cells. The spent media, containing the infectious viral particles, is filtered through a millipore filter to remove detached producer cells and this media is then used to infect fibroblast cells. Media is removed from a sub-confluent plate of fibroblasts and quickly replaced with the media from the producer cells. This media is removed and replaced with fresh media. If the titer of virus is high, then virtually all fibroblasts will be infected and no selection is required. If the titer is very low, then it is necessary to use a retroviral vector that has a selectable marker, such as neo or his. Once the fibroblasts have been efficiently infected, the fibroblasts are analyzed to determine whether protein is produced. The engineered fibroblasts are then transplanted onto the host, either alone or after having been grown to confluence on cytodex 3 microcarrier beads. Example 17: Gene Therapy Using Endogenous Genes Corresponding To Polynucleotides of the Invention Another method of gene therapy according to the present invention involves operably associating the endogenous polynucleotide sequence of the invention with a promoter via homologous recombination as described, for example, in U.S. Patent NO: 5,641,670, issued June 24, 1997; International Publication NO: WO 96/2941 1, published September 26, 1996; International Publication NO: WO 94/12650, published August 4, 1994; Koller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 86:8932-8935 (1989); and Zijlstra et al., Nature, 342:435-438 (1989). This method involves the activation of a gene which is present in the target cells, but which is not expressed in the cells, or is expressed at a lower level than desired. Polynucleotide constructs are made which contain a promoter and targeting sequences, which are homologous to the 5' non-coding sequence of endogenous polynucleotide sequence, flanking the promoter. The targeting sequence will be sufficiently near the 5' end of the polynucleotide sequence so the promoter will be operably linked to the endogenous sequence upon homologous recombination. The promoter and the targeting sequences can be amplified using PCR. Preferably, the amplified promoter contains distinct restriction enzyme sites on the 5' and 3' ends. Preferably, the 3' end of the first targeting sequence contains the same restriction enzyme site as the 5' end of the amplified promoter and the 5' end of the second targeting sequence contains the same restriction site as the 3' end of the amplified promoter. The amplified promoter and the amplified targeting sequences are digested with the appropriate restriction enzymes and subsequently treated with calf intestinal phosphatase. The digested promoter and digested targeting sequences are added together in the presence of T4 DNA ligase. The resulting mixture is maintained under conditions appropriate for ligation of the two fragments. The construct is size fractionated on an agarose gel then purified by phenol extraction and ethanol precipitation. In this Example, the polynucleotide constructs are administered as naked polynucleotides via electroporation. However, the polynucleotide constructs may also be administered with transfection-facilitating agents, such as liposomes, viral sequences, viral particles, precipitating agents, etc. Such methods of delivery are known in the art. Once the cells are transfected, homologous recombination will take place which results in the promoter being operably linked to the endogenous polynucleotide sequence. This results in the expression of polynucleotide corresponding to the polynucleotide in the cell. Expression may be detected by immunological staining, or any other method known in the art. Fibroblasts are obtained from a subject by skin biopsy. The resulting tissue is placed in DMEM + 10%> fetal calf serum. Exponentially growing or early stationary phase fibroblasts are trypsinized and rinsed from the plastic surface with nutrient medium. An aliquot of the cell suspension is removed for counting, and the remaining cells are subjected to centrifugation. The supernatant is aspirated and the pellet is resuspended in 5 ml of electroporation buffer (20 mM HEPES pH 7.3, 137 mM NaCl, 5 mM KC1, 0.7 mM Na 2 HPO 4 , 6 mM dextrose). The cells are recentrifuged, the supernatant aspirated, and the cells resuspended in electroporation buffer containing 1 mg/ml acetylated bovine serum albumin. The final cell suspension contains approximately 3X10 6 cells/ml. Electroporation should be performed immediately following resuspension. Plasmid DNA is prepared according to standard techniques. For example, to construct a plasmid for targeting to the locus corresponding to the polynucleotide of the invention, plasmid pUC 18 (MBI Fermentas, Amherst, NY) is digested with Hindlll. The CMV promoter is amplified by PCR with an Xbal site on the 5' end and a BamHI site on the 3'end. Two non-coding sequences are amplified via PCR: one non-coding sequence (fragment 1) is amplified with a Hindlll site at the 5' end and an Xba site at the 3'end; the other non-coding sequence (fragment 2) is amplified with a BamHI site at the 5 'end and a Hindlll site at the 3'end. The CMV promoter and the fragments (1 and 2) are digested with the appropriate enzymes (CMV promoter - Xbal and BamHI; fragment 1 - Xbal; fragment 2 - BamHI) and ligated together. The resulting ligation product is digested with Hindlll, and ligated with the Hindlll- digested pUCl 8 plasmid. Plasmid DNA is added to a sterile cuvette with a 0.4 cm electrode gap (Bio-Rad). The final DNA concentration is generally at least 120 μg/ml. 0.5 ml of the cell suspension (containing approximately 1.5.X10 6 cells) is then added to the cuvette, and the cell suspension and DNA solutions are gently mixed. Electroporation is performed with a Gene-Pulser apparatus (Bio-Rad). Capacitance and voltage are set at 960 μF and 250-300 V, respectively. As voltage increases, cell survival decreases, but the percentage of surviving cells that stably incoφorate the introduced DNA into their genome increases dramatically. Given these parameters, a pulse time of approximately 14-20 mSec should be observed. Electroporated cells are maintained at room temperature for approximately 5 min, and the contents of the cuvette are then gently removed with a sterile transfer pipette. The cells are added directly to 10 ml of prewarmed nutrient media (DMEM with 15% calf serum) in a 10 cm dish and incubated at 37 degree C. The following day, the media is aspirated and replaced with 10 ml of fresh media and incubated for a further 16-24 hours. The engineered fibroblasts are then injected into the host, either alone or after having been grown to confluence on cytodex 3 microcarrier beads. The fibroblasts now produce the protein product. The fibroblasts can then be introduced into a patient as described above. Example 18: Method of Treatment Using Gene Therapy - In Vivo Another aspect of the present invention is using in vivo gene therapy methods to treat disorders, diseases and conditions. The gene therapy method relates to the introduction of naked nucleic acid (DNA, RNA, and antisense DNA or RNA) sequences into an animal to increase or decrease the expression of the polypeptide. The polynucleotide of the present invention may be operatively linked to a promoter or any other genetic elements necessary for the expression of the polypeptide by the target tissue. Such gene therapy and delivery techniques and methods are known in the art. see. for example, WO90/1 1092. WO98/1 1779; U.S. Patent NO. 5693622, 5705151, 5580859; Tabata et al.. Cardiovasc. Res. 35(3):470-479 (1997); Chao et al., Pharmacol. Res. 35(6):517-522 ( 1997); Wolff. Neuromuscul. Disord. 7(5):314-318 (1997); Schwartz et al., Gene Ther. 3(5):405-41 1 (1996); Tsurumi et al., Circulation 94(12):3281 -3290 (1996) (incoφorated herein by reference). The polynucleotide constructs may be delivered by any method that delivers injectable materials to the cells of an animal, such as, injection into the interstitial space of tissues (heart, muscle, skin, lung, liver, intestine and the like). The polynucleotide constructs can be delivered in a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid or aqueous carrier. The term "naked" polynucleotide, DNA or RNA, refers to sequences that are free from any delivery vehicle that acts to assist, promote, or facilitate entry into the cell, including viral sequences, viral particles, liposome formulations, lipofectin or precipitating agents and the like. However, the polynucleotides of the present invention may also be delivered in liposome formulations (such as those taught in Feigner P.L. et al. (1995) Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 772: 126-139 and Abdallah B. et al. (1995) Biol. Cell 85(1): 1-7) which can be prepared by methods well known to those skilled in the art. The polynucleotide vector constructs used in the gene therapy method are preferably constructs that will not integrate into the host genome nor will they contain sequences that allow for replication. Any strong promoter known to those skilled in the art can be used for driving the expression of DNA. Unlike other gene therapies techniques, one major advantage of introducing naked nucleic acid sequences into target cells is the transitory nature of the polynucleotide synthesis in the cells. Studies have shown that non-replicating DNA sequences can be introduced into cells to provide production of the desired polypeptide for periods of up to six months. The polynucleotide construct can be delivered to the interstitial space of tissues within the an animal, including of muscle, skin, brain, lung, liver, spleen, bone marrow . thymus, heart, lymph, blood, bone, cartilage, pancreas, kidney, gall bladder. stomach, intestine, testis, ovary, uterus, rectum, nervous system, eye, gland, and connective tissue. Interstitial space of the tissues comprises the intercellular fluid, mucopolysaccharide matrix among the reticular fibers of organ tissues, elastic fibers in the walls of vessels or chambers, collagen fibers of fibrous tissues, or that same matrix within connective tissue ensheathing muscle cells or in the lacunae of bone. It is similarly the space occupied by the plasma of the circulation and the lymph fluid of the lymphatic channels. Delivery to the interstitial space of muscle tissue is preferred for the reasons discussed below. They may be conveniently delivered by injection into the tissues comprising these cells. They are preferably delivered to and expressed in persistent, non-dividing cells which are differentiated, although delivery and expression may be achieved in non-differentiated or less completely differentiated cells, such as. for example, stem cells of blood or skin fibroblasts. In vivo muscle cells are particularly competent in their ability to take up and express polynucleotides. For the naked polynucleotide injection, an effective dosage amount of DNA or RNA will be in the range of from about 0.05 g/kg body weight to about 50 mg/kg body weight. Preferably the dosage will be from about 0.005 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg and more preferably from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg. Of course, as the artisan of ordinary skill will appreciate, this dosage will vary according to the tissue site of injection. The appropriate and effective dosage of nucleic acid sequence can readily be determined by those of ordinary skill in the art and may depend on the condition being treated and the route of administration. The preferred route of administration is by the parenteral route of injection into the interstitial space of tissues. However, other parenteral routes may also be used, such as, inhalation of an aerosol formulation particularly for delivery to lungs or bronchial tissues, throat or mucous membranes of the nose. In addition, naked polynucleotide constructs can be delivered to arteries during angioplasty by the catheter used in the procedure. The dose response effects of injected polynucleotide in muscle in vivo is determined as follows. Suitable template DNA for production of mRNA coding for polypeptide of the present invention is prepared in accordance with a standard recombinant DNA methodology. The template DNA, which may be either circular or linear, is either used as naked DNA or complexed with liposomes. The quadriceps muscles of mice are then injected with various amounts of the template DNA. Five to six week old female and male Balb/C mice are anesthetized by intraperitoneal injection with 0.3 ml of 2.5% Avertin. A 1.5 cm incision is made on the anterior thigh, and the quadriceps muscle is directly visualized. The template DNA is injected in 0.1 ml of carrier in a 1 cc syringe through a 27 gauge needle over one minute, approximately 0.5 cm from the distal insertion site of the muscle into the knee and about 0.2 cm deep. A suture is placed over the injection site for future localization, and the skin is closed with stainless steel clips. After an appropriate incubation time (e.g., 7 days) muscle extracts are prepared by excising the entire quadriceps. Every fifth 15 um cross-section of the individual quadriceps muscles is histochemically stained for protein expression. A time course for protein expression may be done in a similar fashion except that quadriceps from different mice are harvested at different times. Persistence of DNA in muscle following injection may be determined by Southern blot analysis after preparing total cellular DNA and HIRT supernatants from injected and control mice. The results of the above experimentation in mice can be use to extrapolate proper dosages and other treatment parameters in humans and other animals using naked DNA. Example 19: Transgenic Animals The polypeptides of the invention can also be expressed in transgenic animals. Animals of any species, including, but not limited to, mice, rats, rabbits, hamsters, guinea pigs, pigs, micro-pigs, goats, sheep, cows and non-human primates, e.g., baboons, monkeys, and chimpanzees may be used to generate transgenic animals. In a specific embodiment, techniques described herein or otherwise known in the art, are used to express polypeptides of the invention in humans, as part of a gene therapy protocol. Any technique known in the art may be used to introduce the transgene (i.e., polynucleotides of the invention) into animals to produce the founder lines of transgenic animals. Such techniques include, but are not limited to, pronuclear microinjection (Paterson et al.. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 40:691 -698 ( 1994); Carver et al., Biotechnology (NY) 1 1 : 1263- 1270 ( 1993); Wright et al., Biotechnology (NY) 9:830-834 (1991); and Hoppe et al.. U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 (1989)); retrovirus mediated gene transfer into germ lines (Van der Putten et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA 82:6148-6152 (1985)), blastocysts or embryos; gene targeting in embryonic stem cells (Thompson et al., Cell 56:3 13-321 (1989)); electroporation of cells or embryos (Lo, 1983, Mol Cell. Biol. 3: 1803- 1814 ( 1983)); introduction of the polynucleotides of the invention using a gene gun (see, e.g., Ulmer et al., Science 259: 1745 (1993); introducing nucleic acid constructs into embryonic pleuripotent stem cells and transferring the stem cells back into the blastocyst; and sperm- mediated gene transfer (Lavitrano et al., Cell 57:717-723 (1989); etc. For a review of such techniques, see Gordon, "Transgenic Animals," Intl. Rev. Cytol. 1 15: 171-229 (1989), which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety. Any technique known in the art may be used to produce transgenic clones containing polynucleotides of the invention, for example, nuclear transfer into enucleated oocytes of nuclei from cultured embryonic, fetal, or adult cells induced to quiescence (Campell et al., Nature 380:64-66 (1996); Wilmut et al., Nature 385:810- 813 (1997)). The present invention provides for transgenic animals that carry the transgene in all their cells, as well as animals which carry the transgene in some, but not all their cells, i.e., mosaic animals or chimeric. The transgene may be integrated as a single transgene or as multiple copies such as in concatamers, e.g., head-to-head tandems or head-to-tail tandems. The transgene may also be selectively introduced into and activated in a particular cell type by following, for example, the teaching of Lasko et al. (Lasko et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:6232-6236 (1992)). The regulatory sequences required for such a cell-type specific activation will depend upon the particular cell type of interest, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art. When it is desired that the polynucleotide transgene be integrated into the chromosomal site of the endogenous gene, gene targeting is preferred Bnefly, when such a technique is to be utilized, vectors containing some nucleotide sequences homologous to the endogenous gene are designed for the puφose of integrating, via homologous recombination with chromosomal sequences, into and disrupting the function of the nucleotide sequence of the endogenous gene The transgene may also be selectively introduced into a particular cell type, thus inactivating the endogenous gene in only that cell type, by following, for example, the teaching of Gu et al. (Gu et al., Science 265 103-106 (1994)). The regulatory sequences required for such a cell-type specific inactivation will depend upon the particular cell type of interest, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art Once transgenic animals have been generated, the expression of the recombinant gene may be assayed utilizing standard techniques. Initial screening may be accomplished by Southern blot analysis or PCR techniques to analyze animal tissues to verify that integration of the transgene has taken place. The level of mRNA expression of the transgene in the tissues of the transgenic animals may also be assessed using techniques which include, but are not limited to, Northern blot analysis of tissue samples obtained from the animal, in situ hybridization analysis, and reverse transcπptase-PCR (rt-PCR). Samples of transgenic gene-expressing tissue may also be evaluated immunocytochemically or immunohistochemically using antibodies specific for the transgene product Once the founder animals are produced, they may be bred, inbred, outbred, or crossbred to produce colonies of the particular animal. Examples of such breeding strategies include, but are not limited to outbreeding of founder animals with more than one integration site in order to establish separate lines, inbreeding of separate lines in order to produce compound transgenics that express the transgene at higher levels because of the effects of additive expression of each transgene; crossing of heterozygous transgenic animals to produce animals homozygous for a given integration site in order to both augment expression and eliminate the need for screening of animals by DNA analysis, crossing of separate homozygous lines to 70 produce compound heterozygous or homozygous lines, and breeding to place the transgene on a distinct background that is appropriate for an experimental model of interest Transgenic animals of the invention have uses which include, but are not limited to. animal model systems useful in elaborating the biological function of polypeptides of the present invention, studying conditions and/or disorders associated with aberrant expression, and in screening for compounds effective in ameliorating such conditions and/or disorders Example 20 Knock-Out Animals Endogenous gene expression can also be reduced by inactivating or "knocking out" the gene and/or its promoter using targeted homologous recombination (E g , see Smithies et al , Nature 317 230-234 ( 1985), Thomas & Capecchi, Cell 51 503- 512 (1987). Thompson et al , Cell 5 313-321 ( 1989), each of which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety) For example, a mutant, non-functional polynucleotide of the invention (or a completely unrelated DNA sequence) flanked by DNA homologous to the endogenous polynucleotide sequence (either the coding regions or regulatory regions of the gene) can be used, with or without a selectable marker and/or a negative selectable marker, to transfect cells that express polypeptides of the invention in vivo In another embodiment, techniques known in the art are used to generate knockouts in cells that contain, but do not express the gene of interest Insertion of the DNA construct, via targeted homologous recombination, results in inactivation of the targeted gene Such approaches are particularly suited m research and agricultural fields where modifications to embryonic stem cells can be used to generate animal offspπng with an inactive targeted gene (e g , see Thomas & Capecchi 1987 and Thompson 1989, supra) However this approach can be routinely adapted for use in humans provided the recombinant DNA constructs are directly administered or targeted to the required site in vivo using appropπate viral vectors that will be apparent to those of skill in the art In further embodiments of the invention, cells that are genetically engineered to express the polypeptides of the invention, or alternatively, that are genetically engineered not to express the polypeptides of the invention (e g . knockouts) are administered to a patient //; v.vo Such cells may be obtained from the patient (1 e , animal, including human) or an MHC compatible donor and can include, but are not limited to fibroblasts, bone marrow cells, blood cells (e_g_, lymphocytes), adipocytes, muscle cells, endothelial cells etc The cells are genetically engineered in vitro using recombinant DNA techniques to introduce the coding sequence of polypeptides of the invention into the cells, or alternatively, to disrupt the coding sequence and/or endogenous regulatory sequence associated with the polypeptides of the invention, e g . by transduction (using viral vectors, and preferably vectors that integrate the transgene into the cell genome) or transfection procedures, including, but not limited to, the use of plasmids, cosmids, YACs, naked DNA, electroporation, liposomes, etc The coding sequence of the polypeptides of the invention can be placed under the control of a strong constitutive or mducible promoter or promoter/enhancer to achieve expression, and preferably secretion, of the polypeptides of the invention The engineered cells which express and preferably secrete the polypeptides of the invention can be introduced into the patient systemically, e g , in the circulation, or mtraperitoneally Alternatively, the cells can be incoφorated into a matrix and implanted in the body, e g , genetically engineered fibroblasts can be implanted as part of a skin graft, genetically engineered endothelial cells can be implanted as part of a lymphatic or vascular graft (See, for example, Anderson et al U S Patent No 5,399,349, and Mulligan & Wilson, U S Patent No 5,460,959 each of which is incoφorated by reference herein in its entirety) When the cells to be administered are non-autologous or non-MHC compatible cells, they can be administered using well known techniques which prevent the development of a host immune response against the introduced cells For example, the cells may be introduced in an encapsulated form which, while allowing for an exchange of components with the immediate extracellular environment, does not allow the introduced cells to be recognized by the host immune system. Transgenic and "knock-out " animals of the invention have uses which include, but are not limited to, animal model systems useful in elaborating the biological function of polypeptides of the present invention, studying conditions and/or disorders associated with aberrant expression, and in screening for compounds effective in ameliorating such conditions and/or disorders. Example 22: Assays Detecting Stimulation or Inhibition of B cell Proliferation and Differentiation Generation of functional humoral immune responses requires both soluble and cognate signaling between B-lineage cells and their microenvironment. Signals may impart a positive stimulus that allows a B-lineage cell to continue its programmed development, or a negative stimulus that instructs the cell to arrest its current developmental pathway. To date, numerous stimulatory and inhibitory signals have been found to influence B cell responsiveness including IL-2, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL10, IL-13, IL-14 and IL-15. Interestingly, these signals are by themselves weak effectors but can, in combination with various co-stimulatory proteins, induce activation, proliferation, differentiation, homing, tolerance and death among B cell populations. One of the best studied classes of B-cell co-stimulatory proteins is the TNF- superfamily. Within this family CD40, CD27, and CD30 along with their respective ligands CD154, CD70, and CD153 have been found to regulate a variety of immune responses. Assays which allow for the detection and/or observation of the proliferation and differentiation of these B-cell populations and their precursors are valuable tools in determining the effects various proteins may have on these B-cell populations in terms of proliferation and differentiation. Listed below are two assays designed to allow for the detection of the differentiation, proliferation, or inhibition of B-cell populations and their precursors. In Vitro Assay- Agonists or antagonists of the invention can be assessed for its ability to induce activation, proliferation, differentiation or inhibition and/or death in B-cell populations and their precursors The activity of the agonists or antagonists of the invention on purified human tonsillar B cells, measured qualitatively over the dose range from 0 1 to 10,000 ng/mL, is assessed in a standard B-lymphocyte co- stimulation assay in which purified tonsillar B cells are cultured in the presence of either formalin-fixed Staphylococcus aureus Cowan I (SAC) or immobilized anti- human IgM antibody as the priming agent Second signals such as IL-2 and IL-15 synergize with SAC and IgM crosshnking to elicit B cell proliferation as measured by tπtiated-thymidine incoφoration Novel synergizing agents can be readily identified using this assay The assay involves isolating human tonsillar B cells by magnetic bead (MACS) depletion of CD3-posιtιve cells The resulting cell population is greater than 95% B cells as assessed by expression of CD45R(B220) Various dilutions of each sample are placed into individual wells of a 96-well plate to which are added 10 5 B-cells suspended in culture medium (RPMI 1640 containing 10% FBS, 5 X 10 5 M 2ME, lOOU/ml penicillin, lOug/ml streptomycin, and 10 3 dilution of SAC) in a total volume of 150ul Proliferation or inhibition is quantitated by a 20h pulse (luCi/well) with 3H-thymιdιne (6 7 Ci/mM) beginning 72h post factor addition The positive and negative controls are IL2 and medium respectively In Vivo Assay- BALB/c mice are injected (1 p ) twice per day with buffer only, or 2 mg/Kg of agonists or antagonists of the invention, or truncated forms thereof Mice receive this treatment for 4 consecutive days, at which time they are sacrificed and various tissues and serum collected for analyses Comparison of H&E sections from normal spleens and spleens treated with agonists or antagonists of the invention identify the results of the activity of the agonists or antagonists on spleen cells, such as the diffusion of peπ-arteπal lymphatic sheaths, and/or significant increases in the nucleated cellulaπty of the red pulp regions, which may indicate the activation of the differentiation and proliferation of B-cell populations Immunohistochemical studies usmg a B cell marker, antι-CD45R(B220), are used to determine whether anv physiological changes to splenic cells, such as splenic disorganization, are due to increased B-cell representation within loosely defined B- cell zones that infiltrate established T-cell regions. Flow cytometric analyses of the spleens from mice treated with agonist or antagonist is used to indicate whether the agonists or antagonists specifically increases the proportion of ThB+, CD45R(B220)dull B cells over that which is observed in control mice. Likewise, a predicted consequence of increased mature B-cell representation in vivo is a relative increase in serum Ig titers. Accordingly, serum IgM and IgA levels are compared between buffer and agonists or antagonists-treated mice. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 23: T Cell Proliferation Assay A CD3-induced proliferation assay is performed on PBMCs and is measured by the uptake of 3 H-thymidine. The assay is performed as follows. Ninety-six well plates are coated with 100 μl/well of mAb to CD3 (HIT3a, Pharmingen) or isotype- matched control mAb (B33.1 ) overnight at 4 degrees C (1 μg/ml in .05M bicarbonate buffer, pH 9.5), then washed three times with PBS. PBMC are isolated by F/H gradient centrifugation from human peripheral blood and added to quadruplicate wells (5 x 10 /well) of mAb coated plates in RPMI containing 10% FCS and P/S in the presence of varying concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention (total volume 200 ul). Relevant protein buffer and medium alone are controls. After 48 hr. culture at 37 degrees C, plates are spun for 2 min. at 1000 φm and 100 μl of supernatant is removed and stored -20 degrees C for measurement of IL-2 (or other cytokines) if effect on proliferation is observed. Wells are supplemented with 100 ul of medium containing 0.5 uCi of Η-thymidine and cultured at 37 degrees C for 18-24 hr. Wells are harvested and incoφoration of Η-thymidine used as a measure of 75 proliferation Antι-CD3 alone is the positive control for proliferation IL-2 ( 100 U/ml) is also used as a control which enhances proliferation. Control antibody which does not induce proliferation of T cells is used as the negative controls for the effects of agonists or antagonists of the invention The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy) Example 24 Effect of Agonists or Antagonists of the Invention on the Expression of MHC Class II Costimalatori' and Adhesion Molecules and Cell Differentiation of Monocvtes and Monoc\ te-Derived Hitman Dendritic Cells Dendritic cells are generated by the expansion of proliferating precursors found in the peripheral blood: adherent PBMC or elutriated monocytic fractions are cultured for 7-10 days with GM-CSF (50 ng/ml) and IL-4 (20 ng/ml). These dendritic cells have the characteristic phenotype of immature cells (expression of CD1 , CD80, CD86, CD40 and MHC class II antigens) Treatment with activating factors, such as TNF-α, causes a rapid change in surface phenotype (increased expression of MHC class I and II, costimulatory and adhesion molecules, downregulation of FCγRII, upregulation of CD83) These changes correlate with increased antigen-presenting capacity and with functional maturation of the dendπtic cells. FACS analysis of surface antigens is performed as follows Cells are treated 1-3 days with increasing concentrations of agonist or antagonist of the invention or LPS (positive control), washed with PBS containing 1% BSA and 0.02 mM sodium azide, and then incubated with 1 20 dilution of appropriate FITC- or PE-labeled monoclonal antibodies for 30 minutes at 4 degrees C After an additional wash, the labeled cells are analyzed by flow cytometry on a FACScan (Becton Dickinson). Effect on the production of cvtokines Cytokines generated by dendritic cells, in particular IL- 12. are important in the initiation of T-cell dependent immune responses. IL- 12 strongly influences the development of Thl helper T-cell immune response, and induces cytotoxic T and NK cell function. An ELISA is used to measure the IL-12 release as follows. Dendritic cells ( 10 6 /ml) are treated with increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention for 24 hours. LPS (100 ng/ml) is added to the cell culture as positive control. Supernatants from the cell cultures are then collected and analyzed for IL-12 content using commercial ELISA kit (e..g, R & D Systems (Minneapolis, MN)). The standard protocols provided with the kits are used. Effect on the expression of MHC Class II. costimulatory and adhesion molecules. Three major families of cell surface antigens can be identified on monocytes: adhesion molecules, molecules involved in antigen presentation, and Fc receptor. Modulation of the expression of MHC class II antigens and other costimulatory molecules, such as B7 and ICAM-1 , may result in changes in the antigen presenting capacity of monocytes and ability to induce T cell activation. Increase expression of Fc receptors may correlate with improved monocyte cytotoxic activity, cytokine release and phagocytosis. FACS analysis is used to examine the surface antigens as follows. Monocytes are treated 1-5 days with increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention or LPS (positive control), washed with PBS containing 1% BSA and 0.02 mM sodium azide, and then incubated with 1 :20 dilution of appropriate FITC- or PE- labeled monoclonal antibodies for 30 minutes at 4 degreesC. After an additional wash, the labeled cells are analyzed by flow cytometry on a FACScan (Becton Dickinson). Monocyte activation and/or increased survival. Assays for molecules that activate (or alternatively, inactivate) monocytes and/or increase monocyte survival (or alternatively, decrease monocyte survival) are known in the art and may routinely be applied to determine whether a molecule of the invention functions as an inhibitor or activator of monocytes. Agonists or antagonists of the invention can be screened using the three assays described below. For each of these assays, Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) are purified from single donor leukopacks (American Red Cross, Baltimore, MD) by centrifugation through a Histopaque gradient (Sigma). Monocytes are isolated from PBMC by counterflow centrifugal elutriation. Monocyte Survival Assay. Human peripheral blood monocytes progressively lose viability when cultured in absence of serum or other stimuli. Their death results from internally regulated process (apoptosis). Addition to the culture of activating factors, such as TNF-alpha dramatically improves cell survival and prevents DNA fragmentation. Propidium iodide (PI) staining is used to measure apoptosis as follows. Monocytes are cultured for 48 hours in polypropylene tubes in serum-free medium (positive control), in the presence of 100 ng/ml TNF-alpha (negative control), and in the presence of varying concentrations of the compound to be tested. Cells are suspended at a concentration of 2 x 10 6 /ml in PBS containing PI at a final concentration of 5 μg/ml, and then incubaed at room temperature for 5 minutes before FACScan analysis. PI uptake has been demonstrated to correlate with DNA fragmentation in this experimental paradigm. Effect on cytokine release. An important function of monocytes/macrophages is their regulatory activity on other cellular populations of the immune system through the release of cytokines after stimulation. An ELISA to measure cytokine release is performed as follows. Human monocytes are incubated at a density of 5x10 3 cells/ml with increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention and under the same conditions, but in the absence of agonists or antagonists. For IL-12 production, the cells are primed overnight with IFN (100 U/ml) in presence of agonist or antagonist of the invention. LPS (10 ng/ml) is then added. Conditioned media are collected after 24h and kept frozen until use. Measurement of TNF-alpha, IL-10, MCP-1 and IL-8 is then performed using a commercially available ELISA kit (e. g, R & D Systems (Minneapolis, MN)) and applying the standard protocols provided with the kit. Oxidative burst. Purified monocytes are plated in 96-w plate at 2-lxl0 : ' cell/well. Increasing concentrations of agonists or antagonists of the invention are added to the wells in a total volume of 0.2 ml culture medium (RPMI 1640 + 10% FCS, glutamine and antibiotics). After 3 days incubation, the plates are centrifuged and the medium is removed from the wells. To the macrophage monolayers, 0.2 ml per well of phenol red solution (140 mM NaCl, 10 mM potassium phosphate buffer pH 7.0, 5.5 mM dextrose, 0.56 mM phenol red and 19 U/ml of HRPO) is added, together with the stimulant (200 nM PMA). The plates are incubated at 37°C for 2 hours and the reaction is stopped by adding 20 μl IN NaOH per well. The absorbance is read at 610 nm. To calculate the amount of H 2 O 2 produced by the macrophages. a standard curve of a H 2 O 2 solution of known molarity is performed for each experiment. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 25: Biological Effects of Agonists or Antagonists of the Invention Astrocvte and Neuronal Assays. Agonists or antagonists of the invention, expressed in Escherichia coli and purified as described above, can be tested for activity in promoting the survival, neurite outgrowth, or phenotypic differentiation of cortical neuronal cells and for inducing the proliferation of glial fibrillary acidic protein immunopositive cells, astrocytes. The selection of cortical cells for the bioassay is based on the prevalent expression of FGF-1 and FGF-2 in cortical structures and on the previously reported enhancement of cortical neuronal survival resulting from FGF-2 treatment. A thymidine incoφoration assay, for example, can be used to elucidate an agonist or antagonist of the invention ' s activity on these cells Moreover, previous reports describing the biological effects of FGF-2 (basic FGF) on cortical or hippocampal neurons in vitto have demonstrated increases in both neuron survival and neuπte outgrowth (Walicke et al , "Fibroblast growth factor promotes survival of dissociated hippocampal neurons and enhances neuπte extension " Proc Natl Acad Set USA 53 3012-3016 (1986), assay herein incoφorated by reference in its entirety) However, reports from experiments done on PC- 12 cells suggest that these two responses are not necessarily synonymous and may depend on not only which FGF is being tested but also on which receptor(s) are expressed on the target cells Using the primary cortical neuronal culture paradigm, the ability of an agonist or antagonist ot the invention to induce neuπte outgrowth can be compared to the response achieved with FGF-2 using, for example, a thymidine incoφoration assay Fibroblast and endothelial cell assays Human lung fibroblasts are obtained from Clonetics (San Diego, CA) and maintained in growth media from Clonetics Dermal microvascular endothelial cells are obtained from Cell Applications (San Diego, CA) For proliferation assays, the human lung fibroblasts and dermal microvascular endothelial cells can be cultured at 5.000 cells/well in a 96-well plate for one day in growth medium The cells are then incubated for one day in 0 1% BSA basal medium After replacing the medium with fresh 0 1% BSA medium, the cells are incubated with the test proteins for 3 days Alamar Blue (Alamar Biosciences, Sacramento, CA) is added to each well to a final concentration of 10% The cells are incubated for 4 hr Cell viability is measured by reading in a CytoFluor fluorescence reader For the PGE 2 assays, the human lung fibroblasts are cultured at 5,000 cells/well in a 96-well plate for one day After a medium change to 0 1 % BSA basal medium, the cells are incubated with FGF-2 or agonists or antagonists of the invention w ith or without IL- lα for 24 hours The supematants are collected and assayed for PGE 2 by EIA kit (Cayman, Ann Arbor, MI) For the IL-6 assays, the human lung fibroblasts are cultured at 5.000 cells/well in a 96-well plate for one day After a medium change to 0 1% BSA basal medium, the cells are incubated with FGF-2 or with or without agonists or antagonists of the invention IL-lα for 24 hours The supematants are collected and assayed for IL-6 by ELISA kit (Endogen, Cambridge, MA) Human lung fibroblasts are cultured with FGF-2 or agonists or antagonists of the invention for 3 days in basal medium before the addition of Alamar Blue to assess effects on growth of the fibroblasts FGF-2 should show a stimulation at 10 - 2500 ng/ml which can be used to compare stimulation with agonists or antagonists of the invention Parkinson Models. The loss of motor function in Parkinson ' s disease is attπbuted to a deficiency of striatal dopamine resulting from the degeneration of the nigrostriatal dopaminergic projection neurons. An animal model for Parkinson's that has been extensively characterized involves the systemic administration of l-methyl-4 phenyl 1,2,3,6- tetrahydropyπdine (MPTP) In the CNS, MPTP is taken-up by astrocytes and catabohzed by monoamine oxidase B to l -methyl-4-phenyl pyridine (MPP + ) and released. Subsequently, MPP" is actively accumulated in dopaminergic neurons by the high-affinity reuptake transporter for dopamine MPP + is then concentrated in mitochondria by the electrochemical gradient and selectively inhibits mcotidamide adenine disphosphate' ubiquinone oxidoreductionase (complex I), thereby interfering with electron transport and eventually generating oxygen radicals It has been demonstrated in tissue culture paradigms that FGF-2 (basic FGF) has trophic activity towards nigral dopaminergic neurons (Ferrari et al., Dev. Biol 1989) Recently, Dr. Unsicker's group has demonstrated that administering FGF-2 in gel foam implants in the stπatum results in the near complete protection of nigral dopaminergic neurons from the toxicity associated with MPTP exposure (Otto and Unsicker. J Neuroscience. 1990) Based on the data with FGF-2. agonists or antagonists of the invention can be evaluated to determine whether it has an action similar to that of FGF-2 in enhancing dopaminergic neuronal survival in vitro and it can also be tested in vivo for protection of dopaminergic neurons in the stπatum from the damage associated with MPTP treatment The potential effect of an agonist or antagonist of the invention is first examined in vitro in a dopaminergic neuronal cell culture paradigm The cultures are prepared by dissecting the midbrain floor plate from gestation day 14 Wistar rat embryos The tissue is dissociated with trypsin and seeded at a density of 200,000 cells/cm " on polyorthinine-laminin coated glass covershps The cells are maintained in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's medium and F12 medium containing hormonal supplements (NI) The cultures are fixed with paraformaldehyde after 8 days in vitro and are processed for tyrosine hydroxylase, a specific marker for dopminergic neurons, immunohistochemical staining Dissociated cell cultures are prepared from embryonic rats The culture medium is changed every third day and the factors are also added at that time. Since the dopaminergic neurons are isolated from animals at gestation day 14, a developmental time which is past the stage when the dopaminergic precursor cells are proliferating, an increase in the number of tyrosine hydroxylase immunopositive neurons would represent an increase in the number of dopaminergic neurons surviving in vitro Therefore, if an agonist or antagonist of the invention acts to prolong the survival of dopaminergic neurons, it would suggest that the agonist or antagonist may be involved in Parkinson's Disease The studies descπbed in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e g , gene therapy) Example 26 The Effect oj Agonists oi Antagonists of the Invention on the Gi owth of Vascular Endothelial Cells On day 1 , human umbilical vein endothelial cells (HUVEC) are seeded at 2- 5xl0 4 cells/35 mm dish density in Ml 99 medium containing 4% fetal bovme serum (FBS), 16 units/ml heparin, and 50 units/ml endothelial cell growth supplements (ECGS, Biotechnique, Inc ) On day 2, the medium is replaced with Ml 99 containing 10%) FBS, 8 units/ml heparin An agonist or antagonist of the invention, and positive controls, such as VEGF and basic FGF (bFGF) are added, at varying concentrations On days 4 and 6, the medium is replaced On day 8, cell number is determined with a Coulter Counter An increase in the number of HUVEC cells indicates that the compound of the invention may proliferate vascular endothelial cells, while a decrease in the number of HUVEC cell indicates that the compound of the invention inhibits vascular endothelial cells The studies described in this example tested activity of a polypeptide of the invention However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e g , gene therapy), agonists, and/or antagonists of the invention Example 27 Rat Corneal Wound Healing Model This animal model shows the effect of an agonist or antagonist of the invention on neovasculaπzation The experimental protocol includes a) Making a 1-1 5 mm long incision from the center of cornea into the stromal layer b) Inserting a spatula below the lip of the incision facing the outer comer of the eye c) Making a pocket (its base is 1-1 5 mm form the edge of the eye) d) Positioning a pellet, containing 50ng- 5ug of an agonist or antagonist of the invention, withm the pocket e) Treatment with an agonist or antagonist of the invention can also be applied topically to the corneal wounds in a dosage range of 20mg - 500mg (daily treatment for five days). The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 28: Diabetic Mouse and Glucocorticoid-lmpaired Wound Healing Models A. Diabetic db+/db+ Mouse Model. To demonstrate that an agonist or antagonist of the invention accelerates the healing process, the genetically diabetic mouse model of wound healing is used. The full thickness wound healing model in the db+/db+ mouse is a well characterized, clinically relevant and reproducible model of impaired wound healing. Healing of the diabetic wound is dependent on formation of granulation tissue and re- epithelialization rather than contraction (Gartner, M.H. et al, J. Surg. Res. 52:389 ( 1992); Greenhalgh, D.G. et al. Am. J. Pathol. 136: 1235 (1990)). The diabetic animals have many of the characteristic features observed in Type II diabetes mellitus. Homozygous (db+/db+) mice are obese in comparison to their normal heterozygous (db+/+m) littermates. Mutant diabetic (db+/db+) mice have a single autosomal recessive mutation on chromosome 4 (db+) (Coleman et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:283-293 ( 1982)). Animals show polyphagia, polydipsia and polyuria. Mutant diabetic mice (db+/db+) have elevated blood glucose, increased or normal insulin levels, and suppressed cell-mediated immunity (Mandel et al, J. Immunol. 120: 1315 (1978); Debray-Sachs, M. et al. Clin. Exp. Immunol. 51(1): \ -1 (1983); Leiter et al, Am. J. of Pathol. 77^:46-55 (1985)). Peripheral neuropathy, myocardial complications, and microvascular lesions, basement membrane thickening and glomerular filtration abnormalities have been descπbed in these animals (Noπdo. F. et al, Exp. Neurol. 83(2):22 \-232 ( 1984); Robertson et al. Diabetes 29(1):60-61 ( 1980): Giacomelli et al. Lab Invest. 40(4) :460-413 ( 1979); Coleman, D.L.. Diabetes 31 (Suppl): \ -6 ( 1982)). These homozygous diabetic mice develop hyperglycemia that is resistant to insulin analogous to human type II diabetes (Mandel et al, J. Immunol. 120: 1315- 1311 (1978)). The characteristics observed in these animals suggests that healing in this model may be similar to the healing observed in human diabetes (Greenhalgh, et al. Am. J. of Pathol. 75(5: 1235-1246 (1990)). Genetically diabetic female C57BL/KsJ (db+/db+) mice and their non-diabetic (db+/+m) heterozygous littermates are used in this study (Jackson Laboratories). The animals are purchased at 6 weeks of age and are 8 weeks old at the beginning of the study. Animals are individually housed and received food and water ad libitum. All manipulations are performed using aseptic techniques. The experiments are conducted according to the rules and guidelines of Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee and the Guidelines for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals. Wounding protocol is performed according to previously reported methods (Tsuboi, R. and Rifkin, D.B., J. Exp. Med. 172:245-251 (1990)). Briefly, on the day of wounding, animals are anesthetized with an intraperitoneal injection of Avertin (0.01 mg/mL), 2,2,2-tribromoethanol and 2-methyl-2-butanol dissolved in deionized water. The dorsal region of the animal is shaved and the skin washed with 70% ethanol solution and iodine. The surgical area is dried with sterile gauze prior to wounding. An 8 mm full-thickness wound is then created using a Keyes tissue punch. Immediately following wounding, the surrounding skin is gently stretched to eliminate wound expansion. The wounds are left open for the duration of the experiment. Application of the treatment is given topically for 5 consecutive days commencing on the day of wounding. Prior to treatment, wounds are gently cleansed with sterile saline and gauze sponges. Wounds are visually examined and photographed at a fixed distance at the day of surgery and at two day intervals thereafter. Wound closure is determined by daily measurement on days 1 -5 and on day 8. Wounds are measured horizontally and vertically using a calibrated Jameson caliper. Wounds are considered healed if granulation tissue is no longer visible and the wound is covered by a continuous epithelium. An agonist or antagonist of the invention is administered using at a range different doses, from 4mg to 500mg per wound per day for 8 days in vehicle. Vehicle control groups received 50mL of vehicle solution. Animals are euthanized on day 8 with an intraperitoneal injection of sodium pentobarbital (300mg/kg). The wounds and surrounding skin are then harvested for histology and immunohistochemistry. Tissue specimens are placed in 10%> neutral buffered formalin in tissue cassettes between biopsy sponges for further processing. Three groups of 10 animals each (5 diabetic and 5 non-diabetic controls) are evaluated: 1) Vehicle placebo control, 2) untreated group, and 3) treated group. Wound closure is analyzed by measuring the area in the vertical and horizontal axis and obtaining the total square area of the wound. Contraction is then estimated by establishing the differences between the initial wound area (day 0) and that of post treatment (day 8). The wound area on day 1 is 64mm " , the corresponding size of the dermal punch. Calculations are made using the following formula: [Open area on day 8] - [Open area on day 1 ] / [Open area on day 1] Specimens are fixed in 10% buffered formalin and paraffin embedded blocks are sectioned peφendicular to the wound surface (5mm) and cut using a Reichert-Jung microtome. Routine hematoxylin-eosin (H&E) staining is performed on cross- sections of bisected wounds. Histologic examination of the wounds are used to assess whether the healing process and the moφhologic appearance of the repaired skin is altered by treatment with an agonist or antagonist of the invention. This assessment included verification of the presence of cell accumulation, inflammatory cells, capillaries, fibroblasts, re-epithelialization and epidermal maturity (Greenhalgh, D.G. et al. Am. J. Pathol. 136: 1235 ( 1990)). A calibrated lens micrometer is used by a blinded observer. Tissue sections are also stained immunohistochemically with a polyclonal rabbit anti-human keratin antibody using ABC Elite detection system. Human skin is used as a positive tissue control while non-immune IgG is used as a negative control. Keratinocyte growth is determined by evaluating the extent of reepithelialization of the wound using a calibrated lens micrometer. Proliferating cell nuclear antigen/cyclin (PCNA) in skin specimens is demonstrated by using anti-PCNA antibody ( 1 :50) with an ABC Elite detection system. Human colon cancer served as a positive tissue control and human brain tissue is used as a negative tissue control. Each specimen included a section with omission of the primary antibody and substitution with non-immune mouse IgG. Ranking of these sections is based on the extent of proliferation on a scale of 0-8, the lower side of the scale reflecting slight proliferation to the higher side reflecting intense proliferation. Experimental data are analyzed using an unpaired t test. A p value of < 0.05 is considered significant. B. Steroid Impaired Rat Model The inhibition of wound healing by steroids has been well documented in various in vitro and in vivo systems (Wahl, Glucocorticoids and Wound healing. In: Anti- Inflammatory Steroid Action: Basic and Clinical Aspects. 280-302 (1989); Wahlet al, J. Immunol. 115: 476-481 ( 1975); Werb et al, J. Exp. Med. 747: 1684- 1694 (1978)). Glucocorticoids retard wound healing by inhibiting angiogenesis, decreasing vascular permeability (Ebert et al, An. Intern. Med. 37:701-705 (1952)), fibroblast proliferation, and collagen synthesis (Beck et al, Growth Factors. 5 : 295-304 (1991); Haynes et al, J. Clin. Invest. 61: 703-797 (1978)) and producing a transient reduction of circulating monocytes (Haynes et al., J. Clin. Invest. 61: 703-797 (1978); Wahl, "Glucocorticoids and wound healing", In: Antiinflammatory Steroid Action: Basic and Clinical Aspects, Academic Press, New York, pp. 280-302 (1989)). The systemic administration of steroids to impaired wound healing is a well establish phenomenon in rats (Beck et al . Gi owth Factor s 5 295-304 ( 1991 ). Haynes et al . J Clin Invest 61 703-797 ( 1978), Wahl, "Glucocorticoids and wound healing", //? Antiinflammatory Steroid Action Basic and Clinical Aspects, Academic Press, New York, pp 280-302 ( 1989), Pierce et al , Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 86. 2229-2233 (1989)) To demonstrate that an agonist or antagonist of the invention can accelerate the healing process, the effects of multiple topical applications of the agonist or antagonist on full thickness excisional skin wounds in rats in which healing has been impaired by the systemic administration of methylprednisolone is assessed. Young adult male Sprague Dawley rats weighing 250-300 g (Charles River Laboratories) are used in this example The animals are purchased at 8 weeks of age and are 9 weeks old at the beginning of the study The healing response of rats is impaired by the systemic administration of methylprednisolone ( 17mg/kg/rat intramuscularly) at the time of wounding Animals are individually housed and received food and water ad libitum All manipulations are performed using aseptic techniques This study is conducted according to the rules and guidelines of Human Genome Sciences, Inc Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee and the Guidelines for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals The wounding protocol is followed according to section A, above On the day of wounding, animals are anesthetized with an intramuscular injection of ketamme (50 mg/kg) and xylazine (5 mg/kg) The dorsal region of the animal is shaved and the skin washed with 70% ethanol and iodine solutions The surgical area is dried with sterile gauze prior to wounding An 8 mm full-thickness wound is created using a Keyes tissue punch The wounds are left open for the duration of the experiment Applications of the testing mateπals are given topically once a day for 7 consecutive days commencing on the day of wounding and subsequent to methylprednisolone administration Prior to treatment, wounds are gently cleansed with sterile saline and gauze sponges Wounds are visually examined and photographed at a fixed distance at the day of wounding and at the end of treatment Wound closure is determined by daily measurement on days 1 -5 and on day 8 Wounds are measured horizontally and vertically using a calibrated Jameson cahper Wounds are considered healed if granulation tissue is no longer visible and the wound is covered by a continuous epithelium The agonist or antagonist of the invention is administered using at a range different doses, from 4mg to 500mg per wound per day for 8 days in vehicle Vehicle control groups received 50mL of vehicle solution Animals are euthanized on day 8 with an intraperitoneal injection of sodium pentobarbital (300mg/kg) The wounds and surrounding skin are then harvested for histology Tissue specimens are placed in 10% neutral buffered formalin in tissue cassettes between biopsy sponges for further processing Four groups of 10 animals each (5 with methylprednisolone and 5 without glucocorticoid) are evaluated 1 ) Untreated group 2) Vehicle placebo control 3) treated groups Wound closure is analyzed by measuring the area in the vertical and horizontal axis and obtaining the total area of the wound Closure is then estimated by establishing the differences between the initial wound area (day 0) and that of post treatment (day 8) The wound area on day 1 is 64mm " , the corresponding size of the dermal punch Calculations are made using the following formula [Open area on day 8] - [Open area on day 1] / [Open area on day 1] Specimens are fixed in 10% buffered formalin and paraffin embedded blocks are sectioned peφendicular to the wound surface (5mm) and cut using an Olympus microtome Routine hematoxylin-eosin (H&E) staining is performed on cross-sections of bisected wounds Histologic examination of the wounds allows assessment of whether the healing process and the moφhologic appearance of the repaired skin is improved by treatment with an agonist or antagonist of the invention A calibrated lens micrometer is used by a blinded observer to determine the distance of the wound gap Experimental data are analyzed using an unpaired t test A p value of < 0 05 is considered significant. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 29 Ly nphadema Animal Model The puφose of this experimental approach is to create an appropπate and consistent lymphedema model for testing the therapeutic effects of an agonist or antagonist of the invention in lymphangiogenesis and re-establishment of the lymphatic circulatory system in the rat hind limb Effectiveness is measured by swelling volume of the affected limb, quantification of the amount of lymphatic vasculature. total blood plasma protein, and histopathology. Acute lymphedema is observed for 7-10 days. Perhaps more importantly, the chronic progress of the edema is followed for up to 3-4 weeks. Prior to beginning surgery, blood sample is drawn for protein concentration analysis. Male rats weighing approximately ~350g are dosed with Pentobarbital. Subsequently, the right legs are shaved from knee to hip The shaved area is swabbed with gauze soaked in 70% EtOH. Blood is drawn for semm total protein testing. Circumference and volumetric measurements are made prior to injecting dye into paws after marking 2 measurement levels (0.5 cm above heel, at mid-pt of dorsal paw). The intradermal dorsum of both πght and left paws are injected with 0 05 ml of 1% Evan's Blue Circumference and volumetric measurements are then made following injection of dye into paws. Using the knee joint as a landmark, a mid-leg inguinal incision is made αrcumferentially allowing the femoral vessels to be located. Forceps and hemostats are used to dissect and separate the skin flaps. After locating the femoral vessels, the lymphatic vessel that runs along side and underneath the vessel(s) is located. The main lvmphatic vessels in this area are then electrically coagulated or suture ligated Using a microscope, muscles in back of the leg (near the semitendinosis and adductors) are bluntly dissected The popliteal lymph node is then located The 2 proximal and 2 distal lymphatic vessels and distal blood supply of the popliteal node are then and ligated by suturing The popliteal lymph node, and any accompanying adipose tissue, is then removed by cutting connective tissues Care is taken to control any mild bleeding resulting from this procedure After lymphatics are occluded, the skin flaps are sealed by using liquid skin (Vetbond) (AJ Buck) The separated skin edges are sealed to the underlying muscle tissue while leaving a gap of ~0 5 cm around the leg Skin also may be anchored by suturing to underlying muscle when necessary To avoid infection, animals are housed individually with mesh (no bedding) Recovering animals are checked daily through the optimal edematous peak, which typically occurred by day 5-7 The plateau edematous peak are then observed To evaluate the intensity of the lymphedema, the circumference and volumes of 2 designated places on each paw before operation and daily for 7 days are measured The effect plasma proteins on lymphedema is determined and whether protein analysis is a useful testing perimeter is also investigated The weights of both control and edematous limbs are evaluated at 2 places Analysis is performed in a blind manner Circumference Measurements Under brief gas anesthetic to prevent limb movement, a cloth tape is used to measure limb circumference Measurements are done at the ankle bone and dorsal paw by 2 different people then those 2 readings are averaged Readings are taken from both control and edematous limbs Volumetric Measurements On the day of surgery, animals are anesthetized with Pentobarbital and are tested prior to surgery For daily volumetπcs animals are under brief halothane anesthetic (rapid immobilization and quick recovery), both legs are shaved and equally marked using wateφroof marker on legs Legs are first dipped in water, then dipped into instrument to each marked level then measured by Buxco edema software(Chen/Vιctor) Data is recorded by one person, while the other is dipping the limb to marked area. Blood-plasma protein measurements: Blood is drawn, spun, and serum separated prior to surgery and then at conclusion for total protein and Ca2+ comparison. Limb Weight Comparison: After drawing blood, the animal is prepared for tissue collection. The limbs are amputated using a quillitine, then both experimental and control legs are cut at the ligature and weighed. A second weighing is done as the tibio-cacaneal joint is disarticulated and the foot is weighed. Histological Preparations: The transverse muscle located behind the knee (popliteal) area is dissected and arranged in a metal mold, filled with freezeGel, dipped into cold methylbutane, placed into labeled sample bags at - 80EC until sectioning. Upon sectioning, the muscle is observed under fluorescent microscopy for lymphatics.. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 30: Suppression of TNF alpha-induced adhesion molecule expression by a Agonist or Antagonist of the Invention The recruitment of lymphocytes to areas of inflammation and angiogenesis involves specific receptor-ligand interactions between cell surface adhesion molecules (CAMs) on lymphocytes and the vascular endothelium. The adhesion process, in both normal and pathological settings, follows a multi-step cascade that involves intercellular adhesion molecule- 1 (ICAM-1), vascular cell adhesion molecule- 1 (VCAM-1), and endothelial leukocyte adhesion molecule- 1 (E-selectin) expression on endothelial cells (EC). The expression of these molecules and others on the vascular endothelium determines the efficiency with which leukocytes may adhere to the local vasculature and extravasate into the local tissue during the development of an inflammatory response. The local concentration of cytokines and growth factor participate in the modulation of the expression of these CAMs. Tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF-a), a potent proinflammatory cytokine, is a stimulator of all three CAMs on endothelial cells and may be involved in a wide variety of inflammatory responses, often resulting in a pathological outcome. The potential of an agonist or antagonist of the invention to mediate a suppression of TNF-a induced CAM expression can be examined. A modified ELISA assay which uses ECs as a solid phase absorbent is employed to measure the amount of CAM expression on TNF-a treated ECs when co-stimulated with a member of the FGF family of proteins. To perform the experiment, human umbilical vein endothelial cell (HUVEC) cultures are obtained from pooled cord harvests and maintained in growth medium (EGM-2: Clonetics, San Diego, CA) supplemented with 10% FCS and 1% penicillin/streptomycin in a 37 degree C humidified incubator containing 5% CO2- HUVECs are seeded in 96-well plates at concentrations of 1 x 10^ cells/well in EGM medium at 37 degree C for 18-24 hrs or until confluent. The monolayers are subsequently washed 3 times with a serum-free solution of RPMI-1640 supplemented with 100 U/ml penicillin and 100 mg/ml streptomycin, and treated with a given cytokine and/or growth factor(s) for 24 h at 37 degree C. Following incubation, the cells are then evaluated for CAM expression. Human Umbilical Vein Endothelial cells (HUVECs) are grown in a standard 96 well plate to confluence. Growth medium is removed from the cells and replaced with 90 ul of 199 Medium (10% FBS). Samples for testing and positive or negative controls are added to the plate in triplicate (in 10 ul volumes). Plates are incubated at 37 degree C for either 5 h (selectin and integrin expression) or 24 h (integrin expression only). Plates are aspirated to remove medium and 100 μl of 0.1% paraformaldehyde-PBS(with Ca++ and Mg++) is added to each well. Plates are held at 4°C for 30 min. Fixative is then removed from the wells and wells are washed IX with PBS(+Ca.Mg)+0.5% BSA and drained. Do not allow the wells to dry. Add 10 μl of diluted primary antibody to the test and control wells. Anti-ICAM- 1 -Biotin. Anti- VCAM-1 -Biotin and Anti-E-selectin-Biotin are used at a concentration of 10 μg/ml ( 1 : 10 dilution of 0.1 mg/ml stock antibody). Cells are incubated at 37°C for 30 min. in a humidified environment. Wells are washed X3 with PBS(+Ca.Mg)+0.5% BSA. Then add 20 μl of diluted ExtrAvidin-Alkaline Phosphotase ( 1 :5,000 dilution) to each well and incubated at 37°C for 30 min. Wells are washed X3 with PBS(+Ca,Mg)+0.5% BSA. 1 tablet of p-Nitrophenol Phosphate pNPP is dissolved in 5 ml of glycine buffer (pH 10.4). 100 μl of pNPP substrate in glycine buffer is added to each test well. Standard wells in triplicate are prepared from the working dilution of the ExtrAvidin-Alkaline Phosphotase in glycine buffer: 1 :5,000 ( 10°) > 10 "0 5 > 10 "1 > 10 " ' \ 5 μl of each dilution is added to triplicate wells and the resulting AP content in each well is 5.50 ng, 1.74 ng, 0.55 ng, 0.18 ng. 100 μl of pNNP reagent must then be added to each of the standard wells. The plate must be incubated at 37°C for 4h. A volume of 50 μl of 3M NaOH is added to all wells. The results are quantified on a plate reader at 405 nm. The background subtraction option is used on blank wells filled with glycine buffer only. The template is set up to indicate the concentration of AP-conjugate in each standard well [ 5.50 ng; 1.74 ng; 0.55 ng; 0.18 ng]. Results are indicated as amount of bound AP-conjugate in each sample. The studies described in this example tested activity of agonists or antagonists of the invention. However, one skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides or polypeptides of the invention (e.g., gene therapy). Example 31: Production Of Polypeptide oj the Invention For High-Throughput Screening Assays The following protocol produces a supernatant containing polypeptide of the present invention to be tested. This supernatant can then be used in the Screening Assays described in Examples 33-42. First, dilute Poly-D-Lysine (644 587 Boehringer-Mannheim) stock solution (1 mg/ml in PBS) 1 :20 in PBS (w/o calcium or magnesium 17-516F Biowhittaker) for a working solution of 50ug/ml. Add 200 ul of this solution to each well (24 well plates) and incubate at RT for 20 minutes. Be sure to distribute the solution over each well (note: a 12-channel pipetter may be used with tips on every other channel). Aspirate off the Poly-D-Lysine solution and rinse with 1ml PBS (Phosphate Buffered Saline). The PBS should remain in the well until just prior to plating the cells and plates may be poly-lysine coated in advance for up to two weeks. Plate 293T cells (do not carry cells past P+20) at 2 x 10^ cells/well in .5ml DMEM(Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium)(with 4.5 G/L glucose and L-glutamine (12-604F Biowhittaker))/ 10% heat inactivated FBS( 14-503F Biowhittaker)/lx Penstrep( 17-602E Biowhittaker). Let the cells grow overnight. The next day, mix together in a sterile solution basin: 300 ul Lipofectamine (18324-012 Gibco/BRL) and 5ml Optimem I (31985070 Gibco/BRL)/96-well plate. With a small volume multi-channel pipetter, aliquot approximately 2ug of an expression vector containing a polynucleotide insert, produced by the methods described in Examples 8-10, into an appropriately labeled 96-well round bottom plate. With a multi-channel pipetter, add 50ul of the Lipofectamine/Optimem I mixture to each well. Pipette up and down gently to mix. Incubate at RT 15-45 minutes. After about 20 minutes, use a multi-channel pipetter to add 150ul Optimem I to each well. As a control, one plate of vector DNA lacking an insert should be transfected with each set of transfections. Preferably, the transfection should be performed by tag-teaming the following tasks. By tag-teaming, hands on time is cut in half, and the cells do not spend too much time on PBS. First, person A aspirates off the media from four 24-well plates of cells, and then person B rinses each well with .5-lml PBS. Person A then aspirates off PBS rinse, and person B, using a 12-channel pipetter with tips on every other channel, adds the 200ul of DNA/Lipofectamine/Optimem I complex to the odd wells first, then to the even wells, to each row on the 24-well plates. Incubate at 37 degree C for 6 hours. While cells are incubating, prepare appropriate media, either 1%BSA in DMEM with lx penstrep, or HGS CHO-5 media (1 16.6 mg/L of CaC12 (anhyd); 0.00130 mg/L CuSO 4 -5H 2 O; 0.050 mg/L of Fe(NO 3 ) 3 -9H 2 O; 0.417 mg/L of FeSO 4 -7H 2 O; 31 1.80 mg/L of Kcl; 28.64 mg/L of MgCl 2 ; 48.84 mg/L of MgSO 4 ; 6995.50 mg/L of NaCl; 2400.0 mg/L of NaHCO 3 ; 62.50 mg/L of NaH 2 PO 4 -H 2 0; 71.02 mg/L of Na 2 HPO4; .4320 mg/L of ZnSO 4 -7H 2 O; .002 mg/L of Arachidonic Acid ; 1.022 mg/L of Cholesterol; .070 mg/L of DL-alpha-Tocopherol-Acetate; 0.0520 mg/L of Linoleic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Linolenic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Myristic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Oleic Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Palmitric Acid; 0.010 mg/L of Palmitic Acid; 100 mg/L of Pluronic F-68; 0.010 mg/L of Stearic Acid; 2.20 mg/L of Tween 80: 4551 mg/L of D-Glucose; 130.85 mg/ml of L- Alanine; 147.50 mg/ml of L-Arginine-HCL; 7.50 mg/ml of L-Asparagine-H 2 0; 6.65 mg/ml of L-Aspartic Acid; 29.56 mg/ml of L-Cystine-2HCL-H 0; 31.29 mg/ml of L-Cystine-2HCL; 7.35 mg/ml of L-Glutamic Acid; 365.0 mg/ml of L-Glutamine; 18.75 mg/ml of Glycine; 52.48 mg/ml of L-Histidine-HCL-H 0; 106.97 mg/ml of L-Isoleucine; 1 1 1.45 mg/ml of L- Leucine: 163.75 mg/ml of L-Lysine HCL; 32.34 mg/ml of L-Methionine; 68.48 mg/ml of L-Phenylalainine; 40.0 mg/ml of L-Proline; 26.25 mg/ml of L-Serine; 101.05 mg/ml of L-Threonine; 19.22 mg/ml of L-Tryptophan; 91.79 mg/ml of L- Tryrosine-2Na-2H 2 0; and 99.65 mg/ml of L-Valine; 0.0035 mg/L of Biotin; 3.24 mg/L of D-Ca Pantothenate; 1 1.78 mg/L of Choline Chloride; 4.65 mg/L of Folic Acid; 15.60 mg/L of i-Inositol; 3.02 mg/L of Niacinamide; 3.00 mg/L of Pyridoxal HCL; 0.031 mg/L of Pyπdoxine HCL; 0.319 mg/L of Riboflavin; 3.17 mg/L of Thiamine HCL; 0.365 mg/L of Thymidine; 0.680 mg/L of Vitamin Bι 2 ; 25 mM of HEPES Buffer; 2.39 mg/L of Na Hypoxanthine; 0.105 mg/L of Lipoic Acid; 0.081 mg/L of Sodium Putrescine-2HCL; 55.0 mg/L of Sodium Pyruvate; 0.0067 mg/L of Sodium Selenite; 20uM of Ethanolamine; 0.122 mg/L of Ferric Citrate; 41.70 mg/L of Methyl-B-Cyclodextrin complexed with Linoleic Acid; 33.33 mg/L of Methyl-B- Cyclodextrin complexed with Oleic Acid; 10 mg/L of Methyl-B-Cyclodextrin complexed with Retinal Acetate. Adjust osmolarity to 327 mOsm) with 2mm glutamine and l x penstrep. (BSA (81-068-3 Bayer) lOOgm dissolved in I L DMEM for a 10% BSA stock solution). Filter the media and collect 50 ul for endotoxin assay in 15ml polystyrene conical. The transfection reaction is terminated, preferably by tag-teaming, at the end of the incubation period. Person A aspirates off the transfection media, while person B adds 1.5ml appropriate media to each well. Incubate at 37 degree C for 45 or 72 hours depending on the media used: 1%BSA for 45 hours or CHO-5 for 72 hours. On day four, using a 300ul multichannel pipetter, aliquot 600ul in one 1ml deep well plate and the remaining supernatant into a 2ml deep well. The supematants from each well can then be used in the assays described in Examples 33-40. It is specifically understood that when activity is obtained in any of the assays described below using a supernatant, the activity originates from either the polypeptide of the present invention directly (e.g., as a secreted protein) or by polypeptide of the present invention inducing expression of other proteins, which are then secreted into the supernatant. Thus, the invention further provides a method of identifying the protein in the supernatant characterized by an activity in a particular assay. Example 32: Construction of GAS Reporter Construct One signal transduction pathway involved in the differentiation and proliferation of cells is called the Jaks-STATs pathway. Activated proteins in the Jaks-STATs pathway bind to gamma activation site "GAS" elements or interferon- sensitive responsive element ("ISRE"), located in the promoter of many genes. The binding of a protein to these elements alter the expression of the associated gene. GAS and ISRE elements are recognized by a class of transcription factors called Signal Transducers and Activators of Transcription, or "STATs." There are six members of the STATs family. Statl and Stat3 are present in many cell types, as is Stat2 (as response to IFN-alpha is widespread). Stat4 is more restricted and is not in many cell types though it has been found in T helper class I. cells after treatment with IL-12. Stat5 was originally called mammary growth factor, but has been found at higher concentrations in other cells including myeloid cells. It can be activated in tissue culture cells by many cytokines. The STATs are activated to translocate from the cytoplasm to the nucleus upon tyrosine phosphorylation by a set of kinases known as the Janus Kinase ("Jaks") family. Jaks represent a distinct family of soluble tyrosine kinases and include Tyk2, Jakl, Jak2, and Jak3. These kinases display significant sequence similarity and are generally catalytically inactive in resting cells. The Jaks are activated by a wide range of receptors summarized in the Table below. (Adapted from review by Schidler and Darnell, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 64:621- 51 (1995).) A cytokine receptor family, capable of activating Jaks, is divided into two groups: (a) Class 1 includes receptors for IL-2. IL-3, IL-4, IL-6. IL-7, IL-9, IL- 1 1, IL- 12, IL- 15, Epo, PRL, GH, G-CSF, GM-CSF. LIF, CNTF, and thrombopoietin; and (b) Class 2 includes IFN-a. IFN-g, and IL-10. The Class 1 receptors share a conserved cysteine motif (a set of four conserved cysteines and one tryptophan) and a WSXWS motif (a membrane proximal region encoding Trp-Ser-Xxx-Trp-Ser (SEQ ID NO:920)). Thus, on binding of a ligand to a receptor, Jaks are activated, which in turn activate STATs, which then translocate and bind to GAS elements. This entire process is encompassed in the Jaks-STATs signal transduction pathway. Therefore, activation of the Jaks-STATs pathway, reflected by the binding of the GAS or the ISRE element, can be used to indicate proteins involved in the proliferation and differentiation of cells. For example, growth factors and cytokines are known to activate the Jaks-STATs pathway. (See Table below.) Thus, by using GAS elements linked to reporter molecules, activators of the Jaks-STATs pathway can be identified. JAKs STATS GAS(elements) or ISRE Ligand tγk2 Jakl Jak2 Jak3 IFN familv IFN-a/B + + - - 1,2,3 ISRE IFN-g + + - 1 GAS (IRPl>Lys6>IFP) 11-10 + 9 9 - 1,3 gpl30 familv IL-6 (Pleiotrohic) + + + 9 1.3 GAS (IRFl>Lys6>IFP) 11-11 (Pleiotrohic) 9 + 9 9 1,3 OnM(Pleιotrohιc) 9 + + 9 1,3 LIF(Pleιotrohιc) 9 + + 9 1,3 CNTF(Pleιotrohιc) -/+ + + 9 1,3 G-CSF(Pleιotrohιc) 9 + 9 9 1,3 IL-12(Pleιotrohιc) + - + + 1,3 2-C familv IL-2 (lymphocytes) - + - + 1,3,5 GAS IL-4 (lymph/myeloid) - + - + 6 GAS (IRF1 = IFP »Ly6)(IgH) IL-7 (lymphocytes) - + - + 5 GAS IL-9 (lymphocytes) - + - + 5 GAS IL-13 (lymphocyte) - + 9 9 6 GAS IL-15 9 + 9 + 5 GAS gpl40 familv IL-3 (myeloid) - - + - 5 GAS (IRFl>IFP»Ly6) IL-5 (myeloid) - - + - 5 GAS GM-CSF (myeloid) GAS Growth hormone familv GH ? - + 5 PRL ? +/- + 1,3,5 EPO ? - + 5 GAS(B- CAS>IRFl=IFP»Ly6) Receptor Tvrosine Kinases EGF 9 + + 1,3 GAS (IRF1) PDGF 9 + + 1.3 CSF-1 9 + + 1,3 GAS(notΙRFl) To constmct a synthetic GAS containing promoter element, which is used in the Biological Assays described in Examples 33-34. a PCR based strategy is employed to generate a GAS-SV40 promoter sequence. The 5 ' primer contains four tandem copies of the GAS binding site found in the IRF1 promoter and previously demonstrated to bind STATs upon induction with a range of cytokines (Rothman et al., Immunity 1 :457-468 (1994).), although other GAS or ISRE elements can be used instead. The 5' primer also contains 18bp of sequence complementary to the SV40 early promoter sequence and is flanked with an Xhol site. The sequence of the 5' primer is: 5':GCGCCTCGAGATTTCCCCGAAATCTAGATTTCCCCGAAATGATTTCCCC GAAATGATTTCCCCGAAATATCTGCCATCTCAATTAG:3' (SEQ ID NO:921) The downstream primer is complementary to the SV40 promoter and is flanked with a Hind III site: 5 ':GCGGCAAGCTTTTTGCAAAGCCTAGGC:3' (SEQ ID NO:922) PCR amplification is performed using the SV40 promoter template present in the B-gal:promoter plasmid obtained from Clontech. The resulting PCR fragment is digested with Xhol/Hind III and subcloned into BLSK2-. (Stratagene.) Sequencing with forward and reverse primers confirms that the insert contains the following sequence: 5 ' :C CGAGATTTCCCCGAAATCTAGATTTCCCCGAAATG ATTTCCCCGAAA TGATTTCCCCGAAATATCTGCCATCTCAATTAGTCAGCAACCATAGTCCCG CCCCTAACTCCGCCCATCCCGCCCCTAACTCCGCCCAGTTCCGCCCATTCT CCGCCCCATGGCTGACTAATTTTTTTTATTTATGCAGAGGCCGAGGCCGCC TCGGCCTCTGAGCTATTCCAGAAGTAGTGAGGAGGCTTTTTTGGAGGCCTA GGCTTTTGCAAAAAGCTT:3 ' (SEQ ID NO:923) With this GAS promoter element linked to the SV40 promoter, a GAS:SEAP2 reporter construct is next engineered. Here, the reporter molecule is a secreted alkaline phosphatase, or "SEAP." Clearly, however, any reporter molecule can be instead of SEAP, in this or in any of the other Examples. Well known reporter molecules that can be used instead of SEAP include chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT), luciferase. alkaline phosphatase. B-galactosidase. green fluorescent protein (GFP). or any protein detectable by an antibody The above sequence confirmed synthetic GAS-SV40 promoter element is subcloned into the pSEAP-Promoter vector obtained from Clontech using Hindlll and Xhol. effectively replacing the SV40 promoter with the amplified GAS SV40 promoter element, to create the GAS-SEAP vector. However, this vector does not contain a neomycin resistance gene, and therefore, is not preferred for mammalian expression systems Thus, in order to generate mammalian stable cell lines expressing the GAS- SEAP reporter, the GAS-SEAP cassette is removed from the GAS-SEAP vector using Sail and Notl, and inserted into a backbone vector containing the neomycin resistance gene, such as pGFP-1 (Clontech), using these restriction sites in the multiple cloning site, to create the GAS-SEAP/Neo vector Once this vector is transfected into mammalian cells, this vector can then be used as a reporter molecule for GAS binding as described in Examples 33-34 Other constmcts can be made using the above description and replacing GAS with a different promoter sequence For example, constmction of reporter molecules containing NFK-B and EGR promoter sequences are described in Examples 35 and 36 However, many other promoters can be substituted using the protocols descπbed in these Examples For instance. SRE. IL-2, NFAT, or Osteocalcin promoters can be substituted, alone or in combination (e g , GAS/NF-KB/EGR, GAS/NF-KB, II- 2/NFAT, or NF-KB/GAS) Similarly, other cell lines can be used to test reporter constmct activity, such as HELA (epithelial), HUVEC (endothelial), Reh (B-cell), Saos-2 (osteoblast), HUVAC (aortic), or Cardiomyocyte Example 33 High-Throughput Screening Assay for T-cell Activity The following protocol is used to assess T-cell activity by identifying factors, and determining whether supernate containing a polypeptide of the invention proliferates and/or differentiates T-cells T-cell activity is assessed using the GAS/SEAP/Neo constmct produced in Example 32. Thus, factors that increase SEAP activity indicate the ability to activate the Jaks-STATS signal transduction pathway. The T-cell used in this assay is Jurkat T-cells (ATCC Accession No. TIB- 152), although Molt-3 cells (ATCC Accession No. CRL- 1552) and Molt-4 cells (ATCC Accession No. CRL- 1582) cells can also be used. Jurkat T-cells are lymphoblastic CD4+ Thl helper cells. In order to generate stable cell lines, approximately 2 million Jurkat cells are transfected with the GAS- SEAP/neo vector using DMRIE-C (Life Technologies)(transfection procedure described below). The transfected cells are seeded to a density of approximately 20.000 cells per well and transfectants resistant to 1 mg/ml genticin selected. Resistant colonies are expanded and then tested for their response to increasing concentrations of interferon gamma. The dose response of a selected clone is demonstrated. Specifically, the following protocol will yield sufficient cells for 75 wells containing 200 ul of cells. Thus, it is either scaled up, or performed in multiple to generate sufficient cells for multiple 96 well plates. Jurkat cells are maintained in RPMI + 10%) serum with l%Pen-Strep. Combine 2.5 mis of OPTI-MEM (Life Technologies) with 10 ug of plasmid DNA in a T25 flask. Add 2.5 ml OPTI-MEM containing 50 ul of DMRIE-C and incubate at room temperature for 15-45 mins. During the incubation period, count cell concentration, spin down the required number of cells (10 7 per transfection), and resuspend in OPTI-MEM to a final concentration of 10 7 cells/ml. Then add 1ml of 1 x 10' cells in OPTI-MEM to T25 flask and incubate at 37 degree C for 6 hrs. After the incubation, add 10 ml of RPMI + 15% semm. The Jurkat:GAS-SEAP stable reporter lines are maintained in RPMI + 10% semm, 1 mg/ml Genticin, and 1 %> Pen-Strep. These cells are treated with supematants containing polypeptide of the present invention or polypeptide of the present invention induced polypeptides as produced by the protocol described in Example 31. On the day of treatment with the supernatant, the cells should be washed and resuspended in fresh RPMI + 10% semm to a density of 500.000 cells per ml The exact number of cells required will depend on the number of supematants being screened For one 96 well plate, approximately 10 million cells (for 10 plates. 100 million cells) are required Transfer the cells to a triangular reservoir boat, in order to dispense the cells into a 96 well dish, using a 12 channel pipette. Using a 12 channel pipette, transfer 200 ul of cells into each well (therefore adding 100, 000 cells per well). After all the plates have been seeded, 50 ul of the supematants are transferred directly fiom the 96 well plate containing the supematants into each well using a 12 channel pipette In addition, a dose of exogenous interferon gamma (0.1, 1.0, 10 ng) is added to wells H9. H10. and Hl l to serve as additional positive controls for the assay The 96 well dishes containing Jurkat cells treated with supematants are placed in an incubator for 48 hrs (note this time is variable between 48-72 hrs) 35 ul samples from each well are then transferred to an opaque 96 well plate using a 12 channel pipette. The opaque plates should be covered (using sellophene covers) and stored at -20 degree C until SEAP assays are performed according to Example 37 The plates containing the remaining treated cells are placed at 4 degree C and serve as a source of matenal for repeating the assay on a specific well if desired. As a positive control, 100 Unit/ml interferon gamma can be used which is known to activate Jurkat T cells Over 30 fold induction is typically observed in the positive control wells The above protocol may be used in the generation of both transient, as well as, stable transfected cells, which would be apparent to those of skill in the art. Example 34 High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Myeloid Activity The following protocol is used to assess myeloid activity of polypeptide of the present invention by determining whether polypeptide of the present invention proliferates and/or differentiates myeloid cells Myeloid cell activity is assessed using the GAS/SEAP/Neo constmct produced in Example 32. Thus, factors that increase SEAP activity indicate the ability to activate the Jaks-STATS signal transduction pathway. The myeloid cell used in this assay is U937, a pre-monocyte cell line, although TF-1 , HL60, or KG1 can be used. To transiently transfect U937 cells with the GAS/SEAP/Neo constmct produced in Example 32, a DEAE-Dextran method (Kharbanda et. al., 1994, Cell Growth & Differentiation, 5:259-265) is used. First, harvest 2xl0e 7 U937 cells and wash with PBS. The U937 cells are usually grown in RPMI 1640 medium containing 10%) heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (FBS) supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin and 100 mg/ml streptomycin. Next, suspend the cells in 1 ml of 20 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.4) buffer containing 0.5 mg/ml DEAE-Dextran, 8 ug GAS-SEAP2 plasmid DNA, 140 mM NaCl, 5 mM KC1, 375 uM Na 2 HPO 4 .7H 2 O, 1 mM MgCl 2 , and 675 uM CaCl 2 . Incubate at 37 degrees C for 45 min. Wash the cells with RPMI 1640 medium containing 10% FBS and then resuspend in 10 ml complete medium and incubate at 37 degree C for 36 hr. The GAS-SEAP/U937 stable cells are obtained by growing the cells in 400 ug/ml G418. The G418-free medium is used for routine growth but every one to two months, the cells should be re-grown in 400 ug/ml G418 for couple of passages. These cells are tested by harvesting 1x10 cells (this is enough for ten 96-well plates assay) and wash with PBS. Suspend the cells in 200 ml above described growth medium, with a final density of 5x1 (f cells/ml. Plate 200 ul cells per well in the 96-well plate (or lxlO 5 cells/well). Add 50 ul of the supernatant prepared by the protocol described in Example 31. Incubate at 37 degee C for 48 to 72 hr. As a positive control, 100 Unit/ml interferon gamma can be used which is known to activate U937 cells. Over 30 fold induction is typically observed in the positive control wells. SEAP assay the supernatant according to the protocol described in Example 37. Example 35: High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Neuronal Activity. When cells undergo differentiation and proliferation, a group of genes are activated through many different signal transduction pathways One of these genes, EGR1 (early growth response gene 1), is induced in various tissues and cell types upon activation The promoter of EGR1 is responsible for such induction Using the EGR1 promoter linked to reporter molecules, activation of cells can be assessed by polypeptide of the present invention Particularly, the following protocol is used to assess neuronal activity in PC 12 cell lines PC 12 cells (rat phenochromocytoma cells) are known to proliferate and/or differentiate by activation with a number of mitogens, such as TPA (tetradecanoyl phorbol acetate), NGF (nerve growth factor), and EGF (epidermal growth factor) The EGR1 gene expression is activated during this treatment Thus, by stably transfecting PC 12 cells with a constmct containing an EGR promoter linked to SEAP reporter, activation of PC 12 cells by polypeptide of the present invention can be assessed The EGR/SEAP reporter constmct can be assembled by the following protocol The EGR- 1 promoter sequence (-633 to +l)(Sakamoto K et al , Oncogene 6:867-871 (1991)) can be PCR amplified from human genomic DNA using the following primers 5' GCGCTCGAGGGATGACAGCGATAGAACCCCGG -3' (SEQ ID NO 924) 5' GCGAAGCTTCGCGACTCCCCGGATCCGCCTC-3' (SEQ ID NO 925) Using the GAS SEAP/Neo vector produced in Example 32, EGR1 amplified product can then be inserted into this vector Linearize the GAS SEAP/Neo vector using restriction enzymes Xhol/Hindlll, removing the GAS/SV40 stuffer Restπct the EGR1 amplified product with these same enzymes Ligate the vector and the EGR1 promoter To prepare 96 well-plates for cell culture, two mis of a coating solution ( 1 30 dilution of collagen type I (Upstate Biotech Inc Cat#08-1 15) in 30% ethanol (filter sterilized)) is added per one 10 cm plate or 50 ml per well of the 96-well plate, and allowed to air dry for 2 hr. PC12 cells are routinely grown in RPMI- 1640 medium (Bio Whittaker) containing 10% horse serum (JRH BIOSCIENCES, Cat. # 12449-78P), 5% heat- inactivated fetal bovine semm (FBS) supplemented with 100 units/ml penicillin and 100 ug/ml streptomycin on a precoated 10 cm tissue culture dish. One to four split is done every three to four days. Cells are removed from the plates by scraping and resuspended with pipetting up and down for more than 15 times. Transfect the EGR/SEAP/Neo construct into PC 12 using the Lipofectamine protocol described in Example 31. EGR-SEAP/PC12 stable cells are obtained by growing the cells in 300 ug/ml G418. The G418-free medium is used for routine growth but every one to two months, the cells should be re-grown in 300 ug/ml G418 for couple of passages. To assay for neuronal activity, a 10 cm plate with cells around 70 to 80% confluent is screened by removing the old medium. Wash the cells once with PBS (Phosphate buffered saline). Then starve the cells in low semm medium (RPMI-1640 containing 1% horse semm and 0.5% FBS with antibiotics) overnight. The next morning, remove the medium and wash the cells with PBS. Scrape off the cells from the plate, suspend the cells well in 2 ml low semm medium. Count the cell number and add more low semm medium to reach final cell density as 5x10^ cells/ml. Add 200 ul of the cell suspension to each well of 96-well plate (equivalent to 1x10^ cells/well). Add 50 ul supernatant produced by Example 31, 37 degree C for 48 to 72 hr. As a positive control, a growth factor known to activate PC 12 cells through EGR can be used, such as 50 ng/ul of Neuronal Growth Factor (NGF). Over fifty-fold induction of SEAP is typically seen in the positive control wells. SEAP assay the supernatant according to Example 37. Example 36: High-Throughput Screening Assay j or T-cell Activity NF-KB (Nuclear Factor KB) is a transcription factor activated by a wide variety of agents including the inflammatory cytokines IL-1 and TNF, CD30 and CD40. lymphotoxin-alpha and lymphotoxin-beta, by exposure to LPS or thrombin, and by expression of certain viral gene products. As a transcription factor, NF-KB regulates the expression of genes involved in immune cell activation, control of apoptosis (NF- KB appears to shield cells from apoptosis), B and T-cell development, anti-viral and antimicrobial responses, and multiple stress responses. In non-stimulated conditions, NF- KB is retained in the cytoplasm with I-KB (Inhibitor KB). However, upon stimulation, I- KB is phosphorylated and degraded, causing NF- KB to shuttle to the nucleus, thereby activating transcription of target genes. Target genes activated by NF- KB include IL-2, IL-6, GM-CSF, ICAM-1 and class 1 MHC. Due to its central role and ability to respond to a range of stimuli, reporter constmcts utilizing the NF-KB promoter element are used to screen the supematants produced in Example 31. Activators or inhibitors of NF-KB would be useful in treating, preventing, and/or diagnosing diseases. For example, inhibitors of NF-KB could be used to treat those diseases related to the acute or chronic activation of NF- KB. such as rheumatoid arthritis. To constmct a vector containing the NF-KB promoter element, a PCR based strategy is employed. The upstream primer contains four tandem copies of the NF- KB binding site (GGGGACTTTCCC) (SEQ ID NO:926), 18 bp of sequence complementary to the 5' end of the SV40 early promoter sequence, and is flanked with an Xhol site: 5 ' :GCGGCCTCGAGGGGACTTTCCCGGGGACTTTCCGGGGACTTTCCGGGAC TTTCCATCCTGCCATCTCAATTAG:3' (SEQ ID NO:927) The downstream primer is complementary to the 3' end of the SV40 promoter and is flanked with a Hind III site: 5':GCGGCAAGCTTTTTGCAAAGCCTAGGC:3' (SEQ ID NO:922) PCR amplification is performed using the SV40 promoter template present in the pB-gal:promoter plasmid obtained from Clontech. The resulting PCR fragment is digested with Xhol and Hind III and subcloned into BLSK2-. (Stratagene) Sequencing with the T7 and T3 pπmers confirms the insert contains the following sequence 5 ' CTCGAGGGGACTTTCCCGGGGACTTTCCGGGGACTTTCCGGGACTTTCC ATCTGCCATCTCAATTAGTCAGCAACCATAGTCCCGCCCCTAACTCCGCCC ATCCCGCCCCTAACTCCGCCCAGTTCCGCCCATTCTCCGCCCCATGGCTGA CTAATTTTTTTTATTTATGCAGAGGCCGAGGCCGCCTCGGCCTCTGAGCTA TTCCAGAAGTAGTGAGGAGGCTTTTTTGGAGGCCTAGGCTTTTGCAAAAA GCTT 3' (SEQ ID NO 928) Next, replace the SV40 minimal promoter element present in the pSEAP2- promoter plasmid (Clontech) with this NF-KB/SV40 fragment using Xhol and Hindlll However, this vector does not contain a neomycin resistance gene, and therefore, is not preferred for mammalian expression systems In order to generate stable mammalian cell lines, the NF-KB/SV40/SEAP cassette is removed from the above NF-KB/SEAP vector using restriction enzymes Sail and Notl, and inserted into a vector containing neomycin resistance Particularly, the NF-KB/SV40/SEAP cassette was inserted into pGFP-1 (Clontech), replacing the GFP gene, after restricting pGFP-1 with Sail and Notl Once NF-KB/SV40/SEAP/Neo vector is created, stable Jurkat T-cells are created and maintained according to the protocol described in Example 33 Similarly, the method for assaying supematants with these stable Jurkat T-cells is also descπbed in Example 33 As a positive control, exogenous TNF alpha (0 1,1, 10 ng) is added to wells H9. H10, and HI 1, with a 5-10 fold activation typically observed Example 37 Assay for SEAP A ctivi tv As a reporter molecule for the assays described in Examples 33-36, SEAP activity is assayed using the Tropix Phospho-hght Kit (Cat BP-400) according to the following general procedure The Tropix Phospho-hght Kit supplies the Dilution, Assay, and Reaction Buffers used below Prime a dispenser with the 2 5x Dilution Buffer and dispense 15 ul of 2 5x dilution buffer into Optiplates containing 35 ul of a supernatant. Seal the plates with a plastic sealer and incubate at 65 degree C for 30 min. Separate the Optiplates to avoid uneven heating. Cool the samples to room temperature for 15 minutes. Empty the dispenser and prime with the Assay Buffer. Add 50 ml Assay Buffer and incubate at room temperature 5 min. Empty the dispenser and prime with the Reaction Buffer (see the table below). Add 50 ul Reaction Buffer and incubate at room temperature for 20 minutes. Since the intensity of the chemiluminescent signal is time dependent, and it takes about 10 minutes to read 5 plates on luminometer, one should treat 5 plates at each time and start the second set 10 minutes later. Read the relative light unit in the luminometer. Set H12 as blank, and print the results. An increase in chemiluminescence indicates reporter activity. Reaction Buffer Formulation: # of plates Rxn buffer diluent (ml) CSPD (ml) 10 60 3 11 65 3.25 12 70 3.5 13 75 3.75 14 80 4 15 85 4.25 16 90 4.5 17 95 4.75 18 100 5 19 105 5.25 0 110 5.5 1 115 5.75 2 120 6 3 125 6.25 24 130 6.5 25 135 6.75 26 140 7 27 145 7.25 28 150 7.5 29 155 7.75 30 160 8 31 165 8.25 32 170 8.5 33 175 8.75 34 180 9 35 185 9.25 36 190 9.5 37 195 9.75 38 200 10 39 205 10.25 40 210 10.5 41 215 10.75 42 220 1 1 43 225 1 1.25 44 230 1 1.5 45 235 1 1.75 46 240 12 47 245 12.25 48 250 12.5 49 255 12.75 50 260 13 Example 38: High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Changes in Small Molecule Concentration and Membrane Permeability Binding of a ligand to a receptor is known to alter intracellular levels of small molecules, such as calcium, potassium, sodium, and pH, as well as alter membrane potential These alterations can be measured in an assay to identify supematants which bind to receptors of a particular cell. Although the following protocol describes an assay for calcium, this protocol can easily be modified to detect changes in potassium, sodium, pH, membrane potential, or any other small molecule which is detectable by a fluorescent probe. The following assay uses Fluorometric Imaging Plate Reader ("FLIPR") to measure changes in fluorescent molecules (Molecular Probes) that bind small molecules Clearly, any fluorescent molecule detecting a small molecule can be used instead of the calcium fluorescent molecule, fluo-4 (Molecular Probes, Inc.; catalog no. F- 14202), used here. For adherent cells, seed the cells at 10,000 -20,000 cells/well in a Co-star black 96-well plate with clear bottom. The plate is incubated in a CO incubator for 20 hours The adherent cells are washed two times in Biotek washer with 200 ul of HBSS (Hank's Balanced Salt Solution) leaving 100 ul of buffer after the final wash. A stock solution of 1 mg/ml fluo-4 is made in 10% pluronic acid DMSO. To load the cells with fluo-4 , 50 ul of 12 ug/ml fluo-4 is added to each well. The plate is incubated at 37 degrees C in a CO? incubator for 60 min. The plate is washed four times in the Biotek washer with HBSS leaving 100 ul of buffer. For non-adherent cells, the cells are spun down from culture media. Cells are re-suspended to 2-5xl0 6 cells/ml with HBSS in a 50-ml conical tube. 4 ul of 1 mg/ml fluo-4 solution in 10% pluronic acid DMSO is added to each ml of cell suspension. The tube is then placed in a 37 degrees C water bath for 30-60 min. The cells are washed twice with HBSS, resuspended to 1 x10° cells/ml, and dispensed into a microplate, 100 ul/well. The plate is centrifuged at 1000 φm for 5 min. The plate is then washed once in Denley Cell Wash with 200 ul, followed by an aspiration step to 100 ul final volume. For a non-cell based assay, each well contams a fluorescent molecule, such as fluo-4 The supernatant is added to the well, and a change in fluorescence is detected To measure the fluorescence of intracellular calcium, the FLIPR is set for the following parameters ( 1 ) System gain is 300-800 mW, (2) Exposure time is 0 4 second. (3) Camera F/stop is F/2, (4) Excitation is 488 nm, (5) Emission is 530 nm, and (6) Sample addition is 50 ul Increased emission at 530 nm indicates an extracellular signaling event caused by the a molecule, either polypeptide of the present invention or a molecule induced by polypeptide of the present invention, which has resulted in an increase in the intracellular Ca ++ concentration. Example 40 High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying 7 / ostne Kinase Activity The Protein Tyrosine Kinases (PTK) represent a diverse group of transmembrane and cytoplasmic kinases Within the Receptor Protein Tyrosine Kinase RPTK) group are receptors for a range of mitogenic and metabolic growth factors including the PDGF, FGF, EGF, NGF, HGF and Insulin receptor subfamilies. In addition there are a large family of RPTKs for which the corresponding ligand is unknown Ligands for RPTKs include mainly secreted small proteins, but also membrane-bound and extracellular matrix proteins Activation of RPTK by ligands involves ligand-mediated receptor dimeπzation, resulting in transphosphorylation of the receptor subunits and activation of the cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases The cytoplasmic tyrosine kinases include receptor associated tyrosine kinases of the src-family (e g , src. yes, lck, lyn, fyn) and non-receptor linked and cytosohc protein tyrosine kinases, such as the Jak family, members of which mediate signal transduction triggered by the cytokine superfamily of receptors (e g , the Interleukins, Interferons, GM-CSF, and Leptin) Because of the wide range of known factors capable of stimulating tyrosine kinase activity, identifying whether polypeptide of the present invention or a molecule induced by polypeptide of the present invention is capable of activating tyrosine kinase signal transduction pathways is of interest Therefore, the following protocol is designed to identify such molecules capable of activating the tvrosine kinase signal transduction pathways Seed target cells (e g , primary keratmocytes) at a density of approximately 25,000 cells per well in a 96 well Loprodyne Silent Screen Plates purchased from Nalge Nunc (Naperville, IL) The plates are steπhzed with two 30 mmute πnses with 100% ethanol, rinsed with water and dried overnight Some plates are coated for 2 hr with 100 ml of cell culture grade type I collagen (50 mg/ml), gelatin (2%) or polylysine (50 mg/ml), all of which can be purchased from Sigma Chemicals (St Louis, MO) or 10%> Matπgel purchased from Becton Dickinson (Bedford,MA), or calf semm, rinsed with PBS and stored at 4 degree C Cell growth on these plates is assayed by seeding 5,000 cells/well in growth medium and indirect quantitation of cell number through use of alamarBlue as descπbed by the manufacturer Alamar Biosciences, Inc (Sacramento, CA) after 48 hr Falcon plate covers #3071 from Becton Dickinson (Bedford,MA) are used to cover the Loprodyne Silent Screen Plates Falcon Microtest III cell culture plates can also be used in some proliferation experiments To prepare extracts, A431 cells are seeded onto the nylon membranes of Loprodyne plates (20,000/200ml/well) and cultured overnight in complete medium Cells are quiesced by incubation in serum-free basal medium for 24 hr After 5-20 minutes treatment with EGF (60ng/ml) or 50 ul of the supernatant produced in Example 31 , the medium was removed and 100 ml of extraction buffer ((20 mM HEPES pH 7 5, 0 15 M NaCl, 1% Triton X-100, 0 1 % SDS, 2 mM Na3VO4, 2 mM Na4P2O7 and a cocktail of protease inhibitors (# 1836170) obtained from Boeheπnger Mannheim (Indianapolis, IN) is added to each well and the plate is shaken on a rotating shaker for 5 minutes at 4°C The plate is then placed in a vacuum transfer manifold and the extract filtered through the 0 45 mm membrane bottoms of each well using house vacuum Extracts are collected in a 96-well catch/assay plate in the bottom of the vacuum manifold and immediately placed on ice To obtain extracts clarified by centrifugation. the content of each well, after detergent solubilization tor 5 minutes, is removed and centrifuged roi 15 minutes at 4 degree C at 16.000 x g. Test the filtered extracts for levels of tyrosine kinase activity. Although many methods of detecting tyrosine kinase activity are known, one method is described here. Generally, the tyrosine kinase activity of a supernatant is evaluated by determining its ability to phosphorylate a tyrosine residue on a specific substrate (a biotinylated peptide). Biotinylated peptides that can be used for this puφose include PSK1 (corresponding to amino acids 6-20 of the cell division kinase cdc2-p34) and PSK2 (corresponding to amino acids 1- 17 of gastrin). Both peptides are substrates for a range of tyrosine kinases and are available from Boehringer Mannheim. The tyrosine kinase reaction is set up by adding the following components in order. First, add lOul of 5uM Biotinylated Peptide, then lOul ATP/Mg + (5mM ATP/50mM MgCl 2 ), then lOul of 5x Assay Buffer (40mM imidazole hydrochloride, pH7.3, 40 mM beta-glycerophosphate, ImM EGTA, lOOmM MgCl 2 , 5 mM MnCl 0.5 mg/ml BSA), then 5ul of Sodium Vanadate(lmM), and then 5ul of water. Mix the components gently and preincubate the reaction mix at 30 degree C for 2 min. Initial the reaction by adding lOul of the control enzyme or the filtered supernatant. The tyrosine kinase assay reaction is then terminated by adding 10 ul of 120mm EDTA and place the reactions on ice. Tyrosine kinase activity is determined by transferring 50 ul aliquot of reaction mixture to a microtiter plate (MTP) module and incubating at 37 degree C for 20 min. This allows the streptavadin coated 96 well plate to associate with the biotinylated peptide. Wash the MTP module with 300ul/well of PBS four times. Next add 75 ul of anti-phospotyrosine antibody conjugated to horse radish peroxidase(anti-P-Tyr- POD(0.5u/ml)) to each well and incubate at 37 degree C for one hour. Wash the well as above. Next add lOOul of peroxidase substrate solution (Boehringer Mannheim) and incubate at room temperature for at least 5 mins (up to 30 min). Measure the absorbance of the sample at 405 nm by using ELISA reader. The level of bound peroxidase activity is quantitated using an ELISA reader and reflects the level of tyrosine kinase activity. Example 41: High-Throughput Screening Assay Identifying Phosphorylation Activity As a potential alternative and/or compliment to the assay of protein tyrosine kinase activity described in Example 40, an assay which detects activation (phosphorylation) of major intracellular signal transduction intermediates can also be used. For example, as described below one particular assay can detect tyrosine phosphorylation of the Erk-1 and Erk-2 kinases. However, phosphorylation of other molecules, such as Raf. JNK, p38 MAP. Map kinase kinase (MEK), MEK kinase. Src, Muscle specific kinase (MuSK). IRAK, Tec. and Janus, as well as any other phosphoserine, phosphotyrosine. or phosphothreonine molecule, can be detected by substituting these molecules for Erk-1 or Erk-2 in the following assay. Specifically, assay plates are made by coating the wells of a 96-well ELISA plate with 0.1ml of protein G (lug/ml) for 2 hr at room temp, (RT). The plates are then rinsed with PBS and blocked with 3% BSA/PBS for 1 hr at RT. The protein G plates are then treated with 2 commercial monoclonal antibodies (lOOng/well) against Erk- 1 and Erk-2 (1 hr at RT) (Santa Cmz Biotechnology). (To detect other molecules, this step can easily be modified by substituting a monoclonal antibody detecting any of the above described molecules.) After 3-5 rinses with PBS, the plates are stored at 4 degree C until use. A431 cells are seeded at 20,000/well in a 96-well Loprodyne filteφlate and cultured overnight in growth medium. The cells are then starved for 48 hr in basal medium (DMEM) and then treated with EGF (6ng/well) or 50 ul of the supematants obtained in Example 31 for 5-20 minutes. The cells are then solubilized and extracts filtered directly into the assay plate. After incubation with the extract for 1 hr at RT, the wells are again rinsed. As a positive control, a commercial preparation of MAP kinase (lOng/well) is used in place of A431 extract. Plates are then treated with a commercial polyclonal (rabbit) antibody (lug/ml) which specifically recognizes the phosphorylated epitope of the Erk-1 and Erk-2 kinases ( 1 hr at RT) This antibody is biotinylated by standard procedures The bound polyclonal antibody is then quantitated by successive incubations with Europium-streptavidin and Europium fluorescence enhancing reagent in the Wallac DELFIA instmment (time-resolved fluorescence). An increased fluorescent signal over background indicates a phosphorylation by polypeptide of the present invention or a molecule induced by polypeptide of the present invention Example 42 Assay for the Stimulation of Bone Marrow CD 34+ Cell Proliferation This assay is based on the ability of human CD34+ to proliferate in the presence of hematopoietic growth factors and evaluates the ability of isolated polypeptides expressed in mammalian cells to stimulate proliferation of CD34+ cells It has been previously shown that most mature precursors will respond to only a single signal More immature precursors require at least two signals to respond Therefore, to test the effect of polypeptides on hematopoietic activity of a wide range of progenitor cells, the assay contains a given polypeptide in the presence or absence of other hematopoietic growth factors Isolated cells are cultured for 5 days in the presence of Stem Cell Factor (SCF) in combination with tested sample SCF alone has a very limited effect on the proliferation of bone marrow (BM) cells, acting in such conditions only as a "survival" factor However, combined with any factor exhibiting stimulatory effect on these cells (e g , IL-3), SCF will cause a synergistic effect Therefore, if the tested polypeptide has a stimulatory effect on a hematopoietic progenitors, such activity can be easily detected Since normal BM cells have a low level of cycling cells, it is likely that any inhibitory effect of a given polypeptide, or agonists or antagonists thereof, might not be detected Accordingly, assays for an inhibitory effect on progenitors is preferably tested in cells that are first subjected to in vit o stimulation with SCF+IL+3. and then contacted with the compound that is being evaluated for inhibition of such induced proliferation Briefly, CD34+ cells are isolated using methods known in the art The cells are thawed and resuspended in medium (QBSF 60 serum-free medium with 1% L- glutamine (500ml) Quality Biological. Inc.. Gaithersburg, MD Cat# 160-204- 101 ). After several gentle centrifugation steps at 200 x g, cells are allowed to rest for one hour. The cell count is adjusted to 2.5 x 10 3 cells/ml. During this time, 100 μl of sterile water is added to the peripheral wells of a 96-well plate. The cytokines that can be tested with a given polypeptide in this assay is rhSCF (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, Cat# 255-SC) at 50 ng/ml alone and in combination with rhSCF and rhIL-3 (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, Cat# 203-ML) at 30 ng/ml. After one hour, 10 μl of prepared cytokines, 50 μl of the supematants prepared in Example 31 (supematants at 1 :2 dilution = 50 μl) and 20 μl of diluted cells are added to the media which is already present in the wells to allow for a final total volume of 100 μl. The plates are then placed in a 37°C/5% CO incubator for five days. Eighteen hours before the assay is harvested, 0.5 μCi/well of [3H] Thymidine is added in a 10 μl volume to each well to determine the proliferation rate. The experiment is terminated by harvesting the cells from each 96-well plate to a filtermat using the Tomtec Harvester 96. After harvesting, the filtermats are dried, trimmed and placed into OmniFilter assemblies consisting of one OmniFilter plate and one OmniFilter Tray. 60 μl Microscint is added to each well and the plate sealed with TopSeal-A press-on sealing film A bar code 15 sticker is affixed to the first plate for counting. The sealed plates is then loaded and the level of radioactivity determined via the Packard Top Count and the printed data collected for analysis. The level of radioactivity reflects the amount of cell proliferation. The studies described in this example test the activity of a given polypeptide to stimulate bone marrow CD34+ cell proliferation. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. As a nonlimiting example, potential antagonists tested in this assay would be expected to inhibit cell proliferation in the presence of cytokines and/or to increase the inhibition of cell proliferation in the presence of cytokines and a given polypeptide. In contrast, potential agonists tested in this assay would be expected to enhance cell proliferation and/or to decrease the inhibition of cell proliferation in the presence of cytokines and a given polypeptide. The ability of a gene to stimulate the proliferation of bone marrow CD34+ cells indicates that polynucleotides and polypeptides corresponding to the gene are useful for the diagnosis and treatment of disorders affecting the immune system and hematopoiesis. Representative uses are described in the "Immune Activity" and "Infectious Disease" sections above, and elsewhere herein. Example 43: Assay for Extracellular Matrix Enhanced Cell Response (EMECR) The objective of the Extracellular Matrix Enhanced Cell Response (EMECR) assay is to identify gene products (e.g., isolated polypeptides) that act on the hematopoietic stem cells in the context of the extracellular matrix (ECM) induced signal. Cells respond to the regulatory factors in the context of signal(s) received from the surrounding microenvironment. For example, fibroblasts, and endothelial and epithelial stem cells fail to replicate in the absence of signals from the ECM. Hematopoietic stem cells can undergo self-renewal in the bone marrow, but not in in vitro suspension culture. The ability of stem cells to undergo self-renewal in vitro is dependent upon their interaction with the stromal cells and the ECM protein fibronectin (fn). Adhesion of cells to fn is mediated by the αs.βi and α .βι integrin receptors, which are expressed by human and mouse hematopoietic stem cells. The factor(s) which integrate with the ECM environment and responsible for stimulating stem cell self-renewal has not yet been identified. Discovery of such factors should be of great interest in gene therapy and bone marrow transplant applications Briefly, polystyrene, non tissue culture treated, 96-well plates are coated with fn fragment at a coating concentration of 0.2 μg/ cm " . Mouse bone marrow cells are plated ( 1 ,000 cells/well ) in 0.2 ml of serum-free medium. Cells cultured in the presence of IL-3 ( 5 ng/ml ) + SCF ( 50 ng/ml ) would serve as the positive control, conditions under which little self-renewal but pronounced differentiation of the stem cells is to be expected. Gene products of the invention (e.g., including, but not limited to, polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention, and supematants produced in Example 31), are tested with appropriate negative controls in the presence and absence of SCF(5.0 ng/ml), where test factor supemates represent 10% of the total assay volume. The plated cells are then allowed to grow by incubating in a low oxygen environment ( 5% CO , 7% O 2 , and 88%> N 2 ) tissue culture incubator for 7 days. The number of proliferating cells within the wells is then quantitated by measuring thymidine incoφoration into cellular DNA. Verification of the positive hits in the assay will require phenotypic characterization of the cells, which can be accomplished by scaling up of the culture system and using appropriate antibody reagents against cell surface antigens and FACScan. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. If a particular polypeptide of the present invention is found to be a stimulator of hematopoietic progenitors, polynucleotides and polypeptides corresponding to the gene encoding said polypeptide may be useful for the diagnosis and treatment of disorders affecting the immune system and hematopoiesis. Representative uses are described in the "Immune Activity" and "Infectious Disease" sections above, and elsewhere herein. The gene product may also be useful in the expansion of stem cells and committed progenitors of various blood lineages, and in the differentiation and/or proliferation of various cell types. Additionally, the polynucleotides and/or polypeptides of the gene of interest and/or agonists and/or antagonists thereof, may also be employed to inhibit the proliferation and differentiation of hematopoietic cells and therefore may be employed to protect bone marrow stem cells from chemotherapeutic agents during chemotherapy. This antiproliferative effect may allow administration of higher doses of chemotherapeutic agents and. therefore, more effective chemotherapeutic treatment. Moreover, polynucleotides and polypeptides corresponding to the gene of interest may also be useful for the treatment and diagnosis of hematopoietic related disorders such as, for example, anemia, pancytopenia, leukopenia, thrombocytopenia or leukemia since stromal cells are important in the production of cells of hematopoietic lineages. The uses include bone marrow cell ex-vivo culture, bone marrow transplantation, bone marrow reconstitution, radiotherapy or chemotherapy of neoplasia. Example 44: Human Dermal Fibroblast and Aortic Smooth Muscle Cell Proliferation The polypeptide of interest is added to cultures of normal human dermal fibroblasts (NHDF) and human aortic smooth muscle cells (AoSMC) and two co- assays are performed with each sample. The first assay examines the effect of the polypeptide of interest on the proliferation of normal human dermal fibroblasts (NHDF) or aortic smooth muscle cells (AoSMC). Aberrant growth of fibroblasts or smooth muscle cells is a part of several pathological processes, including fibrosis, and restenosis. The second assay examines IL6 production by both NHDF and SMC. IL6 production is an indication of functional activation. Activated cells will have increased production of a number of cytokines and other factors, which can result in a proinflammatory or immunomodulatory outcome. Assays are mn with and without co-TNFa stimulation, in order to check for costimulatory or inhibitory activity. Briefly, on day 1 , 96-well black plates are set up with 1000 cells/well (NHDF) or 2000 cells/well (AoSMC) in 100 μl culture media. NHDF culture media contains: Clonetics FB basal media, 1 mg/ml hFGF, 5mg/ml insulin, 50mg/ml gentamycin, 2%FBS, while AoSMC culture media contains Clonetics SM basal media, 0.5 μg/ml hEGF, 5mg/ml insulin, 1 μg/ml hFGF, 50mg/ml gentamycin, 50 μg/ml Amphotericin B, 5%FBS. After incubation at 37°C for at least 4-5 hours, culture media is aspirated and replaced with growth arrest media. Growth arrest media for NHDF contains fibroblast basal media. 50mg/ml gentamycin, 2% FBS, while growth arrest media for AoSMC contains SM basal media. 50mg/ml gentamycin. 50μg/ml Amphotericin B. 0.4% FBS. Incubate at 37°C until day 2. On day 2, serial dilutions and templates of the polypeptide of interest are designed such that they always include media controls and known-protein controls. For both stimulation and inhibition experiments, proteins are diluted in growth arrest media. For inhibition experiments, TNFa is added to a final concentration of 2ng/ml (NHDF) or 5ng/ml (AoSMC). Add 1/3 vol media containing controls or polypeptides of the present invention and incubate at 37°C/5%> CO? until day 5. Transfer 60μl from each well to another labeled 96-well plate, cover with a plate-sealer, and store at 4°C until Day 6 (for IL6 ELISA). To the remaining 100 μl in the cell culture plate, aseptically add Alamar Blue in an amount equal to 10% of the culture volume ( lOμl). Return plates to incubator for 3 to 4 hours. Then measure fluorescence with excitation at 530nm and emission at 590nm using the CytoFluor. This yields the growth stimulation/inhibition data. On day 5, the IL6 ELISA is performed by coating a 96 well plate with 50-100 ul/well of Anti-Human IL6 Monoclonal antibody diluted in PBS, pH 7.4, incubate ON at room temperature. On day 6, empty the plates into the sink and blot on paper towels. Prepare Assay Buffer containing PBS with 4% BSA. Block the plates with 200 μl/well of Pierce Super Block blocking buffer in PBS for 1-2 hr and then wash plates with wash buffer (PBS, 0.05% Tween-20). Blot plates on paper towels. Then add 50 μl/well of diluted Anti-Human IL-6 Monoclonal, Biotin-labeled antibody at 0.50 mg/ml. Make dilutions of IL-6 stock in media (30, 10, 3, 1, 0.3, 0 ng/ml). Add duplicate samples to top row of plate. Cover the plates and incubate for 2 hours at RT on shaker. Plates are washed with wash buffer and blotted on paper towels. Dilute EU-labeled Streptavidin 1 : 1000 in Assay buffer, and add 100 μl/well. Cover the plate and incubate 1 h at RT. Plates are again washed with wash buffer and blotted on paper towels. Add 100 μl/well of Enhancement Solution and shake for 5 minutes. Read the plate on the Wallac DELFIA Fluorometer. Readings from triplicate samples in each assay are tabulated and averaged. A positive result in this assay suggests AoSMC cell proliferation and that the polypeptide of the present invention may be involved in dermal fibroblast proliferation and/or smooth muscle cell proliferation. A positive result also suggests many potential uses of polypeptides, polynucleotides, agonists and/or antagonists of the polynucleotide/polypeptide of the present invention which gives a positive result. For example, inflammation and immune responses, wound healing, and angiogenesis, as detailed throughout this specification. Particularly, polypeptides of the present invention and polynucleotides of the present invention may be used in wound healing and dermal regeneration, as well as the promotion of vasculargenesis, both of the blood vessels and lymphatics. The growth of vessels can be used in the treatment of, for example, cardiovascular diseases. Additionally, antagonists of polypeptides and polynucleotides of the invention may be useful in treating diseases, disorders, and/or conditions which involve angiogenesis by acting as an anti-vascular (e.g., anti- angiogenesis). These diseases, disorders, and/or conditions are known in the art and/or are described herein, such as, for example, malignancies, solid tumors, benign tumors, for example hemangiomas, acoustic neuromas, neurofibromas, trachomas, and pyogenic granulomas; artheroscleric plaques; ocular angiogenic diseases, for example, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, macular degeneration, corneal graft rejection, neovascular glaucoma, retrolental fibroplasia, rubeosis, retinoblastoma, uvietis and Pterygia (abnormal blood vessel growth) of the eye; rheumatoid arthritis; psoriasis; delayed wound healing; endometriosis; vasculogenesis; granulations; hypertrophic scars (keloids); nonunion fractures; scleroderma; trachoma; vascular adhesions; myocardial angiogenesis; coronary collaterals; cerebral collaterals; arteriovenous malformations; ischemic limb angiogenesis; Osier-Webber Syndrome; plaque neovascularization; telangiectasia; hemophiliac joints; angiofibroma; fibromuscular dysplasia; wound granulation; Crohn's disease; and atherosclerosis. Moreover, antagonists of polypeptides and polynucleotides of the invention may be useful in treating anti-hypeφroliferative diseases and/or anti-inflammatory known in the art and/or described herein. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. Example 45: Cellular Adhesion Molecule (CAM) Expression on Endothelial Cells The recruitment of lymphocytes to areas of inflammation and angiogenesis involves specific receptor-ligand interactions between cell surface adhesion molecules (CAMs) on lymphocytes and the vascular endothelium. The adhesion process, in both normal and pathological settings, follows a multi-step cascade that involves intercellular adhesion molecule- 1 (ICAM- 1 ), vascular cell adhesion molecule-1 (VCAM- 1 ). and endothelial leukocyte adhesion molecule-1 (E-selectin) expression on endothelial cells (EC). The expression of these molecules and others on the vascular endothelium determines the efficiency with which leukocytes may adhere to the local vasculature and extravasate into the local tissue during the development of an inflammatory response. The local concentration of cytokines and growth factor participate in the modulation of the expression of these CAMs. Briefly, endothelial cells (e.g., Human Umbilical Vein Endothelial cells (HUVECs)) are grown in a standard 96 well plate to confluence, growth medium is removed from the cells and replaced with 100 μl of 199 Medium ( 10% fetal bovine semm (FBS)). Samples for testing and positive or negative controls are added to the plate in triplicate (in 10 μl volumes). Plates are then incubated at 37°C for either 5 h (selectin and integrin expression) or 24 h (integrin expression only). Plates are aspirated to remove medium and 100 μl of 0.1% paraformaldehyde-PBS(with Ca++ and Mg++) is added to each well. Plates are held at 4°C for 30 min. Fixative is removed from the wells and wells are washed IX with PBS(+Ca.Mg) + 0.5% BSA and drained. 10 μl of diluted primary antibody is added to the test and control wells. Anti-ICAM-1 -Biotin, Anti- VCAM-1 -Biotin and Anti-E-selectin-Biotin are used at a concentration of 10 μg/ml ( 1 : 10 dilution of 0.1 mg/ml stock antibody). Cells are incubated at 37°C for 30 min. in a humidified environment. Wells are washed three times with PBS(+Ca,Mg) + 0.5% BSA. 20 μl of diluted ExtrAvidin-Alkaline Phosphotase (1 :5,000 dilution, refered to herein as the working dilution) are added to each well and incubated at 37°C for 30 min Wells are washed three times with PBS(+Ca,Mg)+0 5% BSA Dissolve 1 tablet of p-Nitrophenol Phosphate pNPP per 5 ml of glycme buffer (pH 10 4) 100 μl of pNPP substrate in glycine buffer is added to each test well Standard wells in triplicate are prepared from the working dilution of the ExtrAvidin-Alkahne Phosphotase in glycine buffer 1 5,000 (10°) > 10 ° 5 > 10 ' > 10 ' D 5 μl of each dilution is added to triplicate wells and the resulting AP content in each well is 5 50 ng, 1 74 ng, 0 55 ng, 0 18 ng 100 μl of pNNP reagent is then added to each of the standard wells The plate is incubated at 37°C for 4h A volume of 50 μl of 3M NaOH is added to all wells The plate is read on a plate reader at 405 nm using the background subtraction option on blank wells filled with glycine buffer only Additionally, the template is set up to indicate the concentration of AP- conjugate in each standard well [ 5 50 ng. 1 74 ng, 0 55 ng, 0 18 ng] Results are indicated as amount of bound AP-conjugate in each sample Example 46 Alamar Blue Endothelial Cells Prohjer ation Assav This assay may be used to quantitatively determine protein mediated inhibition of bFGF-induced proliferation of Bovine Lymphatic Endothelial Cells (LECs), Bovine Aortic Endothelial Cells (BAECs) or Human Microvascular Uterine Myometrial Cells (UTMECs) This assay incorporates a fluorometric growth indicator based on detection of metabolic activity A standard Alamar Blue Proliferation Assay is prepared in EGM-2MV with 10 ng /ml of bFGF added as a source of endothelial cell stimulation This assay may be used with a variety of endothelial cells with slight changes in growth medium and cell concentration Dilutions of the protein batches to be tested are diluted as appropπate Semm-free medium (GIBCO SFM) without bFGF is used as a non-stimulated control and Angiostatin or TSP-1 are included as a known inhibitory controls Briefly, LEC, BAECs or UTMECs are seeded in growth media at a density of 5000 to 2000 cells/well in a 96 well plate and placed at 37-C overnight After the overnight incubation of the cells, the growth media is removed and replaced with GIBCO EC-SFM. The cells are treated with the appropriate dilutions of the protein of interest or control protein sample(s) (prepared in SFM ) in triplicate wells with additional bFGF to a concentration of 10 ng/ ml. Once the cells have been treated with the samples, the plate(s) is/are placed back in the 37° C incubator for three days. After three days 10 ml of stock alamar blue (Biosource Cat# DAL 1 100) is added to each well and the plate(s) is/are placed back in the 37°C incubator for four hours. The plate(s) are then read at 530nm excitation and 590nm emission using the CytoFluor fluorescence reader. Direct output is recorded in relative fluorescence units. Alamar blue is an oxidation-reduction indicator that both fluoresces and changes color in response to chemical reduction of growth medium resulting from cell growth. As cells grow in culture, innate metabolic activity results in a chemical reduction of the immediate surrounding environment. Reduction related to growth causes the indicator to change from oxidized (non-fluorescent blue) form to reduced (fluorescent red) form. i.e. stimulated proliferation will produce a stronger signal and inhibited proliferation will produce a weaker signal and the total signal is proportional to the total number of cells as well as their metabolic activity. The background level of activity is observed with the starvation medium alone. This is compared to the output observed from the positive control samples (bFGF in growth medium) and protein dilutions. Example 47: Detection of Inhibition of a Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction This assay can be used to detect and evaluate inhibition of a Mixed Lymphocyte Reaction (MLR) by gene products (e.g., isolated polypeptides). Inhibition of a MLR may be due to a direct effect on cell proliferation and viability, modulation of costimulatory molecules on interacting cells, modulation of adhesiveness between lymphocytes and accessory cells, or modulation of cytokine production by accessory cells. Multiple cells may be targeted by these polypeptides since the peripheral blood mononuclear fraction used in this assay includes T. B and natural killer lymphocytes, as well as monocytes and dendritic cells. Polypeptides of interest found to inhibit the MLR may find application in diseases associated with lymphocyte and monocyte activation or proliferation. These include, but are not limited to, diseases such as asthma, arthritis, diabetes, inflammatory skin conditions, psoriasis, eczema, systemic lupus erythematosus, multiple sclerosis, glomerulonephritis, inflammatory bowel disease, crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, arteriosclerosis, cirrhosis, graft vs. host disease, host vs. graft disease, hepatitis, leukemia and lymphoma. Briefly, PBMCs from human donors are purified by density gradient centrifugation using Lymphocyte Separation Medium (LSM ® , density 1.0770 g/ml, Organon Teknika Coφoration. West Chester. PA). PBMCs from two donors are adjusted to 2 x 10 6 cells/ml in RPMI- 1640 (Life Technologies, Grand Island, NY) supplemented with 10% FCS and 2 mM glutamine. PBMCs from a third donor is adjusted to 2 x 10 " cells/ml. Fifty microliters of PBMCs from each donor is added to wells of a 96-well round bottom microtiter plate. Dilutions of test materials (50 μl) is added in triplicate to microtiter wells. Test samples (of the protein of interest) are added for final dilution of 1 :4; rhuIL-2 (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, MN, catalog number 202-IL) is added to a final concentration of 1 μg/ml; anti-CD4 mAb (R&D Systems, clone 34930.1 1, catalog number MAB379) is added to a final concentration of 10 μg/ml. Cells are cultured for 7-8 days at 37°C in 5% CO 2 , and 1 μC of [ 3 H] thymidine is added to wells for the last 16 hrs of culture. Cells are harvested and thymidine incoφoration determined using a Packard TopCount. Data is expressed as the mean and standard deviation of triplicate determinations. Samples of the protein of interest are screened in separate experiments and compared to the negative control treatment, anti-CD4 mAb, which inhibits proliferation of lymphocytes and the positive control treatment, IL-2 (either as recombinant material or supernatant), which enhances proliferation of lymphocytes. One skilled in the art could easily modify the exemplified studies to test the activity of polynucleotides (e.g., gene therapy), antibodies, agonists, and/or antagonists and fragments and variants thereof. It will be clear that the invention may be practiced otherwise than as particularly described in the foregoing description and examples Numerous modifications and vaπations of the present invention are possible in light of the above teachings and. therefore, are within the scope of the appended claims The entire disclosure of each document cited (including patents, patent applications, journal articles, abstracts, laboratory manuals, books, or other disclosures) in the Background of the Invention, Detailed Description, and Examples is hereby incoφorated herein by reference Further, the hard copy of the sequence listing submitted herewith and the corresponding computer readable form are both incoφorated herein by reference in their entireties Moreover, the hard copy of and the coπesponding computer readable form of the Sequence Listing of Serial No 60/124.270 are also incoφorated herein by reference in their entireties INDICATIONS RELATING TO \ DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bts ) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓΓ Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | [ Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and countn i 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United Slates of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209059 C ADDITIONAL This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE* if the mdicatw are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS 1/røιe blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (spec the general nature of the indications eg Accession Number of Deposit ) For International Bureau use onlv | \ This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authorized officer Authorized officer Form PCT RO/134 (Julv 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209059 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authoπzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a wπtten statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office ithout having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected pπor to the grant of a patent, or pπor to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made ailable to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209059 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant ' s Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM For receiv ma Office use onl v For International Bureau use onl v | I This sheet was recen ed with the international application D This sheet was received bv the International Bureau on' Authorized officer Authorized officer Form PCT R0/134 (Julv 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209060 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authoπzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected pπor to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209060 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/T<O/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. A3 Applicant s or agent s tile International application relerence number PA105PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule ] 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page 71 N/A B. IDENTmCATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address ot depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209061 C. ADDITIONAL if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ιfιheιnώcatιonsarenoιforalldesιgnatedStates) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF lNOlCAΥlONS(lea\eblankιfnotapplιcable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general namre of the indications e g Accession Number of Deposit ) ForreceivinsOffice useonlv For International Bureau use onlv I This sheet was received with the international application D This sheet was received bv the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/R0/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209061 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authoπzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected pπor to the grant of a patent, or pπor to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert m the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209061 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. L L Applicant s or agent s file ; International application 1 } U*J U U f reference number PA105PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM ( PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page 71 .ne N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓΓ Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet I I Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas. Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209062 C. D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ιfthe ιndιcaιιonsarenotforalldesιgnatedStates) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify- the general nature of the indications e. , "Accession Number of Deposit") ForreceivincOfficc useonlv For International Bureau use onlv | I This sheet was received with the international application D This sheet was received bv the International Bureau on: Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT R0/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209062 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the fumishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209062 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 . | l,innPe N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet J Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209063 C. Thisinformationiscontinuedonanadditional sheet if " J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are notfor all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FϋRNISHING OFINDICATIONS C/raι- Wflπλι//ιo;npp/ιcαW. J The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of tlie indications e g Accession Number of Deposit i For receiving Office use only For International Bureau use oπlv j I This sheet was received with the international application □ This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209063 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authoπzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a wπtten statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected pπor to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209063 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant s or aεent s tile International application ' reference number PA105PCT JNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule I3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 7 hne N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209064 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS ifnot pplicable) This information iscontinuedonan additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ιfιhe ιndιcaιιonsarenotforalldesιgnaledStates) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONSf/--αv--Wfl/w.ι/;røιβp/>/ιcαo/fl The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g Accession Number of Deposit ) Forrcceiv ins Office use onl v Forlnternational Bureau use onlv | | This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209064 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the fumishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209064 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 , |,ne N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet I I Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209065 C. ADDITIONAL if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet V~ D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OFINDICATIONS r/eαvetøonλz/πσ/αp,7..cαtø--) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g . "Accession Number oj Deposit") For International Bureau use oπlv [ | This sheet was received with the international application D This sheet was received bv the International Bureau c Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209065 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209065 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant ' s Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 | lne IM A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓΓ Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209066 C ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (lease blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [~ ~J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leas e blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g Accession Numoer of Deposit ) ins Office use onl\ For International Bureau useonh | | This sheet was received with the international application □ This sheet was received bv the International Bureau . Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209066 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, infoim the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209066 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. Applicant s or agent s file International application r » reference number PA105PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bis ) A. The indications made below relate lo the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 |,ne N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OFDEPOSΓΓ Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet J Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date ol deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209067 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [_] D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not jorall designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS(/rareWflπ/ t7io/w/ιcflWf) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify- tlie general nature of the indications e.g . "Accession Number of Deposit' ) For recei vine Office use onl v For International Bureau useonlv This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on: Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209067 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authoπzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a wπtten statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected pπor to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209067 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of dcpositarv institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209068 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS^/-.!.? blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet Q D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADEdf the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leaveblanktfnoiapplicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify tle general nature of the indications e g Accession Number of Deposit ) For recei v ine Office use onh For International Bureau use onl v | I This sheet was received with the international application D This sheet was received bv the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/I 34 (Julv 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209068 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the fumishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209068 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓΓ Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet I Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositarv institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 20 May 1997 209069 C. ADDITIONAL INDlCATlONSIIease blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet r~~J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not Jor all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blankif not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specif the general nature of the indications e g Accession Number of Deposit ) For recei vina Otfice use onl v For International Bureau useonlv | I This sheet was received with the international application [ I This sheet was received bv the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209069 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209069 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule I 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 ι, nP N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet I ] Nameofdepositai-v institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country i 10801 University Boulevard anassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 12 January 1998 209579 C ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leas e blank if not applicable I This information is continued on an additional sheet f ] D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADEdf the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leaseblankif not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications eg Accession Number of Deposit ) For International Bureau useonlv I \ This sheet was received with the international application □ This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authonzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT R0/134 (Julv 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209579 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authoπzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a wπtten statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected pπor to the grant of a patent, or pπor to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without havmg been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209579 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule 13 bis) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page JJ . line N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSΓΓ Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet 1 Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country-) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 12 January 1998 209578 C ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet Pj D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADElifthe indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OFlNDlCATlONS(leaveblankifnotapplicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e.g., "Accession Number of Deposit") For receivinc Office use onl v For International Bureau use onlv | I This sheet was received with the international application j | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on: Authorized officer Authorized officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 209578 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdraw n, the Commissioner of Patents only authoπzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a wπtten statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finallv decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or pπor to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest m the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 209578 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bts) A The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 Une N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address ot depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 16 July 1998 203067 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (lease blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [~~J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC) E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OFINDICATIONS(/--flveWaπλ//πo/opp/ιcflWfl The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the mdicanons e g Accession Number of Deposit ) For recen ina Office use onl v Forlntemational Bureau useonlv | I This sheet was received with the international application D This sheet was received bv the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 203067 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authonzes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological matenal referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a wπtten statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected pπor to the grant of a patent, or pnor to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3 25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations) FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 203067 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 , l,ne N/A B. IDF-NTIFICATIONOFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 16 July 1998 203068 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leas blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [ "" J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATEFURNISHING OF INDICATIONS r/e etøαπλz/πøfαpp/icαWe) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the mdicanons e . 'Accession Number of Deposit ') For receiving Office use onl v | I This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 203068 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 203068 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption B. IDENTIFICATION OFDEPOSIT Furtherdeposits are identified on an additional sheet I 1 Name ot depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country ) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 1 February 1999 203609 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (lease blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet | | D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leas e blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications eg "Accession Number of Deposit ) For receiv ing Off ice use onl v For International Bureau useonlv | I This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 203609 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 203609 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 Iln - N/A B. 1DENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet I Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date ot deposit Accession Number 1 February 1999 203610 C ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (lease blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [_J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (ifthe indications are notforall designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OFINDlCATlONS(leaseblankιfnotapplιcable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specifs the general nature of the mdicanons eg Accession Number of Deposit') For recei vine Office use onl v Forlnternational Bureau use onlv I I This sheet was received with the international application | I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 203610 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the fumishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the fumishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 203610 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant ' s Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bts) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 . line N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 17 November 1998 203485 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information tscontinuedonanadditional sheet [_J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE ! if the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e g , "Accession Number of Deposit") For recei vine Office use onlv For International Bureau use onlv | | This sheet was received with the international application j | This sheet was received by the International Bureau on: Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. 203485 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. 203485 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31 F( 1 ) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule 13 bis) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the description on page 71 , line N/A B. IDENTIFICATION OFDEPOSrr Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet I Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 18 June 1999 PTA-252 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet f- J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADE (if the indications are not for all designated Stales) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATEFURNISHING OFINDICATIONS(teαv--Wαn*//no/flpp//cαW-' The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature of the indications e.g.. "Accession Number of Deposit") For receiving Office use only Forlntemational Bureau use onlv | I This sheet was received with the international application I | This sheet was received by the International Bureau c Authorized officer Authorized officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. PTA-252 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the fumishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. PTA-252 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule \ 3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 l,np N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet | | Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 201 10-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 18 June 1999 PTA-253 C. ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (lease blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet fH D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADEIifthe indications are rwtforall designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nature oj the mdicanons e g , "Accession Number of Deposit ) For receiving Office use onlv For International Bureau use onlv | I This sheet was received with the international application j I This sheet was received by the International Bureau on Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/134 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. PTA-253 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. PTA-253 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier. £8 Applicant's or agent's file International application Nc reference number PA105PCT UNASSIGNED INDICATIONS RELATING TO A DEPOSITED MICROORGANISM (PCT Rule I3bιs) A. The indications made below relate to the microorganism referred to in the descnption on page 71 lne N/A B. IDENTIFICATIONOFDEPOSIT Further deposits are identified on an additional sheet I I Name of depositary institution American Type Culture Collection Address of depositary institution (including postal code and country) 10801 University Boulevard Manassas, Virginia 20110-2209 United States of America Date of deposit Accession Number 22 December 1999 PTA-1081 C ADDITIONAL INDICATIONS (7e γ> blank if not applicable) This information is continued on an additional sheet [_J D. DESIGNATED STATES FOR WHICH INDICATIONS ARE MADEdf the indications are not for all designated States) Europe In respect to those designations in which a European Patent is sought a sample of the deposited microorganism will be made available until the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent or until the date on which application has been refused or withdrawn or is deemed to be withdrawn, only by the issue of such a sample to an expert nominated by the person requesting the sample (Rule 28 (4) EPC). E. SEPARATE FURNISHING OF INDICATIONS (leave blank if not applicable) The indications listed below will be submitted to the International Bureau later (specify the general nanire of the mdicanons e.g.. "Accession Number of Deposit") Forreceiving Office use only For International Bureau use only | | Thissheet wasreceived with the international application D This sheet was received bv the International Bureau on- Authoπzed officer Authoπzed officer Form PCT/RO/I 34 (July 1992) ATCC Deposit No. PTA-1081 CANADA The applicant requests that, until either a Canadian patent has been issued on the basis of an application or the application has been refused, or is abandoned and no longer subject to reinstatement, or is withdrawn, the Commissioner of Patents only authorizes the furnishing of a sample of the deposited biological material referred to in the application to an independent expert nominated by the Commissioner, the applicant must, by a written statement, inform the International Bureau accordingly before completion of technical preparations for publication of the international application. NORWAY The applicant hereby requests that the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Norwegian Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Norwegian Patent Office without having been laid open inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Norwegian Patent Office not later than at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Norwegian Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on the list of recognized experts drawn up by the Norwegian Patent Office or any person approved by the applicant in the individual case. AUSTRALIA The applicant hereby gives notice that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be effected prior to the grant of a patent, or prior to the lapsing, refusal or withdrawal of the application, to a person who is a skilled addressee without an interest in the invention (Regulation 3.25(3) of the Australian Patents Regulations). FINLAND The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the National Board of Patents and Regulations), or has been finally decided upon by the National Board of Patents and Registration without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. UNITED KINGDOM The applicant hereby requests that the furnishing of a sample of a microorganism shall only be made available to an expert. The request to this effect must be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the completion of the technical preparations for the international publication of the application. Page 2 ATCC Deposit No. PTA-1081 DENMARK The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Danish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Danish Patent office without having been laid open to public inspection, the furnishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the Danish Patent Office not later that at the time when the application is made available to the public under Sections 22 and 33(3) of the Danish Patents Act. If such a request has been filed by the applicant, any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Danish Patent Office or any person by the applicant in the individual case. SWEDEN The applicant hereby requests that, until the application has been laid open to public inspection (by the Swedish Patent Office), or has been finally decided upon by the Swedish Patent Office without having been laid open to public inspection, the fumishing of a sample shall only be effected to an expert in the art. The request to this effect shall be filed by the applicant with the International Bureau before the expiration of 16 months from the priority date (preferably on the Form PCT/RO/134 reproduced in annex Z of Volume I of the PCT Applicant's Guide). If such a request has been filed by the applicant any request made by a third party for the furnishing of a sample shall indicate the expert to be used. That expert may be any person entered on a list of recognized experts drawn up by the Swedish Patent Office or any person approved by a applicant in the individual case. NETHERLANDS The applicant hereby requests that until the date of a grant of a Netherlands patent or until the date on which the application is refused or withdrawn or lapsed, the microorganism shall be made available as provided in the 31F(1) of the Patent Rules only by the issue of a sample to an expert. The request to this effect must be furnished by the applicant with the Netherlands Industrial Property Office before the date on which the application is made available to the public under Section 22C or Section 25 of the Patents Act of the Kingdom of the Netherlands, whichever of the two dates occurs earlier.

Claims: What Is Claimed Is: 1. An isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of: (a) a polynucleotide fragment of SEQ ID NO:X or a polynucleotide fragment of the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (b) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide fragment of SEQ ID NO:Y or a polypeptide fragment encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (c) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide fragment of a polypeptide encoded by SEQ ID NO:X or a polypeptide fragment encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (d) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide domain of SEQ ID NO:Y or a polypeptide domain encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (e) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide epitope of SEQ ID NO:Y or a polypeptide epitope encoded by the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X; (f) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:Y or the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X, having biological activity; (g) a polynucleotide which is a variant of SEQ ID NO:X; (h) a polynucleotide which is an allelic variant of SEQ ID NO:X; (i) a polynucleotide which encodes a species homologue of the SEQ ID NO:Y; (j) a polynucleotide capable of hybridizing under stringent conditions to any one of the polynucleotides specified in (a)-(i), wherein said polynucleotide does not hybridize under stringent conditions to a nucleic acid molecule having a nucleotide sequence of only A residues or of only T residues. 2. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1 , wherein the polynucleotide fragment comprises a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein. 3. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1 , wherein the polynucleotide fragment comprises a nucleotide sequence encoding the sequence identified as SEQ ID NON or the polypeptide encoded by the cDΝA sequence included in the related cDΝA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID ΝO:X. 4. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1 , wherein the polynucleotide fragment comprises the entire nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:X or the cDNA sequence included in the related cDNA clone, which is hybridizable to SEQ ID NO:X. 5. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 2, wherein the nucleotide sequence comprises sequential nucleotide deletions from either the C-terminus or the N-terminus. 6. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 3, wherein the nucleotide sequence comprises sequential nucleotide deletions from either the C-terminus or the N-terminus. 7. A recombinant vector comprising the isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1. 8. A method of making a recombinant host cell comprising the isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 1. 9. A recombinant host cell produced by the method of claim 8. 10. The recombinant host cell of claim 9 comprising vector sequences. 1 1. An isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of: (a) a polypeptide fragment of SEQ ID NON or of the sequence encoded by the cDΝA included in the related cDΝA clone; (b) a polypeptide fragment of SEQ ID ΝO:Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone, having biological activity; (c) a polypeptide domain of SEQ ID NO: Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone: (d) a polypeptide epitope of SEQ ID NO:Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone; (e) a full length protein of SEQ ID NO:Y or of the sequence encoded by the cDNA included in the related cDNA clone; (f) a variant of SEQ ID NO: Y; (g) an allelic variant of SEQ ID NO:Y; or (h) a species homologue of the SEQ ID NO:Y. 12. The isolated polypeptide of claim 1 1 , wherein the full length protein comprises sequential amino acid deletions from either the C-terminus or the N- terminus. 13. An isolated antibody that binds specifically to the isolated polypeptide of claim 1 1. 14. A recombinant host cell that expresses the isolated polypeptide of claim 1 1. 15. A method of making an isolated polypeptide comprising: (a) culturing the recombinant host cell of claim 14 under conditions such that said polypeptide is expressed; and (b) recovering said polypeptide. 16. The polypeptide produced by claim 15. 17. A method for preventing, treating, or ameliorating a medical condition, comprising administering to a mammalian subject a therapeutically effective amount of the polypeptide of claim 1 1 or the polynucleotide of claim 1. 18. A method of diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition in a subject comprising: (a) determining the presence or absence of a mutation in the polynucleotide of claim 1 ; and (b) diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition based on the presence or absence of said mutation. 19. A method of diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition in a subject comprising: (a) determining the presence or amount of expression of the polypeptide of claim 1 1 in a biological sample; and (b) diagnosing a pathological condition or a susceptibility to a pathological condition based on the presence or amount of expression of the polypeptide. 20. A method for identifying a binding partner to the polypeptide of claim 1 1 comprising: (a) contacting the polypeptide of claim 1 1 with a binding partner; and (b) determining whether the binding partner effects an activity of the polypeptide. 21. The gene corresponding to the cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO: Y. 22. A method of identifying an activity in a biological assay, wherein the method comprises: (a) expressing SEQ ID NO:X in a cell; (b) isolating the supernatant; (c) detecting an activity in a biological assay; and (d) identifying the protein in the supernatant having the activity. 23. The product produced by the method of claim 20.

Inventors: ROSEN CRAIG A, RUBEN STEVEN M, ROSEN, CRAIG, A., RUBEN, STEVEN, M.
Applicants: HUMAN GENOME SCIENCES INC, ROSEN CRAIG A, RUBEN STEVEN M, HUMAN GENOME SCIENCES, INC., ROSEN, CRAIG, A., RUBEN, STEVEN, M.
Application year: 2000
Main classification: C12N15
IPC codes: A61K31, A61K35, A61K38, A61K39, A61K45, A61K48, A61P1, A61P9, A61P13, A61P17, A61P25, A61P27, A61P29, A61P35, C07K14, C07K16, C12N1, C12N5, C12N15, C12P21, C12Q1, G01N33, G01N37